JP6653034B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally referred to as a “pachinko machine”).

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, as this type of gaming machine, there has been known a gaming machine that performs a lottery game based on a game ball winning in a winning area of a gaming area. A plurality of winning areas are provided in the gaming area, and a lottery game corresponding to each of the winning areas is performed. Then, even if a prize of a game ball to each prize area occurs at the same time, only one lottery game is performed according to the priority, and the other lottery games are in a standby state (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2012-148017 A

However, in the gaming machine described above, it had led to interest reduction of Yu skills.

  The problem to be solved by the present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a decrease in interest in a game by controlling a plurality of lottery games to be simultaneously executable.

In one form of a typical gaming machine of the present invention, a first lottery executing means for executing a first lottery based on winning of a game medium to a first winning area in the gaming area, and a second winning area in the gaming area A second lottery executing means for executing a second lottery based on winning of a game medium to the game medium; a variable display executing means capable of executing a variable display of a symbol based on the first lottery or the second lottery; Based on the lottery or the second lottery, a first specific game execution means for executing a first specific game capable of providing a game profit with a different probability according to the game state, and based on the second lottery, A second specific game execution means for executing a second specific game capable of providing a smaller game profit than the first specific game with a constant probability, and a game state changed to a normal game upon execution of the first specific game A special game state that is different from the state A game state transition unit, and a variable display that can be executed based on the second lottery in the normal game state for a long time while the probability that the second specific game is executed is constant regardless of the game state; With the lottery frequency suppressing means for suppressing the execution frequency of the second specific game, the probability that the second specific game is executed irrespective of the game state is constant, Lottery frequency improving means for increasing the execution frequency of the second specific game by setting a variable display that can be executed based on the second lottery to be a short time shorter than the long time, The second identification, which is performed during the period of time in which the variable display based on the second lottery is performed by the lottery frequency improving means, rather than the game profit given in the first specific game executed by The game profit given in the technique can be larger, the variable display based on the first lottery can be executed during the execution of the variable display based on the second lottery, the first lottery and the second An effect execution means capable of displaying an effect display based on the lottery is provided, and the effect execution means executes the first specific game based on the second lottery in which the variable display is set to a long time by the lottery frequency suppressing means. When the variable display is performed, a special effect display that is not performed in the first lottery in a state where the variable display of the second lottery is set to a long time is executed as the variable display based on the first lottery. It can be displayed inside .

  According to one embodiment of the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can solve the above-described problem and prevent a decrease in interest in a game.

It is a perspective view showing the state where the main part frame was opened to the outer frame of the pachinko machine concerning an embodiment, and the door frame was opened to the main part frame. It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a right view of a pachinko machine. It is a top view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame, the main body frame, the game board, and the door frame of the pachinko machine as viewed from behind. It is the exploded perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame, the main body frame, the game board, and the door frame which constitute the pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of an outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame. It is a front view of an outer frame. It is a rear perspective view of an outer frame. It is a right view of an outer frame. It is a perspective view for demonstrating the attachment / detachment structure of the upper support of the main body frame and the upper support of the outer frame. (A) is an exploded perspective view showing an attached state of a lock member provided on the back surface of the upper support bracket of the outer frame, and (B) is a perspective view of the view of (A) viewed from below. It is a rear view of the upper support metal part for demonstrating the relationship between a pivot pin and a lock member. It is a rear view of the upper support metal part for demonstrating the effect | action of a lock member. It is a front view of a door frame. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view seen from right rear of a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the door frame from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. (A) is a front perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit from the disassembly. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base board cover and the wiring holding member in the door frame base unit from the back. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the mode of the wiring which electrically connects a door frame and a main body frame. (A) is a front perspective view of the right side decorative unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the right side decorative unit in the door frame. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the right side decoration unit as viewed from the front by exploding. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at after disassembling the right side decoration unit. (A) is a front perspective view of the left side decoration unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the left side decoration unit in the door frame. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the left side decoration unit and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the left side decoration unit after disassembly. It is sectional drawing of a left side decoration unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the light emission aspect of a left side decoration unit with a photograph. It is a front perspective view of the upper decoration unit in a door frame. It is a rear perspective view of the upper decoration unit in a door frame. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the upper decoration unit and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at after disassembling the upper decoration unit. It is a front perspective view of the plate unit in a door frame. It is a rear perspective view of the plate unit in a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the plate unit and disassembled from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at after disassembling the plate unit. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected in the part of the ball rental unit of the plate unit in a door frame. (A) is a front perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the operation unit as viewed from the upper right front. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the operation unit as viewed from the lower right front. It is sectional drawing of an operation unit. FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a state where a pressing operation unit in the operation unit is pressed. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the handle device in the door frame, which is exploded and seen from the front, and (B) is an exploded perspective view of the handle device which is exploded and seen from the rear. (A) It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the front from the disassembly of the foul cover unit in the door frame, and FIG. It is a front view showing the state where the front cover of the foul cover unit was removed. It is a front view of a static electricity prevention mechanism. It is a perspective view when the door frame which shows the state provided with the static electricity prevention mechanism was seen from the back. It is a principal part back view of the door frame which shows the state provided with the static electricity prevention mechanism. FIG. 57 is a sectional view taken along line AA of FIG. 56. (A) is a front perspective view of the ball feed unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the ball feed unit. It is a rear view of a ball feed unit. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feed unit as viewed from the front with the ball feed unit exploded, and (B) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feed unit as viewed from the rear with the rear case removed. (A) is a plan view of the fraud prevention member in the ball feeding unit, (B) is a front view of the fraud prevention member, (C) is a perspective view of the fraud prevention member viewed from the front, and (D). It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect | action of a fraud prevention member. It is sectional drawing which cut | disconnects and shows a door frame in the substantially vertical center. It is a front view which shows arrangement | positioning of the LED for light emission decoration in a door frame. It is a front view which shows the system | system of LED for light emission decoration in a door frame. It is a front view of a main body frame. It is a rear view of a main body frame. It is a front perspective view of a main-body frame. It is a rear perspective view of a main body frame. It is a left view of a main body frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the main frame from the front by disassembling. It is the perspective view which looked at after disassembling the main body frame. It is a front perspective view of a main part frame base in a main part frame. FIG. 3 is a rear perspective view of a main body frame base in the main body frame. It is a front perspective view of a hit ball launching device in a main part frame. It is a rear perspective view of the hit ball launching device in a main body frame. It is a front perspective view of a prize ball unit in a main part frame. It is a back perspective view of a prize ball unit in a main part frame. It is the exploded perspective view which looked at the prize ball unit from the exploded view. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at after award ball unit was disassembled. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the relationship between the prize ball tank and the tank rail unit in the prize ball unit in an exploded view from behind. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the prize ball apparatus in the prize ball unit later and disassembled. It is a rear view which shows the relationship between the payout passage, the payout motor, and the payout rotating body in the prize ball device. It is sectional drawing which shows the rolling path of the ball in a prize ball unit. It is a front perspective view of the ball outlet opening / closing unit in a main body frame. FIG. 4 is a rear perspective view of a ball outlet opening / closing unit in a main body frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the ball exit opening / closing unit in a main body frame, and the foul cover unit in a door frame. It is a front perspective view of the board unit in a main part frame. FIG. 4 is a rear perspective view of the board unit in the main body frame. It is the exploded perspective view which looked at the board unit from the exploded view. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at after disassembling the board unit. It is a perspective view explaining the effect | action of the standing wall part of the power supply board box in a board unit. (A) is a sectional view of the terminal board box in the board unit, and (B) is an exploded perspective view of the terminal board box in the board unit disassembled and viewed from the front. (A) is a front view of the launch power supply board box, and (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA shown in (A). (A) is a front perspective view of the back cover in the main body frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the back cover in the main body frame. It is sectional drawing which expands and shows the site | part of the fastening mechanism in a back cover. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the fastening mechanism in the back cover and was seen from the rear side. (A) is a left side view of the lock device in the main body frame, and (B) is a perspective view of the lock device in the main body frame as viewed from the front. (A) is a rear perspective view of the lock device, and (B) is a rear perspective view showing a slide rod for a glass door and a slide rod for a main body frame slidably provided inside a U-shaped base of the lock device. It is a figure and (C) is a front perspective view of (B). It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at after disassembling the lock device. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation | movement of the sliding rod for glass doors and the sliding rod for main body frames in a lock device. It is an explanatory view showing operation of a fraud prevention member in a lock device. It is a front view which shows the game board attached to the main-body frame in the state which removed the door frame of the pachinko machine. It is a front view of a game board. It is the exploded perspective view which looked at the game board from the exploded view. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at after disassembling the game board. (A) is an enlarged front view showing a function display unit in a game board attached to a pachinko machine, and (B) is a front view showing another form of the function display unit. FIG. 104 is an exploded perspective view of a gaming board using a gaming panel of an embodiment different from the example of FIG. 104 and the like, as viewed from the front. FIG. 107 is an exploded perspective view of the game board as viewed from behind in FIG. 107. FIG. 107 is a cross-sectional view of a game panel of the game board of FIG. 107 cut in a vertical direction. FIG. 107 is an exploded perspective view of a game board using a front component according to an embodiment different from the example of FIG. 107 and the like, as viewed from the front. FIG. 110 is an exploded perspective view of the game board as viewed from behind in FIG. 110. FIG. 2 is a partial cross-sectional view showing a security structure on the pivot side of the pachinko machine. It is the perspective view seen from the back side in the state where a game board was stored in a main part frame. It is a front view of the game board in a pachinko machine. It is a front view when the special winning opening of the game board in the pachinko machine is opened. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from back. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled every main member which comprises a game board, and was seen from diagonally back. It is a block diagram which shows the control structure of a pachinko machine schematically. It is a block diagram of a door frame base board, a peripheral side relay terminal board, an abnormal sound signal cutoff board, and a lower speaker. It is a circuit diagram showing a circuit of an abnormal sound signal cutoff board. 5 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a main process of the present embodiment executed by a main control MPU. 6 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process at the time of power failure occurrence according to the embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of timer interruption processing of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special control processing of this embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows starting opening winning processing of this embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the 1st special symbol control processing of this embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the 1st change start processing of this embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the 1st change pattern setting processing of this embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the processing during the 1st change of this embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the 1st big hit game start processing of this embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the 1st big hit game processing of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the time saving function setting process of this embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the 1st interlocking setting processing of this embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the 2nd special symbol control processing of this embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd change start processing of this embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the 2nd change pattern setting processing of this embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the processing during the 2nd change of this embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the 2nd big hit game start processing of this embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the 2nd big hit game processing of this embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the 2nd small hitting game start processing of this embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the 2nd small hit game processing of this embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the 2nd interlocking setting processing of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about an example of the normal control process of this embodiment performed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the gate passage processing of this embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of normal design normal processing of this embodiment. It is an example of various tables showing game specifications of a first special symbol and a second special symbol of the present embodiment. It is a figure showing transition of a game state (game mode) of this embodiment. It is an example of a timing chart explaining simultaneous fluctuation control of the present embodiment. It is an example of a timing chart showing ideal game mode transition in the present embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the processing procedure about an example of the sub main process of this embodiment performed by peripheral control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a 16ms steady process performed every 16ms in a sub main process. It is a front view of the game board in the pachinko machine of 2nd Embodiment. (A) is a simplified structural diagram of the attacker device, (B) is an enlarged front view showing a function display unit, and (C) is an enlarged front view showing a 7-segment display. It is an example of various tables showing game specifications of a first special symbol and a second special symbol of the second embodiment. It is a figure showing transition of a game state (game mode) of a 2nd embodiment. It is a figure explaining the outline of the control pattern of the simultaneous variation control structure of a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the 1st change start processing in a basic control pattern of a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the 1st big hit game processing in the basic control pattern of a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the 1st interlocking setting processing in the basic control pattern of a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the 2nd change start processing in the basic control pattern of a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the 2nd big hit game processing in the basic control pattern of a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the 2nd small hitting game processing in the basic control pattern of a 2nd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the 2nd interlock setting process in the basic control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the right strike penalty setting process in the basic control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a liquid crystal display process in the basic control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the right-handed penalty alerting | reporting process in the basic control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the 1st change start processing in the priority control pattern of a 2nd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the 1st priority determination process in the priority control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process during 1st change in the priority control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the 1st interlock setting process in the priority control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the 2nd change start processing in the priority control pattern of a 2nd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the 2nd priority determination process in the priority control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process during 2nd change in the priority control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the 2nd interlock setting process in the priority control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing a procedure of a forced loss effect addition process in the priority control pattern of the second embodiment, and (B) shows a special symbol change when an additional loss notification effect is set in the forced loss effect addition process. 11 is a timing chart of effect display in the liquid crystal display device 1900. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the 1st special design control processing in the interruption control pattern of a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the 2nd special symbol control processing in the interruption control pattern of a 2nd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the resumption effect change process in the interruption control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure explaining an example of a production after resumption in resumption production change processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the 1st interlocking setting process in the modification of the interruption control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the 2nd interlock setting process in the modification of the interruption control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process during the 1st change in the reset control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the 1st interlocking setting process in the reset control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process during 2nd change in the reset control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the 2nd interlock setting process in the reset control pattern of 2nd Embodiment. It is a timing chart explaining reset setting in a reset control pattern of a 2nd embodiment.

[Overall structure of pachinko machine]
Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, an entire pachinko machine according to the embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing a state in which a main frame is opened to an outer frame of the pachinko machine according to the embodiment, and a door frame is opened to the main frame. FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 3 is a right side view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 4 is a plan view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 5 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 6 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine as viewed from the rear of an outer frame, a main frame, a game board, and a door frame. FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 5 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front.

  1 to 7, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment has an outer frame 2 installed on an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, and an open front side that is pivotally supported by the outer frame 2 and is openable. A game frame 4 having a box frame-shaped main frame 3, a game area 1100 mounted and fixed to the main frame 3 from the front side and into which a game ball as a game medium is driven, and a front face of the main frame 3 and the game panel 4 A door frame 5 pivotally supported so as to be openable and closable with respect to the main body frame 3 so as to be closed from the side. In the door frame 5 of the pachinko machine 1, a game window 101 formed so that the game area 1100 of the game board 4 can be viewed from the player side, and a game ball is arranged below the game window 101 and stores game balls. A dish-shaped upper plate 301 and a lower plate 302 are provided, and a handle device 500 operated by a player to drive game balls stored in the upper plate 301 into the game area 1100 of the game board 4.

  As shown in the figure, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment has an outer frame 2, a main body frame 3, and a door frame 5 each formed in a vertically long rectangular shape extending in a vertical direction when viewed from the front. Of the main frame 3 and the door frame 5 are slightly shorter than the outer frame 2. A decorative cover 23 is attached to the front of the outer frame 2 at a position lower than the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5, and the front of the outer frame 2 is completely closed by the door frame 5 and the decorative cover 23. It has become so. The outer frame 2, the main body frame 3, and the door frame 5 are arranged such that the upper ends thereof are substantially aligned, and the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are rotatable at a position on the left front side of the outer frame 2. The main frame 3 and the right end of the door frame 5 are moved forward with respect to the outer frame 2 to be in an open state.

  The pachinko machine 1 is configured such that, when viewed from the front, a game area 1100 into which a game ball is driven through a game window 101 having a substantially circular shape is desired, and protrudes forward below the game window 101. Two upper plates 301 and lower plates 302 are arranged vertically. A handle device 500 for a player to operate is arranged at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 5, and the player operates the handle device 500 while game balls are stored in the upper plate 301. When the player rotates the game ball, the game ball in the upper plate 301 is driven into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 with a hitting ball strength corresponding to the rotation angle, so that the player can play a game.

  Although details will be described later, the game window 101 of the door frame 5 is closed by a transparent glass unit 590, and although the inside of the game area 1100 can be visually recognized by the player, the player cannot see the inside of the game area 1100. It is configured such that a hand or the like cannot be inserted to touch a game ball, an obstacle nail, various prize holes, an accessory, or the like in the game area 1100. In addition, various control boards are provided on the rear side of the main body frame 3, and a cover 1250 that closes so as to cover the rear of the game board 4 is provided.

[Outer frame]
The outer frame 2 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 8 is a front perspective view of the outer frame, FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame, and FIG. 10 is a front view of the outer frame. FIG. 11 is a rear perspective view of the outer frame, and FIG. 12 is a right side view of the outer frame. Further, FIG. 13 is a perspective view for explaining a detachable structure of the upper support of the main frame and the upper support of the outer frame. FIG. 14A is an exploded perspective view showing an attached state of a lock member provided on the back surface of the upper support member of the outer frame, and FIG. 14B is a perspective view of FIG. . FIG. 15 is a rear view of the upper support metal part for explaining the relationship between the pivot pin and the lock member. FIG. 16 is a rear view of the upper support metal part for explaining the operation of the lock member.

  As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has upper and lower upper frame plates 10 and lower frame plates 11 extending in the horizontal direction and left and right sides extending in the vertical (up and down) direction. It comprises frame plates 12, 13 and four connecting members 14 for connecting the ends of the respective frame plates 10, 11, 12, 13. By connecting them, they are assembled in a vertically long rectangular shape (square shape). The upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 in the outer frame 2 of the present example are formed of a solid material having a predetermined thickness (for example, wood, plywood, or the like). And an engagement notch 15 which is recessed toward the center in the left-right direction. In addition, on the upper surface and the front surface of the left end portion of the upper frame plate 10, a mounting step 10a recessed from other general surfaces is formed, and an upper support fitting 20 described later is mounted on the mounting step 10a. It has become.

  On the other hand, the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of a lightweight metal material (for example, aluminum alloy) having a constant cross-sectional shape, the outer side surface is a substantially flat surface, and the inner side surface protrudes inward at the rear end. It has a protruding portion 16 having a cavity that penetrates in the vertical direction (extrusion direction), and has increased strength and rigidity (see FIGS. 9 and 112). A plurality of grooves extending in the vertical direction are formed on the outer side surface and the inner side surface of the side frame plates 12 and 13, and when the pachinko machine 1 is installed on the island facilities of the game hall, etc. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily held as a finger hook, and the design of the appearance can be enhanced. For convenience, there are some drawings in which a plurality of grooves formed on the side surfaces of the side frame plates 12 and 13 are omitted.

  The connecting member 14 in the outer frame 2 of this example is formed by bending and deforming a metal plate having a predetermined thickness by press molding or the like, and is fixed to the upper frame plate 10 or the lower frame plate 11 and is fixed in the left-right direction. The vertical piece 18 extends in the vertical direction from the outer end of the horizontal piece 17 to one side in the up-down direction and is fixed to the side frame plates 12 and 13, and the vertical piece 18 is opposite to the horizontal piece 17. And a plate-shaped engaging piece 19 that can be inserted into and engaged with the engaging notch 15 of the upper frame plate 10 or the lower frame plate 11. In this example, the connecting member 14 for connecting the upper frame plate 10 and the left side frame plate 12 and the connecting member 14 for connecting the upper frame plate 10 and the right side frame plate 13 are respectively left-right asymmetric. And a vertical piece 18 is formed separately in front and back. On the other hand, the connecting member 14 for connecting the lower frame plate 11 and the left side frame plate 12 and the connecting member 14 for connecting the lower frame plate 11 and the right side frame plate 13 are formed in left-right symmetric shapes, respectively. Have been.

  The connecting member 14 has an upper surface and a lower surface of the horizontal piece 17 in contact with the lower surface and the upper surface of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, and the engagement piece 19 is formed by engaging notches of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11. A predetermined screw is screwed into the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 through the horizontal piece 17 and the engagement piece 19 in a state where the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame 11 are inserted and engaged in the portion 15. It is adapted to be fixed to the plate 11. The connecting member 14 fixed to the upper frame plate 10 penetrates through the side frame plates 12, 13 in a state where the vertical pieces 18 abut on the inner side surfaces at the upper ends of the side frame plates 12, 13. Is screwed into the vertical piece 18, so that the upper frame plate 10 and the side frame plates 12, 13 can be connected. The rear vertical piece 18 of the connecting member 14 fixed to the upper frame plate 10 is fixed to the side frame plates 12 and 13 while being inserted into the projecting portion 16 of the side frame plates 12 and 13. It has become. Further, the connecting member 14 fixed to the lower frame plate 11 penetrates through the side frame plates 12 and 13 in a state where the vertical piece 18 is in contact with the lower inner side surface of the side frame plates 12 and 13 and a predetermined screw is formed. Are screwed into the vertical pieces 18 so that the lower frame plate 11 and the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be connected. The four connecting members 14 allow the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 to be connected. , And the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be assembled in a frame shape.

  The outer frame 2 of this example is fixed to an upper support bracket 20 fixed to the upper surface of the left end of the upper frame plate 10, and fixed to a predetermined position inside the lower side of the left side frame plate 12 so as to face the upper support bracket 20. A lower support metal member 21, a reinforcing metal member 22 arranged to support the lower surface of the lower support metal member 21 and fixed to connect the left and right side frame plates 12 and 13, and fixed to a front surface of the reinforcement metal member 22. Decorative cover 23. The upper support member 20 and the lower support member 21 support the body frame 3 and the door frame 5 so as to be openable and closable.

  First, the upper support bracket 20 includes a plate-shaped fixing piece 20a fixed to the upper frame plate 10, a support projecting piece 20b projecting forward from a front end of the upper frame plate 10 from a front end of the fixing piece 20a, A support hook hole 20c formed by notching so as to bend from the right end near the front end of the piece 20b toward the center of the tip, and a left side frame hanging down from the left end of the fixing piece 20a and the support projecting piece 20b. A plate-shaped hanging fixing piece 20d (see FIG. 14A) that abuts on the outer side surface of the plate 12 and a hanging wall 20e (see FIG. 14A) that is continuous with the hanging fixing piece 20d and hangs down along the outer edge of the supporting projecting piece 20b. 14), and a stop hanging part 20f (see FIG. 15) which is continuous with the hanging wall 20e and is inclined inward at the entrance end of the support hook hole 20c. A support pin 633 (see FIG. 67) of an upper support 630 of the body frame 3 to be described later is detachably engaged with the support hook hole 20c of the upper support 20. In addition, the upper support fitting 20 can connect the upper frame plate 10 and the left side frame plate 12 with the fixing piece 20a and the hanging fixing piece 20d.

  In the upper support fitting 20, the strength of the support projecting piece 20b is increased by a hanging wall 20e hanging down from the outer edge of the support projecting piece 20b. Can be concealed so that the lock member 27 arranged on the back surface of the player cannot be seen from the player side, so that the appearance can be improved. Further, the support hook hole 20c formed in the support projecting piece 20b is bent in a V-shape so as to be inclined from the side on the opposite side (right side) where the hanging wall 20e is not formed toward the center of the tip. The width of the inclined hole of the support hook hole 20c is slightly larger than the diameter of the pivot pin 633.

  On the other hand, the lower support member 21 includes a horizontal fixing piece 21a placed and fixed on the reinforcing metal piece 22, and a vertical fixing piece fixed to the inner side surface of the left side frame plate 12 rising upward from the left end of the horizontal fixing piece 21a. 21b, a plate-shaped support protrusion 21c protruding forward from the front end of the horizontal fixing piece 21a beyond the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, and a pin-shaped protrusion protruding upward from near the front end of the support protrusion 21c. And a support projection 21d. A main frame support formed on a main frame support 644 (see FIG. 70 and the like) of the main frame 3 described below is inserted into the support protrusion 21d of the lower support 21. After the support projection 21d of the support fitting 21 is inserted into the support hole of the main frame support 644 in the main body frame 3, the support pin 633 of the upper support 630 of the main body frame 3 is locked in the support hook hole 20c. Thus, the main body frame 3 can be easily pivotally supported so as to be freely opened and closed.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 of the present embodiment has two closing plates 24 and 25 which are disposed inside the right side frame plate 13 and are separated from each other by a predetermined distance in the vertical direction. These closing plates 24, 25 are formed in a substantially L-shape in plan view, and the closing plate 25 disposed on the lower side has a rectangular opening 25a penetrating in the front-rear direction (FIG. 9). The closing plates 24 and 25 are connected to the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the lock device 1000 (see FIG. 97) which are attached along the open side of the main frame 3 when closing the main frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2. As will be described later in detail, the hooks 1054 and 1065 are disengaged from the closing plates 24 and 25 by inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 and rotating one side. Thus, the main body frame 3 can be opened to the outer frame 2.

  Further, the outer frame 2 of the present example further includes a guide plate 26 fixed to the upper surface of the right end of the reinforcing bracket 22. The guide plate 26 is provided for smoothly guiding the main body frame 3 when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, and is exchangeably mounted and fixed.

  As shown in FIG. 14 and the like, the outer frame 2 of the present example further includes a lock member 27 supported on the back surface of the support protrusion 20b of the upper support fitting 20, and the lock member 27 is fixed to the support protrusion 20b by a rivet 28. It is rotatably supported with respect to it. The lock member 27 is formed of a synthetic resin, and has a stopper portion 27a protruding forward from a position supported by the rivet 28 and a shorter portion than the stopper portion 27a rightward from the position supported by the rivet 28. An operating portion 27b that protrudes, an elastic piece 27c that protrudes from a side opposite to the position supported by the rivet 28 with respect to the operating portion 27b, and is formed to protrude forward at the tip of the stopper portion 27a. And an arc-shaped tip surface 27d. As shown, the lock member 27 is formed in a substantially L-shape by a stopper portion 27a and an operation portion 27b. The elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27 is formed to have a width smaller than that of the stopper 27a or the operation unit 27b, and to extend forward as the distance from the stopper 27a to the left increases.

  As shown in FIGS. 14B and 15, when the lock member 27 is supported by the support projecting piece 20 b of the upper support fitting 20 (normal state), the distal end contact portion of the elastic piece 27 c has a hanging wall. The stopper 27a is in contact with the inner side surface of the support hook hole 20c so that the stopper 27a closes the inclined hole of the support hook hole 20c. Is not closed, and a space in which the pivot pin 633 of the upper pivot bracket 630 of the main body frame 3 can be inserted is formed in the leading space of the support hook hole 20c. .

  The support mechanism of the pivot pin 633 using the upper support fitting 20 and the lock member 27 of the present example is such that the pivot pin 633 is inserted into the tip space of the inclined hole of the support hook hole 20c and the stopper 27a A state in which the front end side faces the stop hanging part 20f at the entrance end (in this state, there is a slight gap between the front end side of the stopper part 27a and the stop hanging part 20f, and the state is in contact. In the normal pivoted state (not shown), each of the pivot pin 633 located in the distal end space of the inclined hole of the support hook hole 20c formed by bending and the distal end surface 27d of the stopper 27a is formed. The center is displaced in an oblique direction and faces each other. In this normal pivot state, the pivot pin 633 that pivotally supports the heavy body frame 3 is in contact with the tip of the support hook hole 20c. Since the load is hardly applied to the distal end surface 27d of the stopper 27a from the above, the load is not applied to the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27. The stopper 27a is provided with an arc-shaped tip surface 27d at the tip thereof so that when the operation part 27b is rotated to rotate the lock member 27, the lock member 27 rotates smoothly. Has become. In the drawing, the center of the arc of the tip end surface 27d is the center of the rivet 28 (the center of rotation of the lock member 27).

  Therefore, when the acting force F is applied in a direction in which the pivot pin 633 is pulled out along the inclination of the inclined hole of the support hook hole 20c and comes into contact with the arc-shaped tip surface 27d, the acting force F is applied to the pivot support pin 20c. A component force F1 (normal direction of the arc of the tip surface 27d) acting on the contact portion between the pin 633 and the arc-shaped tip surface 27d, and one side of the inclined pin portion of the pivot pin 633 and the support hook hole 20c. The component force F1 is directed to the center of the rivet 28 (the rotation center of the lock member 27) when divided into the component force F2 acting on the contact portion with the inner surface. There is no moment for rotating the tip in the direction (clockwise in the figure) in which the tip departs from the support projecting piece 20b, and the pivot pin 633 moves between the tip of the stopper 27a of the lock member 27 and the inclined hole of the support hook hole 20c. Maintain the state of being sandwiched between To. For this reason, even in a normal support state or a state in which the acting force of the support pin 633 is applied to the lock member 27, no load is constantly applied to the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27, and the elastic piece integrally formed of synthetic resin is used. The plastic deformation of the piece 27c due to creep can be prevented, and the pivot pin 633 can be prevented from falling out of the support hook hole 20c for a long period of time. Note that even if an excessive force is applied to rotate the tip of the stopper 27a of the lock member 27 in a direction (clockwise direction in the drawing) to be disengaged from the support projecting piece 20b, one side of the tip of the stopper 27a may be rotated. The lock member 27 does not protrude outside the support projecting piece 20b because the lock member 27 does not rotate in the direction in which it comes into contact with the stop hanging portion 20f and further comes off.

  Even if the shape of the distal end surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a is not an arc shape, the distal end portion of the stopper member 27a faces the outside of the support projecting piece 20b at a position where no rotational moment is generated by the action of the component force F1. By positioning the rotation center (the shaft fixed by the rivet 28) of the lock member 27 at a position where a rotational moment for rotating the lock member 27 is generated, no load is applied to the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27 at all times. Even if the member 27 is rotated, the applicant has pointed out that the locking member 27 does not protrude outside the support projecting piece 20b because only one side of the tip of the stopper portion 27a contacts the stop hanging portion 20f even if the member 27 rotates. I have confirmed.

  The operation of the lock member 27 of this example will be specifically described with reference to FIG. Assuming that the body frame 3 is pivotally supported on the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, a lower support bracket is provided in a body frame shaft support hole (not shown) formed in the body frame shaft support 644 (see FIG. 67) of the body frame 3. 21 need to be inserted. Under such a premise, as shown in FIG. 16 (A), the support pin 633 of the upper support 630 of the main body frame 3 is pressed into contact with the side surface of the stopper 27 a of the lock member 27. As shown in FIG. 16 (B), since the lock member 27 rotates counterclockwise while deforming the elastic piece 27c, the pivot pin 633 can be inserted into the support hook hole 20c. When the pivot pin 633 reaches the leading space of the inclined hole of the support hook hole 20c, as shown in FIG. 16C, the pivot pin 633 does not come into contact with the tip side surface of the stopper 27a. Therefore, the lock member 27 is urged by the elastic force of the elastic piece 27c to rotate clockwise, and the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 returns to the normal state again to close the entrance portion of the support hook hole 20c. The tip of the stopper 27a faces the pivot pin 633 so that the pivot pin 633 does not fall out of the support hook hole 20c.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 16 (D), this state is maintained even when the main body frame 3 is completely closed or during the normal opening / closing operation of the main body frame 3. Next, in order to remove the pivot pin 633 from the support hook hole 20c, as shown in FIG. 16 (E), a finger is inserted into the back surface of the support projecting piece 20b, and the operation portion 27b of the lock member 27 is rotated in a counterclockwise direction. By rotating, the lock member 27 rotates against the elastic force of the elastic piece 27c, and the distal end portion of the stopper portion 27a is retracted from the support hook hole 20c. It can be taken out from the hole 20c. Thereafter, the body frame 3 is lifted, and the engagement between the body frame shaft support hole formed in the body frame shaft support 644 and the support protrusion 21 d of the lower support metal 21 is released, so that the body frame 3 is moved to the outer frame 2. It can be removed from.

  As described above, in the outer frame 2 of the present embodiment, the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 constituting the outer shell of the outer frame 2 are made of wood as in the related art, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of lightweight metal ( For example, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed on an island facility lined up in a game arcade, it is necessary to perform an operation of fixing the pachinko machine 1 at a predetermined angle with respect to the vertical surface of the island because the extruded material is an aluminum alloy). However, since such an operation is performed by nailing the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 and the island, the nail can be easily hammered, and the pachinko machine 1 can be installed on the existing island equipment without any problem. It can be installed. Further, since the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of a lightweight metal (for example, an aluminum alloy) extruded material, the thickness can be reduced while maintaining strength as compared with a conventional wooden outer frame. A game board 4 having a large left-right width when viewed from the front of a peripheral wall portion 605 (see FIG. 67 and the like) of the main body frame 3 adjacent to the inside of the side frame plates 12 and 13, and having a large size in the left-right direction. Can be mounted on the main body frame 3 and, at the same time, the game area 1100 of the game board 4 can be formed large.

  Further, the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12, 13 constituting the outer shell of the outer frame 2 are connected by a connecting member 14, and the connecting member 14 is connected to the side frame plates 12, 13. The outer frame 2 is fastened in close contact with the inner surface, and is fastened in a state where the connecting member 14 and the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are engaged. It can be used as a rectangular frame. After the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12, 13 are connected by the connecting member 14, when the upper support fitting 20 is attached to a predetermined position, as shown in FIG. Since there is no member that protrudes outward from the outer surface (outer peripheral surface) of the frame plates 10, 11, 12, and 13, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in an island facility of a game hall (not shown), an adjacent device (for example, (Adjacent ball rental machine) so that it can be attached in close contact.

[Overall configuration of door frame]
Next, the door frame 5 provided on the front side of the main body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 is a front view of the door frame, FIG. 18 is a rear view of the door frame, and FIG. 19 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the right front. FIG. 20 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the left front, and FIG. 21 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the right rear. FIG. 22 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 23 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the back.

  As shown, the door frame 5 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has a game window 101 whose outer shape is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and whose inner peripheral shape is a slightly vertically long circular shape (elliptical shape). The base unit 100, the right side decoration unit 200 attached to the right outer periphery of the game window 101 on the front of the door frame base unit 100, and the left side of the game window 101 on the front of the door frame base unit 100 facing the right side decoration unit 200. A left side decoration unit 240 attached to the outer periphery, and an upper decoration unit 280 attached to the upper outer periphery of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 are provided.

  Further, the door frame 5 includes a dish unit 300 attached to the front of the door frame base unit 100 below the gaming window 101, an operation unit 400 attached to the upper center of the dish unit 300, and a door penetrating the dish unit 300. A handle device 500 attached to the lower right corner of the frame base unit 100 for driving a game ball; and a rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 disposed behind the plate unit 300 with the door frame base unit 100 interposed therebetween. , A ball feed unit 580 mounted on the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the foul cover unit 540, and mounted to close the gaming window 101 behind the door frame base unit 100. A glass unit 590.

[Door frame base unit]
Subsequently, the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 24A is a front perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame, and FIG. 24B is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame. FIG. 25 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit when disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 26 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 27 is a perspective view of the door frame base board cover and the wiring holding member in the door frame base unit when viewed from behind, and FIG. 28 shows a state of wiring for electrically connecting the door frame and the main body frame. It is a perspective view which expands and shows.

  As illustrated, the door frame base unit 100 of the present embodiment has a game window 101 having an outer shape formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and penetrating in the front-rear direction and having an inner circumference formed in a vertically elongated substantially elliptical shape. A frame base main body 110, a pair of side speakers 130 arranged on the front left and right outer sides of the game window 101 on the front of the door frame base main body 110, and a speaker for fixing the side speakers 130 to the door frame base main body 110. It includes a bracket 132 and a handle bracket 140 attached to the front lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame base main body 110 to support the handle device 500.

  In addition, the door frame base unit 100 covers the side surface of the side speaker 130 and the front side of the wiring (not shown) connected to the right side decoration unit 200 and the like outside the right side speaker 130 in front view. Further, a cover member 134 attached to the front surface of the door frame base body 110 is further provided. The cover member 134 can guide the wiring along the outer periphery of the speaker mounting portion 111, and can hold the wiring so that the wiring does not interfere when the side speaker 130 is mounted or removed. It has become.

  Further, the door frame base unit 100 is made of a metal frame-shaped reinforcing unit 150 fixed to the rear side of the door frame base body 110 and a lower portion of the gaming window 101 covered by the rear surface of the door frame base body 110. A security cover 180 to be mounted, a glass unit locking member 190 rotatably mounted at a predetermined position on the outer periphery of the game window 101 on the rear surface of the door frame base main body 110, and a left side (open side) ), Which is mounted on the rear surface of the door frame base body 110 along the lower end of the game window 101, and the rotation position of the handle device 500 mounted on the rear surface of the door frame base body 110 below the fire cover 191. A handle device relay board 192 for relaying the connection between the detection sensor 512 and the main control board 4100, and a rear side of the handle device relay board 192 is covered. The door frame is disposed on a side opposite to the launch cover 191 and the handle device relay board 192, etc. (right side of the center in the left-right direction (axial support side) in rear view) with the middle device relay board cover 193 interposed therebetween in the left-right direction. A door frame base substrate 194 attached to the rear surface of the base body 110, a door frame base substrate cover 195 covering the rear side of the door frame base substrate 194, and pivotally supported by the rear surface of the door frame base substrate cover 195. A wiring holding member 197 that holds a part of a wiring 196 (see FIG. 28) that connects the door frame 5 side and the main body frame 3 side.

  In the door frame base unit 100 of the present example, a reinforcing unit 150 in which a metal sheet metal is assembled with rivets or the like is fixed to the rear side of a rectangular door frame base body 110 made of a synthetic resin, thereby increasing the overall rigidity. In addition, it has sufficient strength to sufficiently support the decoration units 200, 240, 280, the dish unit 300, and the like.

  The door frame base substrate 194 in the door frame base unit 100 is connected to the side speakers 130 and the upper speakers 222 and 262 of the left and right side decoration units 200 and 240, and a peripheral control unit provided in the game board 4 described later. 4140, and includes an amplification circuit that amplifies the acoustic signal sent from the peripheral control unit 4140 and outputs the amplified signal to each speaker 130. In the present example, each of the decorative units 200, 240, and 280, the decorative substrates 430 and 432 provided in the dish unit 300 and the operation unit 400, the dial drive motor 414 and the sensors 432a and 432b provided in the operation unit 400, respectively. 432c, the handle device relay board 192, the wire lending unit 360 of the plate unit 300, etc., and the wiring 196 connecting the payout control board 4110, the peripheral control unit 4140, etc. After being collected and bundled at the position (side), it is held by the wiring holding member 197 and extends rearward, as will be described in detail later, and the main relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral relay terminal plate 882 of the main body frame 3 are extended. (See FIGS. 1 and 28).

  The door frame base main body 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of this example is formed in a vertically long frame shape with a synthetic resin as shown in FIGS. The substantially elliptical gaming window 101 is formed so as to be offset upward as a whole. As shown in the drawing, the left and right inner edges of the gaming window 101 are formed in a continuous smooth curved shape, whereas the lower inner edge is formed in a straight line extending left and right. ing. In addition, a square notch 101a at the lower inner peripheral edge of the game window 101 in the door frame base body 110, through which the first ball outlet 544a of the foul cover unit 540 can be inserted on the pivot side (left side in front view). Are formed. In the door frame base body 110, the upper side formed by the gaming window 101 and the width of the left and right sides are the upper side reinforcing sheet metal 151, the supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 152, and the opening side reinforcing sheet metal 153 of the reinforcing unit 150 described later. , And the game window 101 is formed as large as possible with respect to the size of the door frame base body 110 when viewed from the front. Therefore, a wider range of the game board 4 arranged on the rear side of the door frame 5 can be visually recognized from the player side, and a wider game area 1100 than the conventional pachinko machine can be easily formed. It has become.

  The door frame base main body 110 is, besides the gaming window 101, a speaker mounting portion 111 disposed on both left and right outer sides of a lower side of the gaming window 101 for mounting and fixing the side speakers 130, and a ball feed unit 580. The game balls stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 and penetrating in the front-rear direction at a predetermined position of the ball feed unit mounting recess 112 (see FIG. 26) and the ball feed unit mounting recess 112 for the ball feeding unit 580. A ball feed opening 113 for supply and a handle mounting for mounting a handle bracket 140 which is inclined obliquely so that a right (open side) end of a front surface which is located at a lower right corner and swells forward when viewed from the front is retracted. A wire passage opening 115 through which a wire from the handle device 500 can pass through in a front-rear direction at a predetermined position of the handle mounting portion 114; Cylinder lock 1010 to be described later is formed in a cylindrical shape extending short toward the front in the upper Le mounting portion 114 is provided with a Joana 116, which can be inserted.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 26, the door frame base main body 110 has a relay board mounting portion 117 for mounting the handle device relay board 192 below the ball feed unit mounting recess 112, and a door frame base main body in rear view. A board mounting portion 118 disposed on the lower right side (supporting side) for mounting the door frame base substrate 194, and a position closer to the center than the speaker mounting portion 111 on the left side (open side) of the lower end of the gaming window 101 in rear view (open side). The security cover mounting portion 119 for mounting the mounting elastic piece 185 of the security cover 180 protruding rearward, and the door frame base body 110 have a rearwardly recessed glass unit 590 substantially along the inner circumference of the gaming window 101. The glass unit supporting step 110a with which the outer peripheral edge of the front surface can be abutted, and the glass unit locking member 190 protruding rearward from a predetermined position on the outer periphery of the game window 101 to be rotatable. Further comprises a, and two of the locking member mounting portion 110b for supporting the.

  Further, on the rear side of the door frame base main body 110, a door frame protruding piece 110c protruding rearward from the lower side by a predetermined amount is provided. The door frame protruding piece 110c is engaged with an engagement groove 603 of the main body frame 3 described later. It is designed to be inserted inside. As a result, the door frame 5 can be positioned and locked with respect to the main body frame 3, and an illegal tool such as a piano wire can be inserted into the pachinko machine 1 through a gap between the lower side of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3. However, the tool can be prevented from entering by the door frame projection 110c engaged with the engagement groove 603, and the security function of the pachinko machine 1 is enhanced. Further, on the rear side of the door frame base main body 110, there is provided a positioning projection 110d which projects rearward from a position slightly lower right than the lock hole 116 in rear view and fits into the fitting groove 612 of the main body frame 3. By fitting the positioning protrusion 110d into the fitting groove 612, the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 are positioned at the correct positions.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 25, the door frame base body 110 has a plurality of mounting bosses 110e protruding forward for fixing the decorative units 200, 240, 280, the plate unit 300 and the like on the front surface thereof. In addition, a number of mounting holes for mounting the handle bracket 140 and the like are formed at appropriate positions. In the door frame base body 110, a mounting boss 110g for mounting a speaker bracket 132 for mounting the side speaker 130 and a mounting hole 110h (see FIG. 18 and the like) for mounting the side speaker cover 338 are appropriately positioned. Are formed respectively.

  Further, in the door frame base body 110, between the ball feeding unit mounting concave portion 112 and the substrate mounting portion 118, the lower tray ball supply port 310g in the tray unit base 310 of the tray unit 300 described later and the At a position corresponding to the two-ball outlet 544b, a rectangular ball passage port 110f penetrating in the front-rear direction is provided.

  Further, the door frame base main body 110 has a shallow dish-shaped security recess 120 formed on the front side above the left and right speaker mounting portions 111 and recessed rearward in a substantially triangular shape. A security member 121 formed in a shallow box shape from the front side is inserted into the security recess 120. The security member 121 is formed in a shallow box shape with a front side opened by bending a metal plate. Accordingly, in order to perform an illegal act on the inside of the pachinko machine 1, for example, a hole made by a thin drill or the like from a joint portion between the side decoration units 200 and 240 and the plate unit 300 is made of metal. It can be prevented by the security member 121, and it is possible to prevent improper conduct.

  Although a detailed illustration of the pair of side speakers 130 in the door frame base unit 100 is omitted, the intersection of the center axes is a predetermined distance (for example, 0.2 m to 1 m) from the center of the game area 1100 to the front in a front view. .5m), so that the sound reaches the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 most efficiently. The side speaker 130 mainly outputs sounds in the middle and high frequency range, and is disposed at a position as far away from the pachinko machine 1 as possible in the left-right direction. By outputting different related sounds from the side speakers 130, sounds with high stereo feeling can be output.

  The outer periphery of the side speakers 130 is sandwiched between the substantially annular speaker bracket 132 disposed on the front side and the speaker mounting portion 111 of the door frame base body 110 disposed on the rear side, so that the door frame is closed. It can be attached to the base body 110. The speaker bracket 132 is mounted on the mounting boss 110g of the door frame base body 110 from the front side by a predetermined screw.

  The door frame base substrate cover 195 of the door frame base unit 100 is formed in a thin box shape with an open front side as shown in FIGS. Is provided with a step 195a which is recessed forward at a position slightly lower than the center. A wiring holding member 197 is rotatably attached to the step portion 195a of the door frame base substrate cover 195.

  On the other hand, the wiring holding member 197 in the door frame base unit 100 is formed in a plate shape extending long in the lateral direction, as shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, and has an I-shaped cross section. , Made of a relatively hard synthetic resin. Further, as shown in the figure, the wiring holding member 197 has a plurality of (in this example, three in each case, upper and lower) holding holes 197a at both upper and lower ends at predetermined intervals along the longitudinal direction. When the door frame 5 is assembled, the end of the wiring holding member 197 on the side where the door frame 5 is pivotally supported by the main body frame 3 is vertically attached to the rear step portion 195 a of the door frame base board cover 195. The wiring holding member 197 is rotatably supported around the extended axis, and although not shown in detail, the wiring holding member 197 is rotated toward the door frame base substrate cover 195 by the free end side of the wiring holding member 197, so that the wiring holding member 197 is rotated. The door frame base board cover 195 can be accommodated in the step portion 195a.

  The wiring holding member 197 is provided with a predetermined binding band in a pair of holding holes 197 a in a state where wiring 196 for electrically connecting the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 is arranged along the rear surface side. The wiring 196 can be held by tightening the wiring 196 together with the wiring holding member 197 with the binding band 198 so that the wiring 196 can be held (see FIGS. 1 and 28).

  When the wiring holding member 197 of this example is rotated in the direction to close the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3, the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 extends from the free end side of the wiring 196 to the main body frame 3. As a result, it is pushed forward to rotate in a direction approaching the door frame base substrate cover 195 side. As a result, as the door frame 5 closes, the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 approaches the door frame base board cover 195, and the wiring 196 extending from the free end of the wiring holding member 197 to the main body frame 3 side becomes free end. The bend becomes large (sharp) in the vicinity. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the wiring 196 is folded in two laterally on the free end side of the wiring holding member 197.

  On the other hand, when the closed door frame 5 is opened with respect to the main body frame 3, the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are relatively separated from each other, so that the wiring 196 connected to the main body frame 3 side holds the wiring. The free end side of the member 197 is pulled rearward, and the wiring holding member 197 smoothly rotates so that the free end side moves away from the door frame base board cover 195 (direction of the main body frame 3). As a result, the wiring 196 folded on the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 is developed so as to extend straight, and the door frame 5 can be opened without being hindered by the wiring 196.

  As described above, according to this example, the end of the wiring holding member 197 on the same side as the side on which the door frame 5 is pivotally supported is moved so that the free end moves toward the body frame 3. The rear frame is rotatably supported on the rear surface, and a part of the wiring 196 that electrically connects the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 is held so as not to move in the vertical direction. On the other hand, when the door frame 5 is opened and closed, the wiring 196 can be laterally folded or unfolded on the free end side of the wiring holding member 197, and the wiring 196 is caught or pinched when the door frame 5 is opened or closed. This makes it possible to prevent the occurrence of troubles (breakage of the wiring 196, disconnection of the connector, etc.).

  Further, according to the present embodiment, the wiring holding member 197 is formed of a relatively hard and highly rigid synthetic resin. The wiring 196 can be prevented from being blurred in the direction, and the wiring 196 can be securely folded in the horizontal direction to prevent the occurrence of a problem.

  Further, as described above, when the door frame 5 is opened and closed with respect to the main body frame 3, a state is obtained in which a bridge is hung between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 by the wiring holding member 197. Since a part of the wiring 196 is bridged by the wiring holding member 197, the wiring 196 can be prevented from hanging down even when the door frame 5 is opened and closed. It is possible to prevent a problem that the door frame 5 cannot be closed or the door frame 5 cannot be closed, and the main control board 4100, the peripheral control unit 4140, the payout control board 4110, and the like as the main body-side electric device, and the door side Decorative boards 214, 216, 254, 256, 288, 290, 322, 430, 432 as electric devices, speakers 130, 222, 262, ball rental unit 360, Bundle 500, etc., capital can provide pachinko machine 1 capable of malfunction in the wiring 196 to be connected to reduce the occurrence as much as possible.

  Further, a part of the wiring 196 is held by a rotatable wiring holding member 197, and when the door frame 5 is opened, even if the wiring 196 is forcibly pulled, the wiring holding member 197 rotates. The wiring 196 can be prevented from being pulled, and the wiring 196 can be prevented from being pulled and the wiring 196 can be prevented from being broken or the connector from being disconnected. it can. In addition, since a part of the wiring 196 is held by the wiring holding member 197 and the wiring 196 is only partially bent with the rotation of the wiring holding member 197, a conventional one (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2009-213675) is used. 2), the wiring 196 does not slide, and it is possible to prevent the wiring 196 from rubbing and causing problems such as electric leakage and disconnection.

  Further, in the wiring holding member 197, the binding band 198 is inserted through a plurality of penetrating holding holes 197a arranged at predetermined intervals in the longitudinal direction, and the wiring 196 is held by the binding band 198. The held binding band 198 can be prevented from moving (sliding) in the longitudinal direction of the wiring holding member 197 by the holding hole 197a, and the wiring 196 together with the binding band 198 from the wiring holding member 197 can be reliably prevented from falling off. can do.

  Further, even if the position where the wiring 196 extends from the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 is arranged at a position away from the side supporting the door frame 5, as described above, the wiring 196 is formed by the wiring holding member 197. Since the wiring 196 can be prevented from hanging down when the door frame 5 is opened and closed by guiding (guidance), the strength and rigidity of the body frame 3 on the side of the door frame 5 supported by the shaft are enhanced. And the door frame 5, and the pachinko machine 1 with high crime prevention against fraudulent acts.

  Further, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided with ridges projecting from both ends in a direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction at least to the side along which the wiring 196 extends, the wiring is formed by the pair of ridges and the plate surface of the wiring holding member 197. 196 can be surrounded, and the wiring 196 can be easily held along the wiring holding member 197. Further, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided with the protrusion, the bending rigidity of the plate-shaped wiring holding member 197 can be increased, and the wiring holding member 197 is prevented from bending when the door frame 5 is opened and closed. Thus, the door frame 5 can be opened and closed in a favorable state.

  Further, the length from the base end to the tip end of the wiring holding member 197 is set to be substantially the same as the distance from the axis of the door frame 5 to the axis of the base end, and the main body frame 3 in the wiring 196 is extended. The predetermined position is a position closer to the axis of the door frame 5 than the tip of the wiring holding member 197 in a state where the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3. Since the pantograph-like link is formed at the axis of 197, the tip of the wiring holding member 197, and the position where the wiring 196 extends in the main body frame 3, the wiring for opening and closing the door frame 5 is formed. The movement of the holding member 197, the wiring 196, and the like can be made smooth, so that the opening and closing work can be easily performed, and a problem such as a disconnection occurs by reducing an excessive force acting on the wiring 196 or the like. Can be prevented. Further, a pantograph link is formed, and when the door frame 5 is closed, a portion of the wiring 196 extending from the distal end of the wiring holding member 197 is folded back at the distal end side along the wiring holding member 197. Therefore, when the door frame 5 is closed, the wiring 196 can be folded and compacted, and the space for the wiring holding member 197 and the wiring 196 can be reduced.

  Further, the door frame 5 is recessed in the door frame base board cover 195 of the door frame 5 which pivotally supports the wiring holding member 197 so as to open toward the main body frame 3 with the door frame 5 closed with respect to the main body frame 3. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the wiring holding member 197 is provided on the door frame base board cover 195. Since the wire holding member 197 is housed in the portion 195a, the protrusion of the wiring holding member 197 from the door frame 5 side to the main body frame 3 side can be almost eliminated, and the door frame 5 can be easily closed. The wiring 196 can be made compact, and the wiring 196 can be prevented from being caught by another member, thereby preventing a problem from occurring.

  Further, the wiring 196 is held along the surface of the wiring holding member 197 facing the body frame 3 with the door frame 5 closed with respect to the body frame 3. When the door frame 5 is closed, the wiring holding member 197 can be brought as close as possible to the door frame 5 side (door frame base substrate cover 195 side). The protrusion of the holding member 197 can be reduced, the door frame 5 can be easily closed, and the space for the wiring holding member 197 and the wiring 196 can be reduced as much as possible.

  Further, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided on the side of the door frame 5 that moves (opens and closes), the wiring holding member 197 can be easily rotated by an inertial force, an impact force, and the like for opening and closing the door frame 5. Thus, it is possible to surely achieve the function and effect described above. Further, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided in the door frame 5, there is no need to secure a space for providing the wiring holding member 197 in the main body frame 3, so that the space for holding the game board 4 in the main body frame 3 relatively. The pachinko machine 1 which can hold the game board 4 having the larger game area 1100 by increasing the size of the game area 1100, and has the large game board 4 and can strongly attract the player's interest. it can.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, the handle bracket 140 of the door frame base unit 100 has a cylindrical tubular portion 141 extending in the front-rear direction and a shaft from the rear end of the tubular portion 141 to the axis of the tubular portion 141. An annular flange portion 142 extending outward in a direction perpendicular to the direction, and a plurality (three in this example) of ridges projecting into the cylindrical portion 141 and arranged at irregular intervals in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 141. 143, and a plurality of reinforcing ribs 144 that connect the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 141 and the front surface of the flange portion 142 and are arranged in a plurality in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 141. The handle bracket 140 is attached to the handle mounting portion 114 with a predetermined screw in a state where the rear surface of the flange portion 142 is in contact with the front surface of the handle mounting portion 114 of the door frame base body 110. Although not shown, the axis of the cylindrical portion 141 substantially coincides with the wire passage opening 115 when attached to the handle attaching portion 114.

  The handle bracket 140 is provided with one protrusion 143 on the upper side and two protrusions 143 on the lower side in the cylindrical portion 141, and these protrusions 143 are formed on the outer periphery of the cylindrical portion of the handle base 502 in the handle device 500. It is arranged and formed at a position corresponding to the three grooves 502a. The cylindrical portion of the handle device 500 can be inserted into the cylindrical portion 141 only when the three protrusions 143 of the handle bracket 140 and the three grooves 502a of the handle device 500 match. I have. Therefore, the handle base 502 of the handle device 500 inserted and supported by the handle bracket 140 is supported in a state in which the handle base 502 cannot rotate relative to the handle bracket 140.

  The handle bracket 140 is attached to the handle attachment portion 114 that is inclined obliquely, so that the axis of the cylindrical portion 141 extends toward the right side (open side) as it goes forward in front view. The shaft of the handle device 500 supported by the handle bracket 140 in this state is also inclined obliquely.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame base unit 100 includes an upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 attached along the back side of the upper side of the door frame base body 110, and a door frame base body. 110, an opening-side reinforcing sheet metal 153 attached along the open-side back surface of the door frame base body 110, and a support-side reinforcing sheet metal 153 attached along the open-side back surface of the door frame base body 110. And a lower reinforcing metal plate 154 attached along the lower surface of the lower side of the gaming window 101, and these are formed in a square shape by being mutually fastened with screws or rivets.

  As shown in FIG. 25, the reinforcing unit 150 has an upper shaft supporting portion 156 having upper and lower end portions of a shaft supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 152 and a shaft pin 155 provided on an upper surface thereof so as to be vertically slidable. And a lower shaft support 158 having a shaft pin 157 (see FIG. 18). Then, the upper and lower shaft pins 155 and 157 are supported by the upper shaft support 630 and the lower shaft support 640 formed on the upper and lower support sides of the main body frame 3, so that the door frame 5 is moved relative to the main body frame 3. It can be freely opened and closed.

  Further, the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 of the reinforcing unit 150 has a predetermined width and is formed to have a length substantially equal to the lateral width dimension of the door frame base body 110, and is formed at the lower long side edge of both long side edges thereof. A lower bent protruding piece 159 bent forward, and an upper bent protruding piece 160 bent forward toward the right side (open side) of the upper long side edge in a front view (open side); And a vertically bent protruding piece 161 that is bent rearward at the center of the upper long side edge and extends vertically. The strength of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 is increased by a lower bent protrusion 159 and an upper bent protrusion 160. The vertically bent protruding piece 161 of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 is formed so as to engage and lock with a locking piece 592b formed at the lower end of a unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590 described later. When the unit 590 is fixed to the back side of the door frame 5, the vertically bent protruding piece 161 is locked by the locking piece 592 b of the unit frame 592 in the glass unit 590, so that the lower end of the glass unit 590 is moved in the horizontal direction. It can be restricted from moving backward. The lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 has a notch 162 substantially corresponding to the notch 101 a of the door frame base body 110.

  In addition, the open-side reinforcing sheet metal 153 of the reinforcing unit 150 includes an open-side outer bent protruding piece 163 bent rearward on both sides of a long side between the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 and the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154, And an open-side inner bent protruding piece 164. As shown in the figure, the open-side inner bent protruded piece 164 is formed to extend rearward longer than the open-side outer bent protruded piece 163. ing. In addition, a hook cover 165 is provided at the rear lower portion of the opening-side reinforcing sheet metal 153 in contact with a door frame hook portion 1041 of the lock device 1000 described later. Further, the support-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is provided with a U-shaped support-side U-shaped protruding piece 166 that extends rearward at an outer end of a long side thereof and that opens to the outside of the support side (FIG. 112). In addition, the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 includes bent protruding pieces 167 that are bent rearward on both sides of the longer side.

  The supporting-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 of the reinforcing unit 150 is mounted and supported on the main body frame 3 only at the upper and lower two points of the upper supporting part 156 and the lower supporting part 158. When an incorrect tool such as a screwdriver or a bur is inserted between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3, the supporting metal plate 152 is deformed, and the gap between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 becomes large. Although the act may be easily performed, the strength of the supporting-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is further increased because the supporting-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 of the present example includes the supporting-side U-shaped protrusion 166. , The pivot-support-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is hard to bend. The U-shaped protruding piece 166 of the supporting-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is configured such that a front end piece 952b of a side security plate 950 of the main body frame 3 described later is inserted into the U-shape (FIG. 112), the insertion of the tool can be prevented, and the bending of only the pivot side reinforcing sheet metal 152 can be prevented, so that the security function of the pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced.

  Next, the security cover 180 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. This security cover 180 is provided with a security function for covering the lower back surface of the above-mentioned glass unit 590 to prevent the intrusion of unauthorized devices into the game board 4, and as shown in FIG. Is formed in a flat plate shape so as to cover the lower portion of the glass unit 590 disposed between the reinforcing sheet metals 152 and 153, and the upper side thereof is formed in an arc shape substantially along the lower arc surface of the inner rail 1112 of the game board 4. It has a contact recess 181 formed, and a post-crime prevention projection 182 projecting rearward along the upper end of the contact recess 181. Further, on both left and right ends of the security cover 180, security rear end protrusions 183 projecting rearward along the end shape are provided respectively. In addition, in the rear view, the right side (supporting side) crime prevention rear end protruding piece 183 is configured to extend rearward longer than the opposite side (open side) crime prevention rear end protruding piece 183. On the other hand, on the front surface of the security cover 180, the security protrusion 180 is attached to the glass unit 590, and the projection 184 protrudes along the shape below the unit frame 592. And a U-shaped mounting elastic piece 185 projecting forward at the lower end of the mounting member.

  In the security cover 180, the mounting elastic piece 185 on the right side (open side) in front view is mounted on the security cover mounting portion 119 of the door frame base unit 100, and the mounting elastic piece 185 on the opposite side (axial support side) is mounted on the plate. By being mounted on the security cover mounting portion 364 of the unit 300, it can be detachably mounted on the back side of the door frame 5. In a state where the security cover 180 is attached to the door frame 5, although not shown in detail, the security pre-projection piece 184 fits with the outer periphery of the lower portion of the unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590. The rear surface of the lower end portion of the unit frame 592 comes into contact with the vertical bent protruding piece 161. When the door frame 5 is closed, half of the pivot support side is inserted into the lower side surface of the inner rail 1112 fixed to the game board 4 and half of the open side is projected forward when the door frame 5 is closed. It is configured to be inserted into the rail security groove 1118 of the inner rail 1112 of the component 1110. Thus, even if an illegal tool is to enter the game area 1100 of the game board 4, the entry can be prevented by the security piece 182 inserted below the inner rail 1112. .

  In addition, since the security cover 180 can cover the lower part of the front surface of the guide path of the hit ball formed by the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 in a state where the door frame 5 is closed, with the back surface thereof. In addition, it is possible to prevent a ball hitting the glass plate 594 from hitting or feeding back the guide path portion.

  Thereby, in this example, since the security cover 180 covers the lower outer periphery of the rear side of the glass unit 590 (the game window 101) in the door frame 5, the game window 101 and the glass unit 590 are formed from the front side of the door frame 5. Even if an attempt is made to insert a highly flexible tool into the pachinko machine and perform an illegal action inside the pachinko machine 1 (in the game area 1100), the security cover 180 can prevent the tool from entering, and Thus, the pachinko machine 1 having higher safety against the like can be provided.

  Subsequently, the four glass unit locking members 190 in the door frame base unit 100 are fitted with a fitting portion 190a that rotatably fits into a locking member mounting portion 110b that projects rearward from the door frame base body 110. A locking piece 190b extending in a direction perpendicular to the axial direction of the fitting portion 190a and locking the locking projection 451f of the glass unit 590. The glass unit locking member 190 has a retaining screw fixed to the tip of the locking member mounting portion 110b in a state where the locking member mounting portion 110b of the door frame base body 110 penetrates the fitting portion 190a. By doing so, it is rotatably supported by the locking member mounting portion 110b.

  Although not shown in detail, the locking piece 190b of the glass unit locking member 190 has a ridge protruding rearward on the rear side, and the ridge rotates when the glass unit 590 is attached and detached. It is a finger when operating.

  The firing cover 191 of the door frame base unit 100 is fixed to the rear side of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 of the reinforcing unit 150. Further, the handle device relay board cover 193 and the door frame base board cover 195 are fixed at predetermined positions on the rear side of the door frame base body 110, respectively. In a state where the firing cover 191, the handle device relay board cover 193, and the ball feed unit 580 are attached to the door frame base unit 100, the rear surfaces thereof are substantially flush with each other. The front surface of the hit ball firing device 650 attached to the main body frame 3 can be covered.

[Right side decoration unit]
Subsequently, the right side decorative unit 200 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 29A is a front perspective view of the right side decorative unit in the door frame, and FIG. 29B is a rear perspective view of the right side decorative unit in the door frame. FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the right side decoration unit as viewed from the front by exploding. Further, FIG. 31 is an exploded perspective view of the right side decorative unit as seen from the rear.

  As shown, the right side decorative unit 200 of the door frame 5 in the present embodiment is for decorating the right outer half of the front outer periphery of the gaming window 101 excluding the lower part in a front view, and the inner side corresponds to the gaming window 101. It is formed in the shape of an arc along with, and the outside is formed in the shape of a straight line along the perimeter of door frame base unit 100. The right side decoration unit 200 includes a side lens 210 that forms the outer surface of the right side decoration unit 200 and has a plurality of substantially spindle-shaped curved surfaces, a side inner lens 212 disposed behind the side lens 210, A right side upper decorative board 214 on the rear side of which the plurality of LEDs 214a (full-color LEDs) and 214b (white LEDs) are mounted on the rear side of the rear side of the side inner lens 212 from a substantially vertical center and a side inner side on the lower side A lower right side decorative board 216 on which a plurality of LEDs 216a (full color LED) and 216b (white LED) are mounted on the surface and disposed on the lower side from substantially the center in the vertical direction of the lens 212, and a rear side of the right side upper decorative board 214 Right side mounted on the side inner lens 212 so as to cover the right side upper decorative substrate 214 An upper decorative board cover 218 and a right side lower decorative board cover 220 that covers the rear side of the right side lower decorative board 216 and is attached to the side lens 210 and the side outer cover 202 so as to sandwich the right side lower decorative board 216 therebetween. ing.

  The right side decoration unit 200 is disposed at a predetermined interval in a circumferential direction of the game window 101 on a front surface of the side lens 210 and a side outer cover 202 attached to an upper right corner of the side lens 210. A plurality of side flash lenses 204 radially extending about the center, a side upper inner lens 206 disposed between the upper left of the side inner lens 212 and the side lens 210, and a side inner lens 206 An inner lens bracket 208 to be attached to the 212 and an upper right speaker 222 to be attached to the upper side lens 206 are provided.

  In the right side decoration unit 200, the side outer cover 202, the side flash lens 204, the upper side inner lens 205, the inner lens bracket 208, the side lens 210, and the side inner lens 212 are formed of a translucent member. The side outer cover 202, the upper side inner lens 205, the inner lens bracket 208, the side lens 210, and the side inner lens 212 are substantially colorless and transparent, and the side flash lens 204 is colored and transparent (red in this example).

  Although not shown in detail, a plurality of small-diameter lenses are formed on the surface of the side inner lens 212 and the side upper inner lens 206 so that light can be irregularly refracted. Therefore, the LEDs 214a and 214b mounted on the surfaces (front surfaces) of the right side upper decorative substrate 214 and the right side lower decorative substrate 216 disposed behind the side lens 210, the side inner lens 212, and the side upper inner lens 206, respectively. 216a, 216b and the like cannot be clearly seen from the player side. The front surfaces of the upper right side decorative substrate 214 and the lower right side decorative substrate 216 are white, and the light of the mounted LEDs 214a, 214b, 216a, 216b and the like allows the right side decorative unit 200 to efficiently emit light. The decoration substrates 214 and 216 are not so noticeable when the LEDs 214a, 214b, 216a and 216b are not lit. The upper right side decorative board 214 and the lower right side decorative board 216 are respectively connected to the peripheral control section 4140, and each of the LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a is driven by a drive signal (light emission drive signal) from the peripheral control section 4140. , 216b to emit light as appropriate, so that the right side decoration unit 200 can emit light.

  As shown, the side lens 210 of the right side decoration unit 200 of this example has a right end and an upper end formed in a straight line along the outer periphery of the door frame base main body 110 in a front view, and a left end thereof as a game window 101 in a front view. Is formed in a curved shape along the outer periphery on the right side. The side lens 210 includes a peripheral lens portion 210a having a plurality of curved surfaces having a substantially spindle shape, and a plurality of peripheral lens portions 210a divided into a plurality in the circumferential direction of the game window 101 and extending substantially concentrically with the game window 101. And a radiation lens portion 210b having a prism surface. As shown, the plurality of radiation lens portions 210b of the side lens 210 are formed so as to extend on the radiation centered on the lower center portion of the game window 101 in a front view, and from the front surface of the peripheral lens portion 210a. Is also formed to be recessed rearward, and the side flash lens 204 is inserted into the recess.

  In addition, the side lens 210 includes a side diffusion lens portion 210c that extends in the front-rear direction and is arranged in the vertical direction on the right side surface. By the side diffusion lens portion 210c, light from the upper right side decorative substrate 214 and the lower right side decorative substrate 216 can be widely diffused rightward and vertically in the pachinko machine 1. Although not shown in detail, a plurality of through holes are formed in a portion corresponding to the lower side of the upper right speaker in the side lens 210, so that sound from the upper right speaker can be favorably transmitted to the player side. It can be transmitted.

  The side inner lens 212 is substantially colorless and transparent, and is inserted and fitted from the rear side into the inside of the side lens 210. As shown in the figure, a portion of the side lens 210 corresponding to the peripheral lens portion 210a is formed in a wrinkle shape. In addition, a portion corresponding to the radiation lens portion 210b is formed in a flat surface shape. Although not shown in detail, the side inner lens 212 has a plurality of small-diameter lenses formed on a crest-like portion of the side lens 210 corresponding to the peripheral lens portion 210a and protruding forward. The side inner lens 212 is capable of irregularly refracting and irregularly reflecting light by using a wrinkle-shaped portion and a plurality of small-diameter lenses. In addition, the perspective can be made to look strange and unclear.

  The right upper decorative board 214 and the right lower decorative board 216 of the right side decorative unit 200 have a plurality of high-brightness color LEDs mounted on the surface, and are arranged at positions corresponding to the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210. The LEDs 214a and 216a used have relatively large irradiation angles (for example, 60 ° to 180 °), and the LEDs 214b and 216b arranged at positions corresponding to the radiation lens portions 210b of the side lenses 210 emit relatively light. Those having a small angle (for example, 15 ° to 60 °) are used. In this example, the LEDs 214c of the upper right side decorative board 214 are red and green LEDs.

  The upper right speaker 222 of the right side decoration unit 200 outputs a sound in the middle and high frequency ranges similarly to the side speaker 130, and is mounted at a predetermined position in a predetermined direction by the side upper inner lens 206. ing. The side upper inner lens 206 that supports the upper right speaker 222 has a cylindrical horn portion extending obliquely forward and downward at the left and right centers of the pachinko machine 1 in a front view, and on the back side of the upper end of the horn portion, The upper right speaker 222 is fixed so that the upper right speaker 222 cannot be seen from the player side in front view.

  The upper right speaker 222 of the present example is emitted from the upper part of the pachinko machine 1 to the player below by the horn part of the side upper inner lens 206, and generates noise for other pachinko machines. It is becoming difficult. In addition, similarly to the side inner lens 212, the side upper inner lens 206 also has a front surface formed in a wrinkle shape, and a plurality of small-diameter lenses formed in a crest portion protruding forward in a wrinkle-shaped portion. The light can be irregularly refracted and irregularly reflected by the wrinkled portion and the plurality of small-diameter lenses.

  The side flash lens 204 of the right side decoration unit 200 is arranged to be inserted in front of the radiation lens portion 210b which is recessed rearward of the side lens 210, and simulates a rocky surface formed by a plurality of spindle-shaped curved surfaces. It is possible to add an accent to the side lens 210 that has been set. In addition, the side flash lens 204 can perform a radial light emission effect by the light emission of the LEDs 214b and 216a of the upper right decorative board 214 and the lower right decorative board 216 disposed on the rear side, and the peripheral lens section 210a Can be divided in the circumferential direction of the gaming window 101 to emphasize each of them.

[Left side decoration unit]
Subsequently, the left side decorative unit 240 of the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 32A is a front perspective view of the left side decorative unit in the door frame, and FIG. 32B is a rear perspective view of the left side decorative unit in the door frame. FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the left side decoration unit as viewed from the front by being disassembled. Further, FIG. 34 is an exploded perspective view of the left side decorative unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 35 is a cross-sectional view of the left side decoration unit, and FIG. 36 is an explanatory diagram showing a light emission mode of the left side decoration unit by a photograph.

  As shown, the left side decorative unit 240 of the door frame 5 in the present embodiment is for decorating a left half of the front outer periphery of the gaming window 101 excluding a lower part in a front view, and the right side is the gaming window 101. In addition to the right side decoration unit 200, the left side and the upper side are formed linearly along the outer periphery of the door frame base unit 100, and are formed asymmetrically with the right side decoration unit 200. The left side decoration unit 240 has a plurality of large window frames 242a extending substantially in the circumferential direction of the game window 101 with a width substantially equal to the width of the right side decoration unit 200, and an elliptical shape arranged between the large window frames 242a. A frame-shaped lower side decorative frame 242 having a small window frame 242b, two large window frames 244a extending above the side lower decorative frame 242 and extending in the circumferential direction of the gaming window 101 and arranged in a row. And a frame-shaped upper side decorative frame 244 having one elliptical small window frame 244b disposed between the window frames 244a.

  Further, the left side decorative unit 240 includes a side flash lens 246 fitted into each of the small window frames 242b and 244b of the lower side decorative frame 242 and the upper side decorative frame 244 from the rear side, and a side flash lens 246 on the rear side. And a transparent side lens 250 having a plurality of peripheral lens portions 250a that are supported from behind and are fitted into the large window frames 242a and 244a of the side lower decorative frame 242 and the upper side decorative frame 244 from the rear side. A plurality of slits 251a which are arranged on the rear side of the peripheral lens portion 250a and extend in the circumferential direction of the game window 101 and have an inner decoration member 251 having a plating layer having a metallic luster on the surface; and a rear side of the inner decoration member 251 Bands extending radially around the lower left and right center of the gaming window 101 A side inner lens 252 having a diffusing portion 252a formed by the lens, and a.

  Further, the left side decoration unit 240 is disposed on the rear side of the side inner lens 252 from above substantially the center in the vertical direction to the upper side, and has a plurality of LEDs 254a (full color LED) and 254b (white LED) mounted on the surface thereof. A substrate 254, a lower side lower decorative substrate 256 which is disposed below the lower side of the side inner lens 252 from substantially the center in the vertical direction and has a plurality of LEDs 256 a (full color LED) and 256 b (white LED) mounted on the surface; A left upper decorative board cover 258 attached to the side inner lens 252 so as to cover the rear side of the left upper decorative board 254 and sandwich the left side upper decorative board 254, and a left side covering the rear side of the left side lower decorative board 256. Left side lower decorative board cover attached to side lens 250 so as to sandwich lower decorative board 256 It is provided with a 60, a.

  Further, the left side decoration unit 240 includes a left upper speaker 262 disposed in front of the side inner lens 252 and at the upper right portion in front view, and a transparent speaker which supports the upper left speaker 262 and is attached to the front upper right portion of the side inner lens 252. An upper speaker bracket 264 and a diffuser formed by a plurality of band-shaped lenses attached to the front surface of the upper speaker bracket 264 and inserted into the inner decoration member 251 at the upper right of the front view from the rear and extending radially around the lower left and right centers. And an upper right inner lens 266 having a 266a. The upper left speaker 262 is attached to the upper speaker bracket 264 so as to sandwich a protective plate 268 made of a metal plate capable of transmitting sound.

  In the left side decorative unit 240, the lower side decorative frame 242, the upper side decorative frame 244, the left side upper decorative substrate cover 258, and the left side lower decorative substrate cover 260 are formed of an opaque member. The surface of the decorative member 251 is provided with a plating layer of a predetermined color (in this example, silver). The side flash lens 246 has translucency and is entirely formed of milky white synthetic resin. The side lens 250, the side inner lens 252, the upper speaker bracket 264, and the upper right inner lens 266 are formed of a substantially colorless and transparent synthetic resin.

  In this example, both sides of the small window frames 242b and 244b in the lower side decorative frame 242 and the upper side decorative frame 244 (the small window is located in the radial axis direction centered on the lower left and right center of the game window 101). Opening frames 242c, 244c penetrating the side lower decorative frame 242 and the upper side decorative frame 244 in a cut-out state are formed on both sides of the frames 242b, 244b), and the small window frames 242b, 244b and The opening frames 242c and 244c on both sides are closed by a side flash lens 246 from the rear side. Therefore, the rear side of the small window frames 242b, 244b and the opening frames 242c, 244c of the lower side decorative frame 242 and the upper side decorative frame 244 cannot be viewed from the player side by the milky white side flash lens 246. .

  On the other hand, the peripheral lens portion 250a of the transparent side lens 250 is inserted into the large window frames 242a and 244a of the lower side decorative frame 242 and the upper side decorative frame 244 from the rear side, and is closed. The inner decorative member 251 arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized from the player side through 250a. The diffusion part 252a of the side inner lens 252 is located on the rear side of the inner decoration member 251. The light is diffusely refracted by the diffusion part 252a, so that the light passes through the slit 251a of the inner decoration member 251 and is behind the side inner lens 252. The side cannot be clearly seen. That is, the LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b mounted on the surface (front surface) of the upper left side decorative substrate 254 and the lower left side decorative substrate 256 disposed behind the side inner lens 252 through the slit 251a of the inner decorative member 251. Etc. cannot be clearly seen from the player side.

  The front surfaces of the upper left side decorative substrate 254 and the lower left side decorative substrate 256 are white, and the light of the mounted LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b and the like allows the left side decorative unit 240 to efficiently emit light. The decorative boards 254 and 256 are not so noticeable when the LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a and 256b are not lit. The upper left decorative board 254 and the lower left decorative board 256 are connected to the peripheral control section 4140, respectively, and each of the LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b is driven by a drive signal (light emission drive signal) from the peripheral control section 4140. Is emitted as appropriate, so that the left side decoration unit 240 can be illuminated.

  The lower side decorative frame 242 of the left side decorative unit 240 of the present example extends vertically along the left outer periphery of the gaming window 101, and has a U-shaped cross section with an open rear side. The lower side decorative frame 242 includes a plurality of large window frames 242a extending along the outer periphery of the game window 101 and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a substantially elliptical small frame disposed between the large window frames 242a and penetrating in the front-rear direction. A window frame 242b, and an opening frame 242c arranged on both sides of the small window frame 242b (on the gaming window 101 side and the outside of the pachinko machine 1), penetrating in the front-rear direction, and notched to the side, are provided. Is formed.

  The lower side decorative frame 242 is configured such that the corresponding peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 is fitted into the large window frame 242a from the rear side, and the side flash lens 246 corresponding to the small window frame 242b and the opening frame 242c. Are fitted from the rear side. That is, the lower side decorative frame 242 can form the outer peripheral frame of the peripheral lens part 250a of the corresponding side lens 250 and the side flash lens 246, respectively.

  Further, the upper side decorative frame 244 in the left side decorative unit 240 is substantially triangular in front view, extending from the upper left outer periphery to the upper outer periphery of the gaming window 101 and continuing from the upper end of the lower side decorative frame 242. It is formed in a U-shaped cross section with an open side. The upper side decorative frame 244 includes two large window frames 244a extending along the game window 101 and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a substantially elliptical small window frame disposed between the large window frames 244a and penetrating in the front-rear direction. 244b, and an opening frame 244c that is disposed on both sides of the small window frame 244b (on the gaming window 101 side and outside the pachinko machine 1), penetrates in the front-rear direction, and is cut out to the side surface, and is formed of synthetic resin. ing.

  The upper side decorative frame 244 is configured such that the corresponding peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 is fitted into the large window frame 244a from the rear side, and the side flash lens corresponding to the small window frame 244b and the opening frame 244c. 246 is fitted from the rear side. That is, the upper side decorative frame 244 can form the outer peripheral frame of the corresponding peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 and the corresponding side flash lens 246. The upper side decorative frame 244 forms a design that is continuous with the lower side decorative frame 242 when assembled as the left side decorative unit 240.

  In this example, the lower side decorative frame 242 and the upper side decorative frame 244 are colored black, and the side lenses facing the large window frames 242a, 244a, the small window frames 242b, 244b, and the opening frames 242c, 244c. 250 and the side flash lens 246 are emphasized.

  The side lens 250 in the left side decorative unit 240 has a size obtained by combining the lower side decorative frame 242 and the upper side decorative frame 244, and has a size extending to the left side and the upper side of the game window 101 from the center to the left side. I have. The side lens 250 has a peripheral lens portion 250a fitted into the large window frames 242a and 244a of the lower side decorative frame 242 and the upper side decorative frame 244 from the rear side, and a concave shape rearward between the peripheral lens portions 250a. And a radiation lens portion 250b in which a side flash lens 246 is disposed on the front side. In the side lens 250, the peripheral lens portion 250a is formed by one smoothly curved surface, and the radiation lens portion 250b is formed by a substantially flat surface. The side lens 250 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, so that the rear side can be visually recognized.

  Further, the inner decoration member 251 of the left side decoration unit 240 is provided behind the peripheral lens portions 250a of the side lens 250, and includes a plurality of slits 251a extending along the outer periphery of the game window 101 and penetrating in the front-rear direction. ing. As shown in the drawing, the inner decorative member 251 has a plurality of slits 251a extending along the outer periphery of the gaming window 101, and is also concentric with the center of the gaming window 101 in the width direction. There are several. The inner decorative member 251 has a front surface on which a plurality of slits 251 a are formed in a curved shape substantially along the inner surface of the peripheral lens portion 250 a of the side lens 250. Note that the inner decorative member 251 of this example has a plating layer having a silver metallic luster on the surface, and is visible from the player side through the peripheral lens portion 250a of the transparent side lens 250. .

  Further, the side inner lens 252 in the left side decoration unit 240 is disposed on the rear side of the inner decoration member 251 and has substantially the same size and outer shape as the side lens 250, and is formed of a substantially colorless and transparent synthetic resin. I have. The side inner lens 252 is formed with a diffusion portion 252a that bulges forward so that a portion corresponding to the inner decoration member 251 is inserted from the rear side into each of the inner decoration members 251. The diffusion portion 252a of the side inner lens 252 has a plurality of band-shaped lenses extending radially around the center in the left-right direction of the game window 101 on the front surface, and the direction in which the band-shaped lens extends is disposed on the front side. The decoration member 251 intersects (substantially orthogonally) with the extending direction of the slit 251a.

  In the side inner lens 252, the diffusion portion 252a can be seen from the player side through the slit 251a of the inner decoration member 251. However, since light is irregularly refracted by a plurality of band-shaped lenses formed in the diffusion portion 252a, the diffusion The rear side is not clearly visible through the portion 252a. As shown in the figure, the side inner lens 252 has a substantially flat surface between the diffusing portions 252a, and the light from the upper left side decorative substrate 254 and the lower left side decorative substrate 256 disposed on the rear side. Can be transmitted forward without being diffused or refracted.

  The left upper decorative board 254 and the left lower decorative board 256 of the left side decorative unit 240 have a plurality of high-brightness color LEDs mounted on the surface, and have a larger size than the lower side decorative frame 242 and the upper side decorative frame 244. The LEDs 254a and 256a arranged at positions corresponding to the window frames 242a and 244a (the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250) have relatively wide irradiation angles (for example, 60 ° to 180 °). LEDs 254b arranged at positions corresponding to the small window frames 242b, 244b and the opening frames 242c, 244c of the lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244 (the radiation lens portion 250b of the side lens 250, that is, the side flash lens 246). 256b has a relatively narrow irradiation angle (for example, 15 ° to 6 °). °) it is used.

  The upper left speaker 262 of the left side decoration unit 240 outputs a sound in the middle and high frequency ranges similarly to the side speaker 130, and is mounted at a predetermined position in a predetermined direction by the upper speaker bracket 264. I have. The upper speaker bracket 264 that supports the upper left speaker 262 includes a cylindrical horn (not shown) that projects obliquely forward and downward at the left and right centers of the pachinko machine 1 when viewed from the front. An upper left speaker 262 is fixed via a protective plate 268 behind the upper end of the horn portion of the upper speaker bracket 264 so that the upper left speaker 262 is not seen from the player side in a front view. It has become. Further, the protection plate 268 made of a metal plate can prevent a mischief by the upper left speaker 262 or break of a cone of the upper left speaker 262 to insert an unauthorized tool into the pachinko machine 1. Has become. The upper left speaker 262 of this example is designed to be emitted from the upper part of the pachinko machine 1 to a player below, so that it is difficult for other pachinko machines to make noise.

  Next, a characteristic light emission effect in the left side decoration unit 240 of the present example will be described. As described above, the left side decoration unit 240 forms the outer surface of the left side decoration unit 240 and includes a side lens 250 having a curved transparent peripheral lens part 250a, and a rear lens part 250a disposed on the rear side and on the surface. An inner decorative member 251 having a plurality of slits 251a having a metal glossy plating layer and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and extending in a direction intersecting the direction in which the slit 251a extends, which is disposed on the rear side of the inner decorative member 251; A left inner upper decorative substrate 254 and a lower left lower decorative substrate 256 having a side inner lens 252 provided with a diffusion portion 252a formed of a plurality of belt-shaped lenses, and a plurality of LEDs 254a and 256a mounted on the rear side of the side inner lens 252; (See FIG. 35 and the like). Accordingly, in the left side decoration unit 240, when the LEDs 254a and 256a emit light, the light emitted forward is diffused by the diffusion portion 252a of the side inner lens 252, and then passes through the slit 251a of the inner decoration member 251. Irradiation is performed from the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 to the player side so that the peripheral lens portion 250a of the left side decoration unit 240 can be illuminated.

  By the way, the light irradiated forward (to the side of the side lens 250) through the slit 251a of the inner decoration member 251 is partially transmitted to the player side through the peripheral lens portion 250a of the transparent side lens 250. At the same time, the remaining light is reflected on the inner surface of the peripheral lens portion 250a and irradiates the front surface of the inner decorative member 251. Since the inner decorative member 251 is provided with a plating layer having a silver metallic luster on the surface, light reflected toward the inner decorative member 251 on the inner surface of the peripheral lens portion 250a is transmitted to the surface of the inner decorative member 251. The light is reflected toward the peripheral lens part 250a at the (front) side, and a part of the light reflected on the surface of the inner decorative member 251 is transmitted through the peripheral lens part 250a and irradiated to the player side.

  At this time, in this example, as shown in FIG. 35, the peripheral lens portion 250a, the front surface of the inner decorative member 251 and the diffusion portion 252a of the side inner lens 252 are each smoothly curved, so that the inner surface side ( The light reflected on the rear side) converges, and the light reflected on the outer side (front side) is diffused, so that the peripheral lens portion 250a receives direct light passing through the slit 251a of the inner decorative member 251 and peripheral light. The indirect light reflected on the front surface of the lens part 250a and the inner decorative member 251 is applied to the shifted positions. Further, the light passing through the slit 251a of the inner decorative member 251 is diffused and intersected by the diffusing portion 252a formed by the plurality of band-shaped lenses in the side inner lens 252 in a stripe shape with respect to the extending direction of the slit 251a. (Substantially orthogonal) is diffused. Therefore, a plurality of striped lights having different shadings are radiated (projected) to the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 so as to extend in a direction that is longer than the width of the slit 251a and intersect with the direction in which the slit 251a extends. As a result, a fantastic luminous decoration with a perspective can be provided (see FIG. 36).

[Upper decoration unit]
Subsequently, the upper decorative unit 280 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 37 is a front perspective view of the upper decorative unit in the door frame, and FIG. 38 is a rear perspective view of the upper decorative unit in the door frame. FIG. 39 is an exploded perspective view of the upper decoration unit as viewed from the front after being disassembled, and FIG. 40 is an exploded perspective view of the upper decoration unit as viewed from the rear after being disassembled.

  As shown in FIG. 17 and the like, the upper decorative unit 280 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment is located at the upper center of the front surface of the door frame 5 and is located between the upper edges of the right side decorative unit 200 and the left side decorative unit 240 on the central side. It is attached between and decorates between them. As shown in the figure, the upper decoration unit 280 has an annular central frame 281a penetrating in the front-rear direction, a frame-shaped upper extension frame 281b that extends elongated from the top of the central frame 281a to the left and right, and becomes thinner toward the tip. A front decoration member 281 having a frame-shaped lower extension frame 281c extending from the lower portion of the center frame 281a to the left and right and becoming thinner toward the front end; A translucent upper lens 282 having a through hole 282a having a diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the central frame 281a while closing the inside of the extension frame 281c, and a cylindrical shape inserted into the through hole 282a of the upper lens 282. A central sleeve 283, an upper central lens 284 inserted into the central sleeve 283 and bulging forward, and a surface disposed behind the upper central lens 284. A plate-shaped diffusion lens 285 on which a plurality of fine prisms are formed; an annular lens support member 286 which holds the outer periphery of the diffusion lens 285 and is supported on the rear side of the upper lens 282; and a rear side of the lens support member 286 And a light-shielding member 287 having a cylindrical portion 287a having substantially the same diameter as the inner diameter of the lens support member 286; and a light-shielding member 287 disposed at a position corresponding to the inside of the cylindrical portion 287a of the light-shielding member 287. A plurality of LEDs 288a, and an upper central decorative board 288 having a plurality of LEDs 288b disposed at positions corresponding to the outside of the cylindrical portion 287a mounted on the front surface.

  The upper decorative unit 280 includes a unit base 289 that supports the front decorative member 281, the upper lens 282, the light blocking member 287, and the upper central decorative substrate 288 from the rear side, and a plurality of units arranged on the rear side of the unit base 289 and arranged on the front surface. The upper side decorative board 290 on which the LED 290a is mounted, the board cover 291 which covers the rear surface of the upper side decorative board 290 and is mounted on the rear side of the unit base 289, and which is mounted on the lower rear surface of the board cover 291 and extends rearward. A mounting bracket 292, an upper lower cover 293 which is attached to the lower side of the mounting bracket 292 and extends rearward from the lower rear end of the front decorative member 281; And an upper lower decorative cover 294 shaped into a shape.

  Further, the upper decoration unit 280 is attached to the board cover 291 and extends rearward from the upper rear end of the front decoration member 281 in a plate shape, and has a cutout 295a having a rear end opened at the center in the left-right direction. A cover 295, a plate-shaped lid member 296 for closing the cutout portion 295a of the upper upper cover 295, and a decorative member 297 attached to the right side of the unit base 289 in a front view and formed into a predetermined shape are provided. .

  In the upper decoration unit 280 of this example, a plating layer having a silver metallic luster is formed on the surface of the front decoration member 281, and the front decoration member 281 is made to glitter by external light. The upper lens 282 is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and has a center ring lens portion 282b facing the center frame 281a of the front decoration member 281 at the outer periphery of the through hole 282a, and an upper extension of the front decoration member 281. A frame 281b and an extension frame lens portion 282c facing the inside of the frame of the lower extension frame 281c. The upper lens 282 has a plurality of radially extending band-shaped lenses arranged in the circumferential direction on the rear surface of the central ring lens portion 282b, and the center of the through-hole 282a on the front surface of the extension frame lens portion 282c. A plurality of concentrically extending prisms are formed. Accordingly, the light can be irregularly refracted by the plurality of prisms and the band-shaped lenses of the upper lens 282, and the rear side of the upper lens 282 cannot be clearly seen.

  The upper central lens 284 of the upper decoration unit 280 is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin. The upper central lens 284 has a smooth spindle shape on the front side, and a plurality of concentric lenses on the rear side. Is invisible to the public.

  In the upper central decorative board 288 of the upper decorative unit 280, the plurality of LEDs 288a and 288b mounted on the front surface are each a full-color LED, and the upper central lens 284 and the central frame 281a in the front decorative member 281 are provided. The outer periphery of the upper central lens 284 and the outer periphery thereof can be separately illuminated. Further, in the upper side decorative board 290 of the upper decorative unit 280, the plurality of LEDs 290a mounted on the front surface are each a full-color LED, and these LEDs 290a are connected to the upper extension frame 281b and the lower extension frame 281c of the front decorative member 281. Are arranged at positions corresponding to the insides of the frames. The upper side decorative board 290 can emit light and decorate the upper extension frame 281b and the lower extension frame 281c of the front decoration member 281 by appropriately emitting the LED 290a.

[Dish unit]
Subsequently, the plate unit 300 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 41 is a front perspective view of the plate unit in the door frame, and FIG. 42 is a rear perspective view of the plate unit in the door frame. FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit as disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 44 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 45 is a cross-sectional view of the dish frame unit at the portion of the door frame at the ball lending unit.

  The plate unit 300 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment includes an upper plate 301 and a lower plate 302 for storing game balls paid out from a prize ball device 740 described later, and a game stored in the upper plate 301. The ball can be supplied to a hit ball firing device 650 described later via a ball feed unit 580. As shown in FIGS. 43 and 44, the plate unit 300 of this example includes a plate-shaped plate unit base 310 that is fixed to the lower front surface of the door frame base unit 100 and extends substantially in the left-right direction and extends in the left-right direction. A dish-shaped upper plate main body 312 fixed to substantially the center of the front surface and opened upward and rearward, and the left side (axial support side) swells greatly forward when viewed from the front. An upper plate upper panel 314 formed in a curved shape so that the center in the left-right direction projects forward when viewed, an upper plate front decorative member 316 attached to an upper front edge of the upper plate upper panel 314, and an upper plate front portion An upper plate upper inner decorative member 318 disposed between the decorative member 316 and the upper plate upper panel 314, and a right upper portion of the upper plate upper panel 314 that is continuous with a right portion of the upper plate front decorative member 316. A dish upper right decorative member 319 on the cover, and a.

  The plate unit 300 is mounted on the upper plate upper panel 314 from the left and right center to the lower surface on the right side and has a plate-shaped substrate mounting base 320 on which a plurality of fine prisms are formed, and is mounted below the substrate mounting base 320. And an upper plate decorative substrate 322 having a plurality of LEDs 322a mounted on the upper surface thereof. By appropriately emitting light from the LEDs 322a of the upper plate decorative substrate 322, a part of the upper plate front decorative member 316 and the upper plate upper right decorative member 319 can be light-emitting decorated.

  Further, the plate unit 300 is fixed to the front surface of the plate unit base 310 below the upper plate main body 312 and is open at the top and the rear. A dish-shaped lower dish main body 324 formed so as to become lower as it goes forward, and is fixed to the upper portion of the lower dish main body 324, and the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front is bulged forward substantially in the same manner as the lower dish body 324, and the front end is left-right direction. A plate-shaped lower plate top plate 326 curved so as to become higher toward the center, and a cylinder lock 1010 of a lock device 1000 described later at a portion that covers the lower front end of the lower plate main body 324 and extends rightward in front view. A lower plate cover 328 having a lock hole 328a facing it, and an upper opening 330a coaxial with the lock hole 328a of the lower plate cover 328 by decorating the right side from the position of the lower end of the lower plate cover 328 to the left and right center. And Shitasara side cover 330 provided with a lower opening 330b of the handle 500 is inserted from the front opening on the lower side of the upper opening 330a, and a.

  The plate unit 300 also includes a lower plate upper left side cover 332 that extends obliquely and covers the left front end of the lower plate main body 324 and the left front end of the lower plate top plate 326, and is disposed at the lower end of the lower plate left upper side cover 332. A lower cover left lower side cover 334 having an opening 334a penetrating in the direction, a protective cover 336 made of a metal plate in which the opening 334a of the lower plate left lower side cover 334 is closed from the rear side to allow sound to pass therethrough, and protection. A frame-shaped holding member 337 that holds the outer periphery of the cover 336 and is attached to the rear surface of the lower left lower side cover 334. The right front end of the lower plate top plate 326 is covered with the upper plate front decorative member 316.

  In addition, the plate unit 300 is attached to the upper left and right ends of the plate unit base 310, and the lower ends of the right side decorative unit 200 and the left side decorative unit 240 and the upper ends of the lower plate side cover 330 and the lower plate left upper side cover 332 are designed. And a side speaker cover 338 having an opening 338a penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the side speaker 130 attached to the door frame base unit 100, and an opening of the side speaker cover 338. And a cover body 339 having a disc-like shape having a plurality of holes that is loosely curved so as to close the portion 338a from the rear side and bulge forward.

  In this example, since the cover body 339 is formed of a predetermined punching metal, the cover body 339 is not easily deformed even if it is pushed or hit from the front side, and the side speaker 130 can be used. As long as it can be protected. The side speaker cover 338 has a plating layer having a silver metallic luster formed on the surface. The cover body 339 is colored black.

  Further, in the plate unit 300, an upper plate ball removing mechanism 340 attached to the plate unit base 310 and the upper plate main body 312 to pull out game balls stored in the upper plate 301 to the lower plate 302, and a lower plate main body 324. A lower plate ball removing mechanism 350 attached to the lower surface for pulling down the game balls stored in the lower plate 302 and a lower unit upper portion on the left side when viewed from the front of the plate unit base 310 and installed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. A ball lending unit 360 for operating a ball lending machine (also referred to as a CR unit 6, not shown).

  The plate unit 300 of the present example constitutes an upper plate 301 capable of storing game balls by a part of the plate unit base 310, the upper plate main body 312, the upper plate upper panel 314, and the like. Further, the plate unit 300 constitutes a lower plate 302 capable of storing game balls by a part of the plate unit base 310, the lower plate main body 324, the lower plate top plate 326, the lower plate cover 328, and the like.

  As shown in FIG. 43, the plate unit base 310 of the plate unit 300 is formed in a substantially plate shape extending in the left-right direction, and a decorative portion 310a having a predetermined shape is formed on an upper edge extending in the left-right direction. Provided. A ball lending unit mounting portion 310b is formed at the left end of the decorative portion 310a and penetrates in the front-rear direction to mount the ball lending unit 360. The dish unit base 310 is arranged below the ball lending unit attachment part 310b (near the upper left corner in front view), and has a horizontally elongated rectangular upper dish ball supply port 310c that penetrates in the front-rear direction. An upper tray ball discharge port 310d which extends in the front-rear direction below and below the right end of the decorative portion 310a in the front-rear direction below the mouth 310c (substantially in the height direction of the plate unit base 310); A pair of lower plate support portions 310e, which are disposed immediately below the ball discharge port 310d and the upper plate ball supply port 310c, protrude forward and have the same upper surface, are provided. The upper bowl discharge port 310d is formed continuously up to an intermediate position in the front-rear direction on the upper surface of the lower bowl support portion 310e disposed immediately below.

  Further, the plate unit 300 is disposed between the pair of lower plate support portions 310e, is fitted with the lower ends of the lower plate main body 324 and the lower plate top plate 326, and has a horizontally long rectangular lower plate support formed in a front view. It includes a groove 310f, and a rectangular lower dish ball supply port 310g that is disposed at a lower portion on the right side of the center of a portion surrounded by the lower dish support groove 310f and penetrates in the front-rear direction. Further, as shown in FIG. 44, the dish unit base 310 includes a lower dish ball supply gutter 310h that extends rearward so as to be continuous with the lower dish ball supply port 310g, and an opening side of the lower dish ball supply gutter 310h. And a notch 310i formed on the side surface and having a size through which a game ball can pass.

  An upper plate ball supply port 310c of the plate unit base 310 is a foul cover attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit via the cutout portions 101a and 162 of the door frame base body 110 and the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame base unit 100. The first sphere outlet 544a of the unit 540 is communicated with. At the front end of the upper dish ball supply port 310c, there is provided a guide recess 310j that extends long in the right direction as viewed from the front and is recessed rearward. The guide recess 310j is inclined so that the right end side in front view is slightly lower in the left-right direction, and is also inclined so that the front end side is lower in the front-rear direction. As a result, the height difference between the front end of the guide recess 310j and the bottom surface of the upper plate main body 312 becomes higher toward the right end of the guide recess 310j. Is slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball.

  Therefore, in this example, when the front side of the upper plate ball supply port 310c is closed by the game balls stored in the upper plate 301, the game balls paid out from the prize ball device 740 through the foul cover unit 540, Since it is impossible to linearly enter the upper plate 301 forward from the upper plate supply port 310c, the dispensed game balls contact the game balls having the front side of the upper plate supply port 310c closed and roll. The direction is changed, the guide recess 310j is guided to roll in the right direction when viewed from the front, and is discharged from near the right end of the guide recess 310j to the upper side of the game ball stored in the upper plate 301. Become. As a result, the game balls can be automatically stored in the upper and lower two stages in the upper plate 301, so that when the game balls close the front of the upper plate supply port 310c, the player does not bring the game balls by hand. Even so, it is possible to continue supplying (discharging) the paid game balls into the upper plate 301, and it is possible to suppress the player from feeling troublesome in storing the game balls in the upper plate 301. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from deteriorating the interest in the game by focusing the player on the operation of hitting the game ball or the game with the hit game ball, and to increase the storage amount of the game ball in the upper plate 301. Can be done.

  The upper bowl discharging port 310d of the bowl unit base 310 is connected to the opening 344a of the upper bowl removing base 344 of the upper bowl removing mechanism 340 and the ball feed opening 113 of the door frame base body 110 of the door frame base unit 100. It communicates with the entrance 581a of the ball feed unit 580 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 through the door. Further, in the lower counter ball supply port 310g, the lower counter ball supply gutter 310h extending rearward from the rear side extends rearward through the ball passage port 110f of the door frame base body 110 in the door frame base unit 100. Above, it is connected to the second ball outlet 544b of the foul cover unit 540 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100, and the notch 310i of the lower counter ball supply gutter 310h is connected to the upper counter ball removing mechanism 340. It is connected to the ball drain channel 344c of the upper ball drain base 344.

  In addition, in this example, as shown in the figure, the front end of the lower tray ball supply port 310g is provided with an opening 310k that expands leftward when viewed from the front. The front end of 310 g is spread in the left-right direction. As a result, it is possible to suppress early occurrence of ball clogging in the lower dish ball supply port 310g due to game balls in the lower dish 302 accumulated on the front side of the lower dish ball supply port 310g. The balls can be supplied into the lower plate 302.

  The upper plate main body 312 of the plate unit 300 is formed so that the left side (the pivot side) from the center in front view bulges forward, and the bottom surface is entirely lower on the left end side (open side) and the rear end side. I have. The bottom surface of the upper plate main body 312 has a rear end on the pivot side near the bottom of the upper plate ball supply port 310c in the plate unit base 310 and a rear end on the open side in the upper plate ball discharge port 310d in the plate unit base 310. The game balls that are formed so as to be located near the vertical intermediate position, respectively, and that are supplied to the upper plate main body 312 (upper plate 301) from the upper plate ball supply port 310c are guided to the upper plate ball discharge port 310d. It has become so.

  The upper plate main body 312 is provided with a metal upper plate rail 313 that can be in contact with the game ball at the rear end of the bottom surface from the center in the left-right direction to the open side. Although not shown, the upper plate rail 313 is electrically grounded (earthed), so that static electricity charged on the game ball can be removed.

  The upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300 extends in a curved shape from the upper end of the upper plate body 312 such that the center in the left-right direction of the door frame 5 projects forward, and is located outside the open side of the upper plate body 312. A mounting hole 314a is formed through which the upper ball removing mechanism 340 to be described later is mounted. The upper plate upper panel 314 has a front end formed in a stepped shape lower than the upper front end of the upper plate main body 312, and is a decorative mounting portion 314b for mounting the upper plate front decorative member 316 and the upper plate upper inner decorative member 318. And an operation unit attachment portion 314c formed in a stepped shape lower than the decoration attachment portion 314b at a position on the front side of the upper plate main body 312 at the center in the left-right direction and for attaching an operation unit 400 described later. I have.

  The upper plate front decorative member 316 is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin in a shape extending in a curved shape in the left-right direction along the front end of the upper plate upper panel 314. The upper plate front decorative member 316 has a smooth shape on the left side and a plurality of curved surfaces curved in the shape of a spindle on the right side, while the left side is formed from a position closer to the right in the center in the left-right direction. It is formed in such a rugged shape. Although a detailed illustration is omitted, the upper plate front decorative member 316 has a plurality of small-diameter lenses formed on the right rear surface formed by a plurality of curved surfaces, and can diffuse light erratically. The rear side is not clearly visible from the player side. The upper plate upper inner decorative member 318 is disposed behind the smoothly formed portion on the left side of the upper plate front decorative member 316, and has a surface provided with a plating layer having a silver metallic luster. ing. Thus, the upper plate upper inner decorative member 318 can be clearly seen from the player side through the left side of the upper plate front decorative member 316 in the assembled state, while the upper plate upper inner decorative member 316 can be clearly seen from the player side. The part seen through is seen from the player side as unclear and the sense of distance is uncertain.

  The upper plate upper right decorative member 319 is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin. The upper plate upper right decorative member 319 is formed by a plurality of spindle-shaped curved surfaces like the right side of the upper plate front decorative member 316. In addition to being formed in a shape integral with the right side portion, the upper right end side is formed so as to decorate the outer periphery of an upper tray ball removing button 341 described later. Further, the upper plate upper right decorative member 319 has a plurality of small-diameter lenses formed on the back surface (lower surface) so that light can be irregularly refracted and the lower side cannot be clearly seen from the player side. I have. Note that an upper plate decorative board 322 is disposed behind the right side of the upper plate decorative member 316 and below the upper plate upper right decorative member 319, and the LED 322a of the upper plate decorative substrate 322 is turned on. By appropriately emitting light, the upper plate front decoration member 316 and the upper plate upper right decoration member 319 can emit light as appropriate.

  The lower plate main body 324 of the plate unit 300 has a bottom plate 324a formed in a fan shape in a plan view and a rear end formed linearly in the left-right direction and a substantially center of an upper surface being lowest, and a center of the bottom plate 324a. And a side plate 324c that rises upward from a front end and a side end of the bottom plate 324a except for a rear end of the bottom plate 324a. The side plate 324c of the lower plate main body 324 is formed in a curved shape so that the upper end rising upward from the side end of the bottom plate 324a is lower on the front side and higher on the rear side. The upper end rising upward from the side end is formed in a linear shape, and the left and right ends of the lower plate 326 are placed and connected to the linear portion of the upper end.

  In the lower plate main body 324, the rear ends of the bottom plate 324a and the side plate 324c are inserted and supported in a lower plate support groove 310f formed on the front surface of the plate unit base 310. In addition, the lower plate hole 324b of the lower plate main body 324 is closed by an opening / closing shutter 352 of a lower plate ball removing mechanism 350 disposed on the back side of the bottom plate 324a.

  The lower plate cover 328 is formed of a black synthetic resin. On the other hand, the lower plate side cover 330 is formed of a predetermined synthetic resin, and has a silver-plated layer having a metallic appearance (a matte state such as sandblasted instead of a mirror surface) on the surface. The lower plate side cover 330 has a plate-like portion that extends rearward from the lower end and forms a part of the bottom surface of the plate unit 300. The lock hole 328 a of the lower plate cover 328 and the upper opening 330 a of the lower plate side cover 330 are formed at positions corresponding to the cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 attached to the main frame 3. On the other hand, when the door frame 5 is closed, the lock hole of the cylinder lock 1010 faces the lock hole 328a and the upper opening 330a.

  The lower plate upper left side cover 332 is formed of a predetermined synthetic resin and has a plating layer having a silver metallic luster on the surface. Further, the lower plate left lower side cover 334 is formed of a predetermined synthetic resin and has a plating layer having a red metallic luster on its surface. It has a plate-like part forming a part. The opening 334a of the lower plate left lower side cover 334 is formed at a position corresponding to the front surface of a lower speaker 821 (low-pitched speaker) provided in the main body frame 3 described later. It can be transmitted to the side. The protective cover 336 that closes the opening 334a of the lower left lower side cover 334 is a punched metal having a plurality of holes formed in a metal plate, and prevents an unauthorized tool from being inserted inside. .

  In the plate unit 300 of this example, the bottom surface except for the center in the left-right direction is closed by the lower plate side cover 330 and the lower plate left lower side cover 334, and the lower plate side cover 330 and the lower plate left lower side cover are provided. 334 is closed by a lower bowl removing mechanism 350 described later.

  The upper bowl removing mechanism 340 in the tray unit 300 is provided with an upper bowl removing button 341 and an upper bowl removing button 341 which are attached to the mounting hole 314 a of the upper upper panel 314 so as to be able to move up and down. The operation piece 342 which is moved up and down more than the up and down movement of the upper dish ball removal button 341 to be supported on the front side of the dish unit base 310, and the actuation piece 342 is operably (rotatably) supported and the dish unit base 310 is supported. And a contact piece that slides up and down by the up and down movement of an operating piece 342 supported by the mounting base 346 and that comes into contact with an operating rod 583c of a ball removing member 583 in a ball feed unit 580 described later. An upper plate ball removing slider 343 provided on the rear side of the plate unit base 310 with the upper plate ball removing slider 343; The an upper pan ball vent base 344 attached to the rear side of the vertical direction slidably supported to be countersunk unit base 310, and a.

  Although the detailed illustration is omitted, the operation piece 342 which moves up and down together with the upper countersunk button 341 such that the upper countersunk button 341 is located at the upper moving end is omitted. It is urged upward by a coil spring. Further, the upper countersunk ball removing slider 343 is in a state of being urged upward by a coil spring provided between the slider and the upper countersunk ball removing base 344.

  The upper bowl removing base 344 of the upper bowl removing mechanism 340 closes the upper bowl discharging port 310d of the bowl unit base 310 and at the same time communicates with the upper bowl discharging port 310d to open forward 344a (FIG. 43), and a ball guiding flow path 344b (FIGS. 42 and FIG. 42) that guides a game ball that has communicated with the opening 344a on the back side of the upper bowl removing base 344 and that has passed through the opening 344a, and then guides the game ball backward. 44), extends downward from the lower side of the ball guiding flow path 344b, and then extends substantially along the lower side of the upper bowl removing base 344 toward the right side (axial support side) end in rear view. And a ball removal channel 344c in which a game ball can be rolled.

  The opening 344a communicates with the upper bowl discharging port 310d, and the lower end of the ball guiding flow path 344b that communicates with the opening 344a has a ball at the lower end of the door frame base body 110 in the door frame base unit 100. The game balls stored in the upper plate 301 are communicated with the entrance 581a of the ball feeding unit 580 attached to the rear side of the door frame base body 110 through the feeding opening 113, and the ball feeding unit 580 is provided. It can be supplied to.

  The upper end of the ball removing channel 344c of the upper bowl removing base 344 communicates with the ball outlet 581b of the ball feeding unit 580 through the ball feeding opening 113 of the door frame base body 110 at the upper end adjacent to the ball guiding channel 344b. In addition, the lower end extending to the pivot side communicates with the cutout portion 310i of the lower dish ball supply gutter 310h in the dish unit base 310, and the game ball discharged from the ball outlet 581b of the ball feed unit 580 can be used. It can be guided to the lower plate 302. The lower portion of the rear end of the ball removing channel 344c is closed by an upper ball removing channel cover 345.

  When the upper counter-ball-pulling button 341 is pressed downward against the urging force of the coil spring, the upper counter-ball-pulling mechanism 340 causes the upper counter-ball-pulling slider 343 to slide downward and the abutting piece 343a protruding rearward. Move down. Then, the operating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583 of the ball feeding unit 580 that contacts the upper surface of the contact piece 343a rotates the partitioning portion 583a of the ball removing member 583 in a predetermined direction as the contact piece 343a moves downward. Then, the partition between the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b partitioned by the partition portion 583a is released, and the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b communicate with each other. Thereby, the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 are transferred from the upper plate discharge port 310d to the entrance 581a of the ball feed unit 580 through the opening 344a of the upper plate extraction base 344 and the ball guiding flow path 344b. After entering, the ball is discharged from the ball outlet 581b to the ball drain channel 344c of the upper ball drain base 344, and from the lower ball feed port 310g to the lower plate 302 through the lower ball feed gutter 310h of the plate unit base 310. Can be discharged to

  Note that the ball removing member 583 of the ball feeding unit 580 is in contact with the upper surface of the contact piece 343a of the upper counter ball removing slider 343 whose operating rod 583c is urged upward by a coil spring. Even if a game ball is supplied vigorously onto the partitioning portion 583a, the impact can be absorbed by a coil spring that urges the upper plate ball removing slider 343 via the operating rod 583c. It is possible to prevent the ball from being damaged and to prevent the game ball from bouncing off at the partition 583a.

  The lower plate removing mechanism 350 in the plate unit 300 is disposed between the lower plate side cover 330 and the lower plate left lower side cover 334 below the lower plate main body 324 and forms a bottom central portion of the plate unit 300. A ball-opening base 351, a plate-shaped opening / closing shutter 352 rotatably supported on the upper surface of the lower-plate ball-opening base 351, and a plate-shaped opening / closing shutter 352 capable of opening and closing a lower-plate ball opening 324 b. A lower plate pull-out slide 353 supported on the upper surface of the lower plate pull-out base 351 so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction; and a lower plate pull-out button 354 attached to the front end of the lower plate pull-out slide 353. ing.

  The lower bowl removing base 351 includes a base bowl removing hole 351a vertically penetrating at a position facing the lower bowl removing hole 324b of the lower bowl main body 324. Further, the opening / closing shutter 352 includes a closing portion 352a capable of closing the lower countersunk ball hole 324b, and a shutter ball extracting hole disposed in front of the closing portion 352a and penetrating in a vertical direction substantially coincident with the lower countersunk ball holes 324b. 352b, and the closing portion 352a is urged by the coil spring 356 so as to be at a position for closing the lower countersunk hole 324b and the base ball extracting hole 351a with respect to the lower countersunk hole base 351. .

  Although not shown in detail, the opening / closing shutter 352 includes a contact pin which can be brought into contact with the lower plate ball removing slide 353, and the contact pin comes into contact with the lower plate ball removing slide 353. The closing portion 352a and the shutter ball removing hole 352b are rotated so as to move backward by the lower plate removing ball 353, and the lower plate removing slide 353 is slid forward by the urging force of the coil spring 356. You can do it.

  Further, in the lower dish removing mechanism 350, the shutter ball removing hole 352b of the opening / closing shutter 352 substantially coincides with the lower dish removing hole 324b of the lower dish main body 324 and the base ball removing hole 351a of the lower dish removing base 351. A holding mechanism 355 for holding the lower dish removing slide 353 at a predetermined position is further provided to hold the slide 353 at the predetermined position.

  In a state where the surface shape of the lower plate ball removing button 354 is continuous with the surface shape of the lower plate cover 328 and the like, the lower plate ball removing button 350 moves to the front end in the closed state. In this state, the lower plate hole 324b of the lower plate body 324 is closed by the closing portion 352a of the opening / closing shutter 352. In this state, game balls can be stored in the lower plate main body 324 (lower plate 302). When the lower plate ball pulling button 354 is pressed rearward, the lower plate ball pulling button 354 and the lower plate ball pulling slide 353 slide backward, and the lower plate ball pulling slide 353 slides backward. The opening / closing shutter 352 rotates so that the closing portion 352a and the shutter ball hole 352b move rearward against the urging force of the coil spring 356.

  Then, as the opening / closing shutter 352 rotates backward, the shutter ball hole 352b overlaps the lower ball hole 324b and the base ball hole 351a, and then the shutter ball hole 352b and the lower ball hole 324b coincides with each other, and the game balls stored in the lower plate 302 can be discharged below the plate unit 300 through the lower plate ball hole 324b. Note that when the slide 353 for removing the bottom dish ball moves backward to a position where the shutter hole 352b and the bottom dish hole 324b substantially coincide with each other, the slide mechanism 355 holds the bottom dish removal slide 353. When the slide of the lower-drill ball pull-out slide 353 is locked (held), the lower-drill ball pull-out button 354 is kept in the open state in which the lower-drill ball pull-out button 354 is retracted rearward, and the lower-drill ball pull-out hole 352b is moved to the lower-drill ball release hole 352b. The game balls stored in the lower plate 302 can be discharged downward even if the lower plate 302 is not held down by holding the lower plate ball release button 354.

  On the other hand, in the case of closing the lower bowl removing hole 324b, when the lower bowl removing button 354 that has been retracted is further pressed backward, the holding of the lower bowl removing slide 353 by the holding mechanism 355 is released, and the lower bowl removing slide 353 is released. The ball-pull slide 353 can slide, and the opening / closing shutter 352 in which the closing portion 352a is urged by the coil spring in a direction to close the lower plate ball hole 324b, the closing portion 352a is urged by the urging force. It turns in the direction of moving in the direction (forward) of the ball hole 324b. Then, as the opening / closing shutter 352 rotates forward, the slide 353 for pulling out the lower platen ball slides forward, the closing portion 352a closes the hole 324b for extracting the lower platen ball, and the lower plate release button 354 is pressed down. It returns to the closed position substantially coincident with the front surface of the dish cover 328 and the like, so that game balls can be stored in the lower dish 302.

  The holding mechanism 355 of the lower bowl removing mechanism 350 uses a known technique having the above-described function, and a detailed description of the mechanism will be omitted.

  The ball lending unit 360 in the plate unit 300 includes a ball lending button 361 and a return button 362 that can be pressed backward, and a lending remaining display section 363 between the ball lending button 361 and the return button 362. The ball lending unit 360 inserts cash or a prepaid card into a ball lending machine provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 and presses a ball lending button 361 to place a predetermined number of game balls in the plate unit 300. Can be lent (paid out) into the upper plate 301, and when the return button 362 is pressed, the balance of the cash or the prepaid card inserted after subtracting the remainder of the borrowed amount is returned. I have. In addition, the remaining lending display section 363 displays the number of cash or prepaid cards remaining in the ball lending machine.

  The ball lending unit 360 is attached from the rear side to a ball lending unit attachment portion 310b formed on the decoration portion 310a at the upper end of the plate unit base 310. Further, the ball rental unit 360 is provided with a security cover mounting portion 364 that protrudes rearward from the rear surface and mounts and locks the mounting elastic piece 185 on the pivot side (left side in front view) of the security cover 180.

  More specifically, the ball lending unit 360 has a transparent ball lending unit front cover 365 that covers the front side of the lending remaining display unit 363, and a lending residual display unit 363 that is disposed behind the lending ball lending unit front cover 365. A ball-lending unit board 366 (see FIG. 45) to which a switch operated by operating the ball-lending button 361 and the return button 362 is attached, and a ball-lending unit of the plate unit base 310 that covers the rear side of the ball-lending unit board 366. And a rear cover 367 attached to the rear side of the attachment portion 310b. The security cover mounting portion 364 is provided on the rear surface of the rear cover 367.

  The ball lending unit mounting portion 310b of the plate unit base 310 to which the ball lending unit 360 is mounted has a circular button opening 310m facing the ball lending button 361 and the return button 362, and a lending formed between the button openings 310m. It has a rectangular display opening 310n closed by the ball unit front cover 365, and a protruding portion 310o formed on the outer periphery of each of the two button openings 310m and protruding forward, and is transparent to close the display opening 310n. The remaining lending display portion 363 arranged on the rear side through the lending unit front cover 365 can be seen from the player side. Further, as shown in FIG. 45, the protruding portion 310o of the plate unit base 310 has a rounded front end.

  As shown in the drawing, the ball-lending unit 360 of this example has the ball-lending unit mounting portion 310b of the plate unit base 310 disposed above the upper plate 301 and directly above the upper plate supply port 310c, and has a front surface. It is arranged to face. In the ball lending unit 360, the return button 362 is disposed at a position closer to the center in the left-right direction than the ball lending button 361. In this example, the ball-lending button 361 and the return button 362 are colored differently from the plate unit base 310 (ball-lending unit mounting portion 310b). This makes it easy for the player to recognize the ball lending button 361 and the return button 362.

  Further, the ball lending unit 360 includes a protruding portion 310o that protrudes forward (toward the player) from the outer periphery of the ball lending button 361 and the return button 362. When the player inserts a hand into the upper plate 301, Since the hand touches the protrusion 310o before the hand touches the ball lending button 361 or the return button 362, the player can be made aware of the existence of the ball lending button 361 or the return button 362, and the ball lending button It is possible to prevent erroneous operation of the 361, the return button 362, and the like.

  The plate unit 300 of this example includes an upper plate 301 and a lower plate 302, and can be a pachinko machine 1 having the same feeling as a conventional pachinko machine having two storage plates. A new pachinko machine 1 (a new type of pachinko machine) can be reminiscent of a pachinko machine 1 (a new type of pachinko machine) so that anxiety or the like given to a player can be reduced and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as a pachinko machine to play. Has become.

[Operation unit]
Next, the operation unit 400 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 46A is a front perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame, and FIG. 46B is a rear perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame. FIG. 47 is an exploded perspective view of the operation unit as viewed from the upper right front, and FIG. 48 is an exploded perspective view of the operation unit as viewed from the lower right front. Further, FIG. 49 is a cross-sectional view of the operation unit, and FIG. 50 is a cross-sectional view of the operation unit when the pressing operation unit is pressed.

  The operation unit 400 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment is disposed on the front surface of the upper plate 301 at substantially the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and includes a dial operation unit 401 that can be rotated by the player, and a press that can be pressed by the player. And an operation unit 405. The operation unit 405 can receive an operation of the player according to a game state, and can operate the dial operation unit 401. , So that the user can also participate in the effects during the game.

  The operation unit 400 includes an annular dial operation unit 401, a cylindrical pressing operation unit 405 inserted into the ring of the dial operation unit 401, and an annular driven unit connected to a lower end of the dial operation unit 401. A gear 410, a disk-shaped drive gear 412 meshing with the driven gear 410, a dial drive motor 414 in which the drive gear 412 is fixed to a rotating shaft, an annular gear rail 416 a rotatably supporting the driven gear 410, and An operation unit holding member 416 having a cylindrical button support tube 416b that supports the pressing operation unit 405 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction, and a pressing operation unit 405 that is disposed inside the button support tube 416b of the operation unit holding member 416. It has a spring 418 that urges upward, and an opening 420a through which the gear rail 416a and the button support cylinder 416b of the operation unit holding member 416 can pass. A base member 420 to which the operation unit holding member 416 and the dial drive motor 414 are fixed on the lower surface, and an upper cover 422 having an opening 422a which covers the upper surface of the base member 420 and through which the inner cylindrical portion 401a of the dial operation unit 401 can pass. And a lower cover 424 that is attached to the lower side of the upper cover 422 so as to sandwich the base member 420 and covers the lower surfaces of the base member 420 and the dial drive motor 414.

  Further, the operation unit 400 is fixed to the base member 420 so as to cover the upper side of the upper cover 422, and the opening 426a through which the inner cylindrical portion 401a of the dial operation unit 401 can pass, and extends outward from both left and right sides of the opening 426a. A cover main body 426 having a fixing portion 426b for fixing to the operation unit mounting portion 314c of the plate unit 300; and a plating having a silver metallic luster on the surface, which is disposed above the cover main body 426 and formed in a predetermined shape. An inner cover 427 provided with a layer and a transparent surface cover 428 that covers the upper surface of the inner cover 427 are provided. The inner cover 427 and the front cover 428 are formed with circular openings through which the outer cylinder 401c of the dial operation unit 401 can pass.

  Further, the operation unit 400 has an opening 430a which is attached to the upper surface of the base member 420 and through which the button support cylinder 416b of the operation unit holding member 416 and the inner cylinder 401a of the dial operation unit 401 can pass. A dial decoration board 430 on which a plurality of color LEDs 430b are mounted at positions corresponding to the circular shape of a circle, and a pair of rotation detection sensors 432a fixed to the lower side of the operation unit holding member 416 and detecting rotation of the dial operation unit 401. 432b, a pressing detection sensor 432c for detecting operation of the pressing operation section 405, and a button decoration board 432 having a color LED 432d mounted on the upper surface immediately below the pressing operation section 405. The button decoration board 432 is locked and held on the lower surface of the operation section holding member 416 by the board holding claws 416g of the operation section holding member 416.

  The dial operation unit 401 in the operation unit 400 of the present example is formed of a translucent material, and has a cylindrical inner cylinder 401a extending in the up-down direction, and outward from the upper end of the inner cylinder 401a. An annular top plate portion 401b having a predetermined decoration on the extension surface, an outer cylinder portion 401c extending downward from the outer peripheral end of the top plate portion 401b in a tubular shape, and being shorter than the inner cylinder portion 401a; And a flange portion 401d extending annularly outward from the lower end of the portion 401c. The outer diameter of the flange portion 401d in the dial operation portion 401 is larger than the inner diameter of the opening 422a in the upper cover 422. The dial operating section 401 has a connection locking section (see FIG. 48) at the lower end of the inner cylinder section 401a, and the connection locking claw 410b of the driven gear 410 is locked, so that the dial operating section 401 is locked. 401 and the driven gear 410 can be connected.

  Further, the dial operating unit 401 further includes a protruding portion 401f that protrudes from the inner wall of the inner cylindrical portion 401a in the center direction at a position lower by a predetermined distance from the upper end. The protrusion 401f of the dial operation unit 401 is formed in an annular shape along the inner periphery of the inner cylinder 401a. Although details will be described later, the protrusion 401 f can be brought into contact with the step 407 a of the button cap 407 in the pressing operation section 405, and the step 407 a of the button cap 407 By contacting the portion 401f, the button cap 407 (the pressing operation portion 405) can be prevented from further immersing into the inner cylindrical portion 401a (see FIG. 50).

  As shown in the drawing, the projecting portion 401f of the dial operating portion 401 and the step portion 407a of the button cap 407 of the pressing operation portion 405 have their contact surfaces lower as going toward the center of the dial operating portion 401. The contact surfaces are large when they come into contact with each other. Thus, the load from the pressing operation unit 405 can be more dispersed (released) to the dial operation unit 401 side, and the vibration from the dial operation unit 401 can be easily transmitted to the pressing operation unit 405 side. It has become.

  The pressing operation portion 405 of the operation unit 400 is formed in a cylindrical shape having a closed upper end, and has a button body 406 having a bottomed cylindrical shape, a button cap 407 for closing the upper end of the button body 406, a button cap 407, A cap inner 408 is provided inside the button 407 and is sandwiched between the upper end of the button body 406 and the button cap 407. The button body 406 of the pressing operation unit 405 has a truncated cone shape in which the lower surface of the bottom is narrowed downward, and the upper end of the coiled spring 418 is inserted into the lower surface of the truncated cone. In addition, a through hole 406a penetrating in the vertical direction is provided in the center of the lower end surface of the truncated cone, and light from the LED 432d of the button decoration board 432 is irradiated to the button cap 407 and the cap inner 408 through the through hole 406a. It has become.

  Further, the button body 406 has a pair of locking claws 406 b extending downward from the outer peripheral lower part and having a lower end protruding outward in a direction perpendicular to the axis. By locking with a locking projection 416f (see FIGS. 49 and 50) formed in the button support cylinder 416b, the upward moving end is prevented so that the button body 406 does not come off from the button support cylinder 416b. It can be regulated. Although not shown in detail, the button support cylinder 416b of the operation portion holding member 416 includes a contact portion that prevents the locking claw 406b of the button body 406 from moving in the circumferential direction. The button body 406 (pressing section 405) does not rotate in the button support cylinder 416b. In addition, a predetermined amount of gap is formed in the circumferential direction between the locking claw 406b of the button body 406 and the contact portion in the button support cylinder 416b, and the gap causes the button body 406 to have a predetermined angle. It can rotate within the range.

  In addition, the button body 406 includes a pressing detection piece 406c that extends downward from a position different from the lower part of the outer periphery of the locking claw 406b and can be detected by the pressing detection sensor 432c of the button decoration board 432. When the button main body 406 (the pressing operation section 405) moves downward against the urging force of the spring 418, the pressing detecting piece 406c is detected by the pressing detecting sensor 432c.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the button cap 407 of the pressing operation portion 405 has a smaller outer diameter than the upper center in the vertical direction, and a stepped portion 407a between the upper and lower sides. Is formed. The button cap 407 (pressing section 405) has a lower portion below the step portion 407a and a smaller diameter than the inner diameter of the protrusion 401f of the dial operation portion 401, and a portion above the step portion 407a has a dial operating portion. The diameter of the inner tube 401 is smaller than the inner diameter of the inner tube 401a and larger than the inner diameter of the protrusion 401f. As a result, when the button cap 407 (pressing operation unit 405) is inserted into the inner cylinder 401a from above the dial operation unit 401, the step 407a of the button cap 407 comes into contact with the protrusion 401f of the dial operation unit 401. The button cap 407 (pressing operation unit 405) cannot be further immersed into the inner cylinder 401a (see FIG. 50).

  Further, the button cap 407 and the cap inner 408 of the pressing operation section 405 are formed of a material having a light-transmitting ring. The character “Push” is displayed on the upper surface of the cap inner 408, and the character can be visually recognized from the outside through the button cap 407.

  The driven gear 410 in the operation unit 400 has a plurality of gear teeth meshing with the drive gear 412 on the annular outer periphery. The driven gear 410 has an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the button support cylinder 416 b of the operation portion holding member 416, and has an annular sliding surface on the lower surface that abuts the gear rail 416 a of the operation portion holding member 416. The moving surface 410a is provided. By inserting the driven gear 410 into the button support tube 416b and bringing the sliding surface 410a into contact with the gear rail 416a, the driven gear 410 can slide and rotate substantially concentrically with the button support tube 416b. It has become.

  Further, the driven gear 410 includes a pair of connection locking claws 410b extending upward from a position facing the upper end and protruding inward. The driven gear 410 and the dial operation unit 401 are connected so as to be integrally rotatable by being locked with the connection locking unit 401e of the inner cylinder 401a.

  In addition, the driven gear 410 includes a plurality of rotation detecting pieces 410c that protrude downward from the lower end and are arranged in a row at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. These rotation detection pieces 410c are detected by a pair of rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b attached to the button decoration board 432, and details of the rotation detection pieces 410c and the rotation detection pieces 410c will be described later. The rotation direction of the driven gear 410, that is, the dial operating portion 401, can be detected by the detection pattern of each of the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b with respect to the rotation detection piece 410c by the slit 410d formed therebetween. In this example, the circumferential lengths of the rotation detecting piece 410c and the slit 410d are substantially the same.

  The drive gear 412 in the operation unit 400 is a spur gear meshing with the driven gear 410 as shown in the figure, and is fixed so as to be able to rotate integrally with the rotation shaft of the dial drive motor 414. The dial drive motor 414 is a known stepping motor that can arbitrarily control a rotation direction, a rotation speed, and a rotation angle. The dial drive motor 414 drives the drive gear 412 to rotate via a rotation shaft. Thus, the dial operating unit 401 can be rotated via the driven gear 410. In addition, the dial operating motor 401 can be vibrated by repeatedly rotating the drive gear 412 (rotating shaft) forward and reverse by the dial drive motor 414 in small increments. In addition, by stopping the rotation of the dial drive motor 414 for each predetermined rotation angle for a short period of time based on the detection signals from the rotation detection sensors 432a and 342b, the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 can be clicked. The feeling can be given.

  Further, the operation unit holding member 416 of the operation unit 400 includes an annular gear rail 416a that rotatably supports the driven gear 410, and a button body 406 of the pressing operation unit 405 that protrudes upward from the inside of the gear rail 416a in a cylindrical shape and is inside. A button support tube 416b that slidably supports the button in a vertical direction, and a locking protrusion 416f formed on the inner peripheral surface near the bottom inside the button support tube 416b and lockable with the locking claw 406b of the button body 406 ( 49 and 50), and a through hole 416c that passes light from the LED 432d mounted on the button decoration board 432 through the center of the bottom inside the button support cylinder 416b and sends the light to the inside of the button support cylinder 416b (the pressing operation unit 405). And a rotation detection sensor 4 that vertically penetrates the bottom outside the button support cylinder 416 b and is attached to the button decoration substrate 432. An opening 416d through which the holes 2a and 432b can pass, an opening 416e penetrating vertically through the bottom of the button support tube 416b, and which the pressing detection sensor 432c attached to the button decoration board 432 desires from above, and downward from below. A pair of substrate holding claws 416 g for locking and holding the extended button decorative substrate 432.

  Although not shown in detail, the operation unit holding member 416 is disposed in the button support cylinder 416b, and forms a predetermined gap in the circumferential direction with respect to the locking claw 406b of the button main body 406, and locks the same. It further includes a plurality of abutting portions capable of abutting on the claw 406b. With this contact portion, the button body 406 (the pressing operation unit 405) can rotate within a predetermined angle range, and does not rotate around in the button support cylinder 416b. Further, although detailed description of the operation unit holding member 416 is omitted, screw holes for fixing to the base member 420 and positioning bosses for positioning with the base member 420 and the button decoration board 432 are appropriately positioned. It is provided in.

  The operation unit holding member 416 slides the driven gear 410 (dial operation unit 401) around a predetermined rotation axis by inserting the driven gear 410 through the outer periphery of the button support cylinder 416b and mounting the driven gear 410 on the gear rail 416a. It can be supported so as to be capable of dynamic rotation. Further, by inserting the button main body 406 of the pressing operation unit 405 into the button support cylinder 416b, the pressing operation unit 405 can be supported via the button main body 406 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction. . A coil-shaped spring 418 is arranged between the bottom inside the button support cylinder 416b and the truncated cone-shaped lower surface of the button body 406. 405) is urged upward.

  The base member 420 of the operation unit 400 is formed of a metal such as an aluminum alloy, so that the operation unit 400 is unlikely to be damaged even if the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 is hit hard. The base member 420 vertically penetrates a lower concave portion 420b in which the outer periphery of the operating portion holding member 416 can be fitted and is depressed upward, and a bottom portion (ceiling portion) of the lower concave portion 420b in a vertical direction. An opening 420a having an inner shape through which the gear rail 416a can pass, and an upper recess 420c which is arranged on the opposite side to the lower recess 420b with the opening 420a interposed therebetween and which is at least recessed downward to accommodate the driven gear 410, It has. As shown in FIG. 48, the base member 420 is opened downward to the outside of the lower recess 420b, and a motor mounting portion 420d for mounting the dial drive motor 414, and downward from the outside of the lower recess 420b. A plurality (four in this example) of leg portions 420e projecting by a predetermined amount, and a positioning hole 420f that opens downward at the lower end of each leg portion 420e.

  Further, the base member 420 includes a plurality of cover fixing portions 420g for fixing the cover body 426 disposed above and outside the upper concave portion 420c, and the cover fixing portion 420g is located above a different position outside the upper concave portion 420c. And a plurality of board mounting bosses 420h for mounting the dial decorative board 430 protruding therefrom. Further, although detailed description is omitted for the base member 420, positioning bosses for positioning each member, mounting holes, and the like are formed at appropriate positions on the upper surface and the lower surface thereof.

  The operating member holding member 416 is fitted and inserted into the lower concave portion 420b so that the button support cylinder 416b and the gear rail 416a pass from below into the central opening 420a. Is screwed from above into the operation section holding member 416 through the ceiling of the lower concave portion 420b, so that the operation section holding member 416 can be supported. Although the detailed illustration of the base member 420 is omitted, the upper end of the gear rail 416a is slightly higher than the upper surface of the ceiling of the lower concave portion 420b, that is, the bottom surface of the upper concave portion 420c in a state where the operation portion holding member 416 is supported. The driven gear 410 mounted on the gear rail 416a can slide and rotate in the upper recess 420c without any problem.

  The leg 420e of the base member 420 has a positioning hole 420f formed at the lower end thereof and a positioning protrusion 424a formed on the upper surface of the bottom of the lower cover 424 described later. The lower cover 420 and the lower cover 424 can be positioned at predetermined positions. Further, the board mounting boss 420h of the base member 420 protrudes to a position above the driven gear 410 housed and arranged in the upper concave portion 420c, and the dial decorative board 430 mounted on the board mounting boss 420h is driven It does not come into contact with the gear 410.

  Further, the base member 420 comes into contact with the upper surface of the dial drive motor 414 by attaching the dial drive motor 414 to the motor attachment portion 420d, and transfers the heat from the dial drive motor 414 to the base member 420 side. , And the heat of the dial drive motor 414 can be radiated by the base member 420. As a result, overheating of the dial drive motor 414 can be suppressed, and it is possible to prevent a problem from occurring in the dial drive motor 414 and the like due to overheating.

  The upper cover 422 of the operation unit 400 has a box shape with its lower part opened, and has an opening 422a on the top plate having an inner diameter through which the outer cylinder part 401c of the dial operation part 401 can pass and the flange part 401d cannot pass. ing. The upper cover 422 has a long direction (left-right direction in the pachinko machine 1) connecting the axis of the pressing operation portion 405 (driven gear 410) and the axis of the dial drive motor 414 (drive gear 412) in plan view. It is formed so as to extend, and is provided with engaging claws 422b projecting downward at both ends in the longitudinal direction thereof. By engaging the engaging claws 422b with the engaging portions 424b of the lower cover 424, the upper surface is formed. The cover 422 and the lower cover 424 can be assembled.

  The upper cover 422 has a claw-shaped locking piece 422c extending downward from the outer periphery of one of the short-axis directions (the front-rear direction in the pachinko machine 1) (the front side in the pachinko machine 1) and having a lower end protruding outward. It has. The locking piece 422c can be locked to the upper plate front decorative member 316 in the plate unit 300. By locking the locking piece 422c to the upper plate front decorative member 316, The operation unit 400 can be prevented from falling out of the operation unit mounting portion 314c upward.

  The upper cover 422 has the operation member holding member 416, the driven gear 410, the dial decoration substrate 430, the dial operation portion 401, and the like attached to the base member 420, and the dial operation portion 401 from below the opening 422 a. By covering the upper portion of the base member 420 so that the dial operation portion 401 passes through, the dial operation portion 401 can be prevented from coming off upward by the opening 422a.

  On the other hand, the lower cover 424 of the operation unit 400 has a box shape whose upper side is open, and has an outer peripheral shape substantially coincident with the outer periphery of the upper cover 422, and a leg portion of the base member 420 at a predetermined position on the bottom upper surface. A positioning protrusion 424a that can be fitted to the positioning hole 420f at the lower end of 420e is provided. The lower cover 424 has an engaging portion 424b at an upper portion of both ends in the long axis direction (left and right direction in the pachinko machine 1) which can be engaged with the engaging claws 422b of the upper cover 422. The upper cover 422 can be attached to the lower cover 424 by engaging the engaging claws 422b.

  As shown, the cover main body 426 of the operation unit 400 has an opening 426a penetrating vertically in the center and through which the upper cover 422 can pass, and extending outward from both left and right sides of the opening 426a to attach the operation unit to the plate unit 300. A fixing portion 426b fixed to the portion 314c and a fixing boss 426c extending downward from the outer peripheral lower surface of the opening 426a and fixed to the cover fixing portion 420g of the base member 420 are provided.

  The operation unit 400 of this example is adapted to be attached to the plate unit 300 via the fixing portion 426b of the cover main body 426, and although not shown in detail, attached to the operation unit attachment portion 314c of the plate unit 300. In the state, the lower surface of the operation unit 400 (lower cover 424) is mounted with the lower surface slightly floating (for example, 0.5 mm to 2.0 mm) than the upper surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314c. The cover main body 426 can be elastically deformed to reduce the impact when the button is pressed or hit.

  In this operation unit 400, with the inner cover 427 and the front cover 428 removed, the fixing portion 426b of the cover main body 426 is attached to the operation unit attachment portion 314c of the plate unit 300 with a predetermined screw. The inner cover 427 and the front cover 428 are mounted on the upper surface of the cover body 426.

  In the operation unit 400 of the present embodiment, the rotation detection piece 410c of the driven gear 410 that rotates together with the dial operation unit 401 has the circumferential length in the slit between the adjacent rotation detection pieces 410c and the circumference of the rotation detection piece 410c. The length in the direction is the same length. In addition, the pair of rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b attached to the button decoration board 432 has a distance in the circumferential direction corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 equal to 2.5 times the length of the rotation detection piece 410c in the circumferential direction. It has been. As a result, although details will be described later, when the player rotates the dial operation unit 401, a time lag occurs between the detection and non-detection of the rotation detection piece 410c by the pair of rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b, and each rotation detection is performed. The direction in which the dial operation unit 401 is rotating can be detected from the detection pattern of the rotation detecting piece 410c by the sensors 432a and 432b.

  Although details will be described later, the operation unit 400 of the present example can rotate the dial operation unit 401 clockwise or counterclockwise by the driving force of the dial driving motor 414. . Further, the operation unit 400 rotates the dial operation unit 401 in a step-by-step manner by the driving force of the dial drive motor 414 using a stepping motor, or when the player rotates the dial operation unit 401, It is possible to assist rotation, prevent rotation, or add a click feeling to rotation. Further, the operation unit 400 can cause the dial operation unit 401 to vibrate by repeatedly rotating the dial drive motor 414 forward and backward in small increments.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 50, when the pressing operation portion 405 is pressed downward, the step portion 407a of the button cap 407 comes into contact with the protrusion 401f of the dial operation portion 401, and the button unit 407 (pressing operation unit 405) cannot be further immersed into the inner cylindrical portion 401a, so that the load applied to the pressing operation unit 405 is dialed through the step portion 407a and the protruding portion 401f. The pressing operation unit 405 (operation unit 400) can be dispersed to the operation unit 401 side, so that it is hard to break.

  Further, the operation unit 400 of the present embodiment gradually rotates the dial drive motor 414 in a state where the pressing operation portion 405 is pressed so that the step portion 407a of the button cap 407 abuts on the projection portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401. By repeatedly rotating and reversing, the pressing operation unit 405 can be caused to vibrate together with the dial operation unit 401, and the vibration of the pressing operation unit 405 surprises the player and allows the player to enjoy a game or an effect. It has become.

  According to the operation unit 400 of this example, the dial operation unit 401 that can be rotated by the player and the pressing operation unit 405 that can be pressed by the player are supported by the metal base member 420. Since the strength can be increased, even if the player or the like hits the operation units 401 and 405 strongly, the operation unit 400 can be prevented from being damaged, and the operation units 401 and 405 can be freely provided to the player. In addition to being able to be operated, the operability of the operation units 401 and 405 can be improved, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game by making the effect using the operation units 401 and 405 fun. it can.

  Further, the pressing operation unit 405 is arranged at the center of the ring-shaped dial operation unit 401, and if the user tries to hit the pressing operation unit 405 strongly, the dial operation unit 401 is likely to hit, too. The force for tapping 401 and 405 can be distributed to the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405, so that the impact of the tapping is prevented from being concentrated and the operation unit 400 and the plate unit 300 are prevented from being damaged. Therefore, it is possible to make the operation units 401 and 405 of the operation unit 400 withstand strong blows, and to allow the player to freely operate the operation units 401 and 405. The operability of the 405 can be improved, and the effect using the operation units 401 and 405 can be enjoyed, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest in the game. Door can be.

  Further, the base member 420 and the like of the operation unit 400 are accommodated in the recessed operation unit mounting portion 314c of the plate unit 300, and a predetermined gap is formed between the lower end of the base member 420 and the bottom surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314c. As described above, the cover main body 426 attached to the base member 420 is fixed to the upper surface of the plate unit 300, and when the operation units 401 and 405 of the operation unit 400 are hit with an impact or a load is applied. Until the lower end of the operation unit 400 contacts the bottom surface of the operation unit attachment portion 314c, the cover body 426 can absorb an impact or a load by elastic deformation, and the lower end of the operation unit 400 is in contact with the bottom surface of the operation unit attachment portion 314c. After the contact, the bottom of the operation unit mounting portion 314c (dish unit 300) causes an impact or Since it is possible to receive impacts, it is possible to prevent impacts and the like from being concentrated by dispersing impacts and the like from the operation units 401 and 405, and to reduce the impact resistance and load resistance of the operation unit 400 and the plate unit 300. Can be enhanced.

  Further, the base member 420 is provided with a plurality of downwardly projecting legs 420e at positions away from the positions where the operation units 401 and 405 are supported, and the legs 420e of the base member 420 are attached to the operation unit of the plate unit 300. Even if an impact from the operating portions 401 and 405 is applied to the base member 420 by abutting against the bottom surface of the mounting portion 314c, the leg portions 420e are not disposed immediately below the impact, so that the operating portions 401 and 405 of the base member 420 are not provided. Is bent by the impact, and the base member 420 is bent (elastically deformed), so that the impact from the operation units 401 and 405 can be absorbed to some extent, and the base member 420 is applied to the plate unit 300. The impact can be reduced to prevent the dish unit 300 from being damaged.

  Further, the dial operating unit 401 is held by the operating unit holding member 416 attached to the base member 420 from below so that a part of the dial operating unit 401 overlaps the base member 420 in a plan view. Even if the operation unit holding member 416 that holds the dial operation unit 401 is disengaged from the base member 420 and moves downward when the operation unit 401 is hit hard from above, the dial operation unit 401 abuts on the upper surface of the base member 420. The downward movement of the dial operation unit 401 can be restricted by the base member 420, and the fall of the dial operation unit 401 can be favorably prevented.

  Furthermore, since the dial operating unit 401 in which the pressing operation unit 405 is disposed at the center is rotated by the dial driving motor 414 according to the game state, the dial operating unit 401 that rotates (rotationally drives including vibration) without permission. With this, the player can be surprised to pay attention to the effects of the operation units 401 and 405, and can entertain the player. In addition, by appropriately driving the dial operation unit 401 by the dial drive motor 414, the dial operation unit It is possible to make the effect using the 401 (pressing operation unit 405) more diverse and hard to get tired, and it is possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from decreasing.

  Further, the dial operating unit 401 is rotated by the dial driving motor 414 via the driven gear 410 and the driving gear 412, and the position of the rotating shaft of the dial driving motor 414 is likely to be adjusted by the dial operating unit 401 (the driven gear). Since the position of the rotation axis can be eccentric with respect to the position of the rotation axis of 410), even if the dial operation section 401 or the pressing operation section 405 is strongly hit, the impact is transmitted via the rotation axis of the dial operation section 401. The direct drive motor 414 can be prevented from being directly applied, and the dial drive motor 414 (the operation unit 400) can be prevented from being damaged.

  Further, the diameter of the opening 420a of the base member 420 is smaller than that of the dial operating portion 401, and the dial operating portion 401 is supported by the gear rail 416a of the operating portion holding member 416 through the opening 420a. Even when the gear rail 416a (the operation unit holding member 416) moves downward due to an impact or load from the 401, the dial operation unit 401 can contact the upper surface of the opening 420a of the base member 420, and the dial operation unit 401 can It is possible to reliably prevent the temperature from dropping below 420. Further, since the dial operating section 401 is supported by the annular gear rail 416a, the contact area between the dial operating section 401 and the operating section holding member 416 (gear rail 416a) can be increased, and the dial operating section 401 can be increased. It is possible to prevent the operation section holding member 416 from being damaged by dispersing an impact or a load from the operation section.

  Further, since the dial drive motor 414 for rotating and driving the dial operation unit 401 is attached to the metal base member 420, the dial operation unit 401 is frequently rotated by the dial drive motor 414, or the dial drive motor 414 is driven. Even if the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 is forcibly stopped by the player despite the fact that the dial drive motor 414 is rotationally driven, even if the amount of heat generated by the excessive load on the dial drive motor 414 increases, The heat generated from the dial drive motor 414 can be satisfactorily dissipated and radiated through the base member 420, so that the dial drive motor 414 can be prevented from malfunctioning due to overheating. To be able to withstand high loads Ri, it is possible to sufficiently embody the effect of the dial operation unit 401 using a dial drive motor 414 as described above, can be pachinko machine 1 to be entertained player.

  Further, it has rotation detecting sensors 432a and 432b for detecting the rotation of the dial operating unit 401 and a pressing detecting sensor 432c for detecting the pressing of the pressing operating unit 405. Since the rotation operation and the pressing operation of the player can be detected, it is possible to perform an effect corresponding to the operation of the player based on the detection signal. It is possible to provide an effect with a bodily sensation, and it is possible to entertain the player and to suppress a decrease in interest in the game. In addition, a dial decoration substrate 430 and a button decoration substrate 432 for decorating the operation units 401 and 405 with light are provided. Since the operation units 401 and 405 can be decorated with light, the operation units 401 and 405 emit light. By doing so, the player's interest can be attracted to the operation units 401 and 405, and the player can easily operate the operation units 401 and 405.

  Further, when the pressing operation section 405 of the operation unit 400 is pressed, the step portion 407a of the pressing operation section 405 and the protruding section 401f of the dial operation section 401 are in contact with each other. Is pressed, the dial operating unit 401 is repeatedly rotated forward and backward within a predetermined angle range by the dial driving motor 414 and vibrated, so that the dial operating unit 401 is in contact with the protrusion 401f of the dial operating unit 401 via the stepped portion 407a. The pressing operation section 405 can also be vibrated. Therefore, even if a vibrator or the like for vibrating the pressing operation unit 405 is not separately provided, it is possible to give the player a feeling of operation of the pressing operation unit 405, and to enjoy the effect using the operation unit 400. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game. In addition, since the pressing operation unit 405 vibrates when the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed, the player can be greatly surprised by the movement of the pressing operation unit 405, which was thought to be involuntary, and something good. It is possible to make the user think that there is a chance, and it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game and to suppress a decrease in interest. Therefore, unlike the conventional operation unit, the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 move without permission, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the operation unit 400, and the player can participate in the effect using the operation unit 400. The operation unit 400 can be easily operated and the operation unit 400 can be positively operated by the player, and the operation of the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 can be enjoyed, thereby reducing the interest in the game. Can be suppressed.

  Further, when the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed, the pressing operation unit 405 and the dial operation unit 401 are in contact with each other, so that the force from the pressing operation unit 405 can be transmitted to the dial operation unit 401 side. This makes it possible to distribute the load and impact applied to the pressing operation unit 405 also to the dial operation unit 401 side even when the pressing operation unit 405 is strongly struck, so that the load resistance and impact resistance to the pressing operation unit 405 can be improved. Can be increased. Therefore, even if the pressing operation unit 405 is hit hard, it is possible to prevent the pressing operation unit 405 from being damaged, thereby preventing the game from being interrupted due to the damage to the pressing operation unit 405 (operation unit 400). Thus, it is possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from decreasing due to the interruption of the game.

  Further, the pressing operation section 405 is supported so as to be rotatable only within a predetermined angle range around an axis extending in the up-down direction, and when the player presses the pressing operation section 405, the dial driving is performed. Even when the dial operation unit 401 is driven to rotate by the motor 414, it is possible to prevent the pressing operation unit 405 from trying to rotate together with the dial operation unit 401. It is possible to reliably recognize the respective roles of the unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405, and to make it easy for the player to enjoy the effect using the operation unit 400, and to guide the player to the upper surface of the pressing operation unit 405. The character “PUSH” is not turned or greatly inclined, so that the player can easily read the character. It is possible to reliably recognize that the part 405 is intended to pressing.

  In addition, the dial operating portion 401 includes a protruding portion 401f that protrudes from the inner circumference of the inner cylindrical portion 401a to the axial center side, and has a smaller diameter on the outer circumferential surface of the pressing operating portion 405 than a predetermined vertical position. Since the step portion 407a formed by the step 407 is provided, the inner peripheral surface of the inner cylinder portion 401a of the dial operating portion 401 and the outer peripheral surface of the pressing operation portion 405 can be brought as close as possible to the upper end of the operation unit 400. As a result, the gap between the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be made as small as possible to improve the appearance, and the inside of the operation unit 400 via the gap between the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be improved. It is possible to make it difficult for foreign substances such as dust and dirt to enter, and it is difficult for the dial operation section 401 to rotate or to press the pressing operation section 405 due to the entry of foreign substances. The occurrence of a problem it is possible to prevent that or Tsu.

  Further, a contact portion between the pressing operation unit 405 and the dial operation unit 401 in the operation unit 400 is formed in an annular shape, and when the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed, the dial operation unit 401 is pressed in a circumferential direction. Since the contact can be made even at the position, even if the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed with a feeling of being inclined (a position deviated to the outer periphery from the center of the pressing operation unit 405), the pressing operation unit 405 is surely brought into contact with the dial operation unit 401. The rotation drive from the dial drive motor 414 can be reliably transmitted to the pressing operation unit 405 via the dial operation unit 401. Further, since the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 are in annular contact, the load from the pressing operation unit 405 can be widely dispersed to the dial operation unit 401 side, and the load resistance to the pressing operation unit 405 and The impact resistance can be further improved.

  Further, the contact portion between the pressing operation unit 405 and the dial operation unit 401 in the operation unit 400 is inclined so as to become lower toward the rotation axis of the dial operation unit 401. In comparison, the contact area can be relatively increased, and the driving force from the dial drive motor 414 via the dial operation unit 401 can be easily transmitted to the pressing operation unit 405 side. Further, the load from the pressing operation portion 405 can be radially dispersed outward in a direction perpendicular to the direction in which the rotation axis extends, preventing concentration of the load, and preventing the operation unit 400 from withstanding the load. The loadability and impact resistance can be reliably increased, and the durability of the operation unit 400 can be increased. The occurrence of malfunctions during the game is reduced as much as possible, and the interest of the player is reduced. Can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, since the dial drive motor 414 of the operation unit 400 is a stepping motor capable of normal rotation and reverse rotation, the dial operation unit 401 can be simply stopped at a predetermined position as well as simply rotated, and can be switched between normal rotation and reverse rotation. The operation unit 400 (sling machine 1) that can easily vibrate by repeating the operation and has the above-described effects can be embodied reliably.

  In addition, since the operation unit 400 is supported by the plate unit 300 provided with the upper plate 301 for storing game balls, the strength and rigidity of the plate unit 300 are high in order to store a large number of game balls. Thus, it is possible to sufficiently cope with a strong hit to the operation unit 400 (the pressing operation unit 405), and it is possible to easily enjoy the effect using the operation unit 400.

[Handle device]
Next, the handle device 500 of the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 51 (A) is an exploded perspective view of the handle device in the door frame as disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 51 (B) is an exploded perspective view of the handle device disassembled and viewed from the rear. As shown, the handle device 500 of the present embodiment is attached to a handle bracket 140 attached to the front surface of the door frame base body 110 of the door frame base unit 100 through the lower opening 330b of the lower plate side cover 330 of the plate unit 300. A fixed and cylindrical handle base 502 whose front end bulges round in the direction perpendicular to the axis, a handle body 504 disposed on the front side of the handle base 502 so as to be rotatable relative to the handle base 502, and a front face of the handle body 504. A front end cover 506 which is arranged and is fixed to the handle base 502 and cooperates with the handle base 502 to rotatably support the handle main body 504.

  Further, the handle device 500 has an inner base 508 attached to the front side of the handle base 502 on the rear side of the handle body 504, and a rear end and a front end rotatably supported by the inner base 508 and the front end cover 506. A shaft member 510 rotatable integrally with the shaft 504 and having a drive gear portion 510a on the outer periphery; a transmission gear 511 meshing with the drive gear portion 510a of the shaft member 510; A rotation position detection sensor 512 sandwiched between the inner base 508 and the handle base 502.

  Further, the handle device 500 has one end side attached to the inner base 508 and the other end side attached to the transmission gear 511, and the detection shaft portion 512a of the rotational position detection sensor 512 via the transmission gear 511 in a clockwise direction in a front view. An auxiliary spring 514 for biasing, a touch sensor 516 mounted on the rear side of the inner base 508, and a touch stop sensor 516 mounted on the rear surface of the inner base 508 at different positions, A single-shot button 520 that is rotatably supported to actuate the firing stop switch 518, and one end is attached to the handle base 502 and the other end is attached to the handle main body 504, so that the handle main body 504 is in the initial rotation position (counterclockwise in front view). End of rotation in the direction of A handle return spring 522 that includes a.

  As shown in the figure, the handle base 502 of the handle device 500 of the present embodiment has a form in which a front end is opened and a rear end portion which is cylindrically extended rearward from a front end portion which is rounded and bulged rearward. Three grooves 502a extending in the axial direction are formed on the outer periphery of the cylindrical shape. The three groove portions 502a of the handle base 502 correspond to the three ridges 143 in the tubular portion 141 of the handle bracket 140, one at the upper side, two at the lower side, and at irregular intervals in the circumferential direction. Are located. The handle base 502 is supported in a non-rotatable state by being inserted into the cylindrical portion 141 of the handle bracket 140 so that the groove portion 502a fits with the protrusion 143.

  In the handle device 500, an arc-shaped slit 504a arranged concentrically with the rotation axis of the handle body 504 is formed, and three mounting bosses 506a projecting rearward are formed in a front end cover 506. The mounting bosses 506a are fixed to the front surface of the handle base 502 through the slits 504a of the handle body 504. Thus, the rotation range of the handle main body 504 is restricted by the circumferential end of the slit 504a of the handle main body 504 abutting on the mounting boss 506a of the front end cover 506.

  In the handle device 500, a locking projection 504b projecting rearward is formed on the handle main body 504, and the other end side (front end side) of the coil-shaped handle return spring 522 is formed on the locking projection 504b. By being locked, the handle main body 504 is urged by a handle return spring 522 attached at one end to the handle base 502 to rotate counterclockwise in a front view.

  The handle device 500 of the present embodiment is configured to be attached to the handle attachment portion 114 of the door frame base body 110 via a handle bracket 140. The handle mounting portion 114 of the door frame base body 110 has a mounting surface that is inclined so as to face outward (open side) when viewed from above when viewed from above. The device 500 is also inclined outwardly in a plan view (in other words, the front end of the device 500 is inclined with respect to a line orthogonal to the front vertical surface of the pachinko machine 1 so as to be directed outward of the pachinko machine 1). 5 to be fixed. Thus, the player can easily grip the handle device 500, and can easily perform the rotation operation without a sense of strangeness in the rotation operation.

  In the handle device 500, the rotation position detection sensor 512 is a variable resistor. When the handle body 504 (the handle device 500) is rotated, the rotation position detection sensor 512 is transmitted via the shaft member 510 and the transmission gear 511. The detection shaft portion 512a rotates. Then, the internal resistance of the rotation position detection sensor 512 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft portion 512a, and the driving force of the firing solenoid 654 in the hit ball firing device 650 described later changes according to the internal resistance of the rotation position detection sensor 512. Then, the game ball is driven into the game area 1100 with a firing intensity corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle device 500. Therefore, when the handle main body 504 is turned so that the firing intensity becomes equal to or more than a predetermined value, the game ball fired toward the game area 1100 reaches the right area on the right side of the center role 2500, and the right area. Flow down. On the other hand, when the handle main body 504 is turned so that the firing intensity becomes smaller than the predetermined value, the game ball fired toward the game area 1100 flows down the left area on the left side of the center role 2500. As described above, it is possible to hit a game ball into the right area and the left area by the operation of the player. It should be noted that the ball speed of the game ball flowing down the right side area of the center role 2500 is relatively faster than the ball speed of the game ball flowing down the left side area of the center role 2500. Then, a game ball flowing down the right region at a relatively high ball speed can win a second starting port 2102 described later, and a game ball flowing down the left region at a relatively slow ball speed will be described later. Winning of the first starting port 2101 becomes possible.

  The outer peripheral surfaces of the handle main body 504 and the front end cover 506 are plated with conductive material, and the touch sensor 516 detects the contact when the player comes into contact with the handle main body 504 or the like. Then, when the handle body 504 rotates while the touch sensor 516 detects the contact of the player, the rotational drive of the firing solenoid 654 is controlled with the strength corresponding to the rotation, and the player hits the game ball. Is available. In other words, even if the player attempts to drive the game ball by rotating the handle device 500 by some method without touching the handle device 500, the firing solenoid 654 is not driven, and the player cannot drive the game ball. It is possible to prevent a player from playing a game different from the original game and reduce the load (burden) on the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

  When the player presses the single-shot button 520 while rotating the handle device 500, the firing stop switch 518 detects the operation of the single-shot button 520, and the firing control unit 4120 (see FIG. 118) operates the firing solenoid 654. The rotation drive is stopped. Thereby, without returning the rotation operation of the handle device 500, the firing of the game ball can be temporarily stopped, and by releasing the pressing operation of the single-shot button 520, the operation before the single-shot button 520 is operated is released. A game ball can be fired at the driving strength.

  In the handle device 500 of this example, the rotation operation of the handle main body 504 is electrically detected by the rotation position detection sensor 512, and based on the detection of the rotation position from the rotation position detection sensor 512, Since the rotational drive strength of the firing solenoid 654 is controlled, the handle device 500 provided on the door frame 5 and the hit ball firing device 650 provided on the main body frame 3 like a conventional pachinko machine are provided with a door. When the frame 5 is closed, there is no need to provide a mechanical (for example, a joint unit) mechanism so that the linkage is released when the door frame 5 is opened and the linkage is released when the door frame 5 is opened, and the configuration of the pachinko machine 1 can be simplified. As well as the occurrence of malfunctions in the joint unit can be prevented, thereby suppressing a decrease in the interest of the player due to a malfunction of the game ball being hit. It has to be able to bet.

  In the hitting ball firing device 650 (the firing solenoid 654) according to the present embodiment, when the handle device 500 is operated (maintained), 100 gaming balls are sequentially fired at a constant interval in one minute. It is driven so as to have a launch speed (pace). Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the operation of the handle device 500 is performed (maintained), the game balls are sequentially driven into the game area 1100 at 0.6 second intervals.

[Fall cover unit]
Next, the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 52 and 53. FIG. 52 (A) is an exploded perspective view of the door cover frame in a disassembled state as viewed from the front, and FIG. 52 (B) is an exploded perspective view of the door cover frame as viewed in a disassembled state. FIG. 53 is a front view showing a state in which the front cover of the foul cover unit is removed.

  The foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 is attached to a rear surface below the gaming window 101 in the door frame base unit 100, and is fired by a game ball paid out from a prize ball unit 700 described later or a hit ball firing device 650. In spite of this, the game balls (foul balls) that have not reached the game area 1100 are guided to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300. The foul cover unit 540 of this example includes a cover base 542 having a front side opened and a plurality of flow paths for game balls therein, and a front cover 544 for closing a front end of the cover base 542.

  As shown in FIG. 52 (B), the cover base 542 of the foul cover unit 540 is disposed at the upper right corner in rear view and communicates with the first ball inlet 542a penetrating in the front-rear direction. A first ball passage 542b extending rightward in a front view toward the front end of the cover base 542; 542c, and a second ball passage 542d that extends downward and is inclined downward to the lower right corner in front view inside the cover base 542 communicating with the second ball inlet 542c. The first ball inlet 542a and the second ball inlet 542c are connected to the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 of the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 with the door frame 5 closed with respect to the main body frame 3. Are formed at positions facing each other. As shown in the drawing, the second ball passage 542d of the cover base 542 has a portion that extends in the left-right direction along the lower end and has a height that is about three times the outer diameter of the game ball. A storage space 546 capable of storing a predetermined amount of game balls is formed.

  Further, the cover base 542 is disposed substantially at the upper center in the left-right direction and is open to the upper side with a foul ball inlet 542e, and can communicate with the foul ball inlet 542e to guide game balls to an upper portion near the downstream of the second ball passage 542d. And a foul ball passage 542f. Further, the cover base 542 includes an opening / closing operating piece 542g for operating the opening / closing shutter 792 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 on the lower rear surface of the second ball inlet 542c. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the opening / closing operation piece 542 g contacts the spherical contact portion 793 d of the opening / closing crank 793 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 to rotate the opening / closing crank 793. The opening / closing shutter 792 can be opened.

  The front cover 544 of the foul cover unit 540 is formed in a substantially plate shape that closes the front surface of the cover base 542, is disposed at the upper left corner in front view, communicates with the first ball passage 542b of the cover base 542, and penetrates in the front-rear direction. And a second ball outlet 544b disposed at the lower right corner in front view and communicating with the downstream end of the second ball passage of the cover base 542 and penetrating in the front-rear direction. The first ball outlet 544a of the front cover 544 is connected to the upper plate ball supply port 310c of the plate unit 300 through the notch 101a of the door frame base unit 100. The second ball outlet 544b is configured to be connected to the rear end of the lower dish ball supply gutter 310h in the dish unit 300 through the ball passage port 110f of the door frame base body 110.

  The foul cover unit 540 of the present embodiment transfers the game ball supplied from the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branch unit 770 of the prize ball unit 700 to the first ball inlet 542a through the first ball passage 542b to the first ball outlet 542b. 544a can be supplied to the upper plate 301 via the upper plate supply port 310c of the plate unit 300. In addition, the foul cover unit 540 transfers the game ball supplied from the full tank outlet 776 of the full tank branch unit 770 of the prize ball unit 700 to the second ball inlet 542c to the second ball outlet 542d through the second ball passage 542d. 544b can be supplied to the lower plate 302 through the lower plate ball supply gutter 310h and the lower plate ball supply port 310g.

  Further, although details will be described later, when foul cover unit 540 is in a state where door frame 5 is closed with respect to main body frame 3, foul ball inlet 542 e is positioned below foul space 626 of main body frame 3. When the game ball fired by the hit ball firing device 650 does not reach the inside of the game area 1100 and becomes a foul ball and falls down in the foul space 626, it is received by the foul ball entrance 542e. Then, foul cover unit 540 discharges (supplies) the game balls received at foul ball inlet 542e from second ball outlet 544b to lower plate 302 of plate unit 300 through foul ball passage 542f and second ball passage 542d. ) Can be.

  Further, the foul cover unit 540 of the present example forms a side surface on the upstream side (left side in front view) of the accommodation space 546 in the second ball passage 542d, and is swingably movable by the game balls stored in the accommodation space 546. A rocking member 548 pivotally supported by the first and second sensors, a full tank detection sensor 550 for detecting rocking of the rocking member 548, and a spring for urging the rocking member 548 in a direction in which the full tank detection sensor 550 is in a non-detection state. 552. As shown in FIG. 53, the swinging member 548 has a lower end rotatably supported by the cover base 542 and an upper end that rotates leftward in a front view. In such a state, the left side wall of the accommodation space 546 is formed. The swing member 548 is urged by a spring 552 to a position where the swing member 548 is substantially vertical. Further, the swing member 548 has a detection piece 548a projecting outward on a side surface opposite to the storage space 546, and the detection piece 548a is detected by the full tank detection sensor 550. I have.

  Further, foul cover unit 540 includes an earth rail 554 disposed at the bottom of accommodation space 546 in second ball passage 542d, a plate-like earth metal fitting 556 that covers the right end and the left end of cover base 542 in rear view, respectively. , So that static electricity generated by the rolling resistance due to the rolling of the game ball can be removed.

  In this example, the game balls paid out from the prize ball unit 700 are supplied from the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branch unit 770 to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 via the foul cover unit 540, Even if the upper plate 301 is full, when the game ball is further paid out from the prize ball unit 700, the ball stays in the first ball passage 542b of the foul cover unit 540, and further the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branch unit 770 is closed. When the upstream normal passage 773 is also full, the game balls roll toward the full tank passage 775 through the branch space 772 of the full tank branch unit 770 (see FIG. 83), and the full tank branch unit 770 From the full sphere outlet 776 to the second sphere inlet 542c, the second sphere passage 542d, and the second sphere outlet 544 of the foul cover unit 540. It comes to be supplied to the lower tray 302 of tray unit 300 via the.

  Then, when the inside of the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 is full of game balls, the game balls cannot come out from the second ball outlet 544b of the foul cover unit 540, and have stayed in the accommodation space 546 in the second ball passage 542d. Game balls will be stored. Further, as the game balls are paid out from the prize ball unit 700 and many game balls are stored in the accommodation space 546, the stored pressure of the game balls acts on the rocking member 548 and resists the urging force of the spring 552. The upper end of the swing member 548 moves to the left. When the detection piece 548a of the swinging member 548 is detected by the full tank detection sensor 550, the payout control board 4110 (see FIG. 118) stops paying out the game balls from the prize ball unit 700 and plays the game. The user is notified that the game balls in the plate unit 300 are discharged to the outside.

  When the game ball in the storage space 546 (lower plate 302) is discharged and the swinging member 548 returns to a substantially vertical state by the urging force of the spring 552, the detection of the detection piece 548a by the full tank detection sensor 550 is performed. The detection is not performed, and the payout of the game balls from the prize ball unit 700 is restarted.

[Antistatic measures for door frame base substrate 194]
As described above, the foul cover unit 540 (molded product of transparent polycarbonate) (see FIGS. 52 (A), (B) and FIG. 53) includes the second ball passage 542d for guiding the game ball to the lower plate and the game ball. Is formed, and the game ball (metal) passes at a high speed while being in contact with the passage wall surface, so that the game ball and the resin rub against each other to generate static electricity, thereby charging the game ball. Cheap.

  For this reason, at the bottom of the second ball passage 542d, a metal ground rail 554 for removing static electricity of the game ball generated by rolling resistance due to rolling of the game ball and discharging it to the lower plate is provided. I have. Further, the foul cover unit 540 is provided with a plate-like grounding metal fitting 556 that covers the right end and the left end of the cover base 542, and the leftmost grounding metal fitting 556 can be electrically connected to the ground rail 554 on the bottom surface of the foul cover unit 540. (See FIGS. 52 (A), (B) and FIG. 53). The ground metal 556 is screwed to the metal lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 (FIGS. 18, 23, and 26) of the door frame 5 so that static electricity escapes.

  Although the second ball passage 542d of the foul cover unit 540 can remove static electricity from the game ball by the ground rail 554 as described above, the electrostatic charge is accumulated in the polycarbonate in this portion, and it can be as high as 10 kV. (3-4 kV at most even when pain is felt by the discharge of the accumulated electrostatic charge). In addition, even if the electric charge accumulated in the resin is grounded, only a very small portion of the electric charge is removed, and most of the charge remains. Then, there is a possibility that the digital amplifier circuit of the door frame base substrate 194 adjacent thereto may malfunction due to electrostatic induction due to the electric charge.

  In the gaming machine, a ground wire for releasing static electricity is attached to the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154, for example. However, there is a possibility that the ground wire may be disconnected or a connection terminal of the ground wire may be disconnected due to an accident.

  The embodiment described below is made in view of such circumstances, and even if the ground is not taken, the charge accumulated in the foul cover unit 540 does not cause electrostatic induction. The invention relates to an invention relating to an antistatic mechanism for shielding a door frame base substrate 194 with a metal plate (a shield plate 562 described later) and preventing static electricity released to the shielding metal plate from jumping to surrounding conductors. It is.

  FIG. 54 is a front view of the static electricity prevention mechanism. FIG. 55 is a perspective view when the door frame showing the state provided with the antistatic mechanism is viewed from the back. FIG. 56 is a rear view of a main part of a door frame showing a state provided with an antistatic mechanism. FIG. 57 is a sectional view taken along line AA of FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 54, the static electricity prevention mechanism 560 in the embodiment is a metal (tin in this example) plate that shields the door frame base substrate 194 so as to prevent static electricity from being induced by the charge accumulated in the foul cover unit 540. A shield plate 562 and a thin plate of polyethylene terephthalate (PET) which is formed in an outer peripheral shape larger than the shield plate 562 and insulates the charge that has jumped to the shield plate 562 so as not to jump to the surrounding conductor. And an insulating sheet 570.

  The shield plate 562 has a flat conductive portion 563 which is in conductive contact with the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 of the door frame 5 at an upper portion in the vertical direction, and a step portion 568 bent and formed in the left-right direction. And a substantially plate-shaped shield portion 564 that is located below and deeper than the conductive portion 563 with the boundary as a boundary and is disposed over substantially the entire area on the back side of the door frame base substrate cover 195 attached to the lower back surface of the door frame 5. And

  A mounting portion 565 extending in a substantially semicircular shape is formed in the middle of the upper side of the conductive portion 563, and an insertion hole 566 is formed in the mounting portion 565. Are drilled.

  The insulating sheet 570 has a shape larger than the outer peripheral edge of the shield portion 564 of the shield plate 562, and functions to electrically insulate the outer peripheral edge of the shield portion 564 from surrounding conductors. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 54, an insulating sheet 570 is attached to the upper surface of the back surface of the shield portion 564 of the shield plate 562 by sticking.

  55 to 57, as described above, the rear side of the door frame base substrate 194 is covered with the door frame base substrate cover 195 (FIGS. 23 and 24). The insulating sheet 570 of the static electricity prevention mechanism 560 is disposed over substantially the entire rear surface of the door frame base substrate cover 195. At this time, the shield plate 562 is disposed on the rear surface of the insulating sheet 570 so that the outer peripheral edge of the shield portion 564 is surrounded by the insulating sheet 570. That is, the shield plate 562 is disposed between the door frame base substrate cover 195 and the shield plate 562. At this time, the outer peripheral portion of the insulating sheet 570 is located radially outside the outer peripheral portion of the shield plate 562. Then, the conductive portion 563 of the shield plate 562 comes into contact with the back surface of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 (see FIG. 23) of the door frame 5 so as to make conductive contact and release static electricity.

  In addition, bosses 110g, 110h, 110i, and 110j for attachment to the foul cover unit 540 are protruded at appropriate places on the right side of the lower back surface of the door frame 5 (door frame base body 110). Also, screw insertion holes 154a and 154b for screwing the shield plate 562 and the earth metal fitting 556 into the metal lower reinforcing plate 154 so as to release static electricity are provided at appropriate positions of the lower reinforcing metal plate 154. , 154c (see FIG. 56).

  The shield plate 562 is positioned by inserting the mounting boss 110g into the insertion hole 566, screws are inserted into the mounting holes 567 and the screw insertion holes 154a of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154, and the screws are screwed into the door frame. Screwed to base body 110.

  Fail cover unit 540 is arranged such that front cover 544 is in surface contact with the back surface of shield plate 562, and a screw is inserted into its mounting portion, and the screw is screwed into mounting bosses 110g to 110j. It is screwed to the back of the door frame base body 110. Also, a screw is inserted into a mounting portion of the grounding metal fitting 556, and a screw is further inserted into the screw insertion holes 154b and 154c of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154. By screwing the screw, static electricity is applied to the metal lower reinforcing sheet metal 154. It is screwed to the door frame base body 110 so as to escape.

  In addition, the shield plate 562 and the foul cover unit 540 are attached together and fastened to the attachment boss 110g with screws. A ground wire (not shown) is attached to the screw insertion hole 154c of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 together with a ground metal 556 by screws.

[Operation of antistatic mechanism 560]
The static electricity accumulated in the foul cover unit 540 escapes to the metal lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 through the shield portion 564 of the shield plate 562 that is in surface contact and the conductive portion 563 that is surface-contacted with the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154, so that metal With the thin plate-shaped shield plate 562, the door frame base substrate 194 can be shielded so that the charge accumulated in the foul cover unit 540 does not cause electrostatic induction.

  In addition, since the shield plate 562 is arranged so that the outer peripheral edge of the shield portion 564 is surrounded by the insulating sheet 570, the electric charge that has jumped to the shield plate 562 transfers the surrounding conductor (metal) from the corner or end face of the shield portion 564. Objects and harnesses) can be prevented from jumping over.

[Ball feed unit]
Subsequently, the ball feeding unit 580 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 58A is a front perspective view of the ball feed unit in the door frame, and FIG. 58B is a rear perspective view of the ball feed unit. FIG. 59 is a rear view of the ball feeding unit. FIG. 60 (A) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit in a disassembled state as viewed from the front, and FIG. 60 (B) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit in a rear case with the rear case removed. Further, FIG. 61 (A) is a plan view of the fraud prevention member in the ball feeding unit, (B) is a front view of the fraud prevention member, and (C) is a perspective view of the fraud prevention member as viewed from the front. (D) is explanatory drawing which shows the effect | action of a fraud prevention member. The ball feeding unit 580 in the door frame 5 can supply the game balls supplied from the upper plate 301 in the plate unit 300 to the hit ball launching device 650 one by one, and can also play the game balls stored in the upper plate 301. The upper plate ball removing mechanism 340 can be pulled out to the lower plate 302 by operating the upper plate ball removing button 341.

  In this ball feed unit 580, the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 are supplied through the upper plate ball discharge port 310d of the plate unit base 310 and the ball feed opening 113 of the door frame base main body 110, and are fed in the front-rear direction. A box-shaped front cover 581 having a penetrating entrance 581a and a ball outlet 581b opening below the entrance 581a and having an open rear, a rear end of the front cover 581 closed, and a front opened. A rear cover 582 having a hit box supply port 582a for supplying a game ball which has a box shape and penetrates in the front-rear direction and penetrates from the entrance 581a of the front cover 581 to the hitting ball firing device 650, a rear cover 582 and a front cover 581, which is rotatably supported about an axis extending in the front-rear direction and partitions the entrance 581 a and the ball outlet 581 b behind the front cover 581. a, and the game balls on the partitioning portion 583a of the ball removing member 583 are sent one by one to the ball supply port 582a of the rear cover, and extend vertically between the front cover 581 and the rear cover 582. The ball feeding member 584 is rotatably supported around the axis. The ball feeding solenoid 585 rotates the ball feeding member 584. In this example, as shown in the figure, a ball feed member 584 is disposed on the right side of the entrance 581a in a front view, and a ball punching member 583 is provided on the left side of the ball feed member 584, and a ball feed solenoid 585 is provided on the right side thereof. Are located.

  The front cover 581 of the ball feed unit 580 includes an arc-shaped slit 581c formed concentrically with the rotation center of the ball removing member 583 on the left side of the ball outlet 581b in a front view. An operating rod 583c of a ball removing member 583 described later extends forward from 581c. The front cover 581 has an upper side extending upward from the upper edge of the entrance 581a. When the front cover 581 is assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the rear end opening of the ball guiding flow path 344b in the upper bowl removing base 344. It is formed so as to close.

  In addition, the ball removing member 583 has a partition portion 583a below the entrance 581a and between the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b, the upper surface of which is lowered toward the ball feeding member 584, and a partition 583a. It extends downward from the end opposite to the ball feed member 584 and bends in a V-shape from near the middle in the vertical direction toward the lower center of the ball outlet 581b, with the lower end extending around the axis extending in the front-rear direction. A rotating rod portion 583b rotatably supported, a rod-shaped operating rod 583c protruding forward from an upper end of the rotating rod portion 583b, and a side surface of the rotating rod portion 583b below the operating rod 583c And a weight portion 583d protruding to the opposite side from the partition portion 583a. The operating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583 is formed so as to protrude forward through an arc-shaped slit 581c formed in the front cover 581 (see FIG. 58), and a ball feed opening of the door frame base body 110. The upper end of the abutment piece 343a of the upper dish removing slider 343 in the upper dish removing mechanism 340 of the dish unit 300 is contacted via 113.

  Further, the ball feeding member 584 includes a blocking portion 584a having a fan shape in a plan view around a rotation axis extending in the up-down direction and facing the direction of the entrance 581a and the partition portion 583a of the ball removing member 583, and the blocking portion 584a. The ball holder 584b includes a spherical holding portion 584b that is recessed in an arc shape from the rear end toward the rotation axis, and a rod-shaped rod portion 584c that extends downward from the rear end of the spherical holding portion 584b. The blocking portion 584a and the ball holding portion 584b of the ball feeding member 54 are each formed within an angle range of about 90 ° about the rotation axis. Further, the ball holding portion 584b of the ball feeding member 584 is sized to hold one game ball. The ball feeding member 584 rotates around the rotation axis by driving the ball feeding solenoid 585 to move the rod 584c disposed at a position eccentric to the rotation axis in the left-right direction. ing.

  The ball feeding member 584 is configured such that the blocking portion 584a faces the partitioning portion 583a and the ball holding portion 584b communicates with the hit ball supply port 582a at the same time as the supply position, and the ball holding portion 584b faces the partitioning portion 583a. It is designed to rotate between the holding position. When the ball feeding member 584 is at the supply position, the game ball held by the ball holding portion 584b is supplied from the hit ball supply port 582a to the hit ball launching device 650, and enters the partition portion 583a from the entrance 581a. The movement of the ball to the ball holding unit 584b (hit ball supply port 582a) is blocked by the blocking unit 584a, and the ball stays on the partition unit 583a. On the other hand, when the ball feeding member 584 rotates to the holding position, the ball holding portion 584b faces the partitioning portion 583a, and the end of the ball holding portion 584b on the rod portion 584c side closes the hit ball supply port 582a. Only one game ball on the partition portion 583a is held in the ball holding portion 584b.

  The ball feed unit 580 is moved forward and backward by the ball feed operation rod 586 whose tip swings up and down by driving (energizing) the ball feed solenoid 585 and the movement of the tip of the ball feed action rod 586 which swings up and down. And a ball-feeding crank 587 that rotates about the axis extending in the vertical direction and rotates the ball-feeding member 584 about the axis extending in the vertical direction. The ball feed crank 587 is capable of engaging with the vertically moving tip of the ball feed operation rod 586 and extending in the left-right direction, and a side of the engagement part 587a that engages with the ball feed operation rod 586. A shaft 587b that is disposed on the opposite side and is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 581 and the rear cover 582; a ball feed member 584 extending upward from the shaft 587b; And a transmission portion 587c that engages with a rod-shaped rod portion 584c (see FIG. 60) that protrudes downward from a position eccentric with respect to the rotation center in FIG.

  The ball feed unit 580 of the present example transmits the movement of the ball feed operation rod 586 that swings by the driving of the ball feed solenoid 585 that moves up and down by the ball feed operation rod 586 and the ball feed crank 587, so that a ball feed member is provided. 584 can be rotated. When the ball feeding solenoid 585 is not driven (normal time), the tip at which the ball feeding operation rod 586 swings away from the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 585 is positioned downward. In the state, the ball feed member 584 is located at the supply position. Also, when the ball feeding solenoid 585 is driven, the ball feeding operation rod 586 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 585 and the tip that swings is positioned upward, so that the ball feeding member 584 rotates to the holding position. It has become. That is, when the ball feeding solenoid 585 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member 584 receives one game ball, and when the ball feeding solenoid 585 is released from driving (OFF state), the ball feeding member 584 receives the ball. The game ball is sent (supplied) to the hitting ball firing device 650 side. The driving of the ball feeding solenoid 585 in the ball feeding unit 580 is controlled by the firing control unit 4120 in synchronization with the driving control of the firing solenoid 654.

  Further, the ball pulling member 583 rotatably supported in the ball feed unit 580 of the present example is applied with a moment to rotate counterclockwise in front view by the weight portion 583d. When the operating rod 583c protruding forward abuts on the upper end of the contact piece 343a of the upper tray ball removing slider 343 in the upper bowl removing mechanism 340 of the tray unit 300, the rotation thereof is restricted. In normal times, the partitioning portion 583a of the ball removing member 583 partitions between the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b so that game balls do not enter the ball outlet 581b. Then, when the player presses down the upper tray ball removing button 341 of the upper tray ball removing mechanism 340 in the tray unit 300, the upper tray ball removing slider 343 slides down together with the contact piece 343a to make contact. As the piece 343a moves downward, the operating rod 583c also moves relatively downward.

  As described above, when the operating rod 583c moves downward together with the abutting piece 343a of the upper bowl removing mechanism 340, the bowl removing member 583 rotates counterclockwise in front view, and the entrance is formed by the partition 583a. The partition between the ball opening 381a and the ball outlet 381b is released, and the game ball that has entered through the entrance 381a is discharged from the ball outlet 381b to the ball discharging channel 344c of the upper plate ball discharging base 344 of the plate unit 300. , Is discharged (supplied) to the lower plate 302.

  In addition, since the contact piece 343a of the upper plate ball removing slider 343 with which the operating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583 abuts is urged upward by the coil spring, the game ball is supplied vigorously onto the partitioning portion 583a. In addition, the impact can be absorbed by a coil spring that urges the upper plate ball removing slider 343 via the operating rod 583c, so that the ball removing member 583 and the like can be prevented from being damaged, and the game ball can be prevented from being damaged. The partition 583a can be prevented from bouncing off.

  In the ball feeding unit 580 of this example, a rectangular mounting recess 582b (see FIG. 60 (B) and the like) which is recessed forward and to the upper right in the rear view of the hit ball supply port 582a in the rear cover 582 is formed. At the same time, a fraud prevention member 588 is mounted in the mounting recess 582b. The fraud prevention member 588 of the ball feed unit 580 is formed of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is detachably attached to the inside of the attachment recess 582b of the rear cover 582 from the rear side. As shown in FIG. 59 and the like, the entirety of the anti-fraud member 588 is formed in a rectangular shape having a horizontally long overall outside diameter in a rear view. The upper piece 588b and the lower piece 588c, which are vertically divided by a dividing line 588a extending toward the base end side (right side) of the upper piece 588b, and the tips of the upper piece 588b and the lower piece 588c. By bending the base end side of the upper piece 588b away from each other in the vertical direction (rearward) with respect to the general surface of the fraud prevention member 588, V formed between the upper piece 588b and the lower piece 588c. It has a U-shaped cut portion 588d, and an inclined portion 588e formed at the tip of the upper piece portion 588b and the lower piece portion 588c and inclined toward the cut portion 588d.

  As shown in the figure, as shown in the figure, the cutting portion 588d is formed by bending the base end side of the upper piece 588b so that the distal end (left end in rear view) of the upper piece 588b moves rearward. It is formed in a V-shape in plan view, and a wire Iw attached to an incorrect game ball I is inserted into the V-shape. The cut portion 588d of the fraud prevention member 588 has a state in which the lower side of the upper piece 588b and the upper side of the lower piece 588c intersect at a predetermined angle in plan view, and the gap becomes narrower toward the base end side. It is formed as follows.

  Further, the inclined portion 588e of the fraud prevention member 588 is formed at the tip of the cutting portion 588d, and the wire Iw attached to the illegal game ball I can be guided into the cutting portion 588d by the inclined portion 588e. It has become. In the ball feed unit 580 of the present example, the fraud prevention member 588 is mounted in the mounting recess 582b of the rear cover 582 from the rear side as shown in the drawing, and the cutting portion 588d in the mounting recess 582b of the rear cover 582. Are formed in a form that penetrates in the front-rear direction at the same time as the part where is formed, and communicates with the hit ball supply port 582a. In other words, the rear cover 582 is formed in a shape in which the hit ball supply port 582a extends into the mounting recess 582b.

  According to the fraud prevention member 588, the illegal game ball I to which the wire rod Iw is attached is supplied from the ball feed unit 580 to the hit ball launching device 650, and the illegal game ball I is transferred by the hit ball launch device 650 to the game area of the game board 4. When the player hits the ball 1100 into the inside, the illegal game ball I fired by the ball shooting device 650 moves diagonally to the upper left along the shooting rail 660 in front view, and moves between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112. Through the game area 1100. At this time, the wire Iw attached to the illegal game ball I is pulled by the momentum of the hit game ball I, and the wire Iw is different from the movement locus of the illegal game ball I, Within the route within the shortest distance. Accordingly, the wire rod Iw extending from the plate unit 300 to the hitting ball firing device 650 side through the hitting ball supply port 582a of the ball feeding unit 580 causes the game ball I to move to the upper left direction in the front view (upper right direction in the rear view). Thus, the ball is pulled toward the upper right corner in the rear view of the hit ball supply port 582a so as to move on the shortest route, and moves into the mounting recess 582b formed in the upper right corner in the rear view of the hit ball supply port 582a. Then, the wire rod Iw that has moved to a portion extending to the right in the rear view of the hit ball supply port 582a (inside the mounting concave portion 582b) is cut by the pair of inclined portions 588e of the fraud prevention member 588 disposed at that position. After being guided into 588d, it is further pulled rightward in rear view by the momentum of the illegal game ball I.

  As a result, the wire Iw attached to the illegal game ball I is pulled by the force of the illegal game ball I in the cutting portion 588d of the fraud prevention member 588 in the direction in which the gap is narrowed (to the left in front view). In this state, the wire Iw is cut by the friction or shearing force applied by the cutting portion 588d (see FIG. 61 (D)). At this time, since the momentum of the illegal game ball I with the wire Iw is attenuated due to friction or the like acting on the wire Iw, the fraud between the outer rail 1111 and the launch rail 660 does not enter the game area 1100. Will be discharged through

  Therefore, the wire rod Iw attached to the illegal game ball I can be cut by the cutting portion 588d of the fraud prevention member 588, so that an illegal act is performed with the illegal game ball I attached to the wire rod Iw in the game area 1100. Can be prevented. Even if the illegal game ball I enters the game area 1100, the wire rod Iw can be cut by the illegality preventing member 588 as described above, so that the illegal operation cannot be performed. Further, even if the wire rod Iw could not be cut by the fraud prevention member 588, the wire rod Iw cuts into the V-shaped cutting portion 588d to attenuate the momentum of the illegal game ball I, thereby reducing the game area 1100. It is possible to prevent intrusion into the inside, so that it is possible to prevent fraud.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, after the game balls are stored in the upper plate 301 and the game balls are supplied to the ball feeding unit 580, the player operates the handle device 500 provided on the front surface of the door frame 5 so that the player can handle the ball. When operated, the game ball is sent to the hit ball launching device 650 by driving the ball sending solenoid 585 of the ball sending unit 580, and the game ball is shot into the game area 1100 by the hit ball firing device 650, so that the game window 101 of the door frame 5 is opened. The game is played in the game area 1100 which can be visually recognized through the door frame, so that the player can be entertained and a feed mechanism (a ball feed member 584 or a ball feed solenoid 585) is provided on the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100. Etc.) and a ball feed unit 580 provided with a discharge mechanism (ball pulling member 583), so that only the ball feeding member 584 and the ball pulling member 583 are used. The ball sending member 584 and the hitting ball launching device 650 are also as close as possible, and when the game ball in the upper plate 301 is discharged by operating the upper plate ball removing button 341, the ball remains on the ball feeding member 584 side. The number of game balls can be reduced as much as possible, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling bad and to prevent the player's interest from lowering.

  Further, since the ball feeding unit 580 including the ball removing member 583 is disposed on the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100, the capacity of the upper plate 301 in the plate unit 300 can be increased, and the game balls can be driven. It is possible to prevent the game balls in the upper plate 301 from disappearing early by the operation, or to prevent the inside of the upper plate 301 from being filled with the game balls early. It is possible to reduce the annoyance of the player by reducing the annoyance of the player, and to reduce the interest of the player, and to reduce the size of the plate unit 300 while maintaining the capacity of the upper plate 301. The area 1100 can be enlarged (widened) to provide the pachinko machine 1 that can attract the player's attention.

  In addition, since the ball feeding unit 580 is provided with the ball pulling member 583, the ball feeding member 584 and the ball pulling member 583 are compared with a separate ball feeding member 583. The ball feeding member 584 and the ball removing member 583 can be attached, the labor involved in assembling can be simplified, the feed unit 580 can be easily replaced, and a problem occurs in the ball feeding member 584 and the ball removing member 583. However, by replacing the ball feed unit 580, the problem can be easily solved.

  Further, since the ball feed unit 580 is disposed on the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5, the ball feed unit 580 is provided on the body frame 3 side, so There is no need to configure a transmission mechanism (upper ball pull-out mechanism 340) for transmitting the operation of the pull-out button 341 to the ball pull-out member 583 of the ball feed unit 580 so as to straddle the openable and closable door frame 5 and the main body frame 3, The configuration relating to the transmission mechanism can be simplified. Further, since the ball feed unit 580 is provided on the door frame 5 side, the transmission mechanism (every time the door frame 5 is opened is compared with the case where the ball feed unit 580 is provided on the body frame 3 side. By shutting off the upper bowl removing mechanism 340), it is possible to avoid the possibility that the transmission mechanism is worn out early and malfunction or breakage, and the reliability of the operation of the transmission mechanism, the ball feed unit 580 and the like can be avoided. And durability can be improved.

  In addition, since the upper plate ball removing button 341 is pressed downward, the game ball can be discharged from the upper plate 301 to the lower plate 302 simply by pressing the upper plate ball removing button 341 downward, or the upper plate 301 Of the game ball from the player can be stopped, and the player can easily perform the operation of removing the ball in the upper plate 301 by the upper plate ball release button 341.

  In addition, the partitioning portion 583a of the ball-pulling member 583 is made to move by the movement of the ball-pulling-out slider 343 that slides up and down in response to the operation of the ball-pulling-out button 341. The partition 583a is also movable in the vertical direction, so that the horizontal moving range of the slider 343 and the partition 583a in the horizontal direction can be reduced as much as possible. The unit 580 can be reduced in size, and the pachinko machine 1 can surely achieve the above-described effects.

  Further, the slider 343 is biased upward, and the partition 583a of the ball removing member 583 communicates the entrance 581a and the ball supply port 582a when the slider 343 is in the raised position. Therefore, even if the game ball vigorously comes into contact with the partition portion 583a from the upper plate 301, the impact can be mitigated by the urging force acting on the upper plate ball removing slider 343, and the partition portion 583a (ball removing member) 583) can be improved in durability. Further, since the impact on the partition portion 583a can be reduced by the urging force acting on the upper bowl removing slider 343, even if the game ball collides with the partition portion 583a, it is difficult to repel the game ball. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the ball feed unit 580 and the like from being damaged and causing a problem.

  Further, since the partition 583a is rotated, the movement of the partition 583a when the load of the game ball is applied to the partition 583a is related to the case where the partition 583a is slid. Friction loss can be reduced, the operability can be improved by lightening the operation of the upper bowl button 341, and the moving range of the partition 583 a can be reduced in planar projection, and the same as above. The effect of the invention can be obtained.

  Also, since the partition 583a is rotated by its own weight in a direction in which the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b are communicated with each other, if a problem occurs in the partition 583a or the upper plate ball removing mechanism 340, the partition 583a is used. Is rotated by its own weight, so that the entrance and the discharge port are in communication with each other, and the game medium in the storage tray is sent to the feed mechanism (input device) side even though the discharge operation unit is not operated. Since the game is discharged to the player without being played, the player can be made to recognize that a problem has occurred in the pachinko machine 1, and the pachinko machine 1 can be moved to the pachinko machine 1 having no problem to enjoy the interest. The decrease can be suppressed.

  Further, since the partitioning portion 583a of the ball removing member 583 is rotated via the bent rotary rod portion 583b, when a game ball collides with the partitioning portion 583a, the impact thereof is bent. By dispersing by the 583b or absorbing by bending of the rotating rod 583b, it is possible to prevent the impact from being transmitted linearly to the rotating shaft, and to improve the durability of the ball removing member 583. Can be enhanced.

  Further, since the ball outlet 581b is disposed immediately below the entrance 581a communicating with the upper plate 301 side, when discharging the game balls in the upper plate 301, the left and right of the game balls in the ball feed unit 580 are set. The movement in the direction can be minimized, and the play of the game balls in the ball feeding unit 580 can be improved so that the game balls can be discharged well. In addition, since the ball outlet 581b is disposed immediately below the entrance 581a, the discharge path of the game balls in the ball feed unit 580 can be made as short as possible. Even if the ball removing member 583 is provided, it is possible to prevent the ball feed unit 580 from becoming unnecessarily large.

  Further, the fraud prevention member 588 is mounted in the mounting recess 582b on the rear side of the rear cover 582, and the fraud prevention member 588 (cutting portion 588d) is arranged at a position as close as possible to the hitting ball firing device 650. Therefore, the wire rod Iw attached to the illegal game ball I in the state of the highest speed (with momentum) immediately after being fired by the hit ball firing device 650 comes into contact with the cutting portion 588d, and the cutting portion 588d By rapidly (strongly) pulling the wire Iw, the wire Iw can be surely cut, and at the same time, the momentum of the unauthorized game ball I is attenuated to prevent the illegal ball Iw from entering the game area 1100. Thus, it is possible to reliably prevent an illegal game ball I from performing an illegal act.

  Further, since the fraud prevention member 588 having the cutting portion 588d is mounted in the mounting concave portion 582b which is recessed forward from the rear surface of the rear cover 582, the V-shaped cutting portion 588d is formed. The upper piece 588b bent rearward can be prevented from protruding rearward from the rear end face of the rear cover 582, and the upper piece 588b of the tamper-proof member 588 can cause injury to the worker during assembly or the like. Can be prevented.

  Further, in the fraud prevention member 588 capable of cutting the wire Iw attached to the illegal game ball I, the upper piece 588b on the upper side is bent backward with the dividing line 588a extending from the right end of the metal plate interposed therebetween. Thus, since the V-shaped cut portion 588d is formed, the cut portion 588d capable of exerting a shearing force can be easily formed (processed), and the cost of the pachinko machine 1 is reduced. The increase can be suppressed.

[Glass unit]
Next, the glass unit 590 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The glass unit 590 has an opening of approximately the same size as the gaming window 101 and has a unit frame 592 of a vertically long octagonal shape formed of synthetic resin and two sheets for closing front and rear ends of the opening of the unit frame 592, respectively. And a transparent glass plate 594 (see FIG. 112). The unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590 includes two stoppers 592a disposed at the upper portions on both left and right sides and extending outward in a plate shape, and a plate-shaped engagement member extending in the left and right direction along the lower end and extending downward. A stop piece 592b.

  The glass unit 590 locks the locking piece 592b at the lower end so as to engage from the upper rear with the vertically bent protruding piece 161 of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 in the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100. Then, the outer peripheral edge of the unit frame 592 is fitted into the glass unit supporting step 110a of the door frame base body 110, and the stopper piece 592a of the unit frame 592 is locked by the glass unit locking member 190, so that the door frame is locked. It is configured to be detachably attached to the base unit 100 (see FIG. 21 and the like).

[Shape decoration on door frame]
Next, the molding decoration, that is, the shape decoration in the door frame 5, will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 17, 19, 20, and 62. FIG. FIG. 62 is a cross-sectional view of the door frame, which is cut at substantially the center in the vertical direction. As shown, the door frame 5 of the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment has an upper plate 301 and a lower plate 302 for storing game balls arranged vertically below the vertically elliptical game window 101. For driving the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 disposed behind the transparent glass unit 590 that closes the game window 101 on the right side of the lower plate 302 in a front view. The handle device 500 is arranged. In the door frame 5, the right side decoration unit 200, the left side decoration unit 240, and the upper decoration unit 280 are arranged to surround the left, right, and upper sides of the gaming window 101, and surround the lower side of the gaming window 101. Dish unit 300 is arranged as described above.

  The outer appearance of the door frame 5 is greatly different on both sides across the gaming window 101, and the right side has an appearance of a natural rock-like feeling rugged by the side lens 210 forming the outer surface of the right side decorative unit 200. On the other hand, the lower side decorative frame 242 and the upper side decorative frame 244 seen on the left side from the peripheral lens portion 250a of the transparent side lens 250 of the left side decorative unit 240 provide a metallic appearance with a sharp and artificial feel. ing.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 62, the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 have different amounts of forward projection of the door frame 5, and the right side decoration unit 200 has the left side decoration unit. It projects more forward than 240. Further, the front end of the right side decoration unit 200 is formed to have a shape that is pointed forward, whereas the front end of the left side decoration unit 240 is formed to have a slightly curved flat shape.

  Accordingly, in the door frame 5 of the present example, the right side decorative unit 200 and the left side decorative unit 240 look similar to each other when viewed from the right front (see FIG. 19), whereas the left front decorative unit 200 and the left side decorative unit 240 look similar to each other. When viewed from the right side, the right side decoration unit 200 looks larger than the left side decoration unit 240 and the decoration of the left side decoration unit 240 is almost invisible, so that a different impression can be given depending on the player's standing position with respect to the pachinko machine 1. It has become. In other words, the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 changes depending on the position of the player with respect to the pachinko machine 1, and the illusion of a pachinko machine of a different model can be provided. , The pachinko machine 1 can attract the player's attention.

  Further, since the front appearance of the door frame 5 is asymmetrical left and right, for example, when the pachinko machines 1 are arranged in a plurality of rows in the left and right direction in an island facility or the like of a game hall, the whole exterior of the island facility is solid and solid. The right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 having different forms are alternately arranged to give a rhythmical impression and to give the player an exciting appearance (atmosphere). This makes it possible to increase the appeal of the player and strongly attract the interest of the player.

  In addition, the door frame 5 allows the LEDs mounted on the decorative substrates 214, 216, 254, 256, 288, 290, 322, and the like provided in the units 200, 220, 280, and 300 to emit light, thereby causing the gaming window 101 to emit light. Can be illuminated with an arbitrary luminescent color so as to surround. Also, of the LEDs mounted on the decorative boards 214, 216, 254, 256 provided in the right side decorative unit 200 and the left side decorative unit 240, the LEDs 214b, 216b disposed behind the side flash lenses 204, 246. , 254b, 256 are turned on and off, so that the mode of the light-emitting decoration surrounding the gaming window 101 can be changed.

[Light-emitting decoration on door frame]
Subsequently, the light-emitting decoration in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 63 is a front view showing the arrangement of LEDs for light emission decoration on the door frame. FIG. 64 is a front view showing a system of LEDs for light emission decoration in the door frame. The door frame 5 of the present embodiment has a substantially annular outer periphery of the game window 101 substantially corresponding to the game area 1100 of the game board 4 by the right side decoration unit 200, the left side decoration unit 240, the upper decoration unit 280, and the plate unit 300. It is formed to surround. Each of the units 200, 240, 280, and 300 includes decorative boards 214, 216, 254, 256, 288, 290, and 322 on which LEDs are mounted. Can be decorated with light emission.

  As described above, the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 of the door frame 5 are formed so as to surround most of the outer periphery except for the lower side of the game window 101, and the plurality of circumferences of the side lenses 210 and 250 are formed. The lens portions 210a and 250a are arranged along the outer periphery of the gaming window 101, and the side flash lenses 204 and 246 extend along a radial axis centered on the lower center of the gaming window 101 in the left-right center. Is disposed between the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a adjacent to the lens.

  In the door frame 5 of the present example, the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210 in the right side decoration unit 200 is formed by a plurality of substantially spindle-shaped curved surfaces, whereas the side lens 250 in the left side decoration unit 240 is formed. Is formed by one smooth and gentle curved surface. In the door frame 5, side inner lenses 212 and 252 capable of diffusing light are arranged behind the side lenses 210 and 250 in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240. In the left side decoration unit 240, an inner decoration member 251 having a plurality of slits 251a is arranged between the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 and the side inner lens 252.

  Further, the door frame 5 is provided at the rear side of the side inner lenses 212 and 252 in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240, on the right side upper decoration board 214, the right side lower decoration board 216, and the left side upper decoration board 254. , And a lower left side decorative substrate 256 are arranged, and a plurality of LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b are mounted on the front surface of each decorative substrate 214, 216, 254, 256. ing.

  The right side upper decorative substrate 214, the right side lower decorative substrate 216, the left side upper decorative substrate 254, and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 arranged on the rear side of the side inner lenses 212 and 252 have peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a. LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, and 256a are disposed at corresponding positions, and LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b are disposed at positions corresponding to the emission lens units 210b and 250b (side flash lenses 204 and 246). . In this example, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, and 256a corresponding to the peripheral lens units 210a and 250a are full color LEDs, and the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b corresponding to the radiation lens units 210b and 250b have relatively high luminance. It is an LED. The two LEDs 214c disposed at the upper right end of the upper right side decorative board 214 are a green LED and a red LED.

  In this example, the surfaces of the upper right side decorative substrate 214, the lower right side decorative substrate 216, the upper left side decorative substrate 254, and the lower side left decorative substrate 256 are made of white photoresist, white printing (for example, silk printing). ), White paint, and the like. As a result, the reflectivity of the decorative substrates 214, 216, 254, 256 can be increased, so that when the LEDs 214a, 216a, etc. are not lit, light from the player side is reflected by the decorative substrates 214, 216, 254, 256. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the side lenses 210 and 250 from becoming too dark and deteriorating the appearance, and to reflect the light emitted from the LEDs 214a and 216a to the player side by the substrate, thereby improving the side view. The lenses 210 and 250 can be brightly decorated with light.

  As described above, the upper decorative unit 280 of the door frame 5 connects the ends of the upper portions of the right side decorative unit 200 and the left side decorative unit 240 facing the center in the left-right direction of the door frame 5. It is formed to decorate the upper center of the gaming window 101. The upper decoration unit 280 includes an upper central lens 284 arranged at the center in the left-right direction, an annular central ring lens portion 282b arranged on the outer periphery of the upper central lens 284, and an outer portion outside the central annular lens portion 282b. And four extension frame lens portions 282c extending to the right side. In addition, the front surface of the extension frame lens portion 282c on the lower right side in front view is covered with an upper lower decorative cover 294.

  The upper decorative unit 280 includes an upper central decorative substrate 288 disposed behind the central annular lens portion 282b of the upper central lens 284 and the upper lens 282, and a laterally extending upper lens 282 extending from the upper central decorative substrate 288. And an upper side decorative substrate 290 disposed on the rear side of the extension frame lens portion 282c and the upper central decorative substrate 288. A plurality of LEDs 288a corresponding to the upper center lens 284 and a plurality of LEDs 288b corresponding to the center ring lens portion 282b are mounted on the front surface of the upper center decoration substrate 288, and the upper center lens 284 and the center ring lens portion 282b are mounted. And can be separately illuminated. In addition, a plurality of LEDs 290a corresponding to the extension frame lens portion 282c are mounted on the front side of the upper side decorative substrate 290, so that each extension frame lens portion 282c can be individually illuminated. . The LEDs 288a, 288b, 290a of the upper central decorative substrate 288 and the upper side decorative substrate 290 are full color LEDs.

  Subsequently, in the dish unit 300, the outer surface is formed by a plurality of curved surfaces having a substantially spindle shape, and has an external appearance that is continuous with the external appearance of the right side decorative unit 200. In the dish unit 300, an upper dish decorative board 322 is disposed behind the upper dish front decorative member 316, and a plurality of LEDs 322 a mounted on the upper dish decorative board 322 allow the upper plate front decorative member 316 to be mounted. The upper right upper decorative member 319 for decorating the right side portion and the front outer periphery of the upper ball removing button 341 can be illuminated. In this example, the LED 322a of the upper plate decorative board 322 is a full-color LED.

  Next, the operation unit 400 attached to the plate unit 300 includes a light-transmitting annular dial operation unit 401 and a light-transmitting cylindrical pressing operation unit disposed inside the dial operation unit 401. 405, and a dial decoration substrate 430 and a button decoration substrate 432 are arranged below the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405, respectively. The dial decoration board 430 includes a plurality of (four in this example) LEDs 430b arranged in the circumferential direction so as to correspond to the dial operation unit 401. The button decoration board 432 is provided with one LED 432d corresponding to the pressing operation unit 405. In this example, the LED 430b of the dial decoration substrate 430 is a white LED with high brightness, and the LED 432d of the button decoration substrate 432 is a full-color LED. The surfaces (upper surfaces) of the dial decoration substrate 430 and the button decoration substrate 432 are also white, so that the same operation and effect as described above can be achieved.

  By the way, in the door frame 5 of this example, it corresponds to each peripheral lens part 210a, 250a of the side lens 210, 250 in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 which covers the outer periphery above the lower side of the gaming window 101. The LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, and 256a include a first annular group 102 (within a hatched area in FIGS. 63 and 64) near the gaming window 101 and a second annular group 103 disposed outside the first annular group 102. (Within the range of the cross hatch in FIGS. 63 and 64), and the LEDs of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 are made to emit light appropriately, so that they are substantially concentric so as to surround the gaming window 101. A plurality (two in this example) of light emitting decorations can be made. That is, when all the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, and 256a of the first annular group 102 emit light, the area of the hatch near the gaming window 101 is decoratively illuminated annularly, and the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, and 256a of the second annular group 103 are turned on. When all light is emitted, the area of the cross hatch away from the gaming window 101 is decoratively illuminated in a ring shape.

  In the door frame 5, LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b corresponding to the side flash lenses 204 and 246 (radiation lens portions 210b and 250b of the side lenses 210 and 250) in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 are provided. A radial group 104 (FIGS. 63 and 64) extending radially around the lower center in the left-right direction of the game window 101 (game area 1100) so as to divide the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 in the circumferential direction. (Within the shaded area). By appropriately emitting light from the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b of the radial group 104, the outside of the game window 101 can be radiated and decorated, and the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 can form an annular shape. The luminous decoration can be made to be divided in the circumferential direction.

  In the door frame 5, the LED 214c of the upper right side decorative board 214 corresponding to the upper right corner of the side lens 210 in the right side decorative unit 200 is a notification group 105. Various information can be notified to a player or an employee of a game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

  In the door frame 5, the LEDs 288 a and 288 b corresponding to the upper center lens 284 and the center ring lens portion 282 b in the upper decoration unit 280 for decorating the upper center of the gaming window 101 include the first ring group 102 and the second ring group 103. Is formed as an upper central group 106 which emits light at the upper center. By appropriately illuminating the LEDs 288a and 288b of the upper central group 106, the upper center of the gaming window 101 can be illuminated and decorated. It is possible to make a luminous decoration that becomes a point. The LED 290a corresponding to the extension frame lens portion 282c in the upper decoration unit 280 is an upper center side group 107 for emitting and illuminating the left and right sides of the upper center group 106. The boundaries between the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 and the upper central group 106 can be illuminated by appropriately emitting the LED 290a of the upper central side group 107.

  Further, in the door frame 5, the LED 322 a corresponding to the upper plate front decoration member 316 and the upper plate upper right decoration member 319 arranged below the game window 101 makes the upper plate 301 emit light. The dish group 108 is provided. In the door frame 5, LEDs 430 b and 432 d corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 arranged at the lower center of the game window 101 and at the center of the upper part of the plate unit 300, operate the operation unit 400. An operation group 109 for performing light emission decoration is provided. By appropriately illuminating the LEDs 430b and 432d of the operation group 109, the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be decorated with light emission, and the operation timing and operation direction of the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be determined. Can be notified.

  The light-emitting decoration of the door frame 5 according to the present embodiment will be described in further detail. 288b, 290a, 322a, 430b, and 432d are further subdivided in the groups 102, 103, 104, 106, 107, 108, and 109 to which they belong, corresponding to the control systems. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 64, the 20 LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, and 256a belonging to the first annular group 102 include 102a to 102j for each of the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a of the side lenses 210 and 250. The 26 LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a belonging to the second annular group 103 are divided into 10 systems of 103a to 103j for each peripheral lens unit 210a, 250a of the side lens 210, 250. Have been.

  The 20 LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b belonging to the radial group 104 are divided into eight systems of 104a to 104h for each of the side flash lenses 204 and 246 (radiation lens units 210b and 250b of the side lenses 210 and 250). ing. Further, the two LEDs 214c belonging to the notification group 105 are divided into two systems of an upper side 105a and a lower side 105b. Further, the eight LEDs 288a and 288b belonging to the upper central group 106 are divided into three systems: a central part 106a, a right part 106b, and a left part 106c. Also, the seven LEDs 290a belonging to the upper center side group 107 are divided into two systems of a right side 107a and a left side 107b.

  Further, the 11 LEDs 322a belonging to the upper plate group 108 are divided into four systems of 108a to 108d in front and rear and left and right. The five LEDs 430b and 432d belonging to the operation group 109 include a pair of LEDs 430b in which four LEDs 430b corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 are arranged diagonally across the pressing operation unit 405 as a set of left and right 109a and front and rear 109b. And one LED 432c corresponding to the pressing operation unit 405 is divided into three systems, one system. Thus, in the door frame 5 of the present example, the LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, 288a, 288b, 290a, 322a, 430b, and 432d are divided into 42 systems. ing.

  By the way, in the door frame 5, as described above, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a, 288a, 288b, 290a, 322a, 432d are full-color LEDs, and the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a, 288a, 288b, The 28 systems 102a to 102j, 103a to 103j, 106a to 106c, 108a to 108d, and 109c to which 290a, 322a, and 432d belong are further provided with three independent RGB systems for full-color light emission. In the light emission control, the number of systems is tripled to 84 systems. The LEDs 288a and 430b are high-luminance white LEDs, and the four systems 107a, 109a and 109b to which the LEDs 288a and 430b belong require a large amount of current to emit light with high luminance. One system is connected, and the actual light emission control is doubled to eight systems.

  The LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b are white LEDs of normal luminance, and belong to eight systems 104a to 108h. The LED 214c is a green LED and a red LED, and belongs to two systems 105a and 105b. The ten systems 104a to 108h, 105a, and 105b constituted by the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b, and 214c can be sufficiently controlled in each system, and therefore, the same number of ten systems is used in actual light emission control.

  Therefore, the actual number of systems in the light emission control in the door frame 5 is 102 systems, and the LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, 288a, 288b, 290a, 322a, For each system to which 430b and 432d belong, lighting and blinking are controlled by dynamic lighting, and gradation (color and brightness) is controlled by PWM control (pulse width modulation control). . As a result, it is possible to perform an expressive light emission effect.

  As the light emission effect in the door frame 5, for example, light is emitted sequentially from the first annular group 102 to the second annular group 103 (sequentially in the same color or a similar color) to spread outward around the gaming window 101. A light emission effect, or conversely, a light emission effect such that light is converged from the outside toward the game window 101 by sequentially emitting light (same color or similar color sequentially) from the second annular group 103 to the first annular group 102, Alternatively, the first ring group 102 and the second ring group 103 emit light at the same time, so that a light emission effect or the like can be performed such that the entire outer periphery of the game window 101 emits light widely.

  Further, by cooperating with the LEDs (not shown in detail) provided on the game board 4, the LEDs of the game board 4, the LEDs of the first annular group 102 near the gaming window 101, and the first annular group 102 With the LEDs of the second annular group 103 arranged outside, it is possible to perform a more expressive light-emitting effect, and it is possible to strongly attract the interest of the player and to make the player entertain and entertain. Can be suppressed from decreasing.

  In the first annular group 102, the second annular group 103, and the lower group 108, the respective systems 102a to 102j and 103a to 103j emit light as appropriate, so that the upper part of the upper decorative unit 280 is formed along the outer periphery of the gaming window 101. A light emission effect such that light moves toward the center lens 284 or light moves from the upper center lens 284 along the outer periphery of the game window 101 can be provided. In this example, the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 are divided into ten systems 102a to 102j and 103a to 103j in the circumferential direction (ten divisions). However, the present invention is not limited to this. If it is divided into about eight systems (approximately eight divisions), it is possible to satisfactorily perform a light emission effect in which light orbits the outer periphery of the game window 101.

  Further, by emitting light only in the radial group 104, a light emitting effect of emitting light radially around the game window 101 is performed, and simultaneously with the radial group 104, the first annular group 102, the second annular group 103, and the lower group 108 emit light. The light emitting effect of causing the entire outer periphery of the game window 101 to emit light substantially uniformly by causing the light emitting group 101 to emit light, or the radial group 104 emitting light (lighting / flashing) during the light emission of the first annular group 102 or the second annular group 103. Or a luminous effect that gives an accent to the luminous decoration of the hologram. In addition, by causing each of the systems 104a to 104h of the radial group 104 to emit light individually, a light emission effect in which the side flash lenses 204 and 246 (radiation lens units 210b and 250b) orbit can be performed.

  In addition, the upper central group 106 and the upper central side group 105 emit light, so that a chance is given to the player or a specific game state (for example, a jackpot game state, a probable change game state, a time-saving game state, a probable change time-short game state). , Etc.) can be performed.

  Further, by appropriately emitting light from each of the systems 108 a to 108 d of the lower group 108, a light emitting effect for lighting and decorating the upper plate 301 is performed, or by emitting light in association with the operation group 109, the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation For example, a light emission effect for prompting the operation of the unit 405 can be provided. In addition, by appropriately emitting light from the systems 109a and 109b corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 in the operation group 109, a light emission effect for prompting the operation of the dial operation unit 401 and guiding the rotation operation direction of the dial operation unit 401 is provided. can do. Further, by causing the system 109c corresponding to the pressing operation unit 405 in the operation group 109 to emit light, it is possible to perform a light emission effect that prompts the operation of the pressing operation unit 405.

  Since the system 109c of the first annular group 102, the second annular group 103, the upper central group 106, the lower group 108, and the operation group 109 is a full-color LED, each group 102, 103, 106, 108, It is possible to perform a light emission effect with different gradations such as light emission color and brightness for each 109 or for each of the systems 102a to 102j, 103a to 103j, 106a to 106c, 108a to 108d, and 109c. A rich luminous effect can be performed.

[Overall configuration of body frame]
Next, the main body frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 65 is a front view of the body frame, and FIG. 66 is a rear view of the body frame. FIG. 67 is a front perspective view of the main body frame, and FIG. 68 is a rear perspective view of the main body frame. 70 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 69 is a left side view of the main body frame. FIG. 71 is a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the rear. FIG. The main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is supported on the left side of the outer frame 2 in a front view, and is supported like a door so as to open and close the front surface of the outer frame 2 behind the door frame 5. The front side can be opened and closed by a door frame 5. Further, the main body frame 3 can detachably hold the game board 4 at a position corresponding to the game window 101 of the door frame 5 from the front side.

  The main body frame 3 according to the present embodiment forms a skeleton of the main body frame 3 and has a rectangular game board holding opening 601 for penetrating in the front-rear direction and holding the game board 4, and a main body frame base 600. An upper shaft support 630 and a lower shaft support 640 attached to the upper end and the lower end of the left end of the front view 600 and supported by the outer frame 2 and supporting the door frame 5, respectively; A ball launching device 650 mounted on the lower front surface of the game board 4 for driving game balls into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 and pays out game balls to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 mounted on the rear side of the body frame base 600. Ball unit 700 for mounting and blocking the flow of game balls from the prize ball unit 700 to the plate unit 300 of the door frame 5 when the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the main body frame 3 and is attached to the front of the body frame base 600. Open ball exit It includes a unit 790, a.

  Further, the main body frame 3 is attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and includes a door frame 5 excluding the game board 4 and various control boards for controlling electric components provided on the main body frame 3, a power supply board 851, and the like. , A back cover 900 that covers the rear opening of the game board holding opening 601 in the main frame base 600, and a side security plate 950 that covers the left end of the main frame base 600 in front view. And a locking device 1000 attached to the right end of the main body frame base when viewed from the front to open and close the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 and open and close the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3.

[Main frame base]
Next, the main body frame base 600 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 72 and 73. FIG. 72 is a front perspective view of the body frame base in the body frame. FIG. 73 is a rear perspective view of the body frame base in the body frame. The main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is integrally formed of a synthetic resin, has a vertically long rectangular shape along the outer shape of the door frame 5 when viewed from the front, and is substantially in the front-rear direction. It is formed so as to have a constant depth D (see FIG. 69). Thus, when the prize ball unit 700, the board unit 800, the back cover 900, the lock device 1000, and the like are attached to the rear of the main frame base 600, the main frame base 600 is laid face down. In addition, the rear surface of the body frame base 600 is substantially flat at the height of the depth D of the body frame base 600, so that the prize ball unit 700 and the like can be easily mounted, and the workability related to the assembly of the body frame 3 is improved. Can be better.

  As shown in the figure, the main body frame base 600 has a game board holding opening capable of fitting and holding the outer periphery of the game board 4 by penetrating in a rectangular shape in the front-rear direction within about 3/4 of the entire area from the upper part to the lower part. 601, a U-shaped front end frame portion 602 that forms the outer periphery of the front end of the main body frame base 600 excluding the left side when viewed from the front, Frame protruding piece 110c protruding rearward from the lower end of the upper side, upper bent protruding piece 167 protruding rearward of upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 in reinforcing unit 150 of door frame 5, and open side protruding rearward of open side reinforcing sheet metal 153. An engagement groove 603 into which the bent protruding piece 163 is inserted and engaged.

  Further, the main body frame base 600 extends from the lower side of the game board holding opening 601 to the lower end of the main body frame base 600 and is recessed rearward by a predetermined amount from the front end of the front end frame portion 602 and spreads in a left-right direction in a plate-like lower rear wall portion. 604, and a peripheral wall portion 605 projecting rearward inside the front end frame portion 602 and forming an inner peripheral wall of the game board holding port 601. The free end portions (upper and lower left ends in front view) of the U-shaped front end frame portion 602 are connected to each other by the peripheral wall portion 605, and the outer shape of the main body frame base 600 has a frame shape. It has become.

  In addition, the main body frame base 600 forms a lower side of the game board holding opening 601 at the upper end of the lower rear wall section 604 and has a game board placement section 606 on which the game board 4 is placed, and a game board placement section 606. A positioning projection 607 that projects upward from substantially the center in the left-right direction and engages with the out ball discharge groove 1156 of the game panel 1150 in the game board 4 and a game board of the game board 4 formed at a predetermined position on the right inner wall of the peripheral wall 605 when viewed from the front. A game board engaging portion 608 (see FIG. 65) to which the stopper 1120 is fastened, and a plate-like shape which is suspended downward from the upper inner wall of the peripheral wall portion 605 and whose lower end can contact the upper end of the game board 4 in the left-right direction. And a plurality of upper end regulating ribs 609. The positioning protrusion 607 of the main frame base 600 is fitted to the out ball discharge groove 1156 of the game board 4 so that the lower end of the game board 4 can be restricted from moving in the left-right direction and the backward direction. ing. In addition, the game board locking portion 608 can regulate that the right side of the game board 4 in the front view is moved in the front-rear direction by locking the game board stopper 1120 of the game board 4. I have. Although the details of the left side of the game board 4 in a front view will be described later, the movement of the side security plate 950 in the front-rear direction is regulated by the positioning member 956.

  Furthermore, the main body frame base 600 is provided with a metal fitting for mounting the upper shaft support 630 and the lower shaft support 640 on the rear surface of the free end (upper left and right ends in front view) of the U-shaped front end frame 602. A portion 610 is provided (see FIG. 73). As shown in FIG. 72 and the like, this bracket mounting portion 610 is reinforced at its front side by a plurality of ribs extending up and down and left and right, so that the upper shaft support 630 and the lower shaft support 640 can be mounted with sufficient strength. Can be done. The main body frame base 600 has a substantially circular cylinder lock through-hole 611 penetrating in the front-rear direction at the upper right end of the lower rear wall 604 in front view, and a door frame 5 formed at the lower left of the cylinder lock through-hole 611 in front view. The U-shaped fitting groove 612 that fits with the positioning protrusion 110d that projects rearward from the door frame base main body 110, and the firing solenoid 654 of the hitting ball firing device 650 that is formed at the lower left of the fitting groove 612 when viewed from the front. And a solenoid housing recess 613.

  As described above, the main body frame base 600 of the present example has the lower rear wall portion 604 formed at a position one step lower than the front surface of the front end frame portion 602, and the right side of the lower rear wall portion 604 when viewed from the front. On the front surface, the hitting ball firing device 650 is attached from the front side so that the firing solenoid 654 of the hitting ball firing device 650 is housed in the solenoid housing recess 613. In a state in which the hit ball launching device 650 is attached to the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604, as shown in FIG. 67, FIG. A fale space 626 extending downward is formed. In this example, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball inlet 542e of the foul cover unit 540 is located below the foul space 626, and the foul space 626 is lowered. The game ball is received by the foul ball inlet 542e of the foul cover unit 540, and is discharged to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300.

  Further, the main body frame base 600 has an opening 614 that penetrates in a rectangular shape in the front-rear direction to the left of the left and right centers of the lower rear wall 604 in front view, and a plurality of openings are formed on the upper side of the opening 614 and on both left and right sides in front view. And a through hole 615 penetrating in the front-rear direction. The opening 614 of the main body frame base 600 is closed from the front side by a relay terminal plate cover 692 (see FIG. 70 and the like), and passes through the opening 692a of the relay terminal plate cover 692 to pass through the lower rear wall 604. The main-side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral-side relay terminal plate 882 of the board unit 800 attached to the rear surface face the front side. Further, the plurality of through holes 615 are for transmitting sound from the speaker box 820 of the board unit 800 to the front side of the main body frame base 600. Note that the through holes 615 arranged on both left and right sides of the opening 614 are ventilation type holes having a front wall on the front side.

  Further, the main body frame base 600 has a fixture support portion rotatably supporting a game board fixing tool 690 for detachably fixing the game board 4 to the vicinity of the upper front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 above the opening 614. 616, and a stopper 617 that projects forward from the lower right of the fixture supporter 616 in front view and regulates the rotational position of the game board fixture 690.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 65 and the like, the game board fixing tool 690 includes a fixing piece 690a that spreads in a fan shape around an axis supported by the fixing tool supporting portion 616 of the main body frame base 600, and a fixing piece 690a. An operation piece 690b extending outward from one end in the circumferential direction (the side that becomes the rear end when rotated clockwise in front view). The game board fixture 690 is pivotally supported by the fixture support portion 616 of the body frame base 600, and then the operation piece 690b is operated to rotate the game board fixture 690 clockwise in a front view. Then, the fixing piece 690a protrudes above the game board placing portion 606, and is inserted into the fixing recess 1121 of the game board 4 placed on the game board placing portion 606. Can be prevented from moving forward. In addition, the game board fixture 690 is configured such that the operation piece 690b abuts on the stopper 617, and the abutment with the stopper 617 restricts the rotation end in the counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front. Has become.

  Further, the body frame base 600 is provided with a door frame opening switch 618 for detecting the opening of the door frame 5 with respect to the body frame 3 on the lower front surface of the cylinder lock through hole 611. When the door frame 5 is opened (opened), the pressing is released and the opening of the door frame 5 can be detected. Further, the body frame base 600 is provided with a body frame opening switch 619 for detecting opening of the body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 on a rear surface below the position where the door frame opening switch 618 is attached ( When the body frame 3 is opened (opened) with respect to the outer frame 2, the pressing is released and the opening of the body frame 3 can be detected.

  Further, the main body frame base 600 includes three U-shaped front end frame portions 602 which penetrate vertically (in the front-rear direction) inwardly (in the axial support side) from the engagement grooves 603 on the right side (open side) in the front view. A door hook hole 620 and a lock hole 621 penetrating in the front-rear direction below the door hook hole 620 at the lower end and arranged in two in the left-right direction are provided. These three door hook holes 620 are respectively formed near the upper and lower ends in the vertical direction and substantially at the center in the vertical direction. The locking projections 1004 provided on the upper and lower ends of the lock device 1000 are engaged with the upper and middle door hook holes 620 and the lock locking holes 621, respectively. The lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame base 600 along the outer wall of the peripheral wall portion 605 on the rear side of the right side in front view in FIG. When the lock device 1000 is mounted on the body frame base 600, the three door frame hook portions 1041 of the lock device 1000 project forward from the three door hook holes 620, and the cylinder lock of the lock device 1000. 1010 protrudes forward from the cylinder lock through hole 611 (see FIG. 67).

  Further, the main body frame base 600 gently and obliquely descends from the upper right side toward the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the rear on the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604, and then lowers the lower rear wall portion 604 at the approximate center in the left-right direction. And a main frame base ball removal passage 622 from which a game ball is allowed to roll down from the middle in the up-down direction to a slightly upward position. The rear side of the main body frame base ball passage 622 is closed by a substrate unit base 810 of the substrate unit 800. As will be described in detail later, a game ball that has rolled in the ball passage 741d of the prize ball device 740. Are to roll.

  Further, a plurality of main body frame bases 600 are arranged at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction at the rear end of the left side of the peripheral wall portion 605 in rear view, and the back cover shaft support portions 623 rotatably support the support pins 906 of the back cover 900. And a mounting portion 624 for mounting the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 on the front left side of the opening 614 on the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604, and the lock device 1000 on the right side (opening side) of the peripheral wall portion 605 in front view. And a lock mounting portion 625 for mounting and fixing.

  Although a detailed description is omitted, in addition to the above, mounting bosses and mounting holes for mounting the hit ball launching device 650, the prize ball unit 700, the substrate unit 800, and the like are appropriately positioned on the main frame base 600. Is formed.

[Upper shaft support and lower shaft support]
Next, the upper shaft support 630 and the lower shaft support 640 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. The upper shaft support 630 and the lower shaft support 640 of the main body frame 3 are respectively mounted to the metal mount mounting portions 610 on the upper left and lower rear surfaces of the main body frame base 600 in a front view using predetermined screws, so that the upper shaft support 630 and the lower shaft support 640 are attached to the main body frame 3. The door frame 5 can be pivotally supported to be openable and closable, and the main body frame 3 can be pivotally supported to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable.

  First, the upper shaft bracket 630 is attached to the upper bracket attachment portion 610 of the main body frame base 600 and extends in the vertical and horizontal directions, and a plate-like attachment portion 631 extending forward from the upper end of the attachment portion 631. A front extension portion 632, a pivot pin 633 protruding upward from the vicinity of the front end of the front extension portion 632, and an axial pin 155 of the door frame 5 disposed on the left side of the pivot pin 633 in a front view. And a door frame shaft support hole 634 (see FIG. 67 and the like) penetrating in the up and down direction, and hanging downward from the left end in the front view of the front extension portion 632 and turning the door frame 5 to the open side. And a stopper 635 (see FIGS. 69 and 113) for regulating the end. In the upper bracket 630, the mounting portion 631, the front extending portion 632, and the stopper 635 are integrally formed by bending a single metal plate.

  On the other hand, the lower shaft support 640 includes a door frame support 642 for supporting the door frame 5 and a body frame 3 that is disposed below the door frame support 642 and supports the body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2. And a body frame shaft support 644 for performing the operation. The door frame shaft support 642 of the lower shaft support 640 is attached to the lower bracket mounting portion 610 on the lower side of the main body frame base 600 and spreads in the vertical and horizontal directions, and forward from the lower end of the mounting portion 642a. A plate-shaped front extending portion 642b that extends, a door frame shaft support hole 634 that penetrates vertically near the front end of the front extending portion 642b, and into which the shaft pin 157 of the door frame 5 is inserted, and a front extending portion. And a stopper 642d that stands upward from the left end of the front view 642b when viewed from the front and regulates the turning end of the door frame 5 toward the open side. In the door frame shaft support 642, a mounting portion 642a, a front extension 642b, and a stopper 642d are integrally formed by bending a single metal plate.

  Further, the main frame support 644 of the lower support 640 is attached to a metal mounting portion 610 on the lower side of the main body frame base 600 and extends in the vertical and horizontal directions. A front extension portion 644b extending forward, and a main frame support hole (not shown) penetrating in the vertical direction near the front end of the front extension portion 644b are provided. In the main frame supporting member 644, the mounting portion 644a and the front extension portion 644b are also integrally formed by bending a single metal plate.

  In this example, the lower bracket 640 is configured such that the mounting portion 642a of the door frame shaft mounting 642 and the mounting portion 644a of the body frame shaft mounting 644 overlap (contact) with each other in the front-rear direction, and the door frame. With the front extension 642b of the shaft bracket 642 and the front extension 644b of the body frame shaft bracket 644 separated by a predetermined distance in the vertical direction, it is attached to the lower bracket mounting portion 610 of the body frame base 600. It has become.

  The upper shaft support 630 and the lower shaft support 640 are attached to the body frame base 600, and the shaft support pins 633 of the upper shaft support 630 and the body frame shaft support holes (not shown) of the lower shaft support 640. Are positioned coaxially. The main frame support hole of the main frame support 644 in the lower support 640 is fitted and inserted into the support projection 21 d of the lower support 21 in the outer frame 2. As described above, after the front extension portion 644b of the main frame support 644 is placed on the support projecting piece 21c of the lower support 21, the support pin 633 of the upper support 630 is attached to the outer frame 2. By inserting the main frame 3 into the support hook hole 20c of the upper support bracket 20, the main frame 3 can be pivotally supported on the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable.

  When the upper bracket 630 and the lower shaft bracket 640 are attached to the main body frame base 600, the door frame shaft support holes 634 of the upper shaft bracket 630 and the door frame shaft supports of the lower shaft bracket 640 are provided. The metal fitting 642c is positioned coaxially with the door frame 640 so that the shaft pin 157 of the door frame 5 is inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the door frame shaft support 642 of the lower shaft support 640. After placing the lower shaft support 158 of the frame 5 on the front extension 642 b of the door frame support 642, the shaft pin 155 of the door frame 5 is inserted into the door frame support hole 634 of the upper shaft support 630. By inserting, the door frame 5 can be pivotally supported on the main body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable. In this example, the shaft pin 155 on the upper side of the door frame 5 is slidable in the vertical direction, and when the shaft pin 155 is inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support 630, the shaft pin 155 is inserted. The door is once slid downward so that the upper support 156 of the door frame 5 and the front extension 632 of the upper support 630 vertically overlap, and then the shaft pin 155 is slid upward to open the door. It can be inserted into the frame shaft support hole 634.

[Ball launcher]
Next, the hitting ball firing device 650 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 74 and 75. FIG. 74 is a front perspective view of the hit ball firing device in the main body frame. FIG. 75 is a rear perspective view of the hit ball firing device in the main body frame. The hitting ball firing device 650 can hit a game ball supplied from the ball feeding unit 580 of the door frame 5 into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 with a strength corresponding to a rotation operation of the handle device 500. is there.

  The hitting ball launching device 650 of the present embodiment has a launching base 652 of a metal plate attached to a predetermined position on the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600, and a rotary drive shaft 654 a protruding forward from the lower rear surface of the launching base 652. Launching solenoid 654, a hitting hammer 656 fixed to the driving shaft 654a of the firing solenoid 654 so as to be integrally rotatable, a tip 658 fixed to the tip of the hitting hammer 656, and a movement locus of the tip 658 A tip of a ball hitting hammer 656 between a firing rail 660 extending obliquely to the upper left and a front end of the firing base 652 attached to the front of the firing base 652, and a firing rail 660 above the base end of the firing rail 660. A ball stop that forms a gap through which a game ball cannot pass at the same time that the game ball 658 is allowed to pass and holds the game ball at the base end of the firing rail 660 The pin 662 and the ball stopper 662 regulate the rotation of the hitting hammer 656 (hammer tip 658) toward the firing rail 660 from a hitting position at which a game ball held at the base end of the firing rail 660 can be hit. And a stopper 664.

  Although not shown in detail, the firing solenoid 654 of the hitting ball firing device 650 is configured such that the drive shaft 654a reciprocates with a strength (speed) corresponding to the rotation operation angle of the handle device 500. The hitting hammer 656 of the hitting ball launching device 650 has a fixed portion 656a fixed to the drive shaft 654a of the firing solenoid 654, and a gently extending arc extending from the fixed portion 656a with respect to the axis of the drive shaft 654a. A rod portion 656b to which a hammer tip 658 is fixed at the tip in the normal direction, and a stopper portion 656c extending to the opposite side of the rod portion 656b with the fixing portion 656a interposed therebetween and capable of contacting the stopper 664 are provided. ing. When the stopper 656c of the hitting hammer 656 abuts against the stopper 664, the tip 658 of the tip of the hitting ball 656 is rotated toward the firing rail 660 from the hitting position (rotational end in the counterclockwise direction in front view). It is being regulated.

  Further, the firing rail 660 of the hit ball firing device 650 is formed in a loose arc shape having a lower portion depressed substantially along the lower end extension of the outer rail 1111 of the game board 4 (see FIG. 102), and also in the front-rear direction. On the other hand, the center has a V-shaped concave shape, so that a game ball hit by the ball hammer 656 can be smoothly guided to the game board 4 along the firing rail 660. The firing rail 660 is formed by bending a metal plate.

  In addition, the hitting ball firing device 650 includes a stopper cover 666 that covers the front surface of a stopper 664 capable of restricting a rotation end of the hitting hammer 656 toward the hitting position side, and a rotation of the hitting hammer 656 at a position away from the hitting position. A stopper 668 that regulates the end (the rotation end in the clockwise direction in front view). The hitting ball launching device 650 of this example has the stoppers 664 and 668 covered with rubber so as to be able to absorb the impact when the hitting hammer 656 abuts and to suppress the generation of noise due to the abutment. You can do it.

  As shown in FIG. 67, FIG. 102, and the like, when the hitting ball launching device 650 is attached to the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600, the upper end of the launching rail 660 is positioned substantially at the lower center in the left-right direction. It is located below the upper end of the rear wall portion 604, that is, below the game board placement section 606 (the lower side of the game board holding port 601), and the outside of the game board 4 held by the game board holding port 601. Between the lower end of the rail 1111 is formed a foul space 626 that extends downward with a predetermined width in the left-right direction. The hitting ball launching device 650 of the present example launches the game ball so as to jump over the foul space 626 on the left side in front view of the launching rail 660, thereby driving the game ball into the game area 1100 of the game board 4. Can be done. As described above, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball entrance 542e of the foul cover unit 540 is located below the foul space 626, and the gaming area 1100 A game ball that has not been driven into the ball but falls into a foul ball falls through the foul space 626, is received by the foul ball inlet 542e, and is discharged to the lower plate 302.

  Further, the hitting ball firing device 650 is configured such that the firing solenoid 654 is driven by the firing control unit 4120 with a driving strength corresponding to the rotation operation of the handle device 500, and the ball feeding solenoid 585 of the ball feeding unit 580. Is driven in synchronism with the driving of. Specifically, in the ball feeding unit 580 that supplies the game ball to the hitting ball firing device 650, when the ball feeding solenoid 585 is driven (ON), the ball feeding member 584 receives the game ball, and from that state, the ball feeding solenoid 585 is driven. Is released (OFF), the ball sending member 584 sends the received game ball to the hitting ball firing device 650 side, so that the firing solenoid 654 of the ball feeding unit 580 is driven almost simultaneously with the ball feeding solenoid 585. By performing (ON), the game ball can be smoothly supplied from the ball feed unit 580 to the rear end of the firing rail 660, and the game ball can be reliably fired by the rotation of the hitting hammer 656. ing.

[Prizeball unit]
Next, the prize ball unit 700 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 76 is a front perspective view of the prize ball unit in the main body frame, and FIG. 77 is a rear perspective view of the prize ball unit in the main body frame. FIG. 78 is an exploded perspective view of the prize ball unit exploded from the front, and FIG. 79 is an exploded perspective view of the prize ball unit exploded from the rear. Further, FIG. 80 is an exploded perspective view showing the relationship between the prize ball tank and the tank rail unit in the prize ball unit in an exploded view from behind. FIG. 81 is an exploded perspective view of the prize ball device in the prize ball unit, which is disassembled and viewed later. FIG. 82 is a rear view showing the relationship between the payout passage, the payout motor, and the payout rotating body in the prize ball device. FIG. 83 is a sectional view showing a rolling path of a ball in the prize ball unit.

  The prize ball unit 700 in the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment stores a game ball supplied from the island facility side to the pachinko machine 1 in an island facility in a game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and then issues a predetermined payout instruction. Is paid out to the upper plate 301 of the pachinko machine 1 based on the above. The prize ball unit 700 includes a prize ball base 710 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 600 and a prize ball tank 720 attached to the upper rear surface of the prize ball base 710 to receive and store game balls supplied from the island facility side. A tank rail unit 730 arranged below the prize ball tank 720 and arranged to send the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 to the downstream side, and a predetermined payout of the game balls aligned by the tank rail unit 730 The prize ball device 740 to be paid out based on the instruction and the game balls paid out by the prize ball device 740 can be guided to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit, and are paid out when the upper plate 301 is full of game balls. And a full tank branch unit 770 capable of branching a game ball to the lower plate 302 side.

  The prize ball unit 700 includes a prize ball passage cover 780 that closes a rear opening of the prize ball passage 715 formed in the prize ball base 710, and a grounding metal for grounding the tank rail unit 730 and the prize ball device 740. 782, an external terminal plate 784 attached to the rear surface of the prize ball base 710, and an external terminal plate cover 786 covering the rear side of the external terminal plate 784. The prize ball passage cover 780 in the prize ball unit 700 is for fixing the back cover 900 to the rear surface thereof on the rear surface thereof and for fastening the back cover 900 to the left side of the back cover engagement groove 780a as viewed from the rear. (See FIGS. 77 and 79, etc.).

  In this prize ball unit 700, a prize ball base 710 is formed in an inverted L-shape along the upper side and the left side of the main frame base 600 in a front view, and a prize ball tank 720 and a tank rail unit 730 are provided on the upper side. Along with the arrangement, a vertically long prize ball device 740 is disposed on the left side, and a full tank branch unit 770 is disposed below the prize ball device 740. An external terminal plate 784 and an external terminal plate cover 786 are disposed immediately above the prize ball device 740 and above the tank rail unit 730 so as to be adjacent to the prize ball tank 720.

  Next, the prize ball base 710 in the prize ball unit 700 is formed in an inverted L-shape in front view so as to substantially correspond to the upper side of the main body frame base 600 and the left side of the game board holding port 601 in front view as shown in the figure. And are integrally formed of a transparent synthetic resin. The prize ball base 710 extends substantially rearward along the outer periphery of the inverted L-shape, and extends substantially inward from the rear end of the peripheral wall 710a at a predetermined width. And a rear wall portion 710b. In this example, as shown in FIG. 79, the upper side of the peripheral wall portion 710a is formed to extend rearward from a position one step lower than the upper end of the prize ball base 710. The prize ball base 710 is located at a position where the rear wall portion 710b is deeper than the front end, so that when mounted on the main body frame base 600, it is possible to form a space in which the game board 4 can be stored. ing.

  Further, the prize ball base 710 includes a tank mounting portion 711 for mounting the prize ball tank 720 on the upper side of the upper side of the peripheral wall portion 710a, and an external terminal plate 784 and an external terminal plate disposed next to the tank mounting portion 711 (right side in rear view). An external terminal plate mounting portion 712 for mounting the cover 786, a plurality of mounting locking portions 713 for mounting the tank rail unit 730 on the rear side of the upper side lower end of the rear wall portion 710b, and a vertical side rear side of the rear wall portion 710b. A prize ball device mounting portion 714 for mounting a prize ball device 740 to the prize ball device 740; And a mounting locking portion 716 for mounting the full branch unit 770 at the lower end of the portion 710b.

  Further, the prize ball base 710 has an escape hole 717 for letting out a payout motor 744 or the like that penetrates in the front-rear direction at the position of the prize ball device attachment portion 714 of the rear wall portion 710b and projects forward from the prize ball device 740, and a back hole 717. And a back cover engaging groove 718 for fixing the cover 900. Although detailed description is omitted in the prize ball base 710, mounting holes and mounting bosses for mounting the prize ball tank 720, the prize ball device 740, etc., and the main frame base 600 are appropriately positioned. Is formed.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 80, the prize ball tank 720 of the prize ball unit 700 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with an open top, and has a bottom wall portion that is substantially rectangular in plan view. 721, an outer peripheral wall portion 722 that rises upward from the outer periphery of the bottom wall portion 721 and protrudes rearwardly from the bottom wall portion 721 in a rectangular shape only in a right rear portion (opening rear portion) in plan view, and an outer peripheral wall portion. A discharge port 723 formed by a portion of the right side rear wall 721 protruding rearward from the bottom wall 721 and opening downward, and a plate-like shape from the left side (axial support side) of the discharge port 723 in plan view to the left end of the prize ball tank 720. Eaves 724, a bar-shaped shaft 725 extending rearward from the lower left end of the eaves 724 in plan view, and prize balls formed near the base end of the shaft 725 and at both front ends of the outer peripheral wall 722. Tank 720 on prize ball base 710 An attachment portion 726 for attachment to the winning balls tank mounting portion 711, and a.

  In the prize ball tank 720, the outer periphery of the bottom wall portion 721 is surrounded by an outer peripheral wall portion 722, and a predetermined amount of game balls can be stored on the bottom wall portion 721. Also, the prize ball tank 720 is inclined such that the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 721 becomes lower toward the discharge port 723, so that the game balls on the bottom wall portion 721 roll toward the discharge port 723. It has become.

  The prize ball tank 720 includes two ball leveling members 727 rotatably supported by the shaft portion 725. As shown in the figure, the ball leveling member 727 has one end supported by the shaft portion 725 and holds a weight inside, and the other end is suspended by its own weight. . The ball leveling member 727 hangs down in a tank rail unit 730 described later, and can level and align game balls rolling in the tank rail unit 730. Further, the eaves portion 724 of the prize ball tank 720 is formed so as to cover substantially half of the upper side of the tank rail unit 730, so that it is possible to prevent game balls from overflowing from inside the tank rail unit 730, It is possible to prevent dust and the like from entering the rail unit 730.

  Although not shown in detail, the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 721 of the prize ball tank 720 is inclined so that the left side (the side far from the discharge port 723) in plan view becomes lower toward the right side. In a plan view, the right side (the side close to the discharge port 723) is formed so as to be inclined toward the rear discharge port 723. Thereby, the flow of the game ball can be made smooth, the occurrence of clogging of the ball in the prize ball tank 720 can be suppressed, and at the same time, from the discharge port 723 to the tank rail unit 730 side. Gaming balls can be discharged smoothly.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 80, the tank rail unit 730 in the prize ball unit 700 includes a tank rail 731 that is disposed below the prize ball tank 720 and extends long in the left-right direction. The tank rail 731 has a gutter-like shape having a predetermined depth with an open top and a width (depth) in which game balls can be aligned in two rows in the front-rear direction. The bottom is inclined so that is lower. The tank rail 731 has a discharge port 731a (see FIG. 83) that opens downward at the left (axial support side) end, a partition wall 731b that extends upward from the bottom at substantially the center in the front-rear direction, and a front lower surface. A plurality of locking projections 731c (see FIG. 78) that project downward and are locked from above from the mounting locking portion 713 of the prize ball base 710.

  This tank rail 731 has a right end (open side) end in front view located immediately below the discharge port 723 of the prize ball tank 720, and plays the game ball discharged from the discharge port 723 of the prize ball tank 720. After being received, it can be rolled leftward and delivered from the discharge port 731a to the prize ball device 740 side. In addition, the tank rail 731, that is, the tank rail unit 730 can be attached to the prize ball base 710 by locking the locking projection 731 c of the tank rail 731 with the attachment locking portion 713 of the prize ball base 710. ing.

  The tank rail unit 730 is connected to an alignment gear 732 rotatably supported above the discharge port 731 a of the tank rail 731, a gear cover 733 covering the upper part of the alignment gear 732, and a right end of the gear cover 733 in a front view. A ball holding plate 734 for closing the upper part of the tank rail 731, and a ball stopper piece that can be advanced and retracted into the tank rail 731 and can stop the game ball in the tank rail 731 from rolling toward the discharge port 731 a. 735, and an earth plate 736 disposed in the tank rail 731 so as to be able to contact a game ball in the tank rail 731. As shown in the figure, two aligning gears 732 are provided side by side in the front-rear direction so as to correspond to the two flow paths of the game balls partitioned in two rows by the partition wall 731b of the tank rail 731. The ball holding plate 734 includes a mounting portion 734a to which a ball stopper 735 is attached at an upper portion, and two slits 734b that penetrate in a vertical direction and through which a protrusion 735a of the ball stopper 735 can be inserted.

  In this tank rail unit 730, two ball leveling members 727 pivotally supported by the prize ball tank 720 are inserted from above into the upstream side (open side) of the ball pressing plate 734. The game balls discharged into the tank rail 731 from the discharge port 723 of the prize ball tank 720 by the ball leveling member 727 are leveled and arranged in two rows along the partition wall 731b. I can do it. Further, the ball holding plate 734 is for forcibly making the game balls that were not at one level by the ball leveling member 727 at one level, and the gap with the bottom of the tank rail 731 becomes narrower toward the discharge port 731a side. Attached to the tank rail 731 as described above.

  The alignment gear 732 of the tank rail unit 730 has a plurality of teeth formed on the outer periphery as shown in the drawing, and is axially supported so that the pitch of the teeth of the pair of alignment gears 732 is shifted by a half pitch. Thus, when the upper portion of the game balls flowing down the tank rail 731 flows down to the downstream outlet 723 while meshing with the teeth of the alignment gear 732, the game balls arranged in two rows are alternately one by one. It is sent to the device 740.

  In addition, the bottom of the tank rail 731 is formed with a narrow groove that penetrates vertically, so that foreign matter such as dust that rolls with the game ball in the tank rail 731 falls down from the narrow groove. Has become. The ground plate 736 disposed on the inner wall of the tank rail 731 is externally grounded via a grounding connector of the power supply board 851 via a grounding metal 782, though not shown in detail. Since the game ball contacts the ground plate 736 in the tank rail 731, the charged static electricity can be removed.

  In addition, the tank rail unit 730 rotates the ball stopper 735 rotatably attached to the attachment part 734a of the ball holding plate 734, so that the protruding piece 735a of the ball stopper 735 passes through the slit 734b so as to be inside the tank rail 731. , The two rows of flow paths in the tank rail 731 can be closed by the protruding pieces 735a, and the supply of game balls to the prize ball device 740 side can be stopped. I have.

  Further, in the tank rail unit 730, the tank rail 731 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, so that the state of a game ball or the like in the tank rail 731 can be visually recognized from the outside.

  Subsequently, the prize ball device 740 in the prize ball unit 700 pays out the game balls discharged and supplied from the discharge port 731a of the tank rail unit 730 to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 based on a predetermined payout instruction. Things. The prize ball device 740 includes a vertically extending unit base 741 mounted on the prize ball device mounting portion 714 of the prize ball base 710 as shown in FIGS. 81 to 83 and the like. As shown, the unit base 741 in the prize ball device 740 has a supply path which is open at the upper end on the rear side and extends to a position slightly lower than the center in the vertical direction at a width slightly larger than the outer shape of the game ball. A distribution space 741b communicating with the lower end of the supply passage 741a and having a space of a predetermined size, and communicating with a lower end (open side) of the distribution space 741b on the rear side on the rear side and bent in a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the rear. A prize ball passage 741c that opens on the left side surface, and a ball passage 741d that communicates with the lower end of the distribution space 741b on the right side (axial support side) in rear view and extends downward to open at the lower end are provided. The supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the prize ball passage 741c, and the ball ejection passage 741d of the unit base 741 are formed to be open rearward.

  The prize ball device 740 of this example includes a back cover 742 attached to the rear side of the unit base 741 and having a shorter length in the vertical direction than the unit base 741, and a plate-like motor support disposed below the back cover 742. A plate 743, a payout motor 744 disposed on the front side of the motor support plate 743, and fixed to the unit base 741 so that the rotating shaft 744 a projects rearward from the motor support plate 743, and a rotating shaft 744 a of the payout motor 744. A first gear 745 rotatably fixed and disposed on the rear side of the motor support plate 743, a second gear 746 meshed with the first gear 745 and supported by the unit base 741, and meshed with the second gear 746 A third gear 747 pivotally supported by the unit base 741, and a payout cycle which rotates integrally with the third gear 747 and is disposed in the distribution space 741b of the unit base 741. The body 748 and the payout rotating body 748 are fixed to the opposite side with the third gear 747 interposed therebetween so as to be integrally rotatable, and have a plurality (three in this example) of detecting slits 749a at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. 749.

  The prize ball device 740 includes a ball-out switch 750 attached to the unit base 741 for detecting the presence or absence of a game ball in the supply passage 741a, and a game ball attached to the unit base 741 and rolling in the prize ball passage 741c. A counting sensor 751 for counting the number, a rotation angle sensor 752 for detecting a detection slit 749a of a rotation detection board 749 that rotates integrally with the payout rotating body 748, and a rotation angle sensor 752 that is held and attached to the rear surface of the back cover 742. Sensor board 753, a payout motor 744, a ball cutout switch 750, a counting sensor 751, and a prize ball relay board 754 which is connected to the connection between the rotation angle sensor 752 and the payout control board 4110 and is attached to the rear surface of the back cover 742. It has.

  Further, the prize ball device 740 includes a substrate cover 755 that covers the prize ball relay substrate 754 from the rear side and is attached to the rear surface of the back cover 742, a first gear 745, a second gear 746, and a third gear 747 (a rotation detection board 749). ), A gear cover 756 that covers the sensor substrate 753 from the rear side and is attached to the rear surface of the unit base 741 with the back cover 742 interposed therebetween, and a supply passage that can contact a game ball rolling in the supply passage 741a of the unit base 741. A grounding metal 757, a screw 758 for fixing the dispensing motor 744 to the unit base 741 with the motor support plate 743 interposed therebetween and connecting the dispensing motor 744 to the ground, and a back cover 742 detachably supported on the unit base 741. And a detachable button 759 to be operated.

  In the prize ball device 740 of this example, the back lid 742 is attached to the rear side of the unit base 741, so that the supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the prize ball passage 741c, and the ball-extraction passage 741d are opened rear ends. Is to be closed. In addition, the unit base 741 has a shape in which a position below the upper end in the supply passage 741a once bulges rearward, and can relieve the momentum of the game balls discharged and dropped from the tank rail unit 730. I can do it. In addition, the unit base 741 is partially cut out on one side (left side in rear view) below a position of the supply passage 741a that swells rearward, and is outside the cutout position of the supply passage 741a. A switch mounting portion 741e for mounting the ball cutout switch 750, a sensor mounting portion 741f for mounting the counting sensor 751 in the middle of the prize ball passage 741c, and a front and rear side penetrating below the prize ball passage 741c. And a motor insertion hole 741g that is formed and through which the payout motor 744 can be inserted.

  By mounting the cut-out switch 750 on the switch mounting portion 741e of the unit base 741, the operating piece of the cut-out switch 750 forms a part of the side wall of the supply passage 741a, and exists in the supply passage 741a. When the operating piece is pressed by the playing ball, the presence / absence of a playing ball in the supply passage 741a can be detected by the ball cutout switch 750. In the state where the game ball in the supply passage 741a is not detected by the ball-out switch 750 (ball-out state), the payout motor 744 does not rotate, and it is determined that the ball is out of the player or the hall. You will be notified to the side.

  The unit base 741 is provided between the bearing 741h for supporting the second gear 746 and the third gear 747 (the payout rotating body 748) and the switch mounting part 741e and the distribution space 741b in the supply passage 741a. And a button support hole 741j which is provided on the unit base 741 and supports a detachable button 759 for detachably supporting the back cover 742. Have. The unit base 741 is configured such that the rear surface of the supply passage grounding metal 757 can be brought into contact with game balls in the supply passage 741a by mounting the supply passage grounding metal 757 to the grounding metal mounting portion 741i. The front surface of the supply passage grounding metal 757 is in contact with the rear end of the lower end of the U-shaped grounding metal 782, and the static electricity of the game ball rolling in the supply passage 741 a via the supply passage grounding metal 757 is removed. You can do it.

  The back cover 742 of the prize ball device 740 has a vertically long plate shape as a whole and an upper end bulging rearward. A button insertion hole 742a through which the detachable button 759 is inserted, a relay board mounting part 742b for mounting the prize ball relay board 754 and the board cover 755 at a substantially central rear surface in the vertical direction, and a relay board mounting on the upper part of the back cover 742. The sensor board mounting portion 742c is provided below the portion 742b to mount the sensor substrate 753, and a through hole 742d through which the payout rotating body 748 can pass. The relay board mounting portion 742b of the back cover 742 is formed so as to be located behind the grounding metal mounting portion 741i of the unit base 741.

  In this example, the motor support plate 743 of the prize ball device 740 is made of an aluminum plate and comes into contact with the metal motor housing of the payout motor 744, so that the heat generated by the payout motor 744 is removed. Heat can be easily dissipated.

  As shown in FIG. 82, the payout rotator 748 of the prize ball device 740 includes three concave portions 748a each having a size capable of accommodating one game ball at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. As the 748 rotates, the game balls supplied from the supply passage 741a are accommodated one by one in the recess 748a and can be paid out to the prize ball passage 741c or the ball removal passage 741d. In addition, three detection slits 749a of the rotation detection board 749 that rotates integrally with the payout rotating body 748 are formed at positions corresponding to the positions between the concave portions 748a of the payout rotating body 748, respectively. By detecting, the rotational position of the payout rotating body 748 can be detected.

  The prize ball device 740 of the present example is configured such that a payout command from the main control board 4100, a lending command from the CR unit 6, or the like is input to the payout control board 4110, or the payout motor is operated by operating the ball removal switch 860b. 744 rotates so that a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out to the player side (upper plate 301) or discharged to the game hall side (rear side of the pachinko machine 1). When the rotation shaft 744a of the dispensing motor 744 is driven to rotate, the first gear 745 fixed to the rotation shaft 744a rotates, and at the same time, the second gear 746 meshing with the first gear 745 rotates. The third gear 747 that meshes with the gears rotates. A payout rotator 748 is fixed to the front side of the third gear 747 and a rotation detection board 749 is fixed to the rear side thereof so that the payout rotator 748 and the rotation detection board 749 can be rotated together with the third gear 747. It is designed to rotate.

  As shown in FIG. 82, the payout rotator 748 of the prize ball device 740 is rotatably supported at substantially the center of the distribution space 741b. When the payout rotator 748 is rotated counterclockwise in rear view by the payout motor 744, the game balls in the supply passage 741a are paid out to the prize ball passage 741c side. The game balls paid out to the prize ball passage 741c side by the rotation of the body 748 are counted by the counting sensor 751 one by one and then transferred to the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710. On the other hand, when the payout rotating body 748 is rotated clockwise in rear view by the payout motor 744, the game balls in the supply passage 741a are paid out to the ball ejection passage 741d side. The game balls paid out to the side of the ball removal passage 741d by the ball removal passage 778 of the full tank branch unit 770, the body frame base ball removal passage 622 of the body frame base 600, and the board unit 800 from the lower end of the ball removal passage 741d. The pachinko machine 1 can be discharged to the rear outside through the opening 812 of the substrate unit base 810 and the discharge passage 842 of the power supply substrate box holder 840.

  Note that the unit base 741 in the prize ball device 740 of this example is formed of a transparent synthetic resin. Even when the unit base 741 is assembled to the main frame 3, the prize can be received from the front side of the main frame 3 through the transparent prize ball base 710. The inside of the supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the prize ball passage 741c, the ball ejection passage 741d, and the like of the ball device 740 can be visually recognized, and defects such as clogged balls can be easily found. .

  Next, the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 78, 79, and 83. The full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 is attached to the lower end of the prize ball base 710, and guides the game balls paid out to the prize ball passage 741c of the prize ball device 740 to the dish unit 300. When the game balls are full in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300, the game balls can be distributed to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 so as to pay out the game balls.

  This full tank branching unit 770 is fixed to a mounting upper part 716a of the prize ball base 710 at a substantially upper center in the front-rear direction, and is fixed to a rear surface of a lower end of the prize ball base 710 at a rear upper part. And a fixing portion 770b. The full tank branching unit 770 is suspended from the mounting locking portion 716 by locking the locking portion 770a to the mounting locking portion 716 of the prize ball base 710 from the rear side. By fixing the fixing portion 770b to the fixed portion 710 with a predetermined screw, the full branch unit 770 can be attached and fixed to the lower end of the prize ball base 710.

  As shown in the figure, the full-branch branching unit 770 is formed in a box shape such that the whole becomes lower from the rear end toward the front end, and is opened upward at substantially the center in the left-right direction at the upper end of the rear end. A prize ball receiving port 771 for receiving game balls flowing down the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710, and a branch space 772 disposed below the prize ball receiving port 771 and extending in the left-right direction (see FIG. 83). A normal passage 773 (see FIG. 83) for guiding the game ball from immediately below the prize ball receiving port 771 in the branch space 772 to the front side, and the game ball rolling in the normal passage 773 is discharged forward to be forwarded. 83. A normal ball exit 774 opened at the right end in front view, and a full tank passage 775 (FIG. 83) for guiding game balls toward the front from a position further to the right in rear view than immediately below the prize ball receiving port 771 in the branch space 772. three A), a full Tan passage 775 to release the rolling was game balls forward and full ball outlet 776 which opens in a front view the left side of the normal ball outlet 774, a.

  Further, the full tank branch unit 770 has a ball ejection opening 777 that opens upward at the left end of the rear end upper portion in front view and receives a game ball flowing down the ball ejection passage 741d of the prize ball device 740, A ball passage 778 (see FIG. 83) for guiding the game balls received by the withdrawal opening 777 to the front side, and the game balls rolled in the ball discharge passage 778 are discharged to the front, and a normal ball exit 774 at the left end in front view. And a ball ejection port 779 opened at a position behind the full tank exit 776.

  In the full tank branch unit 770 of this example, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 are respectively connected to the first cover of the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5. The game ball discharged from the normal ball outlet 774 is connected to the ball inlet 542a and the second ball inlet 542c so as to face and communicate with each other. The game balls supplied to the upper plate 301 and discharged from the full tank outlet 776 are supplied to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 through the second ball inlet 542c of the foul cover unit 540. Further, the ball ejection port 779 is formed so as to communicate with the upper right end of the main body frame base ball extraction passage 622 in the rear view of the main body frame base 600, and the game ball released from the ball ejection port 779 is used for the main body frame base 600. Is transferred to the main frame base base passage 622.

  In the full tank branch unit 770, the game ball paid out to the prize ball passage 741c of the prize ball device 740 is received at the prize ball receiving port 771 via the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710. In a normal state, the game ball that has entered the prize ball receiving port 771 hangs down the branch space 772 and flows down into the normal passage 773 disposed immediately below the prize ball receiving port 771. The game ball that has flowed into the normal passage 773 enters the first ball inlet 542a of the foul cover unit 540 from the normal ball outlet 774, passes through the first ball passage 542b, and passes from the first ball outlet 544a to the plate unit 300. It will be supplied to the upper plate 301.

  By the way, when the game balls are further paid out from the prize ball unit 700 (prize ball device 740) in a state where the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 is full of game balls, the first ball exit of the foul cover unit 540 is provided. The game ball that cannot be moved out of the upper plate 301 from the 544a stays in the first ball passage 542b of the foul cover unit 540, and eventually fills the normal passage 773 upstream through the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branch unit 770. become. In this state, the game ball that has entered the branch space 772 from the prize ball receiving port 771 cannot enter the normal passage 773, and starts moving in the branch space 772 in the horizontal direction and moves in the horizontal direction. The game ball enters the full tank passage 775, and from the full tank outlet 776, under the plate unit 300 via the second ball inlet 542c, the second ball passage 542d, and the second ball outlet 544b of the foul cover unit 540. It is supplied to the dish 302.

  It should be noted that the full tank branch unit 770 of the present example is entirely formed of a transparent synthetic resin, so that the inside can be visually recognized from the outside. This makes it possible to easily detect foreign matter such as dust and dirt that has entered the full-filled branch unit 770 and the occurrence of clogging without disassembling the full-filled branch unit 7700. .

  As described above, when the game balls are full in the upper plate 301, the full tank branch unit 770 of the present example automatically converts the game balls paid out from the prize ball device 740 until the full game balls are eliminated. The lower plate 302 can be supplied to the lower plate 302, so that the upper plate becomes full and the ball release button on the upper plate is operated as in a conventional pachinko machine, so that the game ball is not supplied to the hitting ball firing device. It is possible to avoid interrupting the driving of the game ball, to reduce the inconvenience during the game, and to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  Further, as described above, when the upper plate 301 is full, the full tank branching unit 770 branches directly below the prize ball device 740, that is, the path of the game ball paid out at the rear part of the pachinko machine 1. Since the game balls stayed in the normal passage 773 of the full tank branch unit 770 are paid out to the upper plate 301, the game balls in the upper plate 301 and the game balls in the normal passage 773 are hit by the ball launching device. The game ball can be directly driven by 650, and the storage amount of the game ball in the upper plate 301 is substantially the sum of the capacity of the upper plate 301 and the capacity of the normal passage 773. In other words, even if the capacity of the upper plate 301 is smaller than the capacity of the upper plate in the conventional pachinko machine, the capacity of the normal passage 773 is added, so that the same amount of game balls as the conventional one is stored in the upper plate 301. Can be. Therefore, by making the upper plate 301 smaller, the gaming window 101 in the door frame 5 can be relatively enlarged (widened), and the pachinko machine 1 having a wider gaming area 1100 can be played. The pachinko machine 1 having a high appeal to the player can be provided, and the wide gaming area 1100 can entertain the player.

  Further, since the two normal sphere outlets 774 and the full sphere outlet 776 of the full tank branch unit 770 are arranged side by side on the left and right, the door frame 5 is provided with only one storage dish so that the receiving port (first Even when only one ball entrance 542a and second ball entrance 542c) are provided, game balls can be sent to the door frame 5 side without changing the main frame 3 side (full tank branching unit 770). Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can correspond to the door frames 5 having different numbers of storage dishes without changing the flow path of the game balls (the full tank branching unit 770) in the main body frame 3. In addition, it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost required for the lineup of the pachinko machine 1 including the door frames 5 having different numbers of storage plates.

  Further, as described above, even if the number of storage trays provided in the door frame 5 is changed, it is possible to cope with the change without changing the main body frame 3. The cost can be reduced, and various pachinko machines 1 can be provided at low cost.

  Furthermore, game balls sent from the normal ball exit 774 to the door frame 5 side through the normal passage 773 are preferentially driven into the game area 1100, and the door frame 5 having only one storage tray is provided. Even if the game ball is exchanged, the game ball paid out from the prize ball device 740 can be immediately sent to the storage dish via the normal passage 773 and the normal ball outlet 774, so that the time lag from the payout to the storage can be reduced. In addition, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player due to a shortage of game balls for driving, and it is possible to sufficiently cope with the door frames 5 having different numbers of storage dishes. .

  As long as the upper plate 301 is not full, the game balls paid out from the prize ball device 740 are sent to the upper plate 301, so that the frequency of transferring the game balls stored in the lower plate 302 to the upper plate 301 is reduced. This makes it possible for the player to concentrate on the operation of hitting the game ball and the like, thereby suppressing the player's interest in the game from decreasing.

  Further, the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank outlet 776 of the full tank branching unit 770 are arranged side by side on the left and right, and even when the door frame 5 is provided with only one storage dish, The position of the lower end of the receiving port corresponding to the inlet 542a or the like can be set at the same height as the first ball inlet 542a or the like corresponding to the upper plate 301 of the door frame 5 provided with two storage dishes. It is possible to prevent the depth from becoming shallow, and it is possible to secure a sufficient amount of game balls by making the storage dish deep, so that the player can play the game without worrying about the amount of storage frequently. Can be performed, and the door frame 5 having a different number of storage trays can be accommodated without changing the body frame 3 side, thereby increasing the cost of changing the model of the pachinko machine 1 and the like. Can be suppressed.

  Further, the position where the full tank passage 775 in the full tank branch unit 770 branches from the normal path 773 is branched at a position as close as possible to the prize ball device 740, and the upper plate 301 is filled with game balls. Therefore, even if the game balls cannot be ejected from the normal ball exit 774, the amount of the game balls stored in the normal passage 773 from the normal ball outlet 774 to the branch position of the full tank passage 775 is increased as much as possible. As a result, the substantial storage amount of the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 can be increased as much as possible. In the case where only one storage dish is provided in the door frame 5, even if the storage dish is full of game balls and the game balls cannot be discharged from the normal ball exit 774 or the full ball exit 776, Since the position where the full tank passage 775 branches from the normal passage 773 is located as close as possible to the prize ball device 740, many game balls are provided not only in the normal passage 773 but also in the full tank passage 775. Can be stored, and the storage amount of the substantial game balls stored in the storage plate can be increased as much as possible. Therefore, even if the number of storage trays provided on the door frame 5 side is different, the storage amount of the game balls in each door frame 5 can be maximized without changing the main body frame 3 side (full branch unit 770). The number of pachinko machines 1 can be increased as much as possible, and the pachinko machine 1 can sufficiently cope with different door frames 5.

  The normal passage 773 and the full tank passage 775 of the full tank branch unit 770 have a width capable of rolling game balls in a plurality of rows. Therefore, even if the number of storage trays provided in the door frame 5 is different, it is possible to prevent the substantial storage amount including the game balls in the full branch unit 770 from being reduced. The pachinko machine 1 can correspond to the door frames 5 having different numbers of storage dishes without changing the flow path of the game balls in the main body frame 3.

  In addition, since the inside of the normal passage 773 and the inside of the full tank passage 775 can be visually recognized from the outside by forming the full tank branch unit 770 with a transparent resin, game balls are clogged in the full tank branch unit 770, causing a problem. In this case, the location of the clogged ball can be easily found from the outside of the full tank branching unit 770, and the malfunction can be eliminated at an early stage, and the operation rate of the pachinko machine 1 can be increased.

[Ball exit opening and closing unit]
Next, the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 84 is a front perspective view of the ball outlet opening / closing unit in the main body frame. FIG. 85 is a rear perspective view of the ball outlet opening / closing unit in the main body frame. FIG. 86 is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the ball outlet opening / closing unit in the main body frame and the foul cover unit in the door frame. The ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 in the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is mounted on a mounting portion 624 formed near the upper left end in front view of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600. When the door frame 5 is opened, the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 are closed, and the prize ball unit 700 is moved to the plate unit 300 of the door frame 5. Of the game ball can be cut off.

  The ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 is mounted on a mounting portion 624 formed near the upper left end of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600 in front view so as not to protrude from the upper end of the lower rear wall portion 604. A plate-shaped opening / closing shutter 792 held in a shutter base 791 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction, an opening / closing crank 793 for sliding the opening / closing shutter 792 in the vertical direction, and an opening / closing shutter 792 ascending via the opening / closing crank 793. And an opening / closing spring 794 that urges the shutter.

  The shutter base 791 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 includes a pair of vertically extending slide grooves 791a for holding the opening / closing shutter 792 slidably in the vertical direction so as to protrude upward from the upper end of the shutter base 791; A rectangular opening 791b penetrating in a front-rear direction between a pair of slide grooves 791a, and a crank disposed on a front surface of a left end portion in a front view and rotatably supporting an opening / closing crank 793 around an axis extending in a front-rear direction. A support portion 791c and a spring locking portion 791d for locking one end (upper end) of the opening / closing spring 794 are provided. The crank support portion 791c of the shutter base 791 is arranged on the left side of the opening 791b when viewed from the front, and the spring locking portion 791d is arranged near the upper left portion from the center in the left-right direction in the front view.

  Further, the opening / closing shutter 792 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 has a flat shutter body 792a and a pair of sliding projections (not shown) which project from the front surface of the shutter body 792a and slide in sliding grooves 791a of the shutter base 791. ), And a horizontally long rectangular drive hole 792b which is disposed between the pair of sliding protrusions and faces the opening 791b of the shutter base 791 and penetrates in the front-rear direction.

  Further, the opening / closing crank 793 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 includes a shaft portion 793a rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction by a crank supporting portion 791c of the shutter base 791, and a right outer periphery of the shaft portion 793a in a front view. A drive rod 793b extending outward to the right and extending to the vicinity of the center in the left-right direction of the opening 791b, and is slidably inserted into a drive hole 792b of the open / close shutter 792 projecting rearward from the distal end of the drive rod 793b. Drive pin 793c, a contact portion 793d extending downward from the outer periphery of the shaft portion 793a in a lower front view and having a spherical tip, and the other end (lower end) of an opening / closing spring 794 formed on the upper surface in the middle of the drive rod 793b. ), And a spring locking portion 793e for locking.

  In the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 of this example, the shutter base 791 and the opening / closing shutter 792 are formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and are disposed behind the opening / closing shutter 792 even when the opening / closing shutter 792 is raised. The normal sphere exit 774 and the full sphere exit 776 of the full tank branching unit 770 can be visually recognized.

  The ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 of this example is configured such that the driving pin 793c of the opening / closing crank 793 rotates vertically in an arc shape by rotating the opening / closing crank 793 about an axis extending in the front-back direction, and at the same time, the driving pin 793c The opening / closing shutter 792 slides up and down via the drive hole 792b into which the is inserted. In the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the contact portion 793d of the opening / closing crank 793 contacts the opening / closing operation piece 542g of the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5, The contact portion 793d is rotated in the clockwise direction in front view against the urging force of the opening / closing spring 794, and the drive pin 793c is rotated in the clockwise direction in front view together with the contact portion 793d. By moving, the open / close shutter 792 is lowered to open the normal sphere outlet 774 and the full sphere outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branching unit 770.

  When the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the main body frame 3 from this state, the contact between the contact portion 793d of the opening / closing crank 793 and the opening / closing operation piece 542g of the foul cover unit 540 on the door frame 5 is released, and the opening / closing crank 793 is opened. Is rotated counterclockwise in front view by the urging force of the opening / closing spring 794, and at the same time, the opening / closing shutter 792 is raised to close the normal sphere outlet 774 and the full sphere outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770. You can do it.

  In this way, in response to the opening and closing of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3, the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 in the winning ball unit 700 are automatically set by the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790. Since it can be opened and closed, even if the door frame 5 is opened with the game balls remaining in the full tank branch unit 770, it is possible to prevent the game balls from spilling from the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776. You can do it.

[Substrate unit]
Next, the board unit 800 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 87 is a front perspective view of the board unit in the main body frame, and FIG. 88 is a rear perspective view of the board unit in the main body frame. FIG. 89 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit as viewed from the front by disassembly. Further, FIG. 90 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit after disassembled and viewed from behind. FIG. 91 is a perspective view for explaining the operation of the upright wall of the power supply board box in the board unit. FIG. 92 (A) is a cross-sectional view of a terminal board box in the board unit, and FIG. 92 (B) is an exploded perspective view of the terminal board box in the board unit as exploded and viewed from the front. FIG. 93 (A) is a front view of the launch power supply board box, and FIG. 93 (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA shown in FIG.

  The board unit 800 in the main body frame 3 includes a board unit base 810 mounted on the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600, a speaker box 820 mounted on the left rear surface of the board unit base 810 when viewed from the front, and a board unit base 810. A power supply board box 830 mounted on the rear surface of the right end of the power supply board 810, a power supply box holder 840 mounted on the rear surface of the board unit base 810 so as to surround the power supply box 830 from the rear side, and a power supply box holder 840. A power supply board box 850 attached to the rear surface and having a rear end substantially flush with the rear end of the speaker box 820, and a payout control board box 860 attached to the rear surfaces of the power supply box box 850 and the speaker box 820. And dispensing control board box A terminal board box 870 attached to the rear surface of the speaker box 820 so as to cover the left end of the 860 in a front view, and a main relay terminal plate 880 and a peripheral relay terminal plate 882 attached to the front surface of the substrate unit base 810. Have.

  As shown, the board unit base 810 in the board unit 800 of the present example is formed to extend long in the left-right direction, and a substantially central portion in the left-right direction is stepped down one step and gradually gently inclines toward the left and right ends. A wall-shaped shielding wall portion 811 protruding forward from the front, an opening portion 812 that is disposed above the position of the shielding wall portion 811 that is one step lower in the left-right direction and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a lower side of the shielding wall portion 811 And a board mounting portion 813 formed on the front surface near the left end in front view for mounting the main relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882, and a rectangular shape horizontally long in the front-rear direction on the left side of the board mounting portion 813 in front view. A tubular slit portion 814 that penetrates, and a vertically long slit-like compound penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the lower speaker 821 of the speaker box 820 fixed to the rear surface. A through hole 815 of, and a rear view left (front view on the right) box accommodation portion 816 capable of accommodating the front is open rearwardly and upwardly to the rear surface of the upper firing power board box 830, the.

  The board unit base 810 is formed such that the shielding wall portion 811 is formed along the lower side of the main frame base baseball passage 622 formed on the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600. The game balls can be prevented from falling down from the base ball removal passage 622, and the strength of the board unit base 810 can be increased. Further, the board unit base 810 sends the game balls flowing down the main body frame base ball passage 622 to the power supply board box holder 840 arranged on the rear side of the board unit base 810 through the opening 812 penetrating in the front-back direction. You can do it.

  In the board unit base 810, the board mounting portion 813 for mounting the main-side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral-side relay terminal plate 882 is disposed at a position corresponding to the rectangular opening 614 in the main body frame base 600. In a state where the main relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral relay terminal plate 882 are mounted on the board mounting portion 813, the main relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral relay terminal plate 882 are positioned on the front side through the opening 614 of the main body frame base 600. It has come to face. Further, the board unit base 810 can transmit sound from the lower speaker 821 of the speaker box 820 to the front side satisfactorily by the duct portion 814 and the plurality of through holes 815.

  Further, the board unit base 810 is formed at a position corresponding to the front box housing section 843 of the power supply board box holder 840 in which the box housing section 816 is disposed on the rear side. Thus, an accommodating recess for accommodating the firing power supply board box 830 can be formed.

  The speaker box 820 in the board unit 800 is provided with a lower speaker 821 attached to the front side literally. The speaker box 820 has a horizontally long rectangular opening 822 formed on the left side of the lower speaker 821 when viewed from the front, while covering the rear side of the lower speaker 821 in a sealed manner. Although not shown in detail, the opening 822 communicates with the space on the rear side of the lower speaker 821 through a predetermined maze-shaped passage, thereby inverting the phase of the sound on the rear side of the lower speaker 821. The lower speaker 821 is a bass reflex type speaker box capable of emitting a deeper sound with respect to the caliber of the lower speaker 821. The duct portion 814 of the board unit base 810 is formed at a position corresponding to the opening 822 of the speaker box 820, so that sound radiated from the opening 822 can be transmitted well to the front. ing.

  The firing power supply board box 830 in the board unit 800 is formed in a box shape having an open rear, and includes a firing power supply board 831 attached so as to close the rear end opening. The launch power supply board box 830 accommodates various electronic components attached to the launch power supply board 831, and receives heat from electronic components and the like through slits 830 a formed on the upper and lower surfaces. Can be released to the outside.

  The firing power supply board box 830 is detached from above into a storage recess opened upward formed by a box storage portion 816 of the substrate unit base 810 and a front box storage portion 843 of a power supply board box holder 840 described below. It is to be accommodated as possible. Thus, in the state where the main body frame 3 is assembled, if a failure occurs in the firing power supply board box 830, the firing power supply board box 830 can be easily attached / detached from the front side of the main body frame 3 to be replaced or repaired. (See FIG. 67).

  Further, the firing power supply board box 830 will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 93, the firing power supply board 831 includes a DC / DC converter 831a and an electrolytic capacitor SC0 for charging and discharging power from the DC / DC converter 831a. , And the combined current obtained by combining the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current from the discharge from the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is supplied to the firing solenoid 654 of the hit ball firing device 650 to be driven. In the firing power supply board box 830, slits 830a as heat radiation holes are formed on upper and lower surfaces of the firing power supply board 831 to release heat generated by the DC / DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 mounted on the firing power supply board 831 to the outside. ing.

  In addition, since the electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the launch power supply board 831 is an electronic component that is more easily damaged by heat than the DC / DC converter 831a, a side surface of the launch power supply board box 830 where the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is disposed has a heat dissipation hole. A slit 830a is formed. Further, the firing power supply board box 830 has a partition wall 830b for dividing the internal space into two spaces, that is, a space for accommodating the DC / DC converter 831a and a space for accommodating the electrolytic capacitor SC0. Is formed integrally from the bottom surface to the edge of the end opening so as to connect to the inner wall of the lower surface. Thus, when the firing power supply board 831 is attached to the end opening of the firing power supply board box 830 to close the internal space of the firing power supply board box 830, the internal space of the firing power supply board box 830 is accommodated by the partition wall 830b to accommodate the electrolytic capacitor SC0. And a housing space 830d for housing the DC / DC converter 831a, the partition wall 830b is provided with a housing space 830c for housing the electrolytic capacitor SC0. , And a housing space 830d for housing the DC / DC converter 831a.

  The heat in the accommodation space 830c in which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is accommodated, that is, the heat generated by the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is a slit as a heat radiation hole formed in the upper surface, the side surface, and the lower surface that communicate the accommodation space 830c with the outside air. By being released to the outside via 830a, the released heat can be prevented from entering the storage space 830d in which the DC / DC converter 831a is stored. Therefore, heat generated by the electrolytic capacitor SC0 can be prevented from being transmitted to the DC / DC converter 831a. The heat in the housing space 830d in which the DC / DC converter 831a is housed, that is, the heat generated by the DC / DC converter 831a is radiated to the heat dissipation holes formed in the upper surface and the lower surface, respectively, which communicate the housing space 830d and the outside air. By releasing the heat to the outside through the slit 830a, it is possible to prevent this released heat from entering the housing space 830c in which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is housed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the heat generated by the DC / DC converter 831a from being transmitted to the electrolytic capacitor SC0.

  In the present embodiment, the DC / DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 for creating a merged current flowing through the firing solenoid 654 of the hit ball firing device 650 are not provided on the power supply board 851, but are launched separately from the power supply board 851. By providing the power supply board 831, the size of the firing power supply board 831 can be made smaller than the size of the power supply board 851. Therefore, the firing power supply board 831 can be easily handled due to its miniaturization, and the replacement work of the firing power supply board 831 can be facilitated, which can contribute to shortening of the time spent for the replacement work. In this replacement work, the state in which the firing power supply board 831 is still attached to the end opening of the firing power supply board box 830, that is, the entire firing power supply board box 830 can be replaced.

  Further, even if the pachinko machine 1 is operated and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 reaches the end of its life and the drive firing by the firing solenoid 654 suddenly becomes impossible to fire and the game must be interrupted, the work of replacing the firing power supply board 831 is easy. The interruption of the game can be eliminated at an early stage. Therefore, the inability to fire due to the life of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 can be eliminated very easily, and the interruption of the game due to the inability to fire can be resolved at an early stage to resume the game, thereby reducing the interest of the player. Can be suppressed.

  It should be noted that the electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the firing power supply board 831 deteriorates and reaches its life by being repeatedly charged and discharged, for example, at a frequency of 100 times per minute, every time when the driving solenoid is fired by the firing solenoid 654. On the other hand, the power supply board 851 creates a DC power supply from an AC power supply of an island facility such as a game hall, but does not repeatedly charge and discharge the same frequency as the electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the firing power supply board 831. , Compared with the launch power supply board 831, its life is extremely long. In other words, the firing power supply board 831 reaches the end of its life due to deterioration caused by the charging and discharging of the electrolytic capacitor SC0, whereas the power supply board 851 reaches its end of life due to aging. The DC / DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 for creating a combined current flowing through the firing solenoid 654 are not provided on the power supply board 851, but are provided on the launch power supply board 831 separate from the power supply board 851, so that the lifetime is improved. Electronic components associated with long-term aging can be concentrated on the power supply board 851. Thus, it is possible to prevent the electronic component from being replaced with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 having a short life due to the long-life aging.

  Further, since the launch power supply board 831 provided with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 for controlling the hitting ball launching device 650 is detachable from the front side through the game board holding port 601 for holding the game board 4, the capacity is changed in order to change the hitting characteristics. In order to attach or detach the firing power supply board 831, it is necessary to remove the game board 4 held in the game board holding port 601, and it is difficult to replace the firing power board 831. In this way, it is possible to prevent fraud that deliberately changes the optimized driving strength of the firing power supply board 831 that has been fraudulently modified, and to suppress fraud. The pachinko machine 1 can prevent the player who has been frustrated or the like from developing into a fraud such as a fraud.

  Further, since the firing power supply board 831 is detachable and can be replaced, even if the electrolytic capacitor SC0 or the like of the firing power supply board 831 is tampered with, the firing power supply board 831 is immediately replaced and the tampering is performed. It is possible to shorten the period of interruption of the game as much as possible, and it is possible to eliminate the frustration and disappointment due to the interruption of the game at an early stage, It is possible to prevent the interest of the player from playing the game from decreasing.

  Further, the firing power supply board 831 provided with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 in the firing control unit 4120 for controlling the hit ball firing device 650 is detachable from the front side through the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3 holding the game board 4. When the game board 4 is replaced due to a model change or the like, the launch power supply board 831 (the launch power supply board box 830) of the launch control unit 4120 can be easily replaced, which matches the concept of the new model to be replaced. By replacing the launching power supply board 831 provided with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 and the DC / DC converter 831a capable of realizing the hitting characteristics, the hitting characteristics of the hitting ball firing device 650 previously provided in the main body frame 3 can be changed to a new game. It can be matched to the board 4. Therefore, the driving characteristics of the game balls can be easily adjusted to the concept of the game board 4, so that the game using the new game board 4 can be sufficiently enjoyed, and a decrease in the interest of the player is suppressed. can do.

  Further, since the firing power supply board 831 of the firing control unit 4120 is detachable from the front side, it is not necessary to open the main body frame 3 with respect to an island facility such as a game hall when replacing the firing power supply board 831. The time and effort required for the exchange can be simplified, the exchange can be performed in a short time, and the burden on the game hall can be prevented from increasing. In addition, since the firing power supply board 831 (the firing power supply box 830) is detachable and can be replaced, the driving characteristics are changed as compared with the case where the entire firing control unit 4120 (dispensing control board 4110) is replaced. Can be reduced, and the burden on the hall side and the like can be reduced.

  Further, when changing the model or the like, only the game board 4 is replaced so that the door frame 5, the body frame 3 and the like can be used as they are, so that the fire control unit 4120 can be used for a long time. When the electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the firing power supply board 831 is deteriorated, the firing power supply board box 830 can be easily replaced from the front side as described above. Troubles can be eliminated, and the interruption period of the game can be shortened as much as possible, and at the same time, the interruption of the game can be frustrated or uncomfortable, so that it can be eliminated as soon as possible. It is possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from decreasing.

  Further, the launch power supply board 831 (the launch power supply board box 830) is supported through the game board holding opening 601 of the main body frame 3. In order to detach the firing power supply board 831, the launch power supply board 831 is held by the game board holding opening 601. Since it is necessary to remove the game board 4, even if a tool for performing wrongdoing enters through the gap between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3, the game board 4 causes the unauthorized tool to reach the firing power supply board 831. Can be prevented, and the launch power supply board 831 can be prevented from being tampered with, and the pachinko machine 1 can have a high defense force against tampering.

  Further, the firing power supply board box 830 is supported through the game board holding opening 601. Probably, the position for supporting the firing power supply board box 830 is behind the front surface of the main body frame 3; A space for supporting the board box 830 can be easily secured, and the pachinko machine 1 that supports the firing power supply board box 830 and has the above-described operational effects can be reliably realized.

  In addition, since the launching power supply board 831 is provided with the electrolytic capacitor SC0, and the launching power supply board 831 can be easily attached and detached from the front side of the main body frame 3, power is supplied from the electrolytic capacitor SC0 to the launching solenoid 654. Therefore, even if the load on the electrolytic capacitor SC0 becomes large and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is easily deteriorated, the electrolytic capacitor SC0 (the firing power supply board 831) can be easily replaced, and the trouble can be eliminated early to interrupt the game. The time can be shortened as much as possible, and the pachinko machine 1 can surely exhibit the above-described effects.

  Further, the power supply board box holder 840 in the board unit 800 receives the game ball discharged upward and released downward from the out ball discharge portion 1161 of the game board 4 to the front left side from the center right and left in the front view. A discharge ball receiving portion 841, a discharge passage 842 for guiding the game ball received by the discharge ball receiving portion 841 downward and discharging the same, and a front surface (right side in front view) of the discharge passage 842 and the discharge ball receiving portion 841. A front box receiving portion 843 which is opened forward and upward to accommodate the rear side of the firing power supply board box 830 and a front end of the power supply board box 850 which is formed so that the entire rear surface of the power supply box holder 840 is depressed forward. And a rear box accommodating portion 844 capable of accommodating.

  The power supply board box holder 840 is configured such that the open front end side of the discharge passage 842 is closed by the rear surface of the substrate unit base 810 and that the opening 812 of the substrate unit base 810 is located at a position desired for the discharge passage 842. The base frame base 600 is rolled through the main frame base baseball escape passage 622 formed on the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600 to pass through the opening 812 of the substrate unit base 810, and then to the rear of the substrate unit base 810. The game balls flowing down to the side and the game balls discharged from the out ball discharge portion 1161 of the game board 4 and received by the discharge ball receiving portion 841, which will be described in detail later, are passed through the discharge passage 842 to the rear side of the pachinko machine 1. It can be discharged downward.

  In addition, the power supply board box holder 840 is formed at a position corresponding to the box storage section 816 of the board unit base 810, and the box storage section 816 and the front box storage section 843 accommodate the emission power supply board box 830. A recess can be formed.

  Further, the power supply board box 850 in the board unit 800 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with an open front, and includes a power supply board 851 attached so as to close the front end opening. The power supply board box 850 accommodates various electronic components attached to the power supply board 851, and transfers heat from the electronic components and the like to the outside through a plurality of slits 850a formed on the upper and lower surfaces. Can be released to As shown in FIG. 90, a power switch 852 attached to the power board 851 faces the rear surface of the power board box 850.

  The power supply board box 850 includes a vertical wall protruding rearward along a lower side of an opening facing a rear side of a power supply terminal 853 (see FIGS. 88 and 90) attached to a lower side of the power switch 852 in the power supply board 851. The wiring cord 854 can be inserted between the portion 850b, the protruding portion 850c that protrudes rearward from both sides of the rear end of the standing wall portion 850b, and the outer periphery of the power supply board box 850 that is disposed in front of and below the standing wall portion 850b. And a wiring guide portion 850d that forms a simple gap. Although not shown in detail, the power supply terminal 853 mounted on the power supply board 851 has a locking piece for locking with the locking claw of the connector terminal 855, and the locking claw and the locking piece are provided. Is locked so that the connector terminal 855 does not come off from the power supply terminal 853.

  As shown in FIG. 91, the power supply board box 850 has the upright wall portion 850b with the connector terminal 855 of the wiring cord 854 connected to the power supply terminal 853 of the power supply board 851 and slightly behind the rear end of the connector terminal 855. It is formed so as to protrude. In the power supply board box 850 of this example, a connector is connected to the power supply terminal 853 of the power supply board 851 with the wiring cord 854 wrapping around from the lower front side of the power supply board box 850 to the rear end so as to be hooked to the rear end of the vertical wall portion 850b. The terminal 855 is connected.

  By the way, when the connector terminal from which the wiring cord is extended is connected to the connection terminal attached to the board, and the wiring cord is pulled toward the board, the connector terminal is connected by the tension from the wiring cord. Since the connector terminal is pressed against the terminal, there is a problem that it is difficult to remove the connector terminal from the connection terminal. However, according to the power supply board box 850 of this example, the front end side of the wiring cord 854 (the side opposite to the connector terminal 855 connected to the power supply terminal 853) faces the power supply board 851 side (front side with respect to the main body frame 3). Even if the connector 855 is pulled, the wiring cord 854 is routed around the connector terminal 855 so as to wrap around (turn back) by the standing wall portion 850 b projecting rearward from the connector terminal 855. It is possible to prevent a force such that the terminal 855 is pressed against the power supply terminal 853 from acting, and the connector terminal 855 connected to the power supply terminal 853 can be easily removed.

  In addition, since the power supply board box 850 has the protrusions 850c protruding rearward on both sides of the rear end of the standing wall 850b, even if the wiring cord 854 slides along the rear end of the standing wall 850b, the rear end of the rear wall 850b can be moved. The projections 850c provided at both ends can prevent the wiring cord 854 from sliding further outward, and can prevent the wiring cord 854 from coming off the standing wall 850b.

  Further, by inserting the wiring code 854 into the wiring guide portion 850d of the power supply board box 850, the wiring code 854 folded back by the standing wall portion 850b can be moved toward the standing wall portion 850b, so that the wiring code 854 is moved from the standing wall portion 850b. Can be made hard to come off, and the wiring code 854 can be immediately turned to the standing wall portion 850b side by the wiring guide portion 850d after the wiring code 854 is folded back at the standing wall portion 850b, so that a series of operations can be continuously performed. It can be performed, and the working process for assembling can be simplified.

  The power supply board box 850 and the power supply board box holder 840 are formed such that the front-back dimension of the power supply board box 850 and the power supply board box holder 840 is substantially the same as the front-back dimension of the speaker box 820. , The rear surface of the power supply board box 850 and the rear surface of the speaker box 820 are substantially flush with each other.

  Further, in this example, after the connector terminal 855 is connected to the power terminal 853 facing the opening of the power substrate box 850 covering the power substrate 851, the connector is formed by the upright wall portion 850b protruding rearward from the rear end of the connector terminal 855. Since the wiring cord 854 extending from the rear end of the terminal 855 is folded, the tension acting on the connector terminal 855 when the wiring cord 854 is pulled is applied to the power supply terminal to which the connection is fixed by a locking claw or the like. 853 can be actuated in such a direction as to cancel the connection with the power supply terminal 853 of the power supply board 851. Can be easily removed, and maintenance such as replacement of the substrate can be easily performed.

  Further, the wiring cord 854 is folded back by the vertical wall portion 850b of the power supply board box 850, and the wiring cord 854 can be bent more loosely than when there is no vertical wall portion 850b. It is possible to prevent an excessive force from acting on the 854 itself, and it is possible to prevent a problem that the wiring cord 854 is disconnected due to an excessive force.

  Further, an upright wall portion 850b is provided near the opening of the power supply board box 850 facing the power supply terminal 853. Since the upright wall portion 850b is located at a position adjacent to the power supply terminal 853, it is connected to the power supply terminal 853. It is possible to extend the wiring cord 854 extending from the connector terminal 855 to the rear side as straight as possible with respect to the connector terminal 855, and the joint between the connector terminal 855 and the wiring cord 854 is broken and cannot be forced. It is possible to prevent an excessive force from acting, and to prevent a problem such as disconnection from occurring.

  In addition, since the power supply board box 850 covering the power supply board 851 is provided with the upright wall 850b, it is not necessary to provide the power supply board 851 with the upright wall 850b, and the assembling work of the power supply board 851 can be facilitated. . In addition, since the power supply board 851 is covered with the power supply board box 850, it is possible to prevent dust, dust, and the like that may cause a problem from attaching to the power supply board 851, and to mount the power supply board 851 on the power supply board 851. Electronic components (e.g., resistors, capacitors, transistors, ICs, CPUs, memories, etc.) that are difficult to touch or replace, thereby increasing the defense against fraud. Has become.

  The direction in which the connector terminal 855 is connected to the power supply terminal 853 on the power supply board 851 is substantially perpendicular to the board surface (front-back direction), and the connector terminal 855 is mounted on the power supply board 851 with respect to the power supply terminal 853. Since the force applied when connecting or disconnecting the 855 can be easily applied to the surface of the power supply board 851, it is possible to prevent a shearing force from acting on the lead portion of the power supply terminal 853, and it is possible to prevent the lead portion from acting. Of the power supply terminal 853 from the power supply substrate 851 and the power supply terminal 853 can be prevented from being detached from the power supply board 851, and the pachinko machine 1 in which a failure hardly occurs can be provided.

  Further, since the connection between the connector terminal 855 and the power supply terminal 853 is fixed by the fixing means using the locking claws and the locking pieces, the wiring code 854 is folded back by the standing wall portion 850b, so that the wiring code 854 is formed. Even if a force is applied to the connector terminal 855 via the connector terminal 855 in such a direction as to release the connection with the power terminal 853, the connection between the connector terminal 855 and the power terminal 853 can be prevented from being released, and the connector can be prevented. The connection between the terminal 855 and the power supply terminal 853 can be reliably maintained, and problems such as poor contact and poor conduction can be prevented.

  Also, since the rear end of the rear end of the power supply board box 850 where the wiring code 854 is folded back is provided with the protruding portions 850c protruding rearward, the wiring cord 854 is folded back at the vertical wall 850b. Even when sliding along the side, the protrusions 850c provided at both ends of the side can prevent the wiring cord 854 from sliding further outward, and prevent the wiring cord 854 from coming off the upright wall 850b. The pachinko machine 1 which prevents the above and reliably achieves the above-described operation and effect can be embodied.

  In addition, the wiring guide 850d provided in the power supply board box 850 causes the wiring cord 854 folded back by the standing wall 850b to be moved toward the standing wall 850b, so that the wiring cord 854 is not easily detached from the standing wall 850b. Thus, the above-described operation and effect can be reliably achieved, and the wiring code 854 is folded back by the standing wall portion 850b, and immediately the wiring code 854 is moved toward the standing wall portion 850b by the wiring guide portion 850d. This makes it possible to perform a series of operations continuously, thereby simplifying the operation steps related to assembly and suppressing an increase in cost.

  The dispensing control board box 860 in the board unit 800 is a thin box-shaped box base 861 that is horizontally long and has an open rear, and a thin box-shaped cover that fits into the box base 861 from the rear and is open at the front. 862, and a payout control board 4110 (see FIG. 118) attached to the rear surface of the box base 861 and covered by the cover 862. The dispensing control board box 860 includes a plurality of separation and cutting portions 863 protruding outward from the left end in rear view and formed on both the box base 861 and the cover 862. The box base 861 and the cover 862 are caulked and fixed. As a result, in order to separate the box base 861 and the cover 862, the box base 861 and the cover 862 cannot be separated without cutting the separation cutting section 863. When the dispensing control board box 860 is opened, the trace is left. . Therefore, it can be determined whether or not the payout control board box 860 has been opened and closed improperly. In this example, the payout control board box 860 can be opened and closed only once for inspection or the like.

  In the dispensing control board box 860, an error release switch 860a, a ball removal switch 860b, an inspection output terminal 860c, and the like attached to the dispensing control board 4110 face the rear through the cover 862 (see FIG. 66). ). In the payout control board box 860, various connection terminals for connecting to the main control board 4100 and the like face rearward through the cover 862.

  Further, the terminal board box 870 of the board unit 800 is attached to the rear surface of the speaker box 820, and has a board mounting portion 871a formed on the upper rear surface on the left side in rear view and a board cover mounting portion 871b formed on the rear surface on the right end in rear view. To the board base 871, the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 in which the peripheral panel relay terminal 872 a is mounted on the substrate mounting portion 871 a of the substrate base 871 from the rear side, and the substrate cover mounting portion 871 b of the substrate base 871. A connection terminal plate cover 873 having an opening 873b extending from the rear wall portion 873a and extending vertically, and a CR unit connection terminal 874a facing rearward from the opening 873b of the connection terminal plate cover 873 are mounted on the rear surface. Unit connection terminal plate 8 supported in the connection terminal plate cover 873 4, a, a substrate box cover 875 covering the rear side of the substrate base 871 together with the connection terminal plate cover 873.

  The peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 in the terminal board box 870 connects the pachinko machine 1 to a frequency display for displaying the operation state of the pachinko machine 1 provided on the island facility side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is for connecting the ball lending machine (also referred to as the CR unit 6) installed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 to the pachinko machine 1. Note that the board base 871, the connection terminal board cover 873, and the board box cover 875 in the terminal board box 870 are each formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and are provided with external peripheral panel relay terminal boards 872 and CR unit connection terminals from the outside. The plate 874 and the like can be visually recognized. On the rear surface of the board box cover 875, the contents of the error code displayed on the frequency display or the CR unit 6 installed on the island facility side when a problem such as ball clogging occurs in the pachinko machine 1 is displayed. The displayed status display sticker 876 is attached.

  As shown in FIG. 92, the board base 871 in the terminal board box 870 has a board mounting portion 871a formed in a thin box shape with an open rear end. The board base 871 is formed at the upper inside of the board mounting portion 871a and fixes to the upper end of the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 (not shown). A terminal board box locking claw 871i for locking the lower end of the terminal plate 872 is provided, and the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 is detachably held from the rear side by the fixing piece and the terminal board box locking claw 871i. You can do it.

  Further, the board base 871 has a board cover mounting portion 871b formed in a thin box shape opened to the rear side, and the inner circumference thereof is large enough to insert the outer circumference of the connection terminal plate cover 873. The inner peripheral wall is an outer piece 871c extending in the front-rear direction. The board base 871 extends in a pair of fixing holes 871d penetrating the outer piece 871c on the right side in the rear view in the left-right direction, and extends rearward from the bottom wall of the board cover attaching section 871b and contacts the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. It has two protruding ridges 871e extending in the vertical direction, and a locking hole 871f disposed on the left outside of the board cover mounting portion 871b as viewed from the rear and penetrating in the front-rear direction. The projecting ridge 871e of the board base 871 is in such a state that the amount of protrusion to the rear is slightly smaller than that of the outer piece 871c and, as shown in FIG. It is arranged so that it may become a position near.

  Further, the board base 871 is disposed on the right rear surface of the board cover mounting portion 871b at a rear surface on the right side as viewed in the vertical direction, and is disposed in a vertical direction so as to rotatably support the board box cover 875. And a rectangular cylindrical locking portion 871h that is disposed on the rear surface in the vicinity of the portion and extends in the front-rear direction.

  The connection terminal plate cover 873 in the terminal board box 870 surrounds the outer periphery of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and can be inserted into the board cover attachment portion 871b surrounded by the outer piece 871c of the board base 871. A rear wall portion 873a for closing a rear end of the outer wall portion 873c; a rectangular opening portion 873b extending vertically through the rear wall portion 873a; and a rear wall portion substantially along the inner periphery of the opening portion 873b. An inner wall portion 873d extending forward from 873a (toward the substrate base 871), and a CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is held so that the front end of the inner wall portion 873d is in contact with the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. And a pair of claw-shaped substrate holding portions 873e formed on the 873c.

  Further, the connection terminal plate cover 873 is disposed at a position corresponding to the plurality of internal connection terminals 874b attached to the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, and has a plurality of openings 873f penetrating through the rear wall portion 873a. A box-shaped protection portion 873g that covers the rear side of the opening 873f disposed at the center and is open on the left side in rear view, and a board base 871 extending outward (rightward) from the right end in rear view of the outer wall portion 873c. And a pair of fixing pieces 873h that can be inserted into the fixing holes 871d, and an elastic claw-shaped engaging member formed at the left end of the outer wall portion 873c when viewed from the rear and can be locked to the locking hole 871f of the substrate base 871. And a stop claw piece 873i. Although not shown, an inner wall portion 873d extending forward is also formed above and below the inner periphery of the central opening 873f provided with the protection portion 873g.

  The connection terminal plate cover 873 has a thin box shape with the front side opened by the outer wall portion 873c and the rear wall portion 873a. The connection terminal plate cover 873 can prevent the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 from moving rearward by the front end of the inner wall portion 873d by inserting the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 into the inside from the opened front side. In addition, the pair of substrate holding portions 873e can restrict the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 from moving forward, so that the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 can be detachably held. Has become. Further, the connection terminal plate cover 873 inserts the fixing piece 873h into the fixing hole 871d of the board base 871 and then locks the locking claw piece 873i into the locking hole 871f of the board base 871 to thereby fix the board. The base 871 can be detachably attached to the board cover attaching portion 871b.

  The CR unit connection terminal plate 874 in the terminal board box 870 has a CR unit connection terminal 874a on the front side (rear side) for connecting the pachinko machine 1 to the CR unit 6 installed on the island facility side of the game hall. In addition, a plurality of internal connection terminals 874b for connecting to the payout control board 4110, the ball lending unit 360, and the like are provided. In the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 of this example, as shown, the CR unit connection terminal 874a is a D-sub connector having a locking function, and the internal connection terminal 874b is a square two-piece connector. I have.

  The board box cover 875 of the terminal board box 870 is formed in a thin box shape having a size substantially covering the entire rear surface of the board base 871 and entirely open to the front side. A pair of shaft portions 875a rotatably supported by the bearing portion 871g, through holes 875b corresponding to the opening portions 873b in the connection terminal plate cover 873, and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and forward from both left and right ends of the through holes 875b. And a locking piece 875d that is locked to the locking portion 871h of the substrate base 871.

  The board box cover 875 is capable of opening and closing the rear surface of the board base 871 together with the connection terminal board cover 873 by pivotally supporting the pair of shafts 875a on the bearings 871g of the board base 871. I have. The board box cover 875 has a length such that an impact wall 875c closer to the shaft portion 875a (a shaft-supported side) extends to the rear surface of the substrate base 871, and an impact wall farther from the shaft portion 875a. 875c extends to the rear surface of the connection terminal plate cover 873. That is, in the terminal board box 870 of this example, when the board box cover 875 is closed, the front ends of the respective impact walls 875c are substantially in contact with the rear faces of the board base 871 and the connection terminal board cover 873. It has become.

  In the terminal board box 870 of this example, since the CR unit connection terminal 874a of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is a D-sub connector, as shown in FIG. The main body of the connection terminal 874a is in a floating state, and the lead portion extending from the CR unit connection terminal 874a is also exposed to the outside on the rear surface side of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Further, the internal connection terminal 874b of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is a rectangular two-piece connector, and is attached so as to be fitted and connected from the rear as shown in the figure.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 92, the terminal board box 870 of this example, when assembled, has the outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal board cover 873 and the board base 871 in the direction along the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal board 874. 871e and the outer piece portion 871c, and the outer wall portion 873c and the inner wall portion 873d of the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the shaft portion 875a of the board box cover 875 in the direction along the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Since the side impact walls 875c are present, a multi-layered barrier is constructed, and the cross-sectional shape of the boundary between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the substrate base 871 has a meandering crank shape. It has become. Therefore, for example, even if an attempt is made to insert an illegitimately flexible tool into the boundary (boundary) between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the board base 871, the tool does not bend along the boundary, and the CR unit connection terminal. Intrusion of an unauthorized tool from a direction along the surface of the plate 874 can be surely prevented, and illegal act on the CR unit connection terminal 874a provided on the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 can be reliably prevented. It has become.

  Further, in this terminal board box 870, the front end of the inner wall portion 873d of the connection terminal plate cover 873 comes into contact with the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, so that the CR unit mounted as the CR unit connection terminal 874a. Even if a D-sub connector having a gap formed with the connection terminal plate 874 is used, the outer periphery of the lead portion exposed by the inner wall portion 873d can be covered, and illegal acts can be prevented. It has become.

  The terminal board box 870 has a pair of shaft portions 875a on the board box cover 875 rotatably supported on the rear surface of the board base 871, on the shaft portion 875a side of the through hole 875b where the CR unit connection terminal 874a faces. An impact wall 875c having a length extending between them is provided. Since the strength and rigidity of the board box cover 875 can be increased by the impact wall 875c, a driver or the like is inserted between the board box cover 875 and the board base 871. Even if an attempt is made to form a gap between the pair of shaft portions 875a, it is possible to prevent the board box cover 875 from being distorted and prevent the gap from being formed, making it more difficult to perform wrongdoing and reducing the deterrent. It can be expensive.

  Further, in the terminal board box 870 of this example, the rear side of the internal connection terminal 874b near the center of the CR unit connection terminal board 874 is covered with the protection portion 873g of the connection terminal board cover 873 and the board box cover 875. Therefore, an illegal act of inserting a needle-like electrode through the gap between the connector body of the connection terminal and the wiring cord in a state where the connection terminal on the wiring cord is fitted and connected to the internal connection terminal 874b formed as a two-piece connector will be performed. In this case, the insertion of the electrodes can be prevented by the protection portion 873g and the board box cover 875, and illegal acts on the internal connection terminals 874b can be prevented.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the terminal board box 870 containing the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is attached to the rear surface of the main body frame 3, so that the outer frame 2, the main body frame 3, and the front side of the pachinko machine 1 are mounted. Even if an illegal tool is inserted through the gap or the like and the tip of the illegal tool is made to enter the back side of the pachinko machine 1, the terminal board box 870 protects the housed CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent improper act on the CR unit connection terminal plate 874.

  In a state where the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is accommodated in the terminal substrate box 870, the outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the substrate are arranged in the direction along the front surface (back surface of the substrate) of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. The ridge 871e and the outer piece 871c of the base 871 and the outer wall 873c and the inner wall 873d of the connection terminal plate cover 873 in the direction along the rear surface (the surface of the substrate) of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Since the collision wall 875c of the box cover 875 exists, a multi-layered barrier is constructed, and the cross-sectional shape of the boundary between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the substrate base 871 has a meandering crank shape. In an analogy, an attempt is made to allow an illegal and highly flexible tool to enter between (boundary) between the connection terminal board cover 873 and the board base 871. In addition, the tool does not bend along the boundary, and it is possible to reliably prevent an unauthorized tool from entering from the direction along the surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that can surely prevent the wrongdoing of the unit connection terminal 874a and the internal connection terminal 874b.

  In addition, since the front end of the inner wall portion 873d of the connection terminal plate cover 873 is configured to contact the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, each lead portion is exposed between the substrate and the CR unit connection terminal 874a. Even with the use of the D-sub connector, the outer periphery of the exposed lead portion can be covered by the inner wall portion 873d, and it is possible to surely prevent fraud.

  Further, one end of the terminal board box 870 is rotatably supported by the rear face of the board base 871 to rotatably cover the rear face of the connection terminal board cover 873 and the opening 873b of the connection terminal board cover 873. And a board box cover 875 having a plate-like impact wall 875c extending forward from the axially supported side end of the through hole 875b to the rear surface of the board base 871. Even if a screwdriver or the like is inserted between the portions of the box cover 875 that are pivotally supported with respect to the board base 871 to form a gap and allow an unauthorized tool to enter, the improper tool is connected by the contact wall 875c. It can be prevented from reaching the plate cover 873 (CR unit connection terminal plate 874) side, thereby preventing improper conduct. Kill.

  Further, in order to take out the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 in the terminal board box 870, it is necessary to open the board box cover 875 and then open the connection terminal plate cover 873, which makes it difficult to take out the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Deterrence against fraudulent acts. Further, the strength and rigidity of the board box cover 875 can be increased by the collision wall 875c. Therefore, even if a driver or the like is inserted between the board box cover 875 and the board base 871 to form a gap, the board box cover 875 can be formed. Can be prevented from being distorted, thereby preventing the formation of a gap.

  Further, even if an illegal act of inserting a needle-like electrode through the gap between the connector body and the wiring cord at the terminal on the wiring cord connected to the internal connection terminal 874b of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 can be performed, The rear side of the opening 873f, that is, the rear side of the opening of the gap along the wiring cord of the connector main body is covered with the protection portion 873g and the board box cover 875, so that the outside of the terminal board box 870 ( A needle-like electrode cannot be inserted into the gap of the connector main body from the rear side), and it is possible to prevent improper conduct from being performed on the terminals of the connected wiring cord, and to have a high crime prevention ability. It can be.

  Further, since the outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal plate cover 873 is provided with the substrate holding portion 873e for holding the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, and the outer wall portion 873c is extended forward from the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Even if a driver or the like is inserted between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the substrate base 871 to form a gap in order to perform a wrongdoing, the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 moves rearward together with the connection terminal plate cover 873. Therefore, the positional relationship between the front end of the outer wall portion 873c and the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 in the connection terminal plate cover 873 does not change, and the outer periphery of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is formed on the outer wall portion 873c (connection terminal plate cover 873). The CR unit connection terminal on the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 can be kept protected by Can not be performed spamming like 74a, it is possible to prevent illegal acts targeting CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and CR unit connection terminals 874a and the like.

  Furthermore, since the terminal board box 870 is formed of a transparent resin and the inside of the terminal board box 870 can be visually recognized from the outside, the terminal board box 870 can be viewed from outside the terminal board box 870 without disassembling. Whether an incorrect tool is inserted into the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872, or the like housed therein, or whether the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 or the like itself has been replaced with an incorrect one. Alternatively, it is possible to easily check whether electronic components (for example, ROM, IC, resistor, capacitor, etc.) mounted on the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 or the like have been replaced with unauthorized ones. In addition, it is easy to detect wrongdoing, and it is easy to detect wrongdoing. Is to be able, it can increase the deterrent to fraud.

  In addition, since the terminal board box 870 is attached to the back surface of the main body frame 3 so that the surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 or the like faces in the rear direction, the terminal frame box 870 is attached to the outer frame 2 during maintenance or the like. When the main body frame 3 is rotated to the front side and the rear side of the main body frame 3 appears, the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and the like accommodated in the terminal board box 870 are oriented to the worker side (player side). The unit connection terminal plate 874 and the terminal board box 870 can be easily inspected.

  The main relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral relay terminal plate 882 of the board unit 800 are connected to a peripheral control unit 4140 provided on the game board 4 attached to the main body frame 3, a payout control board 4110 of the board unit 800, and a door frame. 5 for relaying the connection with the handle device 500 provided in the device 5, each decorative board, the operation unit 400, and the like. The main relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral relay terminal plate 882 have a plurality of connection terminals for connection to the body frame 3 side and the door frame 5 side, and a board formed on the front surface of the board unit base 810. By attaching to the attachment portion 813, these connection terminals are directed to the front side from the front surface of the main body frame base 600.

  The main-side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral-side relay terminal plate 882 are so formed that their front sides are covered by a relay terminal plate cover 692 attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600 as shown in FIGS. At the same time, only the connection terminals for connecting to the door frame 5 side face the front side through the opening 692a of the relay terminal plate cover 692, and the wiring 196 is connected to these connection terminals. (See FIGS. 1 and 28).

  The main relay terminal plate 880 is provided with a ball lending button 361, a return button 362, a lending remaining display section 363, and a rotation position detecting sensor of the handle device 500 in the dish unit 300 arranged on the door frame 5 side. 512, a touch sensor 516, a firing stop switch 518, and a connection between the full tank detection sensor 550 of the foul cover unit 540 and the payout control board 4110 arranged on the main body frame 3 side. Further, the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882 is attached to each of the decorative units 200, 240, and 280 arranged on the door frame 5 side and each of the decorative boards 430, 432 and the operation unit 400 provided in the plate unit 300 and the operation unit 400. It is for relaying the connection between the provided dial drive motor 414 and the sensors 432a, 432b, 432c and the peripheral control unit 4140 of the game board 4 arranged on the main body frame 3 side.

[Back cover]
Subsequently, the back cover 900 in the main body frame 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 94A is a front perspective view of the back cover in the main body frame, and FIG. 94B is a rear perspective view of the back cover in the main body frame. FIG. 95 is an enlarged sectional view showing a portion of the fastening mechanism in the back cover, and FIG. 96 is an exploded perspective view of the fastening mechanism in the back cover as seen from the rear side. The back cover 900 of the present example is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, so that the inside of the main body frame 3 can be viewed from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1.

  The back cover 900 in the main body frame 3 covers the back side of the game board holding opening 601 (the game board 4 attached to the main body frame 3) for holding the game board 4 in the main body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable. . The back cover 900 includes a plate-shaped main body 902 that closes a rear opening of the game board holding opening 601, a side 904 that extends forward from a right side of the main body 902 in a front view, and a front end of the side 904. A plurality of support pins 906 that are arranged side by side in the vertical direction, project downward, and are supported by the back cover support 623 of the main body frame base 600, and prize balls formed on the upper left and lower left sides of the main body 902 when viewed from the front. An engaging piece 908 that engages with the back cover engaging groove 718 of the base 710 and a back cover engaging groove 780a of the prize ball passage cover 780, respectively, and a back cover 900 near the lower engaging piece 908 is attached to the main body frame. 3 is provided with a fastening mechanism 920 for fastening the opening / closing unit 3 so that it cannot be opened and closed.

  As shown in FIGS. 95 and 96, the fastening mechanism 920 of the back cover 900 has a circular insertion hole that penetrates in the front-rear direction on the left side in the rear view of the lower locking piece 923 a of the main body 902 of the back cover 900. 921, a vertically-long rectangular locking port 922 which is disposed at a predetermined distance to the left in the rear view of the insertion hole 921 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a locking section which is elastically locked to the locking port 922 from the rear side. A plate-shaped guide member 923 having a piece 923a at one end and a horizontally long slot 923b corresponding to the insertion hole 921 at the other end, and a main body 902 which is inserted through the elongated hole 923b of the guide member 923 from the rear side. A fastening member 924 having a male screw portion 924a screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b of the prize ball passage cover 780 through the insertion hole 921, and a guide member 92 attached to the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924. A holding member 925 mounted so as to sandwich the, and a. The guide member 923 in the fastening mechanism 920 is formed of a soft synthetic resin, and is easily bent.

  Further, the fastening mechanism 920 is configured such that the locking piece 923a of the guide member 923 is loosely locked to the locking opening 922 of the main body 902, and the guide member 923 is within a predetermined range. It can be idle. Further, the fastening mechanism 920 is in a state where the fastening member 924 is supported by the guide member 923 through the elongated hole 923b by the disk-shaped holding member 925 attached to the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924, and along the elongated hole 923b. It can slide in the left-right direction and does not fall out of the long hole 923b. When the locking piece 923a of the guide member 923 is locked from the rear side to the locking opening 922 of the main body 902 by the fastening mechanism 920, the fastening member 924 protruding forward through the elongated hole 923b of the guide member 923 is formed. The male screw portion 924a is inserted into the insertion hole 921 of the main body 902.

  The back cover 900 of this example can open and close the rear opening of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3 by supporting the pivot pin 906 on the rear cover supporting portion 623 of the main body frame base 600. The engagement pieces 908 are engaged with the back cover engagement grooves 718 and 780a of the main body frame base 600 and the prize ball passage cover 780, whereby the closed state can be achieved. When the back cover 900 is closed, the insertion hole 921 of the fastening mechanism 920 and the back cover fastening hole 780b of the prize ball passage cover 780 substantially coincide with each other.

  When the back cover 900 is closed, the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 inserted into the insertion hole 921 from the rear side to the front side is not naturally screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b. Even when the cover 900 is closed, the distal end of the male screw portion 924a stops at the rear end of the back cover fastening hole 780b, and the fastening member 924 projects rearward from the main body 902 of the back cover 900. By the way, in this example, since the fastening member 924 is supported in the long hole 923b of the guide member 923 locked by the main body 902 of the back cover 900, the fastening member 924 does not fall off the back cover 900, The state of being located on the rear side of the main body 902 is maintained.

  Then, from this state, by inserting the tip of the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 into the back cover fastening hole 780b and rotating the fastening member 924, the male screw portion 924a is screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b (screw). The back cover 900 can be fastened and fixed. Note that the fastening mechanism 920 of the present example allows the fastening member 924 to be screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b even if the guide member 923 supporting the fastening member 924 is inclined with respect to the main body 902. Since it is supported by the elongated hole 923b, the fastening member 924 (male thread portion 924a) can be positioned straight with respect to the axis of the back cover fastening hole 780b, and the fastening member 924 can be favorably inserted into the back cover fastening hole 780b. It can be screwed in.

  Further, in this example, the back cover 900 is fastened and fixed to the main body frame 3 side by one fastening mechanism 920, so that the fastening or fastening can be easily performed only by operating one fastening member 924. It can be released, and the labor involved in opening and closing the back cover 900 can be simplified to improve maintainability.

  Further, the back cover 900 has a connection notch 910 that is cut upward in a rectangular shape at the lower right end of the main body 902 in front view, and a confirmation opening that penetrates in a rectangular shape above the connection notch 910 in front view. 912, and a check notch 914 cut into a rectangular shape at the lower left corner of the main body 902 when viewed from the front.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the back cover 900 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, and through the connection notch 910, the RAM clear switch 4100c of the main control board box 1170 and the main control input circuit 4100f of the main control board box 1170 in the game board 4. Etc. come to the rear side. The back cover 900 has a board management seal 1178 (see FIG. 105) attached to the rear surface of the main control board box 1170 through the confirmation opening 912 facing the rear side. The sealing portion 1176 of the main control board box 1170 faces through the cutout portion 914. Thereby, even if the back cover 900 is not opened with respect to the main body frame 3, it is possible to check the operation, the appearance, and the management state of the main control board box 1170 and the main control board 4100.

  The back cover 900 is formed with a plurality of slits 916 penetrating the main body 902 and the side portions 904, and the heat generated in the game board 4 and the like through the slits 916 is transmitted to the main body frame 3 (the pachinko machine 1). It can be discharged to the outside on the rear side. As shown in the figure, a plurality of through-holes 918 are provided at predetermined positions in the left-right direction that are wide and extend vertically in the left-right direction at a position slightly to the left from the center when viewed from the front. These through holes 918 allow the back cover 900 to be closed with respect to the main frame 3 and the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the second The liquid crystal display device 3252 is located on the rear side of a cooling fan for cooling the peripheral control unit 4140 and the liquid crystal control unit 4150 provided on the rear side of the liquid crystal display device 3252. It can be exhausted. Incidentally, the width of the through-hole 918 is smaller than the outer diameter of the game ball, so that the game ball does not enter the pachinko machine 1 through the through-hole 918.

  Thereby, in this example, the fastening member 924 for fastening the back cover 900 closing the rear side of the game board 4 held on the main body frame 3 to the main body frame 3 is attached to the guide member 923 attached to the back cover 900. When the game board 4 is held on the main body frame 3 and the back cover 900 is opened from the rear side of the main body frame 3 to perform maintenance and the like on the rear side of the game board 4, Even if the fastening of the fastening member 924 for fastening and fixing the back cover 900 to the body frame 3 is released and the fastening member 924 is separated from the back cover fastening hole 780 b of the body frame 3, the fastening member 924 is still the guide member 923. Through the back cover 900 to prevent the fastening member 924 from being lost or left inside the pachinko machine 1. 4 can be pachinko machine 1 capable of preventing falling off.

  Further, as described above, since the fastening member 924 can be prevented from dropping from the opened back cover 900, it is not necessary to store the fastening member 924 having been released in a predetermined position during maintenance or the like. , Can be held in the vicinity of the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900 via the guide member 923, so that maintenance can be easily performed.

  Further, since the elongated hole 923b of the guide member 923 extends at least to the opposite side to the locking port 922 side, even if the guide member 923 is inclined with respect to the surface of the back cover 900, The male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 can be positioned straight through the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900 to the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3, and the male screw portion 924a is surely placed in the correct state with respect to the back cover fastening hole 780b. Can be fastened. Therefore, the back cover 900 can be securely fastened to the main body frame 3, and the security effect of the back cover 900 can be reliably exhibited.

  Further, the holding member 925 that cooperates with the head of the fastening member 924 to hold the fastening member 924 movably with respect to the guide member 923 is attached to the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924. The guide member 923 is sandwiched between the head portion of the guide member 923 and the holding member 925, so that the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 can be reliably prevented from coming out of the elongated hole 923b of the guide member 923, and the holding member 925 can be prevented. The fastening member 924 can be held movably with respect to the guide member 923 by the gap between the guide member 923 and the elongated hole 923b.

  In addition, an accommodation recess capable of accommodating the holding member is provided around the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900, and the male screw portion 924 a of the fastening member 924 is inserted through the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900 to cover the back cover of the main body frame 3. When fastening to the fastening hole 780b, the holding member 925 sandwiching the guide member 923 with the head of the fastening member 924 can be accommodated in the accommodation recess, so that the back cover 900 and the guide member 923 are brought into close contact with each other. As a result, the protrusion from the back cover 900 can be reduced as much as possible, and the possibility that another member abuts on the protruding portion of the guide member 923 or the fastening member 924 is reduced, thereby reducing the occurrence of problems. And at the same time improve the appearance.

  Further, since the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3 is used as a female screw portion and is screw-coupled to the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924, compared to a simple engagement with a locking claw, it is possible to fasten by just pulling. Cannot be released, the back cover 900 can be made difficult to remove, the security effect of the back cover 900 can be further enhanced, and the pachinko machine 1 having a high deterrent to illegal acts can be provided.

  Further, since the guide member 923 has flexibility and the guide member 923 can be bent, it is possible to further increase the degree of freedom of movement of the fastening member 924 with respect to the back cover 900 (the insertion hole 921). It is easy to position the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 in a straight position with respect to the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3 or to move the male screw portion 924a straight with respect to the back cover fastening hole 780b. The male screw portion 924a can be securely fastened to the back cover fastening hole 780b.

  Further, in a state where the locking piece 923a of the guide member 923 abuts along an inner wall extending in a direction perpendicular to an axis connecting the insertion hole 921 of the locking opening 922 of the back cover 900, the locking opening is provided. Since the guide member 923 is elastically locked to the shaft 922, the distal end side (the long hole 923 b side) of the guide member 923 movably attached to the guide member 923 extends in the direction perpendicular to the axis connecting the insertion hole 921. The locking piece 923 a can be pivotally moved around the center, and the locking piece 923 a can be supported by the locking port 922. Therefore, the fastening member 924 held in the long hole 923b on the distal end side of the guide member 923 can be rotated to open and close the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900, that is, the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3. Therefore, the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 can be easily inserted into the insertion hole 921 or the back cover fastening hole 780b, and the fastening operation by the fastening member 924 can be easily performed.

  Further, a plurality of back cover engaging grooves 718 and 780a are further provided at positions different from the back cover fastening holes 780b in the main body frame 3, and the back cover 900 is elastically engaged with the back cover engaging grooves 718 and 780a, respectively. A plurality of engaging pieces 908 are further provided. By engaging the engaging pieces 908 of the back cover 900 with the back cover engaging grooves 718 and 780a of the main body frame 3, the fastening by the fastening member 924 is performed. Separately, since the back cover 900 can be fixed to the main body frame 3, only one place to be fastened using the fastening member 924 can be used to minimize the fastening work, and work such as assembly and maintenance can be performed. Can be enhanced. Further, as described above, the back cover 900 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 by the engagement of the engagement pieces 908 and the back cover engagement grooves 718, 780a separately from the fastening member 924, so that the closing range is wide. Even in the back cover 900, the rear side of the game board holding opening 601 (the rear side of the game board 4) in the main body frame 3 can be closed in a favorable state without increasing the number of fastening portions by the fastening members 924.

  In addition, the back cover 900 can be rotatably supported with respect to the main body frame 3 by supporting the back support pin 906 of the back cover 900 on the back cover supporting portion 623 of the main body frame 3 (main body frame base 600). Therefore, simply turning the back cover 900 in the closing direction to close the rear side of the game board holding opening 601 in the main body frame 3 and fastening the back cover 900 with the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900 and the main body frame 3. The holes 780b can be easily matched, and the fastening members 924 held on the back cover 900 through the insertion holes 921 can be easily fastened to the back cover fastening holes 780b. Further, since the back cover 900 is rotatably supported on the body frame 3, even when the back cover 900 is opened by releasing the fastening by the fastening member 924 at the time of maintenance or the like, the back cover 900 is opened. The cover 900 can be kept in a state of being supported by the main body frame 3, and there is no need to remove the back cover 900 from the main body frame 3, thereby simplifying the time required for opening and closing the back cover 900.

[Side security board]
Next, the side security plate 950 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. As shown, the side security plate 950 in the main body frame 3 forms the left side surface of the main body frame 3 when viewed from the front, and is attached to the main body frame base 600. The side security plate 950 includes a metal main body 952 extruded in a shallow U-shape in plan view, a mounting bracket 954 fixed vertically up and down near the inner front end of the main body 952, and mounted on the front surface of the main body frame base 600. , A positioning member 956 fixed to the inside of the main body 952 and engaged with the positioning recess 1119 of the game board 4.

  The main body 952 of the side security plate 950 extends in the vertical direction at substantially the same length as the height of the main body frame base 600 and has a substantially constant depth in the front-rear direction, and a right front view from the front end of the side piece 952a. A front end piece 952b extending in the direction, a middle piece 952c arranged so as to form a predetermined amount of clearance behind the front end piece 952b and projecting less than the front end piece 952b, and a front face from the rear end of the side piece 952a. And a rear end piece 952d extending to the right in a direction longer than the front end piece 952b (see FIG. 112). The main body 952 is formed in a shallow U-shape by a side piece 952a, a front end piece 952b, and a rear end piece 952d, and a front component 1110 of the game board 4 is provided between the middle piece 952c and the rear end piece 952d. The left side of the game panel 1150 when viewed from the front is inserted (see FIG. 112).

  The side security plate 950 of this example has a mounting bracket 954 attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600 and a rear end piece 952 d of the main body 952 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 600. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the side security plate 950 is configured such that the front end piece 952 b of the main body 952 is connected to the support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 of the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame 5. It is designed to be inserted into the U-shape of the U-shaped protruding piece 166 to prevent insertion of a tool for performing wrongdoing between the body frame 3 and the door frame 5 on the left side in front view. (See FIG. 112). In addition, the main body 952 of the side security plate 950 is made of a metal (for example, an aluminum alloy) extruded material, and is arranged in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the side piece 952a, a front end piece 952b, a middle piece 952c, and Since the rear end piece 952d is provided, the strength and rigidity of the side security plate 950 are increased, and the strength of the entire main body frame 3 is increased so that the game board 4 and the door frame 5 can be favorably supported. It has become.

  Thus, according to this example, when the front surface of the main body frame 3 is closed by the door frame 5, the door frame 5 is located between the front end piece 952b and the middle piece 952c formed inside the front end of the side security plate 950. Of the reinforcing unit 150 is inserted (penetrated) into the substantially U-shaped projecting piece 166 of the reinforcing unit 150, and the front end piece 952b is connected to the U-shaped projecting piece. Since the door frame 5 is sandwiched between the protruding pieces 166, even if the door frame 5 is forcibly opened with respect to the main body frame 3, the U-shaped protruding piece 166 of the door support 5 is attached to the front end piece 952 b of the main body frame 3. This makes it possible to prevent the U-shaped protruding piece 166 of the door frame 5 from moving in the direction away from the main body frame 3 to prevent the closed door frame 5 from being opened. That the door frame 5 is opened against the body frame 3 It can be a pachinko machine 1 that can be stopped.

  In addition, since the side security plate 950 formed of metal in the body frame 3 and the reinforcing unit 150 formed of metal in the door frame 5 are fitted, the gap between the body frame 3 and the door frame 5 is provided. The strength and rigidity of the pachinko machine 1 can be increased, the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 can be hardly distorted by an unauthorized tool, and the security performance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved. In addition, since the main body frame base 600 supporting the game board 4 is formed of a synthetic resin, and the side security plate 950 for supporting the door frame 5 (supporting side) is formed of metal, The cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced as compared with the case where the entire body frame 3 is formed of metal.

  Further, the door frame hook portion 1041 of the lock device 1000 for locking the door frame 5 to the main body frame 3 is engaged with the hook cover 165 of the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame 5 at one point between the upper and lower ends and the upper and lower ends. The door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 on the lock device 1000 side (open side) are locked by the three door frame hooks 1041 so that the open side is an unauthorized device such as a crowbar. Even if it is scooped by a simple tool, it is possible to satisfactorily prevent the space between the door frame 5 and the body frame 3 from spreading, and to prevent the door frame 5 from being forcibly opened.

  In addition, the rear end of the side piece 952a of the side security plate 950 is made to extend rearward from the front surface (game area 1100) of the game board 4, and the dimension of the side piece 952a in the front-rear direction is increased. Since the bending rigidity with respect to the load applied in the front-rear direction is increased, the strength and rigidity of the entire side security plate 950 can be further increased, and it is possible to prevent the side security plate 950 from being forcibly bent and fraudulent. .

  Further, since the side security plate 950 of the main body frame 3 is formed by a metal extruded die, the side security plate 950 (main body 952) having a predetermined sectional shape having the front end piece 952b and the middle piece 952c can be easily formed. It is possible to suppress the increase in cost even if the security performance of the pachinko machine 1 is enhanced, and to reduce defects such as a decrease in strength generated at the time of processing as compared with the case where the metal plate is bent. The side security plate 950 can be reduced as much as possible and has high durability and strength.

[Locking device]
Subsequently, the lock device 1000 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 97 (A) is a left side view of the lock device in the body frame, and FIG. 97 (B) is a perspective view of the lock device in the body frame as viewed from the front. FIG. 98 (A) is a rear perspective view of the lock device, and FIG. 98 (B) is a slide rod for a glass door and a slide rod for a main body frame slidably provided inside a U-shaped base of the lock device. (C) is a front perspective view of (B). Further, FIG. 99 is an exploded perspective view of the locking device when disassembled and viewed from behind, and FIG. 100 is an explanatory diagram showing the operation of the sliding rod for the glass door and the sliding rod for the main body frame in the locking device. FIG. 101 is an explanatory view showing the operation of the fraud prevention member in the lock device.

  The lock device 1000 in the main body frame 3 is attached from the substantially upper end to the lower end of the main body frame 3 along the outer side surface on the open side of the peripheral wall portion 605 in the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. A door hook hole 620 formed on the upper right side (opening side) of the front end frame portion 602 of the main body frame base 600 and a lock hole 621 formed on the lower portion; and a peripheral wall of the main body frame base 600. And a plurality of lock mounting portions 625 formed on the right side surface of the portion 605 when viewed from the front.

  As shown in FIGS. 97 to 99, a lock device 1000 includes a U-shaped base 1001 as a lock base formed in a U-shaped cross section, and a door frame slidably provided in the U-shaped base 1001. A sliding rod 1040, a main frame sliding rod 1050 slidably provided in the U-shaped base 1001, and a U-shaped sliding rod 1050 so that the sliding of the main frame sliding rod 1050 cannot be illegally performed. Anti-fraud members 1023, 1032 attached to the lower portion of the base 1001.

  The U-shaped base 1001 in the lock device 1000 is formed by bending a predetermined metal plate so as to have a U-shaped cross section, and has therein a sliding rod 1040 for a door frame and a sliding rod 1050 for a main body frame. Are slidably arranged. It should be noted that the U-shaped base 1001 is much thinner in width than a conventional locking device integrated into a base formed into an L-shaped cross section. Thereby, the left-right dimension of the lock device 1000 can be made as thin as possible, and the left-right dimension of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3 can be relatively increased. 1100 wide game boards 4 can be provided.

  The U-shaped base 1001 is mounted such that the open side having a U-shaped cross section faces the back surface of the main body frame base 600. When the lock device 1000 is mounted on the main body frame 3, the U-shaped base 1001 is U-shaped. The open side of the base 1001 is closed by the main body frame base 600. Thus, the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main frame arranged inside the U-shaped base 1001 are attached to the U-shaped base 1001 except for the respective hook portions 1041, 1054, and 1065. The lock device 1000 is completely covered, and has an anti-fraud structure in which it is difficult to perform an illegal act on the lock device 1000 from the outside.

  The U-shaped base 1001 of the lock device 1000 has a rectangular shape through which the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the body frame sliding rod 1050 can penetrate up and down on the closed side (front side) opposite to the open side (rear side). A hook through-hole 1002, a screw stop 1003 protruding outward in the middle and above the side surface 1001 b (see FIG. 99) in contact with the peripheral wall 605 of the body frame base 600 on the front side, and a screw stop A side surface 1001a (see FIG. 99) opposite to the side surface 1001b on which the protrusion 1003 is provided protrudes forward from an upper end portion and an intermediate portion on the open side (front side), and lower end portions of the open side surfaces 1001a and 1001b. Locking projection 1004.

  The screwing portion 1003 and the locking projection 1004 of the U-shaped base 1001 are for attaching the locking device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame base 600, and the locking projection 1004 is connected to the door hook hole 620 of the main body frame base 600. And when it is moved upward after being inserted into the lock hole 621 from the rear side, the screwing portion 1003 and the locking portion 625 of the main body frame base 600 are aligned with each other. By screwing a screw (not shown) to the lock mounting portion 625 via the intermediary, the lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame base 600 (main body frame 3).

  The locking of the locking device 1000 by screws is performed not only at the upper and middle screw fixing portions 1003 but also at the screw mounting portion 1003 formed on a lock mounting piece 1008 to be described later and near the upper portion of the cylinder lock through hole 611. The locking device 625 is also fixed to the body frame base 600 with screws (not shown), so that the lower portion of the locking device 1000 can also be mounted.

  When the lock device 1000 is attached, the locking projections 1004 formed at the upper, lower, middle, and lower positions on the open side (front side) of the U-shaped base 1001 are connected to the upper door hook hole 620 and the upper locking hole. 621, and is positioned and locked, and the screw fixing portion 1003 of the U-shaped base 1001 is fixed to the lock mounting portion 625 with screws. (The body frame 3).

  In other words, even when the lock device 1000 is integrated into the U-shaped base 1001 having a very small width, the lock device 1000 is firmly fixed to the main body frame 3 by the locking and fixing of the front and rear sides of the lock device 1000. It can be fixed to. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, after the locking projection 1004 constituting the front locking structure (may be a fixed structure) protrudes from the side surface 1001 a that does not contact the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base 1001, Since the screw fixing portion 1003 constituting the rear fixing structure is formed to protrude from the side surface 1001b, which is in close contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base 1001, toward the peripheral wall portion 605, the front locking structure is the peripheral wall portion 605. The lock device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 so as to prevent rattling as compared with the case where the lock device 1000 is formed on the side surface 1001b which is dense.

  Further, the U-shaped base 1001 has an insertion hole 1005 penetrating in the left-right direction at the upper, middle and lower portions of both side surfaces 1001a and 1001b. By inserting the rivet 1006 into the insertion hole 1005 with the main frame sliding rod 1050 stored therein and caulking, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main frame sliding rod 1050 are inserted into the U-shaped base 1001. Can be slidably mounted vertically.

  In other words, as shown in FIG. 98 (C), the rivet 1006 penetrates through the upper end of the rivet long hole 1042 formed at the upper, lower, middle, and lower three places of the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame. As shown in (B), the rivet 1006 penetrates through the lower end portions of the rivet long holes 1055 and 1061 formed respectively in the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the body frame sliding rod 1050. The sliding rod for door frame 1040 can be moved upward, and the sliding rod for body frame 1050 can be moved downward.

  Further, the U-shaped base 1001 protrudes laterally from the front end of the side face 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall 605 of the open body frame base 600 and the tamper-proof notch 1007 formed on the closed side face at the lower part. A lock mounting piece 1008 for mounting the cylinder lock 1010 and a vertical insertion opening 1020, a spring locking piece 1021, and a lateral relief hole 1022 are formed in a side surface 1001 b in contact with the peripheral wall 605. Although the details of the notch prevention notch portion 1007 of the U-shaped base 1001 will be described later, the stopper piece 1027 of the first anti-fraud member 1023 moves forward and backward. Further, the lock mounting piece 1008 of the U-shaped base 1001 has the side surface 1001b on the lower side of the game board holding opening 601 when the lock device 1000 is mounted on the back surface of the main frame base 600. A lock insertion hole 1009 that projects from the front end to the side and through which the cylinder lock 1010 penetrates, and two mounting holes 1013 formed in the lock mounting board 1011 of the cylinder lock 1010 by screws 1012 are used in upper and lower positions. And a screw stopper 1003 formed to mount the lower portion of the lock device 1000 on the back surface of the main body frame 3.

  The U-shaped base 1001 has an insertion vertical opening 1020 through which the first engagement projection 1017 and the second engagement projection 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 fixed to the cylinder lock 1010 enter when the cylinder lock 1010 rotates. A spring locking piece 1021 for locking a spring 1035 for urging the second tamper-proof member 1032 upward, and a lateral escape hole 1022 for forming an escape hole so as not to hinder the movement of the connecting pin 1034. It has.

  The cylinder lock 1010 in the lock device 1000 is attached to the lock attachment piece 1008 in the U-shaped base 1001. In this cylinder lock 1010, a lock mounting board 1011 for fixing to a lock mounting piece 1008 is fixed to the rear end of a cylindrical cylinder lock main body, and a lock shaft 1015 of the cylinder lock main body extends from the rear surface of the lock mounting board 1011. The engaging cam 1016 is fixed to the rear end of the lock shaft 1015 by a screw 1019. The engagement cam 1016 is formed in a boomerang shape, and one end side is a first engagement protrusion 1017 that engages with the lower engagement hole 1062 of the body frame sliding rod 1050 when rotated. The end side is a second engagement projection 1018 that engages with the ascending engagement hole 1045 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 during rotation.

  The cylinder lock 1010 is formed by inserting a cylindrical cylinder lock body portion into a lock insertion hole 1009 formed in the lock mounting piece 1008 from the rear side, and then mounting holes 1013 formed in two upper and lower portions of the lock mounting board 1011. The cylinder lock 1010 can be fixed to the U-shaped base 1001 by screwing the screw 1012 into the mounting hole 1014 of the lock mounting piece 1008 through the through hole.

  The tamper-proof members 1023 and 1032 attached to the U-shaped base 1001 of the lock device 1000 are provided with a sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame, for example, using a piano wire or a wire without rotating the cylinder lock 1010 with a formal key. Is to prevent the lowering of. As shown in FIG. 99, the anti-fraud members 1023 and 1032 have a structure in which the first anti-fraud member 1023 and the second anti-fraud member 1032 are connected by connecting pins 1034. The first fraud prevention member 1023 has a vertically long plate shape and is swingably supported by the U-shaped base 1001 around the swing shaft hole 1025 at the upper end. More specifically, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is moved through the pivot shaft hole 1025 together with the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main frame arranged inside the U-shaped base 1001. The lower mounting hole 1005 and the rivet 1006 are used for mounting.

  In addition, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is vertically opened at a position overlapping with the insertion vertical opening 1020 of the U-shaped base 1001 on its plate-shaped surface, and the second engagement projection 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 can be inserted. The protruding piece insertion hole 1026 is provided. When the second engagement projection 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 penetrates the projection insertion hole 1026 and the insertion vertical opening 1020, the door frame sliding rod 1040 provided inside the U-shaped base 1001. And the second engagement projection 1018 engages with the ascending engagement hole 1045. The first anti-fraud member 1023 has an obliquely inclined upper outer side in front of the projecting piece insertion hole 1026 so as to be able to contact the rear surface side of the first engaging projecting piece 1017 when the engaging cam 1016 is rotated. When the engagement cam 1016 rotates, the inclined portion 1024 comes into contact with the first engagement protrusion 1017, so that the first tamper-proof member 1023 is centered on the swing shaft hole 1025. (In the clockwise direction in FIG. 101B).

  Further, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is provided with a stopper piece 1027 protruding toward the U-shaped base 1001 from the outer side obliquely below the protruding piece insertion hole 1026 toward the U-shaped base 1001, and further from the position where the stopper piece 1027 protrudes. It has a regulating protrusion 1031 protruding downward, and a pin hole 1029 and a connection hole 1030 that are vertically arranged to penetrate the front side of the regulating protrusion 1031 in the left-right direction. The stopper piece 1027 of the first anti-fraud member 1023 is engaged with the anti-fraud notch 1007 and the engaging notch 1066 of the main frame sliding rod 1050 when the main frame sliding rod 1050 is locked. Thus, it is possible to prevent the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame from sliding illegally. In addition, the regulating protrusion 1031 of the first tamper-proof member 1023 comes into contact with the second tamper-proof member 1032 urged upward by the spring 1035, so that the second tamper-proof member 1032 moves upward (biasing direction). It is possible to regulate movement.

  Further, the pin hole 1029 of the first anti-fraud member 1023 is configured such that the guide pin 1028 is inserted and fixed from the back side of the first anti-fraud member 1023, and the guide pin 1028 fixed to the pin hole 1029 is The first fraud prevention member 1023 is guided along the side surface 1001b of the U-shaped base 1001 by engaging with the horizontally long opening formed at the lowermost end of the insertion vertical opening 1020 in the U-shaped base 1001. Is available. Further, the connection hole 1030 of the first tamper-proof member 1023 is for connecting the first tamper-proof member 1023 and the second tamper-proof member 1032 rotatably by the connecting pin 1034.

  On the other hand, the second anti-fraud member 1032 connected to the first anti-fraud member 1023 is formed of an inverted “L” -shaped plate material, and has a connection hole 1033 at one upper end and a spring engagement hole 1036 at the other upper end. And a contact portion 1037 is provided at the lower end. The second anti-fraud member 1032 can be relatively rotatably connected to the first anti-fraud member 1023 by inserting the connection pin 1034 after aligning the connection hole 1033 with the connection hole 1030 of the first anti-fraud member 1023. I can do it. The second fraud prevention member 1032 locks the lower end (the other end) of the spring 1035 whose upper end (one end) is locked to the spring locking piece 1021 of the U-shaped base 1001 in the spring locking hole 1036. As a result, the spring 1035 is urged upward. Furthermore, the contact portion 1037 of the second fraud prevention member 1032 comes into contact with the closing plate 25 fixed to the lower portion inside the outer frame 2 when the main body frame 3 is closed.

  Next, the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame in the lock device 1000 is slidably supported inside the U-shaped base 1001, and is formed of a vertically long metal plate member. The door frame sliding rod 1040 is provided with three door frame hook portions 1041 protruding forward at three locations on the upper, lower, middle, and upper sides of one side. The door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 projects forward from the open side of the U-shaped base 1001 in a state in which the door frame sliding rod 1040 is stored in the U-shaped base 1001. When the lock device 1000 is fixed to the back surface of the main body frame base 600, the lock device 1000 projects forward from a door hook hole 620 (see FIGS. 67 and 72) formed in the main body frame base 600, and A hook cover 165 (see FIG. 18) formed on the back surface of the frame 5 can be locked. The hook portion 1041 for the door frame has a downward engaging claw shape as shown in the drawing, whereby the door frame hook portion 1041 and the hook cover are raised by raising the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame. The locked state with the 165 can be released.

  Further, the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame is formed at the center of the upper, middle, and lower side surfaces and has a vertically long rivet hole 1042 through which the rivet 1006 is inserted, a lower portion of the uppermost rivet long hole 1042, and a door frame. At the lowermost end of the sliding rod 1040, there is provided a guide projecting piece 1043 projecting in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the door frame sliding rod 1040. The rivet 1006 inserted into the insertion hole 1005 of the U-shaped base 1001 is inserted into the rivet elongated hole 1042 of the door frame sliding rod 1040, and the rivet 1006 is inserted into the door frame slide. The rod 1040 is formed to be vertically long so as not to hinder the ascent operation of the rod 1040. In the normal state, the rivet 1006 penetrating the upper end of the rivet long hole 1042 is in a state of contact. In addition, the guide rod 1043 of the sliding rod for door frame 1040 is inserted into the protruding piece moving holes 1056 and 1064 formed in the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the sliding rod 1050 for body frame. Thus, the sliding operation of the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main frame can be guided.

  Further, the sliding hook 1040 for the door frame has a spring hook portion 1046 for locking one end of the spring 1048 at an upper end portion. The other end of the spring 1048 locked to the spring hook portion 1046 is locked to the spring hook portion 1057 of the upper hook member 1051 of the body frame sliding rod 1050. The rod 1040 is urged downward and the body frame sliding rod 1050 is urged upward. Further, the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame includes a contact elastic piece 1047 formed in a convex shape in the middle of the vertical direction, and is punched out from one side surface of the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame by press molding. It is formed in a convex shape. The contact elastic piece 1047 is configured to contact the inner surface of the U-shaped base 1001, and can prevent the door frame sliding rod 1040 from rattling inside the U-shaped base 1001. It has become.

  Further, the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame has a vertically long play hole 1044 and a rising engagement hole 1045 on the side surface of the lower part. The play hole 1044 is provided at the tip of the first engaging projection 1017 so as not to hinder the rotation of the engaging cam 1016 when the first engaging projection 1017 of the engaging cam 1016 is inserted and rotated. The part constitutes a movable space. In addition, when the second engagement projection 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated, the ascending engagement hole 1045 is configured such that the sliding movement of the engagement cam 1016 raises the door frame sliding rod 1040. For engaging with. Note that the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame is provided with an escape notch 1049 at the lower rear of the vertical side, which is notched in the vertical direction to be larger than the notch 1007. The escape notch 1049 is provided by the door frame sliding rod 1040 so that the stopper piece 1027 of the first anti-fraud member 1023 is securely engaged with the anti-fraud notch 1007 and the engagement notch 1066. The corresponding parts have been cut out so as not to be disturbed.

  On the other hand, the main frame sliding rod 1050 includes an upper hook member 1051 made of a metal plate, a lower hook member 1052 made of a metal plate, a connecting wire rod 1053 connecting the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052, It has. That is, the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame is not formed of one vertical metal plate as in the related art, and the upper hook member 1051 having the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the lower hook member 1052 are made of metal. A plate material is formed by pressing, and the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 made of metal are connected by a thin metal connecting rod 1053. Thus, the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main frame can be efficiently stored in the space of the narrow U-shaped base 1001.

  The upper hook member 1051 of the body frame sliding rod 1050 has a hook portion 1054 formed rearward at an upper end portion, and a rivet long hole 1055 penetrating in the left-right direction on a plate surface portion adjacent to the hook portion 1054. , A protruding piece moving hole 1056 penetrating in the left-right direction below the rivet long hole 1055, a spring hook portion 1057 formed at a lower end of a vertical side in front of the protruding piece moving hole 1056, and a lower side of the spring hook portion 1057. And a contact portion 1059 formed on the upper side and the lower side of the upper hook member 1051. The hook portion 1054 of the upper hook member 1051 penetrates through the hook through-opening 1002 above the U-shaped base 1001 and engages with the closing plate 24 provided on the upper side on the open side of the outer frame 2. And a locking claw portion is formed upward.

  The rivet long hole 1055 of the upper hook member 1051 is arranged at a position corresponding to the rivet long hole 1042 formed on the upper part of the door frame sliding rod 1040. In a normal state where the rivet 1006 penetrates, the rivet 1006 penetrates the lowermost end of the rivet long hole 1055, and the upper hook member 1051 can move downward. The projecting piece 1043 above the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame is inserted into the projecting piece moving hole 1056 of the upper hook member 1051, and the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod for the main body frame are inserted. It is possible to guide the mutual movement with 1050.

  The spring hook 1057 of the upper hook member 1051 is configured so that the other end of the spring 1048 is locked. The connection hole 1058 of the upper hook member 1051 is configured such that the upper end of the connection wire rod 1053 is bent and inserted. Further, the contact portion 1059 of the upper hook member 1051 comes into contact with the inner side wall of the U-shaped base 1001 when housed in the U-shaped base 1001, so that the sliding operation of the upper hook member 1051 is performed. It can slide smoothly without rattling.

  On the other hand, the lower hook member 1052 of the body frame sliding rod 1050 is provided with a hook portion 1065 protruding rearward from the lower end portion and a rivet penetrating in the left and right direction near the upper end of the plate surface portion of the lower hook member 1052. A long hole 1061, a descending engagement hole 1062 disposed below the rivet long hole 1061, a play hole 1063 extending downward from a lower rear side of the lower engagement hole 1062, and a play hole 1063 below the play hole 1063. A projecting piece moving hole 1064 formed near the lower end, a connection hole 1060 formed in the front end side of the upper end of the lower hook member 1052 at the front end side, and a coupling formed at the lower part of the lower vertical side behind the lower hook member 1052. It has a notch 1066 and contact portions 1067 formed on the upper and lower sides of the lower hook member 1052.

  The hook portion 1065 of the lower hook member 1052 penetrates the hook through opening 1002 below the U-shaped base 1001 and engages with the closing plate 25 formed at the lower portion on the open side of the outer frame 2. And a locking claw portion is formed upward. The rivet long hole 1061 of the lower hook member 1052 is formed at a position corresponding to the rivet long hole 1042 formed at the lower portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040. In a normal state in which the rivet 1006 has penetrated, the rivet 1006 is in a state of penetrating the lowermost end of the rivet long hole 1061. This allows the lower hook member 1052 to move downward.

  Further, when the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted into the lower engagement hole 1062 of the lower hook member 1052 and rotated, the body frame sliding rod 1050 is lowered by the rotation. For engagement. The play hole 1063 of the lower hook member 1052 is provided with the second engagement protrusion 1018 so that the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 does not hinder the rotation when the second engagement protrusion 1018 is inserted and rotated. Is able to form a space in which the tip end can move. In addition, the projecting piece moving hole 1064 of the lower hook member 1052 is adapted to receive the guide projecting piece 1043 below the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame. Mutual movement with the moving rod 1050 can be guided.

  In addition, the bent lower end of the connecting wire rod 1053 is inserted into the connecting hole 1060 of the lower hook member 1052. Further, the contact portion 1067 of the lower hook member 1052 comes into contact with the inner side wall of the U-shaped base 1001 when housed in the U-shaped base 1001, and When the hook member 1052 performs a sliding operation, the hook member 1052 can be smoothly slid without rattling.

  Next, assembly of the lock device 1000 of the present embodiment will be described. To assemble the lock device 1000, the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the main frame sliding rod 1050 are connected by the connecting wire rod 1053, and in this state, the guide projection of the door frame sliding rod 1040 is provided. The piece 1043 is inserted into the protruding piece moving holes 1056, 1064 of the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052, and the elongated rivet hole 1042 and the elongated rivet hole 1055, 1061 are aligned and overlapped. In a state where the hook portion 1054 of the upper hook member 1051 and the hook portion 1065 of the lower hook member 1052 are passed through the hook through-opening 1002 of the U-shaped base 1001 in a superposed state, the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the body frame After inserting the sliding rod 1050 into the U-shaped space of the U-shaped base 1001, the rivet 1006 is inserted through the insertion hole 1005. .

  When the rivet 1006 is inserted, the rivet 1006 is inserted so as to penetrate the rivet long holes 1055, 1061, and 1042. When the lowermost rivet 1006 is inserted, it is necessary to insert the rivet 1006 also into the swing shaft hole 1025 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 and attach the first fraud prevention member 1023 to the U-shaped base 1001 at the same time. Before attaching the first tamper-proof member 1023 to the U-shaped base 1001, the first tamper-proof member 1023 and the second tamper-proof member 1032 are connected by the connecting pin 1034, and the guide pin 1028 is connected to the pin hole It is necessary that the guide pin 1028 be further inserted into the lowermost opening of the insertion vertical opening 1020 after being fixed to the 1029 with a screw (not shown).

  Further, in a state where the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame are stored and fixed in the U-shaped base 1001 with the rivets 1006, the spring 1048 is bridged between the spring hook portions 1046 and 1057, and The frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are urged in opposite directions, and a spring 1035 is wrapped around the spring locking piece 1021 and the spring locking hole 1036 to prevent the second fraud. It is assumed that the member 1032 is in contact with the regulating protrusion 1031. Thereafter, the cylindrical main body of the cylinder lock 1010 is inserted into the lock insertion hole 1009 of the lock mounting piece 1008, and the cylinder lock 1010 is fixed to the mounting hole 1014 with the screw 1012. At this time, the distal end of the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is slightly inserted into the insertion vertical opening 1020 outside the inclined portion 1024, and the second engagement protrusion of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted. The cylinder lock 1010 is attached to the lock attachment piece 1008 such that the tip of the piece 1018 is slightly inserted into the projection insertion hole 1026 and the insertion vertical opening 1020 of the first fraud prevention member 1023.

  In this manner, in order to attach the assembled lock device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame base 600, the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted into the door hook hole 620 formed in the main body frame base 600. While being inserted, the hook-shaped locking projection 1004 is inserted into the door hook hole 620 and the locking hole 621 of the main body frame base 600 and moved upward, and in this state, the screw stopper 1003 projecting horizontally is inserted. The lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the back surface of the main body frame base 600 by making it coincide with the lock attachment portion 625 and screwing a screw (not shown) into the coincident hole. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, the locking projection 1004 constituting the locking structure of the front portion is formed so as to protrude from the side surface 1001a not in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base 1001, while fixing the rear portion. Since the screw stopper 1003 constituting the structure is formed so as to protrude in the horizontal direction from the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall 605 of the U-shaped base 1001, the locking structure at the front portion contacts the peripheral wall 605. The lock device 1000 can be fixed to the main frame base 600 so as to prevent rattling as compared with the case where the lock device 1000 is formed on the side surface 1001b.

  Next, the operation of the lock device 1000 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. As shown in FIG. 100, in a state where the main body frame base 600 (main body frame 3) is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 and the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. Then, the closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 and the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame are locked, and the hook portions 1041 for the door frame and the door frame 5 of the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame are locked. The hook cover 165 is locked. In this state, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the first engagement projection 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is rotated in a direction to enter the insertion vertical opening 1020, as shown in FIG. The distal end of the first engaging projection 1017 engages with the downward engaging hole 1062 of the body frame sliding rod 1050 to push down the lower hook member 1052 against the urging force of the spring 1048, and is connected thereto. The connected connecting rod 1053 and the upper hook member 1051 are also pushed down and descend. As a result, the locked state between the closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 and the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame is released, and the main body frame 3 is removed by pulling the main body frame 3 toward the front side. It can be opened to the frame 2.

  When the main body frame 3 is closed, the hook portions 1054 and 1065 are in a state of being raised by the urging force of the spring 1048 (the same raised position as the state shown in FIG. 100A). , 1065 are inclined downward toward the outside, so that the main body frame 3 is forcibly pressed against the outer frame 2 so that the upper slopes of the hook portions 1054, 1065 are closed. Since the sliding rod 1050 for the main frame is lowered downward because of the contact with the lower end, the upwardly-facing claws of the hooks 1054 and 1065 and the closing plates 24 and 25 are locked again, and the sliding for the main frame is performed. The rod 1050 rises and returns to the locked state.

  On the other hand, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the second engagement projection 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is rotated in a direction to enter the insertion vertical opening 1020, as shown in FIG. The tip of the two engagement projections 1018 engages with the ascending engagement holes 1045 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 and pushes up the door frame sliding rod 1040 upward against the urging force of the spring 1048. For this reason, since the hooked state of the hook cover 165 of the door frame 5 and the hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 for the door frame is released, the door frame 5 is pulled forward by pulling the door frame 5 forward. It can be opened to the body frame 3.

  When the door frame 5 is closed, the door frame hook portion 1041 is in a state of being lowered by the urging force of the spring 1048 (the same lowered position as the state shown in FIG. 100 (A)). Since the lower side of the hook portion 1041 is upwardly inclined toward the outside, the door frame 5 is forcibly pressed against the main body frame 3 so that the inclined portion of the lower side of the door frame hook portion 1041 becomes a hook cover 165. The sliding rod 1040 for the door frame rises upward by contact with the upper end of the door frame, and the downwardly-facing claw portion of the hook portion 1041 for the door frame and the hook cover 165 are again locked, so that the sliding for the door frame is performed. The moving rod 1040 descends and returns to the locked state. In addition, the sliding rod 1040 for a door frame in the present embodiment is formed to have substantially the same length as the entire length of the U-shaped base 1001, and the U-shaped base 1001 is substantially the same as the vertical side surface of the main body frame 3. The door frame hooks 1041, which are attached over the entire length and are the locking portions with the door frame 5, are formed at three positions of the upper end, the center, and the lower end of the door frame sliding rod 1040. Therefore, it is possible to securely lock the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 over the entire length in the vertical direction, and forcibly open the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 and insert an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire from the gap therebetween. The act cannot be performed.

  As described above, the lock device 1000 of the door frame 5 of the present embodiment unlocks the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 by rotating the key inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 in one direction, and in the other direction. By rotating, the door frame 5 can be unlocked from the body frame 3. Further, the lock device 1000 of this example performs an illegal act such that a piano wire or the like is hooked on the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame and lowered without inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1010. Can not be. The first structure for preventing such misconduct is a lock mechanism including a first fraud preventing member 1023 and a second fraud preventing member 1032, and the second fraud preventing structure is a U-shaped base 1001. The sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame are housed in the closed space of FIG.

  First, the operation of the lock mechanism as the first fraud prevention structure will be described with reference to FIG. First, in a state where the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 3 are closed, as shown in FIG. 101 (A), the closing plate 25 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 1037 of the second tamper-proof member 1032 are in contact. It is in the state of having done. In this state, the first anti-fraud member 1023 rotates counterclockwise by the urging force of the spring 1035, and the stopper piece 1027 enters the fraud prevention notch 1007, and the stopper piece 1027 is moved to the fraud prevention notch. It is in a state of being engaged with an engagement notch 1066 formed in the lower hook member 1052 of the body frame sliding rod 1050 at a position corresponding to 1007. As a result, even if the piano wire or the like is hooked and pulled down on the sliding rod 1050 for the body frame, the stopper piece 1027 and the engagement notch 1066 are engaged, so that the sliding rod 1050 for the body frame is moved. It is impossible to illegally pull down (unlock), and it is impossible to perform an illegal act of opening the main body frame 3.

  On the other hand, when the key is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the main body frame 3 is unlocked properly, as shown in FIG. 101 (B), the first engagement protrusion of the engagement cam 1016 is rotated by rotating the key. The piece 1017 is rotated so as to enter the insertion vertical opening 1020. When the first engagement protrusion 1017 rotates, the inclined portion 1024 of the first engagement protrusion 1023 abuts against the side surface of the first engagement protrusion 1017. The rotation of the stopper piece 1027 is started in the clockwise direction shown in FIG. Thus, the engagement between the stopper piece 1027 and the engagement notch 1066 is released. At this time, the second tamper-proof member 1032 is in a position where the spring 1035 is extended and the contact portion 1037 is retracted. In this state, when the engagement cam 1016 is further rotated to rotate the first engagement protrusion 1017, the tip of the first engagement protrusion 1017 is engaged with the lower engagement hole 1062 of the lower hook member 1052. Since the entire sliding rod 1050 for the main frame is lowered, the locked state between the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 is released, and the main frame 3 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2. You can do it.

  When the main frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the second anti-fraud member 1032 and the second anti-fraud member 1023 are in contact with the regulating projection 1031. The positional relationship with 1032 is substantially the same as the state shown in FIG. When the main body frame 3 is closed in this state, the closing plate 25 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 1037 of the second tamper-proof member 1032 come into contact with each other from the front, and finally reach the state shown in FIG. Accordingly, the first anti-fraud member 1023 and the second anti-fraud member 1032 do not become an obstacle when closing the main body frame 3. Further, in the present embodiment, the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 prevent only the lowering operation of the body frame sliding rod 1050 from being performed illegally. If the frame sliding rod 1050 is illegally opened, the door frame sliding rod 1040 can be easily opened manually after release, and the illegal act of raising the sliding rod with a piano wire or the like is practically difficult. For this reason, the device is devised so that unauthorized operation on the body frame sliding rod 1050 cannot be performed.

  Further, even with the lock mechanism that is the first fraud prevention structure described above, it is not possible to disable the function of the lock mechanism by swinging the first fraud prevention member 1023 with a piano wire or the like. Absent. Therefore, assuming that the lock function of the lock mechanism is disabled by an illegal act, in the present embodiment, when the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3 (the main body frame base 600), The sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame provided in the housing are completely accommodated in the closed space of the U-shaped base 1001 except for the respective hook portions 1041, 1054, and 1065. In this state, even if a piano wire or the like is inserted and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame provided inside the closed space of the U-shaped base 1001 is pulled down, both side surfaces 1001a and 1001b of the U-shaped base 1001 are pulled down. As a result, the intrusion of the fraudulent equipment into the enclosed space is prevented, so that the fraudulent act cannot be easily performed.

  As described above, the lock device 1000 according to the present embodiment includes the sliding lever 1040 for the door frame inside the U-shaped base 1001 whose width dimension is extremely thin as compared with the lock device integrated into the conventional L-shaped base. The mounting position of the cylinder lock 1010 to the U-shaped base 1001 for slidably mounting the body frame sliding rod 1050 and operating the lock device 1000 is set to a position below the lower end side of the game board 4. Therefore, even if the size of the game board 4 in the left-right direction and the up-down direction is extremely large, and the space surrounded by the peripheral wall portion 605 of the main body frame 3 is increased, the lock device 1000 is firmly attached to the back side of the main body frame 3. Can be installed.

  Further, since the U-shaped base 1001 is mounted so that the open side of the U-shaped cross section faces the back surface of the main body frame 3, when the lock device 1000 is mounted on the main body frame 3 (the main body frame base 600), The sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame, which are arranged in the same manner, are completely covered with the U-shaped base 1001 except for the respective hook portions 1041, 1054, and 1065. It is not possible to easily perform an illegal act such as inserting a piano wire or the like and pulling down a sliding rod 1050 for a main body frame provided therein.

  When the lock device 1000 is attached, the locking projections 1004 formed at three positions on the open side (front portion) of the U-shaped base 1001 are inserted into the door hook holes 620 and the lock holes 621. It is a very simple structure because the screw fixing portions 1003 formed at three places on the closed side (rear part) of the U-shaped base 1001 at the upper, middle, and lower sides are fixed to the lock mounting portion 625 with screws. With such a structure, the lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame 3 (main body frame base 600).

  In the lock device 1000 of this example, a screw fixing portion 1003 formed on the lock mounting piece 1008 and a portion near the upper portion of the cylinder lock through hole 611 of the main body frame 3 are formed as a structure for screwing the lower portion of the U-shaped base 1001. Although a structure in which the formed lock attaching portion 625 is screwed is shown, instead of this, a screw 1012 for attaching the cylinder lock 1010 to the lock attaching piece 1008 is used, and the tip of the screw 1012 is attached to the lock. A lock mounting hole to be screwed through the piece 1008 may be formed above and below the cylinder lock through hole 611. Further, even if the lower part of the U-shaped base 1001 is not screwed, the locking device 1000 can be fixed to the lock mounting portion 625 only by fixing the screw device 1003 on the rear portion of the locking device 1000. It can be fixed sufficiently firmly to the back surface of the base 600).

  In the lock device 1000 of this example, the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main frame are completely covered with the U-shaped base 1001 having the left and right side surfaces 1001a and 1001b. For example, the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the body frame are slidably mounted on the opposite side surface 1001a not in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 with rivets or the like, and the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 is omitted. A door frame sliding rod 1040 and a body frame sliding rod 1050 are provided in a closed space formed by the side surface 1001a of the L-shaped base (tablet base) and the peripheral wall 605 as an L-shaped base (tablet base). The storage device may be configured to be stored, and the same operation and effect as the above-described lock device 1000 can be obtained.

  As described above, according to the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment, the transparent prize ball base 710 having the peripheral wall portion 710a extending rearward (front-back direction) behind the main body frame base 600, and the upper side of the prize ball base 710. The prize ball tank 720 for storing game balls supplied from the island facility side of the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and the game balls discharged from the prize ball tank 720 are arranged to rearward the prize ball base 710. A transparent tank rail unit 730 attached to the rear side of the base 710b, and a game ball released from the tank rail unit 730 paid out to the upper plate 301 of the door frame 5 based on a predetermined payout instruction. A prize ball device 740 partially attached to the rear side of the 710b and a side portion 904 extending to the rear end of the body frame base 600 have a tank rail unit 730 and a prize ball device 74 on the rear surface. Of the game board 4 held in the game board holding opening 601 of the main body frame base 600 through the prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, and the like. Of the game board 4 can be easily inspected (visual inspection) without opening the back cover 900 covering the rear side of the game board 4. The pachinko machine 1 can be used.

  Further, not only the rear side (rear side) of the game board 4 but also the rear side face of the game board 4 can be visually recognized through the transparent prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, and the like. When the game board 4 is detached from the front of the game board 601, even if tools such as a screwdriver and pliers, cleaning waste, dust and dirt, etc. remain between the game board 4 and the back cover 900, they are removed from the outside. Can easily be found, and any trouble caused by the residue can be prevented.

  Further, as described above, since the rear surface and the rear side surface of the game board 4 can be visually recognized from the outside, unauthorized devices and tools for performing illegal acts are attached to the rear side and the side surface of the game board 4. Even if it is, it can be easily found, and it is possible to prevent illegal acts from being performed, and it is possible to easily find an unauthorized device or the like attached to the game board 4 from the outside. It is possible to hesitate to attach an unauthorized device or the like, and the pachinko machine 1 can have a high deterrent against illegal acts.

  Further, since the rear side of the game board 4 is covered with the prize ball base 710 and the back cover 900, other members in the island facility where the pachinko machine 1 is installed may contact the game board 4 or the game board 4 Foreign matter such as dust and dirt can be prevented from adhering to the rear side of the game board 4, and the game board 4 can be maintained in a good state, thereby suppressing the occurrence of problems.

  In addition, the rear surface of the prize ball tank 720 is located at a position about twice the depth D of the main body frame base 600 from the front end of the main body frame base 600, that is, the depth D of the main body frame base 600. Is set to about half of the depth of the main body frame 3, so that the rear side and the rear side surface of the game board 4 can be more easily seen through the prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, and the like, and the above-described effects can be reliably achieved. be able to. Further, since the depth D of the main body frame base 600 is set to about half of the depth of the main body frame 3, the height when the main body frame base 600 is turned down can be made as low as possible to be a flat shape. This makes it easier to perform the mounting work for mounting the prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, the tank rail unit 730, the prize ball device 740, etc. to the rear side of the main frame base 600.

  Further, the rear surface (the main body 902) of the transparent back cover 900 is substantially flush with the rear surfaces of the prize ball tank 720, the tank rail unit 730, and the prize ball device 740 attached to the prize ball base 710. As a result, the rear surface of the pachinko machine 1 can be made a substantially flat surface, and it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 1 from being caught or abutted by other members in the installed island facility by eliminating the rearward projections. By doing so, it is possible to prevent problems from occurring. Further, since the rear surface of the pachinko machine 1 is substantially flat, a simple-shaped cushioning material can be used when the pachinko machine 1 is transported, and the collection efficiency (storage efficiency) can be increased. The cost related to the machine 1 can be reduced.

  In addition, the back cover 900 is provided with a plurality of slits 916 and through holes 918, and the rear side and the rear side surface of the game board 4 can be directly visually recognized through the slits 916 and the like. 4 can be made easier to see, and the above-described effects can be reliably achieved. Further, even if the rear side of the game board 4 held by the main body frame base 600 is covered with the back cover 900, heat from the game board 4 can be released to the outside through the slits 916 of the back cover 900. In addition, the heat from the game board 4 can be prevented from being accumulated, and the control related to the game due to the heat can be prevented from becoming unstable, and the member such as the synthetic resin can be deformed to suppress the occurrence of the trouble. be able to. Further, since the slits 916 and the through holes 918 of the back cover 900 have a size that does not allow game balls to pass through, for example, even if game balls are spilled to the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 in the island facility, they pass through the slits 916 and the like. It is possible to prevent the game balls from entering the pachinko machine 1 and to prevent a problem from occurring due to the entry of the game balls.

[Basic configuration of game board]
Next, a basic configuration of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 102 is a front view showing the game board attached to the main body frame with the door frame of the pachinko machine removed. FIG. 103 is a front view of the game board, FIG. 104 is an exploded perspective view of the game board exploded and viewed from the front, and FIG. 105 is an exploded perspective view of the game board exploded and viewed from the rear. FIG. Further, FIG. 106 (A) is an enlarged front view showing a function display unit in a game board mounted on a pachinko machine, and FIG. 106 (B) is a front view showing another form of the function display unit.

  FIG. 107 is an exploded perspective view of a gaming board using a gaming panel according to an embodiment different from the example of FIG. 104 and the like as viewed from the front, and FIG. 108 is a gaming view of FIG. 107 viewed from behind. It is an exploded perspective view of a board. FIG. 109 is a cross-sectional view of a game panel of the game board of FIG. 107 cut in a vertical direction. Further, FIG. 110 is an exploded perspective view of the gaming board using the front constituent member of the embodiment different from the example of FIG. 107 and the like viewed from the front, and FIG. 111 is a gaming board viewed from the rear of FIG. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of FIG.

  As shown in the drawing, the game board 4 of the present embodiment has a front configuration in which the outer periphery of a game area 1100 into which a game ball is driven by the player operating the handle device 500 is formed to have a substantially rectangular shape in front. A member 1110, a plate-shaped game panel 1150 disposed behind the front component 1110 and defining a rear end of the game area 1100, a substrate holder 1160 disposed below the rear of the game panel 1150, and a substrate holder 1160. A main control board box 1170 that accommodates a main control board 4100 that is mounted on the rear surface of the game area and controls a game performed by driving a game ball into the game area 1100, and a predetermined control signal based on a control signal from the main control board 4100. A function display unit 1180 capable of displaying a game situation and attached to a predetermined position of the front component 1110 so as to be visible to the player. To have. The game board 4 further includes a front unit attached to the front surface of the game panel 1150 and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1150, which are not shown in FIGS. (See FIGS. 113, 116, etc.).

  The basic structure of the game board 4 of this embodiment is formed by the front component 1110, the game panel 1150, the board holder 1160, the main control board box 1170, and the function display unit 1180, and the game board 4 is attached to the game panel 1150. The front unit 2000, the back unit 3000, and the main control board 4100 housed in the main control board box 1170 form a detailed configuration characterizing the pachinko machine 1 (game board 4). Here, the basic configuration of the game board 4 will be described, and the detailed configuration will be described later.

[Front component]
Next, the front component 1110 of the game board 4 will be described. The front component 1110 of the game board 4 of the present example has an outer shape of a substantially rectangular shape which can be inserted into the game board holding opening 601 of the main body frame 3, and an inner shape penetrates in a substantially circular shape in the front-rear direction. The outer periphery of the game area 1100 is defined by the inner periphery of the inner shape. An outer rail 1111 extending in an arc shape from the lower left edge to the left in the left-right direction in the front view and extending in the clockwise circumferential direction from the center in the front view and passing through the upper center in the left-right direction in the front view to the upper right diagonal; An inner rail 1112 that is arranged substantially inside the outer rail 1111 and inside the outer rail 1111 and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the left-right direction in front view to the upper left corner in front view, so that the inner rail 1112 smoothly continues from the lower end thereof. An inner rail 1113 extending in an arc shape to a position below the end (upper end) of the outer rail 1111 along a counterclockwise circumferential direction in a front view, the end (upper end) of the inner rail 1113 and the outer rail 1111. And an inner rail 1112 and an inner peripheral rail 1113 that allow the game ball rolling along the outer rail 1111 to come into contact with the end (upper end) of the inner rail 1111. At the lower end of the game area 1100 at the lower end of the game area 1100, and the outer opening guide surface 1115 which is lowered rearward, is rotatably supported by the upper end of the inner rail 1112, and closes between the outer rail 1111. As described above, it is possible to rotate only between the closed position extending upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1112 and the open position where it is rotated clockwise in front view and opened between the inner rail 1112 and the outer rail 1111. A backflow preventing member 1116 urged by a spring (not shown) to return to the closed position side.

  When the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3, the front component 1110 has a lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112, as shown in FIG. It is located on an extension of the firing rail 660 in the device 650. Between the lower end of the outer rail 1111 and the upper end of the firing rail 660, a space extending in the left-right direction and downward is formed, and a game ball hit along the firing rail 660 of the hit ball firing device 650 is formed. , Jumps over the space and is driven into between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 from the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112. The game ball driven between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 rolls upward along the outer rail 1111 according to the momentum, and the backflow preventing member 1116 pivotally supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1112 is moved. By rotating to the open position side against the urging force, it is possible to enter the gaming area 1100.

  Also, when a game ball is strongly hit with the hit ball launching device 650, the game ball rolled along the outer rail 1111 in the game area 1100 is brought into contact with the stop 1114 provided at the end of the outer rail 1111. The rolling direction of the game ball can be forcibly changed by the contact of the game ball with the stop portion 1114, and the game ball continuously rolls from the outer rail 1111 to the inner peripheral rail 1113. It can be prevented from moving. Even if a game ball that has entered (has been driven into) the game area 1100 attempts to return between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112, the backflow prevention member 1116 returns to the closed position by the urging force before that. In this way, the backflow prevention member 1116 prevents the backflow of the game ball.

  In addition, when the game balls hit into the game area 1100 are not received in the starting ports 2101 and 2102 and the winning ports 2103, 2104 and 2201 of the front unit 2000 described later, the game balls flow down to the lower end of the game area 1100. Then, the player is guided to the out port 1151 of the game panel 1150 by the out port guiding surface 1115 at the boundary between the inner rail 1112 and the inner peripheral rail 1113, and is discharged from the out port 1151 to the rear lower side of the game board 4. ing.

  On the other hand, when the game ball fired from the hit ball firing device 650 cannot enter the game area 1100 beyond the backflow prevention member 1116 at the tip of the inner rail 1112, the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 Rolling downward in the opposite direction, a foul space 626 formed between the upper end of the firing rail 660 and the lower end of the outer rail 1111 from the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112. It falls and is received by the foul ball inlet 542e of the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 located below the foul space 626, and is discharged to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300.

  The outer rail 1111 of the front component 1110 has a metal plate attached to the surface thereof, so that the abrasion resistance due to the rolling of the game ball is enhanced and the game ball rolls smoothly. ing. In addition, the impact portion 1114 has an elastic body such as rubber or synthetic resin disposed on a surface thereof, so that even if a game ball rolls vigorously along the outer rail 1111 and collides, the impact is reduced. And the game ball can be repelled inward.

  Further, the front component 1110 has a wall-shaped security projection 1117 protruding forward from the lower outside of the outer rail 1111 and a substantially central portion in the vertical direction along the inner peripheral rail 1113 from below the out-port guiding surface 1115. And a groove-shaped rail security groove 1118 recessed from the front end by a predetermined amount. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the security projection 1117 on the front component 1110 overlaps the security rear end protrusion 183 of the security cover 180 on the door frame 5 in the vertical direction. Thereby, even if an illegal tool such as a piano wire is intruded from between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 on the pivot side (left side in front view), the illegal tool can reach the inside of the game area 1100. Can not be.

  When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the rear component 182 of the security cover 180 of the door frame 5 is inserted into the rail security groove 1118. So that the projected piece 182 after security is inserted between the inner rail 1112 and the outer rail 1111 so as to substantially contact the outer surface (the opposite side to the game area 1100) of the inner rail 1112. With the inner rail 1112, the rail security groove 1118, and the post-crime protruding piece 182, an illegal tool such as a piano wire penetrated from between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 reaches the gaming area 1100. Can be prevented.

  Further, the front component 1110 is disposed at a left end in a front view in a vertical direction and is disposed to be depressed from the front to the rear, and a pair of positioning recesses 1119 opened to the left end, and vertically separated to a right end in a front view. A pair of game board stoppers 1120, a fixed recess 1121 which is disposed on the left side in front view of the lower end of the outer rail 1111, is opened downward, is formed in an arc shape on the upper side, and is recessed from the front side, Near the left end of the lower end, there is provided a cutout portion 1122 for a ball passage, which is elongated in the left-right direction upward from the lower end and cut in a rectangular shape. The positioning recess 1119 of the front component member 1110 is fitted with a positioning member 956 attached to the inside of the side security plate 950 in the main body frame 3, so that the left end of the game board 4 inserted into the game board holding opening 601 when viewed from the front. However, it is possible to restrict movement in the front-back direction. Further, the game board stopper 1120 can be detachably locked to the game board locking portion 608 of the main body frame base 600 in the main body frame 3, and the game board stopper 1120 is attached to the game board. By locking the locking portion 608, the right end of the game board 4 inserted into the game board holding opening 601 of the main body frame 3 in front view can be restricted from moving in the front-rear direction. .

  In addition, the fixing recess 1121 of the front component 1110 allows the game board fixing tool 690 pivotally supported on the front surface of the main body frame 3 to be viewed from the front in a state where the game board 4 is inserted into the game board holding opening 601 of the main body frame 3. When rotated clockwise, the fixing piece 690a of the game board fixing tool 690 is inserted, and the lower end of the game board 4 is restricted from moving forward by the game board fixing tool 690. It has become. The ball passage notch 1122 of the front component 1110 is also formed with a similar ball passage notch 1152 at the same position of the game panel 1150, and the game board 4 is used to hold the game board holding opening 601 of the main body frame 3. In this state, the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 is inserted into the ball passage cutouts 1122 and 1152.

  Further, the front component 1110 has a horizontally long through hole 1123 penetrating in the front-rear direction near the right end in the front view at the lower end, and a thickness in the front-rear direction at the lower side of the through hole 1123 from the center in the left-right direction to the left in the front view. It is provided with a fastening portion 1124 having a small thickness, and a certificate sticking portion 1125 arranged on the left side of the through hole 1123 in a front view for attaching a certificate for certification confirmation. The fastening portion 1124 of the front component member 1110 is not shown in detail, but when the present game board is attached to a conventional body frame, a predetermined fastening band is inserted into a fastening hole formed in the conventional body frame. The game board 4 can be made difficult to remove by being wound around and fastened to each other, and illegal removal of the game board 4 can be prevented.

  Further, in the front component 1110, a display portion 1181 of a function display unit 1180 described later is disposed outside the rail security groove 1118 along the inner peripheral rail 1113 and at the lower right in front view. Further, the front component 1110 includes a plurality of mounting bosses 1126 protruding rearward from both left and right ends of a lower portion of the rear surface, and a plurality of positioning protrusions 1127 protruding rearward from the rear surface of the inner rail 1112. The mounting boss 1126 penetrates the game panel 1150 and engages with the fixed boss 1162 of the substrate holder 1160. A predetermined screw is screwed into the mounting boss 1126 from the rear side of the substrate holder 1160 through the fixed boss 1162. By attaching, the game panel 1150 can be sandwiched between the front component member 1110 and the substrate holder 1160. The positioning projection 1127 is fitted in an inner rail fixing hole 1155 formed in the game panel 1150 so that the inner rail 1112 can be fixed at a predetermined position on the game panel 1150.

[Game panel]
Next, the game panel 1150 in the game board 4 will be described. The game panel 1150 of this example is formed of a woody material such as veneer plywood having a predetermined thickness (for example, 18 mm to 21 mm), and has an outer shape substantially the same as the outer shape of the front component 1110. The game panel 1150 has an out port 1151 penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the out port guide surface 1115 of the front component 1110 at a lower portion substantially at the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and a horizontally elongated front-rear direction at the lower left side in the front view. And a ball passage notch 1152 which is opened downward and has the same shape as the ball passage notch 1122 of the front component member 1110, and a rear projection of the function display unit 1180 which penetrates the lower right corner in front view in the front-rear direction. And an insertion hole 1153 into which the 1182 is inserted.

  In the game panel 1150, a plurality of boss insertion holes 1154 penetrating in the front-rear direction at positions near the lower left and right ends corresponding to the mounting bosses 1126 of the front component 1110, and positioning projections 1127 of the front component 1110 are inserted and fixed. A plurality of inner rail fixing holes 1155 to be formed and a groove-shaped out ball discharge groove 1156 which is recessed forward from the rear surface by a predetermined amount on the rear surface side of the out port 1151 and has a lower end side opened downward (see FIG. 105). And a notch 1157 formed at a position corresponding to the game board stopper 1120 of the front component 1110 and cut out from the right end in front view so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction. Further, the game panel 1150 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes for mounting and fixing to a rear surface of the front component 1110 at appropriate positions.

  The game panel 1150 in the game board 4 of the present example can define a rear end of the game area 1100 whose outer periphery is defined by the front component member 1110, and within a range corresponding to the game area 1100 on the front surface. A plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are implanted in a predetermined gauge arrangement, and the front unit 2000 is attached. In addition, a back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1150. Further, the game panel 1150 is formed so that the out port 1151 is located at the lowermost end of the game area 1100. When the game panel 1150 is assembled to the game board 4, it is formed at the lowermost end of the game area 1100 of the front component 1110. The game ball guided backward by the provided out port guiding surface 1115 enters the out port 1151 and is discharged to the rear side of the game board 4.

[Substrate holder]
Next, the board holder 1160 in the game board 4 will be described. The substrate holder 1160 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with the upper part and the front part opened. The substrate holder 1160 has an out-ball discharge portion 1161 formed so as to penetrate vertically in the front end of the bottom wall at substantially the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and the upper surface of the bottom wall has an out-ball. The game balls formed so as to become lower toward the discharge portion 1161 and discharged from the out port 1151 of the game panel 1150, the front unit and the back unit, and supplied (discharged) to the upper surface of the bottom of the substrate holder 1160, The ball is discharged downward from the out-ball discharging portion 1161. When the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3, the out ball discharge section 1161 is located directly above the discharge ball receiving section 841 of the board unit 800 in the main body frame 3. The game balls discharged from the game machine are all discharged to the lower rear side of the pachinko machine 1 through the discharge passage 842 of the board unit 800.

  Further, the substrate holder 1160 includes a plurality of fixing bosses 1162 protruding forward from the front ends of the upper and lower ends of the side wall portion. The plurality of fixed bosses 1162 are inserted into the boss insertion holes 1154 from the rear side of the game panel 1520, and then fit with the rear ends of the mounting bosses 1126 of the front component 1110. In a state in which the board holder 1160 is fitted to the boss 1126, a predetermined screw is screwed into the mounting boss 1126 through the inside of the fixed boss 1162 from the rear side of the board holder 1160 so that the board holder 1160 is attached to the front component 1110. The game panel 1150 can be held between the front component 1110 and the substrate holder 1160.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 105, the board holder 1160 has a fixing portion 1163 to which a fixing piece 1174 of the main control board box 1170 can be fitted from the side at the rear left end of the rear surface of the rear wall portion, and a fixing portion. A locking portion 1164 that is arranged to face the 1163 and is capable of locking the elastic fixing piece 1175 of the main control board box 1170 from behind. The main control board box 1170 can be detachably supported on the rear surface of the board holder 1160 by the fixing part 1163 and the locking part 1164 of the board holder 1160.

[Main control board box]
Next, the main control board box 1170 in the game board 4 will be described. The main control board box 1170 has a thin horizontally long box-shaped board base 1171 having an open rear side, and a thin horizontally long box shape having a front side opened by covering the rear face of the board base 1171 and fitted into the inside of the board base 1171 from the rear side. The board cover 1172 includes a main control board 4100 in which electronic components, terminals, and the like are mounted on the rear side at the front end of the board cover 1172. Further, the main control board box 1170 extends outward from the left end of the board base 1171 in rear view and is fixed to the fixing piece 1174 to be fitted to the fixing portion 1163 of the board holder 1160, and from the right end in rear view of the board cover 1172. And a resilient fixing piece projecting rearward and resiliently locked to the locking portion 1164 of the substrate holder 1160.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 105 and the like, the main control board box 1170 is disposed on the right side of the rear view, two each, with the elastic fixing piece 1175 interposed therebetween to seal the opening and closing of the board base 1171 and the board cover 1172. A possible sealing portion 1176, a hermetic seal (not shown) stuck over the substrate base 1171 and the substrate cover 1172 at the lower end of the substrate base 1171 and the substrate cover 1172, and a transparent seal covering the surface of the hermetic seal It has a protective cover 1177 and a board management seal 1178 attached to the rear surface of the board cover 1172. The sealing section 1176 of the main control board box 1170 has the same configuration as the separation cutting section 863 of the payout control board box 860 in the board unit 800, and is caulked and fixed at any one of the four sealing sections 1176. Have been. In order to separate the board base 1171 and the board cover 1172, the main control board box 1170 needs to cut off the sealing portion 1176 fixed by caulking, so that a trace of opening and closing of the main control board box 1170 remains. Has become. This makes it possible to visually and externally determine whether or not the main control board box 1170 has been illegally opened.

  In this example, four sealing portions 1176 of the main control board box 1170 are provided, so that the main control board box 1170 can be opened and closed up to three times. In the main control board box 1170 of the present example, a sealing seal is stuck over the board base 1171 and the board cover 1172. When the board base 1171 and the board cover 1172 are separated, the sealing seal is cut. It must be peeled off or peeled off, and even with this hermetic seal, traces of opening and closing remain. Accordingly, the main control board box 1170 is illegally opened and closed, and the internal main control board 4100 is illegally remodeled or exchanged with an unauthorized main control board (or a ROM storing a game content program or the like). However, it can be visually confirmed from the outside, and it is possible to prevent such illegal acts from being performed.

  In the main control board box 1170, an opening penetrating the board cover 1172 in the front-rear direction is formed at an appropriate position, and the RAM clear switch 4100c and the main control input circuit 4100f attached to the main control board 4100 through the opening. Various connection terminals for connecting to the peripheral control board 4010, the payout control board 4110, and the like face the rear side. By connecting a predetermined measuring device to the main control input circuit 4100f facing the rear surface of the main control board box 1170, the main control board 4100 can be checked from the outside without opening the main control board box 1170. Even if the above-described sealing portion 1176 and the hermetic seal are finely crafted, the presence or absence of unauthorized modification to the main control board 4100 can be confirmed by other than visual inspection, and the pachinko machine 1 with high crime prevention performance can be obtained. You can do it.

[Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1180 in the game board 4 will be described. The function display unit 1180 is attached and arranged at a predetermined position on the front component 1110. The display unit 1181 is provided on the front of the front component 1110 so as to be visible from the player side. And a rear protruding portion 1182 protruding rearward from the rear surface.

  On the display portion 1181 of the function display unit 1180 of this example, as shown in an enlarged manner in FIG. 106 (A), a game state changed by a game ball driven into the game area 1100 is displayed at the left end in front view. A game status indicator 1183 made up of one LED for performing the game, and two LEDs vertically arranged on the right side of the game status indicator 1183 to display the number of reserves for accepting game balls in the first starting port 2101. Special symbol storage and display 1184, and a lottery result of the first special symbol which is arranged on the right side of the first special symbol storage and display 1184 and which is randomly selected by receiving game balls into the first starting port 2101 (first Special lottery result) as a first special symbol, a first special symbol indicator 1185 composed of one 7-segment LED, and a diagonally upper right corner of the first special symbol indicator 1185 A second 7-segment LED for displaying as a second special symbol a lottery result (second special lottery result) of a second special symbol that is arranged and received by accepting a game ball into the second starting port 2102. A special symbol display 1186 and a second special symbol for displaying the number of reserves relating to the reception of game balls into the second starting port 2102, comprising two LEDs vertically arranged on the right side of the second special symbol display 1186. And a storage display 1187.

  In addition, the display portion 1181 of the function display unit 1180 displays the number of reserves related to the passage of the game balls through the general-purpose gate 2301 by being arranged in an arc shape substantially along the inner rail 1113 from directly above the second special symbol display 1186. And a normal symbol storage display 1188 composed of four LEDs for displaying a normal symbol, and a normal symbol drawn by a game ball arranged below the normal symbol memory display and passed through the general symbol gate 2301 to display a normal symbol lottery result. The first special lottery result or the second special lottery result which is arranged side by side on the diagonally upper right side of the ordinary symbol display 1189 made up of one LED for displaying as A round display consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the opening and closing pattern of the special winning opening 2103 at the time of "operating hit". It is provided with a 1190, a.

  The game state indicator 1183 in the function display unit 1180 of this example is a red / green / orange color LED that can change its emission color. Depending on the combination, various game states (for example, a probability change state, a time reduction state, a probability change time short game state, a big hit game state, and the like) can be displayed. In the present embodiment, at least the probability variation state, the time reduction state, and the right-handed game state are configured to be displayed. In particular, in the present embodiment, a game state that is advantageous to a player if a game ball is fired in the game area 1100 on the left side of the center role 2500 (so-called “left hit”), and a game on the right side of the center role 2500 If a game ball is fired in the area 1100 (so-called “right-handed”), a game state that is advantageous to the player is mixed, and the timing of performing “right-handed” is clearly displayed to the player. Thus, even a beginner of the game can smoothly switch the hitting method (strike operation) in accordance with the transition of the game state without mistakenly hitting the "left hit" and the "right hit".

  In addition, the game state display 1183 is not limited to one configured by one color LED, and may be configured by a plurality of LED groups or 7-segment LEDs. Any configuration may be used as long as the player can easily grasp the current game state, particularly, the game state in which the player can right-turn when the player turns his or her eyes to the game state indicator 1183 during the game.

  The function display unit 1180 is controlled by the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100. The control signal is transmitted to a peripheral control unit 4140 of a peripheral control board 4010, which will be described later, so that the player can use the liquid crystal display device 1900. It is preferable to notify "right-handed". Normally, since the liquid crystal display device 1900 is disposed in front of the player (beyond the line of sight), when “right-handed” is notified on the liquid crystal display device 1900, the line of sight is set to the left end in front view. The player can switch to an appropriate hitting method (driving operation) without moving the player.

  Also, when the first special symbol storage display 1184 in the function display unit 1180 cannot display the first special symbol variably on the first special symbol display 1185, a game ball is accepted to the first starting port 2101. In this case, the display of the number of changes (the number of storages) of the first special symbol for which the start of the variable display is suspended (stored) is displayed. The first special symbol memory display 1184 has a first special symbol memory lamp 1184a composed of a predetermined LED and a first special symbol memory lamp 1184b, and the first special symbol memory lamps 1184a and 1184b are turned on. -The number of holds can be displayed by the blinking pattern. Specifically, for example, when the number of reservations is one, the first special symbol storage lamp 1184a is turned on and the first special symbol storage lamp 1184b is turned off, and when the number of reservations is two, the first special symbol storage lamps 1184a, 1184b Are turned on together, the first special symbol storage lamp 1184a flashes when the number of reservations is three, and the first special symbol storage lamp 1184b is turned on. It is blinking. In this example, up to four are reserved.

  Also, the second special symbol storage display 1187 in the function display unit 1180 receives the game ball in the second starting port 2102 when the second special symbol display 1186 cannot display the second special symbol in a variable manner. In this case, the display of the number of changes (the number of storages) of the second special symbol for which the start of the variable display is suspended (stored) is displayed. The second special symbol memory display 1187 has a second special symbol memory lamp 1187a composed of a predetermined LED and a second special symbol memory lamp 1187b, and the second special symbol memory lamps 1187a and 1187b are turned on. -The number of holds can be displayed by the blinking pattern. Specifically, for example, when the number of reservations is one, the second special symbol storage lamp 1187a is turned on and the second special symbol storage lamp 1187b is turned off. When the number of reservations is two, the second special symbol storage lamps 1187a and 1187b are used. Are turned on together, the second special symbol storage lamp 1187a flashes when the number of reservations is three, and the second special symbol storage lamp 1187b is turned on. It is blinking. In this example, up to four are reserved.

  Further, the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 in the function display unit 1180 are the first special lottery selected by receiving game balls in the first starting port 2101 and the second starting port 2102. The 7-segment LED is displayed after displaying the result and the second special lottery result. The 7-segment LED is stopped after fluctuating for a predetermined time according to the special lottery result. The special lottery result and the second special lottery result can be recognized by the player.

  The normal symbol display 1189 in the function display unit 1180 is a red, green, or orange color LED that can change its emission color, and is a combination of a light emission color and lighting / flashing. Accordingly, it is possible to display a normal lottery result which is selected by a game ball passing through the general-purpose gate 2301. The display of the ordinary symbol by the ordinary symbol display 1189 is, similarly to the special symbol, changed and displayed for a predetermined time and then stopped and displayed in a light emission pattern corresponding to the ordinary lottery result.

  In addition, the normal symbol storage display 1188 in the function display unit 1180 starts the variable display when the game ball passes through the general symbol gate 2301 when the normal symbol cannot be displayed in a variable manner on the normal symbol display 1189. The number of reserved (stored) ordinary symbols is displayed (the number of stored). The ordinary symbol storage display 1188 includes four ordinary symbol storage lamps 1188a to 1188d arranged side by side from the bottom, each of which is a predetermined LED, and the ordinary symbol storage lamp 1188a from the bottom according to the number of holdings. By sequentially lighting up to 1188d, the number of reserved ordinary symbols can be displayed. In this example, up to four variable displays of the ordinary symbols are held (stored).

  Further, the round display 1190 in the function display unit 1180 includes round display lamps 1190a and 1190b each formed of a predetermined LED, and by turning on these display lamps, the number of rounds in the “big hit” game can be displayed. It has become.

  As shown in FIG. 106 (A), the function display unit 1180 of this example can be visually recognized from the player side through the game window 101 of the door frame 5 with the game board 4 attached to the pachinko machine 1. It has become. In addition, the game state indicator 1183, the first special symbol memory indicator 1184, the first special symbol indicator 1185, the second special symbol indicator 1186, the second special symbol memory indicator 1187 of the function display unit 1180, and the normal symbol memory The display 1188, the ordinary symbol display 1189, and the round display 1190 are mounted on the front of a function display board (not shown). At the rear end of the rear projection 1182 of the function display unit 1180, a connection terminal for connecting the function display board 1191 and the main control board 4100 is attached.

  In this example, the function display unit 1180 is provided on the front component 1110 of the game board 4, so that the function display unit 1180 is provided on the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 attached to the game panel 1150. The display unit 1180 can be diverted as the basic configuration of the game board 4, and the configuration of the pachinko machine 1 can be simplified to prevent an increase in cost, and the model of the pachinko machine 1 (table unit 2000 or Even if the configuration of the game board 4 embodied by the back unit 3000 and capable of characterizing the model of the pachinko machine 1 is different, the position of the display portion 1181 of the function display unit 1180 does not change. To be able to make the clerk of the hall recognize the position of the display unit 1181 without being confused You have me.

  Further, the function display unit 1180 of the pachinko machine 1 may have a form as shown in FIG. 106 (B). In this example, the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 each composed of 7-segment LEDs are each composed of eight LED groups. In addition, the first special symbol storage display 1184 and the second special symbol storage display 1187 are each configured by four LED groups, and the ordinary symbol storage display 1188 is configured by two LEDs.

  The function display unit 1180 can also provide the same operation and effect as described above, and also, since the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 are constituted by eight LED groups, the function display unit 1180 Compared with the case where the segment LED is used, it is possible to make it difficult to remember the special symbol displayed to the player. Therefore, since the content displayed on the function display unit 1180 is difficult to understand, it is possible to prevent the display of the function display unit 1180 from being anxious during the game and becoming difficult to concentrate on the game. It is possible to make the game more enjoyable by focusing on movable effects and effect images.

[Second embodiment of gaming panel]
Next, a game panel 1200 different from the game panel 1150 in the game board 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. Note that the front component 1110, the substrate holder 1160, and the main control substrate box 1170 in FIGS. 107 to 109 have the same configuration as that described above, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted. The game panel 1200 according to the present embodiment is a plate-like member that is thinner than the above-described game panel 1150 and is capable of partitioning the rear end of the game area 1100 whose outer periphery is partitioned by the front component 1110 from the outer shape of the front component 1110. It also includes a panel plate 1210 having a small external shape, and a frame-shaped panel holder 1220 that holds the panel plate 1210 detachably from the front side and is attached to the rear surface of the front component 1110.

  The panel plate 1210 has a polygonal shape whose outer shape is slightly larger than the game area 1100, and is made of a synthetic resin plate such as an acrylic resin, a polycarbonate resin, a polyarylate resin, a methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. Is formed. The thickness of the panel plate 1210 is thinner than the panel holder 1220 (game panel 1150), and is the minimum thickness that can be sufficiently held even when the obstacle nail G is planted on the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. (8 to 10 mm). In this example, the panel plate 1210 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

  The panel plate 1210 includes a plurality of fitting holes 1211 which are arranged in the vicinity of the outer periphery and penetrate in the front-rear direction, and long holes 1212 which are arranged in the vicinity of the lower left outer periphery and penetrate in the front-rear direction and extend vertically. It has. These fitting holes 1211 and long holes 1212 are arranged outside the game area 1100, and perform positioning with the panel holder 1220. In addition, the panel plate 1210 is provided with a stepped engagement step 1213 having a recessed front side at both ends of the upper side and both ends of the lower side. The engagement step portion 1213 is cut out to substantially half the thickness of the panel plate 1210, and is disposed outside the game area 1100 like the fitting hole 1211 and the long hole 1212. This is for engaging and fixing the panel plate 1210 to the panel holder 1220.

  Further, the panel plate 1210 is provided with a plurality of inner rail fixing holes 1214 at predetermined positions. The inner rail 1112 can be fixed at a predetermined position by fitting and fixing a positioning protrusion 1127 projecting from the rear side of the inner rail 1112 into the inner rail fixing hole 1214. Further, the panel plate 1210 is provided with a plurality of openings 1215 penetrating in the front-rear direction for mounting the front unit 2000 such as the center accessory 2500 and the like, and the attacker devices 2100, 2150, etc. are provided from the front side with respect to the openings 1215. Unit is inserted and fixed.

  On the other hand, the panel holder 1220 of the game panel 1200 has a size that encompasses the panel board 1210 and has a substantially rectangular outer shape, and has a thickness substantially equal to the thickness of the game panel 1150 made of a wooden board (in this example, about 20 mm) (for example, a thermoplastic synthetic resin). The panel holder 1220 has a holding step 1221 which detachably holds the panel plate 1210 and is recessed from the front side to the rear side, and a front and rear portion having a size substantially equal to the game area 1100 inside the holding step 1221. And a through hole 1222 penetrating in the direction.

  The holding step portion 1221 of the panel holder 1220 has a depth from the front surface substantially equal to the thickness of the panel plate 1210, and the front surface of the panel plate 1210 held in the holding step portion 1221 is the front surface of the panel holder 1220. And are substantially flush with each other. In addition, the holding step portion 1221 has a front inner peripheral surface having a size such that a predetermined amount of clearance is formed with respect to the outer peripheral surface of the panel plate 1210. With this clearance, even if the panel plate 1210 relatively expands and contracts due to a change in temperature or a change with time, the expansion and contraction can be absorbed. The clearance may be filled with an elastic member such as rubber.

  Further, the panel holder 1220 is disposed at a position corresponding to the fitting hole 1211 and the long hole 1212 formed in the panel plate 1210 held by the holding step 1221, and from the front of the holding step 1221 toward the front. It has a plurality of projecting pins 1223 which extend and can be fitted and inserted into the fitting holes 1211 and the long holes 1212 of the panel plate 1210. By fitting and inserting these protruding pins 1223 into the fitting holes 1211 and the long holes 1212 of the panel plate 1210, the panel holder 1220 and the panel plate 1210 can be positioned with respect to each other.

  Further, the panel holder 1220 is provided with an engagement claw 1224 and an engagement piece 1225 that engage with the engagement step 1213 at a position corresponding to the engagement step 1213 of the panel plate 1210. More specifically, the engaging claw 1224 is disposed on the upper holding step 1221 of the panel holder 1220, corresponds to the upper engaging step 1213 of the panel plate 1210, and extends forward from the front surface of the holding step 1221. It is configured to protrude toward and engage elastically with the engaging step 1213. The engaging claw 1224 has such a size that its tip does not protrude from the front surface of the panel holder 1220. On the other hand, the engagement piece 1225 is disposed on the lower holding step 1221 on the lower side of the panel holder 1220, corresponds to the lower engaging step 1213 on the panel plate 1210, and is located between the front side of the holding step 1221 and the panel. In a state in which a predetermined gap having a size that allows the engagement step portion 1213 of the plate 1210 to be inserted is formed, a predetermined amount is extended upward (center side) along the front surface of the panel holder 1220. By engaging the engaging step 1213 of the panel plate 1210 with the engaging claw 1224 and the engaging piece 1225, the panel plate 1210 is detachably held to the panel holder 1220.

  Further, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a boss insertion hole 1226 penetrating in the front-rear direction, through which the mounting boss 1126 provided on the front component 1110 can be inserted. By inserting 1126, panel holder 1220 and front component 1110 are positioned with respect to each other.

  As shown in FIG. 108, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a mounting support portion 1227 which is recessed by a predetermined amount on the front side so as to leave the lower side and the outer peripheral edge slightly below the center in the vertical direction on the rear surface side. ing. Due to the mounting support portion 1227, the rear surface of the panel holder 1220 is recessed in a state where the outer peripheral portion on the rear surface side projects rearward above a predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height, and the amount of the depression ( The depth (depth) is set to about 2.5 mm (in this example, about 2.5 mm in this example) that can accommodate the flange-shaped fixing portion 3010c (see FIG. 116) of the back box 3010 in the back unit 3000 attached and fixed to the attachment supporting portion 1227. And preferably between 1 and 3 mm). By attaching and fixing a predetermined member to the attachment support portion 1227, the fixing portion 3010c can be prevented from protruding rearward from the panel holder 1220, and the panel holder 1220, that is, the game board 4 can be attached to the main body frame 3 (Pachinko machine 1) can be securely installed and installed in the game board holding opening 601.

  Further, in the panel holder 1220, as shown in the drawing, a plurality of mounting holes 1228 arranged in the mounting support portion 1227 on the rear surface side and above the accommodation recess 630h and capable of screwing a predetermined screw are arranged in a predetermined arrangement. ing. Further, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of positioning holes 1229 arranged so as to correspond to the mounting holes 1228. This positioning hole 1229 is provided with a positioning protrusion (for example, a positioning protrusion (shown in the figure) that protrudes forward from a fixing portion 3010c formed in a front flange shape in the back box 3010). Is omitted))). In this example, the positioning hole 1229 is a substantially rectangular (square hole) blind hole as viewed from the rear.

  It should be noted that, for the mounting hole 1228, a hole having a large diameter and a hole having a small diameter are mixed, and a mounting hole having an appropriate diameter is selected according to the size and weight of a predetermined member to be mounted and fixed. 1228 may be used.

  The panel holder 1220 is formed with a plurality of lightening portions 1230 that are open to the rear side at least in a predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height, so that the weight of the panel holder 1220 is reduced by the lightening portions 1230. It has become. As shown in FIG. 107, these lightening portions 1230 are not formed on the front side of the accommodation recess 630h, that is, within a predetermined range from the lower end on the front side of the panel holder 1220 to a predetermined height. Since the front face of the panel holder 1220 is substantially flat, the rear face of the front component 1110 disposed on the front face is substantially flat, and the game ball fired from the hit ball firing device 650 However, it is designed to be smoothly guided. Further, as shown in the drawing, the panel holder 1220 is formed with a lightening portion 1230 so that the mounting holes 1228 and the like are formed in a boss shape, and they support them and maintain the strength of the panel holder 1220. For example, a box-shaped rib is formed.

  The panel holder 1220 has a positioning portion 1231 corresponding to a positioning device such as an obstacle nail implantation device (not shown) or an assembling jig, and holds the game panel 1150 on the obstacle nail implantation device. It can be set in the state where it was done. In the lower part of the panel holder 1220, an out port 1232 penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the out port guiding surface 1115 of the front component 1110, and penetrating horizontally in the front-rear direction on the left side of the lower end in front view and downward. And a ball passage notch 1233 having the same shape as the ball passage notch 1122 of the front component 1110 and a rear protruding portion 1182 of the function display unit 1180 penetrating the lower right corner in front view in the front-rear direction. And an insertion hole 1234.

  Further, the panel holder 1220 has a groove-shaped out ball discharge groove 1235 (see FIG. 108) having a concave shape at the rear side of the out port 1232 toward the front from the rear surface by a predetermined amount and having a lower end side opened downward. A notch 1236 formed at a position corresponding to the game board stopper 1120 of the member 1110 and cut out so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction from the right end in front view. Further, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes for mounting and fixing to the rear surface of the front component 1110 at appropriate positions.

  When the game board 4 is inserted and held in the game board holding opening 601 of the main body frame 3, the out ball discharge groove 1235 of the panel holder 1220 is formed on the main body frame 3 (the upper surface of the game board mounting portion 606 in the main body frame base 600). The positioning protrusion 607 provided is adapted to be fitted, and the outboard discharge groove 1235 is fitted to the positioning protrusion 607, so that the game board 4 relatively moves in the left-right direction with respect to the main body frame 3. It is being regulated.

  In the gaming panel 1200 of this embodiment, the panel plate 1210 is fitted and inserted into the holding step 1221 of the panel holder 1220 from the front, and the engaging claw 1224 and the engaging piece 1225 and the engaging step 1213 are engaged. By combining them, the panel plate 1210 can be held by the panel holder 1220, and the front sides of the panel plate 1210 and the panel holder 1220 are substantially flush with each other. The panel nail 1210 can be set to the conventional obstacle nail implantation device while the panel plate 1210 is held in the panel holder 1220 without modifying the installation device, and the cost for implanting the obstacle nail G is increased. It can be suppressed.

  Although not shown, the gaming panel 1200 of the present example is configured such that a plurality of obstacle nails are implanted in a predetermined gauge array in a range corresponding to the gaming area 1100 on the front surface of the panel board 1210. And the front unit 2000 can be attached. The rear unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1220. Thus, since only the front unit is supported on the thin panel plate 1210, it is possible to prevent the panel plate 1210 from being distorted due to the load of the front unit.

  Furthermore, since the game panel 1200 has a divided structure of the panel plate 1210 and the panel holder 1220, even if the panel plate 1210 is a transparent plate, it is possible to suppress an increase in the weight of the entire game panel 1200, and to provide a transparent panel. The pachinko machine 1 in which the rear side of the game area 1100 can be seen by the player through the board 1210 can be embodied, and the pachinko machine 1 can attract the player's interest strongly.

  Also, since the gaming panel 1200 is divided into a panel board 1210 and a panel holder 1220, the panel board 1210 in which the position of obstacle nails, winning holes and the like changes depending on the model of the pachinko machine 1 is used as a replacement part. The panel holder 1220 can be used as a common part, and the pachinko machine 1 having the game board 4 capable of supporting various models can be provided only by replacing the panel plate 1210 alone.

  Furthermore, since a plurality of mounting holes 1228 are provided in the panel holder 1220 in a predetermined arrangement in advance, the mounting and fixing positions of various predetermined members such as the back unit 3000 which is mounted and fixed to the rear surface of the panel holder 1220 according to the model. The panel holder 1220 can be used as a common part of the pachinko machine 1 independent of the model by designing the fixing portions of the various members to correspond to the positions of the mounting holes 1228 even if the positions are different. It has become.

[Second embodiment of front component]
Next, a front component 1110A in a form different from the front component 1110 in the game board 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. The game panel 1200, the board holder 1160, and the main control board box 1170 in FIGS. 110 and 112 have the outer shape of the panel plate 1210 and the inner shape of the through-hole 1222 of the panel holder 1220 according to the embodiment shown in FIGS. Only the configuration is different from that of the example of FIGS. 107 to 109, and the detailed description is omitted here.

  The front component 1110A shown in FIGS. 110 and 111 is different from the above-described front component 1110 in that a part of the inner peripheral shape penetrated in the front-rear direction is different and does not include the function display unit 1180. The points are very different. The other components are the same as those of the front component 1110, and are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description is omitted. In the game board 4 using the front component 1110A, the function display unit 1180 is provided in either the front unit 2000 or the back unit 3000 in the game board 4 (in this example, the front unit). 2000).

  As shown in the drawing, the front component 1110A has a frame-shaped inner peripheral shape extending from the out-port guiding surface 1115 in the clockwise direction in a front view to the stop portion 1114 of the inner rail 1112 and the outer rail 1111. The shape is formed in the same shape as the above-mentioned front component 1110, and the shape from the stop portion 1114 to the out-port guiding surface 1115 in the clockwise direction is different from the above-mentioned front component 1110. ing. Specifically, a portion from the stop portion 1114 to a position immediately above the right stamp stamping portion 1125 disposed immediately below the stop portion 1114 is formed in a gentle arc shape, and the out port is formed from the lower end of the arc shape. It is formed in a linear shape that is inclined so that the space up to the guide surface 1115 becomes lower toward the out-port guide surface 1115.

  The front component 1110A of the present example can secure a wider game area 1100 as compared with the above-described front component 1110, so that the player can be more enjoyed by the wide game area 1100. I can do it.

[Security structure of pachinko machines]
Subsequently, a security structure of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 112 is a partial cross-sectional view showing the security structure on the pivot side of the pachinko machine. FIG. 113 is a perspective view of the game board accommodated therein, as viewed from the rear side.

  First, as shown in FIG. 112, the security structure on the pivot side of the pachinko machine 1 of this example is a side surface on the pivot side (left side in front view) of the main body frame base 600 formed of synthetic resin in the main body frame 3. , And a metal reinforcing unit 150 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base body 110 formed of a synthetic resin in the door frame 5.

  As described above, the side security plate 950 of the main body frame 3 is formed of a metal (for example, an aluminum alloy) extruded material, and the vertical dimension is substantially the same as the vertical dimension of the main body frame base 600. At the same time, the size in the front-rear direction is larger than the size in the front-rear direction of the game panel 4 combined with the front component 1110 and the game panel 1150. The side security plate 950 extends in the up-down direction and extends in the front-rear direction to form a side surface of the body frame 3, and a front end extending inward (open side) in a substantially right angle direction from the front end of the side surface piece 952 a. Piece 952b, a middle piece 952c extending from the side piece 952a along the front end piece 952b so as to form a predetermined amount of clearance behind the front end piece 952b, and a substantially right angle inwardly extending from the rear end of the side piece 952a. And a rear end piece 952d. As a result, the front end of the side security plate 950 has a substantially U-shaped cross section that opens inward (open side) by the front end piece 952b and the middle piece 952c.

  Further, the strength and rigidity of the side security plate 950 (main body 952) is increased by the front end piece 952b, the middle piece 952c, and the rear end piece 952d which are arranged at right angles to the surface of the side piece 952a. The strength of the entire body frame 3 is increased so that the game board 4 and the door frame 5 can be favorably supported.

  On the other hand, as described above, the reinforcement unit 150 of the door frame 5 is formed by forming a plurality of long metal plates into a frame shape so as to surround the outer periphery of the game window 101 in the door frame 5 using spot welding, rivets, or the like. The outer side of the supporting-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 on the supporting side is provided with a supporting-side U-shaped protruding piece 166 having a substantially U-shaped cross section that is opened outwardly (on the supporting side). In the supporting-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 of the reinforcing unit 150, the strength of the supporting-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is further increased by the supporting-side U-shaped protrusion 166, and the supporting-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is hardly bent. .

  By the way, in this example, since the door frame 5 is mounted and supported on the main body frame 3 only at the upper and lower two points of the upper shaft support 156 and the lower shaft support 158, the door frame 5 on the shaft support side is provided. When an incorrect tool such as a screwdriver or a bur is inserted between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3, the supporting metal plate 152 is deformed, and the gap between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 is increased. There is a risk that wrongdoing will take place. On the other hand, in the security structure of the present example, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, between the front end piece 952 b and the middle piece 952 c formed inside the front end of the side security plate 950. The rear side piece of the U-shaped protrusion 166 of the reinforcement unit 150 of the door frame 5 formed in a substantially U shape is inserted (penetrated), and the front end piece 952b is supported by the front end piece 952b. It is configured to be sandwiched by the side U-shaped protruding pieces 166. Thus, even if the door frame 5 is forcibly opened with respect to the main body frame 3, the U-shaped protruding piece 166 of the door frame 5 abuts on the rear surface side of the front end piece 952 b of the main body frame 3, and the door frame 5 is closed. Can be prevented from moving in the direction away from the main body frame 3, so that the closed door frame 5 can be prevented from being cut open, and the main body frame can be prevented. 3 can be prevented from being fraudulently performed to open the door frame 5.

  Further, since the side security plate 950 formed of metal in the main body frame 3 and the reinforcing unit 150 formed of metal in the door frame 5 are fitted, the gap between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 is reduced. Of the main frame 3 and the door frame 5 can be hardly distorted by an unauthorized tool, and the security performance can be enhanced.

  Furthermore, since the rear end of the side piece 952a of the side security plate 950 extends rearward from the game panel 1150 of the game board 4, the main body frame base 600 may be temporarily behind the rear end of the side piece 952a. Is broken, an illegal tool such as a piano wire cannot enter the game area 1100 on the front of the game board 4 (game panel 1150) from the rear end of the side piece 952a, and an illegal act is performed. Can be reliably prevented. As shown in FIG. 112, since the side frame plate 12 of the outer frame 2 is in contact with the outside of the side security plate 950, the pachinko machine 1 has a robust side surface. Is able to fully counter the vandalism. Generally, in a game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, the side of the pachinko machine 1 is inserted and fixed in the frame of an island facility for installing the pachinko machine 1, so that the player side From the (front side), it is almost impossible for an unauthorized tool to penetrate behind the rear end of the middle piece 952c, and the security performance of the pachinko machine 1 is further enhanced.

  Then, as a security structure from the rear side in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, as shown in FIG. 113, the prize ball base 710, the tank rail 731 and the prize ball device 740 in the main body frame 3 accommodating the game board 4 are provided. Since the unit base 741, the full tank branching unit 770, and the back cover 900 are formed of a transparent synthetic resin, the rear and side surfaces of the game board 4 accommodated in the main body frame 3 are used for the game board 4. Even if it is not removed from the main body frame 3 or the back cover 900 is opened, it can be visually recognized from the rear side of the main body frame 3. As a result, even if an unauthorized device is attached to the rear side of the game board 4 or the like, it can be easily detected, and it is possible to prevent an illegal act from being performed. Further, since an unauthorized device or the like attached to the game board 4 can be easily found from the outside, it is possible to hesitate to attach the unauthorized device, and it is possible to increase deterrence against illegal acts. ing.

  In addition, since the rear and side surfaces of the game board 4 can be visually recognized from the rear side of the main body frame 3 through the transparent prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, and the like, the main body frame is used for maintenance and model change. When the game board 4 is attached to / detached from the main body 3, even if tools such as a screwdriver and pliers, cleaning waste, dust and dirt, etc. remain between the main body frame 3 and the game board 4, they are kept outside. , It is possible to prevent any trouble from occurring, and it is possible to improve the maintainability of the pachinko machine 1.

[Detailed configuration of game board]
Subsequently, a detailed configuration of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 114 to FIG. FIG. 114 is a front view of the game board in the pachinko machine. FIG. 115 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the special winning opening of the game board is opened. FIG. 116 is a perspective view of the game board as viewed from behind, and FIG. 117 is an exploded view of the main components of the game board (note that the center role 2500 is not shown). It is the perspective view seen.

  The game board 4 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has an outer rail 1111 and an inner rail 1112, and a game ball (also simply referred to as a “ball”) as a game medium is formed by operating a handle device 500 by a player. It includes a frame-shaped front component 1110A that defines the inner periphery of the game area 1100 to be driven in, and a plate-shaped game panel 1200.

  The game panel 1200 of this example includes a transparent panel plate 1210 that is formed in a plate shape capable of partitioning the rear end of the game area 1100 whose inner periphery is partitioned by the front component member 1110A and has a smaller outer shape than the front component member 1110A. And a frame-shaped panel holder 1220 that detachably holds the panel plate 1210 from the front side and is attached to the rear surface of the front component 1110A. The opening of the game panel 1200 is formed in a transparent panel plate 1210.

  The game board 4 has a front unit 2000 attached to the opening of the game panel 1200 from the front side, a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1200 (panel holder 1220), and a front end left end of the back unit 3000. A function display unit 1180 which is visible from the player side through the transparent panel board 1210 and is located at a position where it becomes visible from the game window 101 of the door frame 5 to the player side when attached to the pachinko machine 1; A liquid crystal display device 1900 having a rectangular display screen (display area) attached to the rear side of the back unit 3000 so as to be visible from the player side and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and covers a lower portion of the back unit 3000 from the rear side. And a substrate holder 1160 attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the game panel 1200 A main control board box 1170 to be attached, and a.

  As shown in FIGS. 114 and 115, in the game area 1100, a number of obstacle nails are provided in a predetermined gauge arrangement, and a windmill is provided at a predetermined position in the middle. A center role 2500 is arranged substantially at the center of the game area 1100. The design of the center role 2500 characterizes the model of the pachinko machine 1, the game concept, and the like.

  Further, behind the center role 2500, an effect display device 1900 for effecting and displaying a large area in front view so as to attract attention from a player is provided. As the effect display device 1900, an appropriate display device capable of displaying image information obtained by combining decorative pattern image information, background image information, character image information, and the like is used. In the present embodiment, a liquid crystal display device is used as effect display device 1900.

  Above the liquid crystal display device 1900, a second liquid crystal display device 3252 having a smaller display area than the liquid crystal display device 1900 and realizing an auxiliary display effect is provided. The second liquid crystal display device 3252 may also display decorative pattern image information, background image information, image information obtained by combining character image information, and the like.

  On the other hand, from the right side to the lower side of the center role 2500 in the game area 1100, the general figure gate 2301, the large winning port 2103 of the attacker device 2100, the special winning port 2101b of the first starting port 2101, the second A starting port 2102 is provided. On the other hand, a plurality of general winning openings 2201 are provided in a left area of the center role 2500 in the gaming area 1100. In addition, a permanent winning port 2101a of the first starting port 2101 is provided in an area below the center role 2500 in the gaming area 1100.

  Here, the first starting port 2101 is located substantially at the center of the game area 1100 in the left-right direction and below the liquid crystal display device 1900, and has a permanent winning opening 2101a in which a game ball can always win. The special prize port 2101b is provided so that a game ball can be won only when the movable piece (ordinary electric accessory) 2111 operates on the right side. When a game ball enters the first starting port 2101 (always winning port 2101a, special winning port 2101b), the first starting port sensor 3131 (see FIG. 118) described later enters the game ball (winning). ) Is detected. At this time, if a predetermined special start condition is satisfied, an attacker (described later) based on a random number for a first special symbol that is periodically updated (generated) within a predetermined numerical range (for example, every 4 ms). A first special symbol lottery (first special determination) for a hit that triggers the operation of the apparatus 2100 is performed, and the first special symbol dynamically displayed on the first special symbol display 1185 is variably displayed for a predetermined time. You. Then, when a winning is won, after the variable display is completed, drive control of an attacker drive mechanism 2121 (see FIG. 118), which will be described later, including a solenoid or the like, is performed, thereby opening and closing the attacker device 2100. Will be activated. After the opening and closing operation of the attacker device 2100 in this manner, it is possible to control the shift to a later-described time-saving gaming state in which the ease of awarding a game ball to the special winning port 2101b of the first starting port 2101 is improved. .

  As will be described later, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment has a control structure capable of simultaneously changing the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and by starting the change of the second special symbol. A symbol change according to the result of the first special symbol lottery cannot be set to a change start waiting state.

  The general-purpose gate 2301 is provided above the special winning opening 2101b, and is configured to allow a game ball driven into the right area of the center role item 2500 to pass therethrough. Then, when the game ball is received (passed) to the general-purpose gate 2301, it is detected by the later-described gate sensor 2302 (see FIG. 118) that the game ball has been received.

  At this time, if a predetermined normal starting condition is satisfied, the movable piece (normal) is updated based on a random number for a normal symbol that is periodically updated (generated, for example, every 4 ms) within a predetermined numerical range. Judgment processing (ordinary judgment) for an ordinary hit which triggers the operation of the electric accessory 2111 is performed, and the ordinary symbol dynamically displayed on the ordinary symbol display 1189 is variably displayed for a predetermined time. Then, when a winning is won, after the variable display is completed, drive control of a later-described ordinary accessory driving mechanism 3114 (see FIG. 118) including a solenoid or the like is performed. By this drive control, acceptance of the game ball into the special winning port 2101b of the first starting port 2101 is allowed through an opening operation in which the movable piece 2111 rotates the upper end clockwise about the lower end. .

  That is, the special winning opening 2101b is used only when the movable piece 2111 performs an opening operation (turning operation of the upper end about the lower end of the movable piece 2111) in response to the winning of the normal winning. The ball is provided so that a prize can be won. In this sense, the movable piece 2111 has a mode in which game balls cannot enter the special winning port 2101b of the first starting port 2101 (rejection mode) and a mode in which the same ball is allowed (permission). (Ball mode), and can be said to be maintained in the rejected ball mode unless drive control of the ordinary accessory drive mechanism 3114 is performed. Therefore, in the special winning opening 2101b, basically, when the game is in the normal game state (non-time saving game state), the winning of the game ball hardly occurs. On the other hand, in the time-saving gaming state, the game ball is driven into the right area of the center role 2500 in the game area 1100 (right-handed), thereby improving the ease of receiving the game ball. A game property centering on a game (first special symbol lottery) corresponding to the acceptance of the game ball to the winning opening 2101b is realized.

  The second starting port 2102 is provided below the special winning port 2101b, is driven into the right area of the center role 2500, and has a special winning port 2103 of the attacker device 2100 and a special winning port of the first starting port 2101. Game balls not accepted by the mouth 2101b are configured to be able to enter. When a game ball enters the second starting port 2102, the second starting port sensor 3132 (see FIG. 118) described later detects the entry (winning) of the game ball. At this time, if a predetermined special start condition is satisfied, an attacker described later is used based on a random number for a second special symbol that is periodically updated (generated) within a predetermined numerical range (for example, every 4 ms). A second special symbol lottery (second special determination) is performed for a hit that triggers the operation of the apparatus 2100, and the second special symbol dynamically displayed on the second special symbol display 1186 is displayed in a fluctuating manner for a predetermined time. You. Then, when a win is obtained, after the variable display is completed, drive control of an attacker drive mechanism 2121 (see FIG. 118), which will be described later, including a solenoid or the like, is performed. Is opened and closed.

  Here, the attacker device 2100 according to the present embodiment is provided above the special winning opening 2101b, and is configured to be able to receive a game ball driven into the right side area of the center role item 2500 in the game area 1100 in the open state. Have been.

  The attacker device 2100 includes a special winning opening 2103, an opening / closing member 2106 operable between a closed state and an open state, and an attacker driving mechanism 2121 (see FIG. 118) for driving the opening / closing member 2106 to open and close. Normally, it is closed by the opening / closing member 2106 so that the gaming ball cannot be received in the special winning opening 2103.

  However, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the special winning opening 2103 is opened as a result of the special lottery performed based on the acceptance of the game ball into the first starting opening 2101 (the first special opening). When the special winning lottery opening 2103 is opened as a result of the special lottery performed based on the reception of the game ball to the second starting port 2102 (the hitting game on the second special symbol side), The number of balls that can be accepted by the game ball is adjusted by making the control modes related to the opening different.

  That is, the attacker apparatus 2100 opens the big winning opening 2103 by opening and closing the opening and closing member 2106 when a big hit or a small hit is obtained as a result of the first special judgment or the second special judgment. As a result, a big hit game state or a small hit game state is generated as an advantage that is advantageous to the player. Therefore, when a game ball wins in the first starting port 2101 (first starting port sensor 3131) or the second starting port 2102 (second starting port sensor 3132), three game balls are paid out. When a game ball wins the big winning port 2103 (count sensor 2122a) used for executing the big hit game state or the small hit game state, 15 game balls are paid out. It should be noted that when a game ball wins the general winning opening 2201 (general winning opening sensor 3133), ten game balls are paid out.

  By the way, in the time saving game state (rush preparation mode in the present embodiment), the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol is “0.08 seconds”, and the movable piece 2111 is in the open state (special winning opening 2101b) after the ordinary symbol stops changing. Is maintained at the right turning side position where the game ball can be won (5.5 seconds). That is, when a game ball passes through the general-purpose gate 2301, the game ball always wins in a normal hit, and after the game ball that passes through the gate 2301 arrives at the movable area of the movable piece 2111, the time (0) is shorter. (.08 seconds), the fluctuation of the normal symbol is stopped, so that the game ball that has triggered the win of the normal hit can directly enter the special winning port 2101b of the first starting port 2101. According to such a configuration, in the time-saving game state, it is possible to prevent the game ball from winning at the second starting port 2102 provided further below the special winning port 2101b and capable of receiving the dropped game ball. . Therefore, it is possible to suppress the execution of the second special symbol lottery in the time-saving gaming state in which the execution of the first special symbol lottery based on the winning of the game ball to the special winning port 2101b is preferred.

  After the movable piece 2111 is maintained for “5.5 seconds” in the open state (the position where the game ball can be accepted in the special winning opening 2101b), the movable ball 2111 is closed (the game ball is in the special winning opening 2101b). (A position that is considered unacceptable).

  Therefore, in the time-saving gaming state (rush preparation mode), the winning probability of a normal symbol is 100%, and the movable piece 2111 of the special winning opening 2101b is moved to the right-rotation side position for a long period (5.5 seconds in this example). In this case, by right-handing in this case, it is easy to win a game ball to the special winning opening 2101b. Therefore, in the time-saving gaming state rush preparation mode), the center role is set so that many game balls win in the first starting port 2101 (special winning port 2101b) instead of the first starting port 2101 (always winning port 2101a). It is considered advantageous for a player to shoot a game ball aiming at the right side of 2500 (so-called “right-handed”).

  On the other hand, in the non-time saving game state (the normal mode and the rush mode in the present embodiment), the winning probability of the normal symbol is set to 0%, and the time required for the variable display control of the normal symbol is set to a predetermined fluctuation time (for example, 1 second). ), It is impossible to accept game balls into the special winning port 2101b of the first starting port 2101.

  It should be noted that, even in the non-time saving game state, whether the shooting ball is aimed at the left or right of the center role item 2500 is more advantageous to the player depending on whether or not the game state is the probability change game state. In the normal game state (normal mode), which is a non-time saving game state and not a probable game state, the left side of the center role object 2500 is set so that many game balls win the regular winning opening 2101a of the first starting port 2101. It is considered advantageous for a player to shoot a game ball (so-called “left-handed”) with aim. Also, in the non-time-saving game state, and in the high-probability non-time-saving game state (rush mode) in which the jackpot probability is higher than the normal game state, a large number of game balls are in the second starting port 2102. It is considered advantageous for the player to shoot the game ball (so-called “right-hand”) aiming at the right side of the center role 2500 so as to win a prize.

  In addition, as the time saving control, control for increasing the winning probability of the ordinary symbol than in the non-hour saving game state, control for shortening the time required for the fluctuation display control of the ordinary symbol than in the non-hour saving game state, and control of the first starting port 2101 The control to extend the period during which the movable piece 2111 of the special winning opening 2101b is maintained at the right rotation side position from the non-time saving game state, and the number of times the movable piece 2111 is operated to the right rotation side position as compared to the non-time saving game state. Any one or any combination (or all) of the increasing controls may be executed.

  The back unit 3000 of the game board 4 is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1200 (panel holder 1220), the front side is opened, and the opening penetrates the rear wall 3010a in the front-rear direction where the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 faces. A back box 3010 in which a back box 3010b is formed, a back decoration unit 3100 arranged near the front end in the back box 3010, a back production unit 3200 arranged above the opening 3010b in the back box 3010, and a back box The lower back production unit 3400 disposed below the opening 3010b in the inside 3010, and the lower right back disposed between the back lower production unit 3400 and the front decoration unit 3100 at the lower right corner in front view inside the back box 3010 And an effect unit 3600. The front display unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 is provided with a function display unit 1180 at a position where the function display unit 1180 can be viewed from the player side through the transparent panel plate 1210.

  Further, on the rear side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the game board 4, a peripheral control board 4010 (see FIG. 118), which has a peripheral control unit 4140 and a liquid crystal control unit 4150, which will be described in detail later, is housed. A box 1910 is provided.

  The game board 4 of the present embodiment is a wide area where the game balls can sufficiently roll between the outer circumference on the left side of the center role item 2500 and the outer circumference of the game area 1100 (the inner circumference of the front component 1110A). A plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are implanted in a predetermined gauge arrangement on the front surface of the panel plate 1210 in the area on the left side of the center role 2500 in the game area 1100.

  In the game board 4 of this example, when a game ball is hit to the right side of the center role 2500 (hit with a strength equal to or higher than a predetermined strength), the game ball is located upstream of the stop portion 1114 of the front component 1110A. It flows down the right passage 2545 of the center role 2500 from the side. Here, the right passage 2545 has a width that allows the game balls to flow down one by one, and the game balls that have flowed down the right passage 2545 are first decelerated by the stop portion 1114, and then first passed through the right passage 2545. The user arrives at the general-purpose gate 2301 arranged above. Thereafter, the user is guided to the movable region of the opening / closing member 2106 of the attacker device 2100. In this movable area, the game ball not received by the opening / closing member 2106 in the special winning opening 2103 is then guided to the movable area of the movable piece 2111. It should be noted that the game ball flowing down to the upper right of the movable region is guided to the movable region of the movable piece 2111 after being decelerated by the first guiding portion 2901 and having its downstream direction changed. Here, the game ball that has passed through the upper general-purpose gate 2301 is guided to the special winning port 2101b in which the movable piece 2111 can receive the game ball.

  In the movable area of the movable piece 2111, the game ball not guided by the movable piece 2111 so as to be accepted by the special winning opening 2101b is decelerated again by the second guiding section 2902, and then guided to the second starting port 2102. Is done. The game ball flowing down the right passage 2545 is guided to the second starting port 2102 with a probability close to 100% unless the ball enters the special winning port 2103 or the special winning port 2101b.

  As described above, in the time-saving game state, a game ball that has been right-handed and passed through the general-purpose gate 2301 is accepted by the special winning port 2101b of the first starting port 2101 with a probability of almost 100%.

  When a large hit or a small hit is obtained as one of the first special judgment and the second special judgment as a result of such a game being played, the big winning opening 2103 is opened by the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member 2106. By doing so, a big hit game state or a small hit game state is generated as a benefit that is advantageous to the player.

[Liquid crystal display]
Subsequently, the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the game board 4 of the present example will be described. The liquid crystal display device 1900 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 in the back unit 3000, and can display a predetermined effect image according to a game state. As shown in FIG. 117 and the like, the liquid crystal display device 1900 includes a fixing piece 1902 protruding outward from both left and right sides, and can be attached to the rear side of the back box 3010 via the fixing piece 1902. ing.

  Specifically, the liquid crystal display device 1900 is configured to be inserted from the rear side into a liquid crystal insertion portion 3010d formed on the rear side of the rear wall 3010a of the back box 3010, and to protrude from the right side in front view. After the two fixing pieces 1902 are inserted into the two liquid crystal fixing portions 3010e on the left side of the back box 3010 when viewed from the rear, the other fixing piece 1902 is inserted into the insertion opening formed by the lock mechanism 3050. The liquid crystal display device 1900 can be locked and attached to the back box 3010 by sliding the lock mechanism 3050 downward to close the insertion opening.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 116 and the like, the liquid crystal display device 1900 includes a peripheral control board box 1910 containing a peripheral control unit 4140 and a liquid crystal control unit 4150 (see FIG. 118) and the like. And a volume 1912 extending rearward. By rotating the volume 1912 in an appropriate direction, the volume output from the speakers 130, 222, 262 provided on the door frame 5, the lower speaker 821 provided on the body frame 3, and the like can be adjusted. It has become.

  Note that the liquid crystal display device 1900 uses a light-brightness white LED as a backlight.

[Various substrates]
Next, a control board for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 118 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of the pachinko machine. As shown, the control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 includes a group of main boards 4000 and a group of peripheral control boards 4010, and these two groups share various controls. The group of the main boards 4000 includes a main control board 4100 for controlling a game operation (progress of a game) and a payout control board 4110 for controlling payout of game balls and the like. Also, a group of peripheral control boards 4010 includes a peripheral control section 4140 that controls various effects during a game based on a command from the main control board 4100, and a liquid crystal display 1900 based on a command from the peripheral control section 4140. A liquid crystal control unit 4150 for controlling the display of the effect image.

[Main control board]
As shown in FIG. 118, a main control board 4100a for controlling the progress of the game is a main control MPU 4100a which is a microprocessor in which a ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands and a RAM for temporarily storing data are incorporated. A main control I / O port 4100b as an input / output device (I / O device), a main control input circuit 4100f to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, and a main control solenoid for driving various solenoids A drive circuit 4100g and a RAM clear switch 4100c for completely erasing information stored in a RAM 4100e (hereinafter, also referred to as “main control built-in RAM 4100e”) incorporated in the main control MPU 4100a are provided. . The main control MPU 4100a has a built-in ROM 4100d (hereinafter, also referred to as "main control built-in ROM 4100d") and a main control built-in RAM 4100e, a watchdog timer for monitoring the operation (system), and a function for preventing impropriety. And other functions are also built-in.

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 includes a first starting port sensor 3131 that detects a game ball received by the first starting port 2101, and a second starting port sensor that detects a game ball received by the second starting port 2102. 3132 and a detection signal from a general winning opening sensor 3133 for detecting a game ball received in the general winning opening 2201 are input via the main control I / O port 4100b, respectively, or the gate sensor 2302 and the count sensor 2122 (count). The detection signals from the sensor 2122a, the count sensor 2122b), the specific sensor 2580, and the magnetic detection sensor 3134 mounted on the back unit 3000 are transmitted to the panel relay board 3040 mounted on the game board 4, and the main control I / O port 4100b. Or to be input via the Internet.

  The main control MPU 4100a outputs a control signal from the main control I / O port 4100b to the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100g based on these detection signals, so that the normal accessory drive mechanism 2114 via the panel relay board 3040, A drive signal is output to the attacker driving mechanism 2121, the winning port distribution driving motor 2558, and the specific area distribution driving motor 2559, and via the main control I / O port 4100 b, the panel relay board 3040, and the function display board 1191. First special symbol display 1185, second special symbol display 1186, first special symbol storage display 1184, second special symbol storage display 1187, ordinary symbol display 1189, ordinary symbol storage display 1188, game status display For example, a driving signal is output to the display 1183 and the round display 1190.

  Also, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various information (game information) related to the game and various commands related to payout to the payout control board 4110, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 4110. Or Further, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various commands relating to control of the game effect and various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to a peripheral control unit 4140 of a peripheral control board 4010 described below via the main control I / O port 4100b. (The boards between the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control unit 4140 are electrically connected by a harness not shown). The main control MPU 4100a, when described in detail later, receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 4110, shapes these various commands, and transmits them to the peripheral control unit 4140.

  Various voltages are supplied to the main control board 4100 from a power supply board 851, as will be described in detail later. The power supply board 851 for supplying various voltages to the main control board 4100 includes an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as a “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 4100 for a predetermined time even when the power is turned off. To be described). This capacitor allows the main control MPU 4100a to store various types of information in the main control built-in RAM 4100e during power-off processing even when power is turned off. When the RAM clear switch 4100c of the main control board 4100 is operated when the power is turned on, the stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the main control built-in RAM 4100e. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch 4100c is also output to the payout control board 4110.

  The main control board 4100 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. The power failure monitoring circuit monitors a reduction in various voltages supplied from the power supply board 851, and outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning when those voltages fall below the power failure warning voltage. The power failure notice signal is input to the main control MPU 4100a via the main control I / O port 4100b, and is also transmitted to the payout control board 4110 and the like via a harness (not shown).

[Payout control board]
As shown in FIG. 118, the payout control board 4110 that controls the payout of the game ball and the like controls the payout control unit 4111 that performs various controls related to payout, the firing control by the firing solenoid 654, and the ball feeding by the ball feeding solenoid 585. A launch control unit 4120 for performing control, an error LED display 4130 for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1, an error release switch 860a for releasing an error displayed on the error LED display 4130, and a prize ball tank 720 , A tank rail 731, and a ball release switch 860 b for discharging a game ball in the prize ball device 740 to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 to start a ball removal operation.

[Payout control unit]
As shown in FIG. 118, a payout control unit 4111 that performs various controls related to payout on the payout control board 4110 is a microprocessor having a built-in ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. , A payout control I / O port 4111b as an I / O device, and an external watchdog timer 4111c (hereinafter referred to as “external WDT4111c”) for monitoring whether the payout control MPU 4111a is operating normally. And a payout motor drive circuit 4111d for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 744 of the prize ball device 740, and a payout control input circuit 4111e to which detection signals from various detection switches related to payout are input. , Is provided. The payout control MPU 4111a has a built-in ROM (hereinafter, referred to as “payout control built-in ROM”) and a RAM (hereinafter, referred to as “payout control built-in RAM”) as well as to prevent fraud. Functions are built in.

  The payout control MPU 4111a of the payout control unit 4111 receives various information related to the game (game information) and various commands related to payout from the main control board 4100 in a serial manner via the payout control I / O port 4111b, The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch 4100c from the RAM clear switch 4100c is input via the payout control I / O port 4111b, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 550 is input, and the ball out switch 750. The detection signals from the counting sensor 751 and the rotation angle sensor 752 are input via the winning ball relay board 754.

  A ball out switch 750 for detecting the presence or absence of a game ball in the supply path 741a formed in the unit base 741 of the prize ball device 740, and a game ball flowing down in the prize ball path 741c formed in the unit base 741. The detection signal from the counting sensor 751 is first input to the payout control input circuit 4111e via the winning ball relay board 754 of the winning ball device 740, and is input to the payout control MPU 4111a via the payout control I / O port 4111b. . The detection signal from the rotation angle sensor 752 for detecting the detection slit 749a formed in the rotation detection board 749 of the prize ball device 740 is first transmitted via the sensor substrate 753 of the prize ball device 740 and the prize ball relay substrate 754. It is input to the payout control input circuit 4111e, and is input to the payout control MPU 4111a via the payout control I / O port 4111b.

  The detection signals from the door frame opening switch 618 for detecting the opening of the door frame 5 with respect to the body frame 3 and the body frame opening switch 619 for detecting the opening of the body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 are first output from the payout control input circuit. 4111e, and is input to the payout control MPU 4111a via the payout control I / O port 4111b.

  Further, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 550 for detecting whether or not the storage space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 is full of the stored game balls is transmitted to the handle device relay board 192 and the main relay terminal first. It is input to the payout control input circuit 4111e via the plate 880, and is input to the payout control MPU 4111a via the payout control I / O port 4111b.

  The payout control MPU 4111a outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 744 to the payout motor 744 via the payout control I / O 4111b and the prize ball relay board 754, and displays the status of the pachinko machine 1 as an error LED display. A signal to be displayed on the 4130 is output to the error LED display 4130 via the payout control I / O port 4111b, and a command for indicating the state of the pachinko game 1 is output via the payout control I / O port 4111b. For example, the main control board 4100 transmits the number of game balls actually paid out to the external terminal board 784 via the payout control I / O port 4111b. The external terminal plate 784 is electrically connected to a hall computer installed in a game hall (hall). The hall computer monitors the game of the player by ascertaining the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1, the game information of the pachinko machine 1, and the like.

  The error LED display 4130 is a segment display, and displays the status of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters, figures, and the like. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display 4130 include the following. For example, when the figure “−” is displayed, it is reported that “normal”, and when the number “0” is displayed, it is “connection abnormal” (specifically, the main control board 4100 Is notified that the electrical connection between the payout control board 4110 and the board is abnormal), and when the number "1" is displayed, it means "ball out" (specifically, ball out). Based on the detection signal from the switch 750, a notification that there is no game ball in the supply path 741a formed in the unit base 741 of the prize ball device 740) is issued. (Specifically, based on the detection signal from the rotation angle sensor 752, the payout rotator 748 at the entrance of the distribution space 741b communicating with the supply passage 741a formed in the unit base 741 of the prize ball device 740. When That the payout rotator 748 is difficult to rotate because of the engagement with the technical ball near the entrance), and when the number “3” is displayed, it is a “count switch error” (specifically, Is notified based on the detection signal from the counting sensor 751), and when the number “5” is displayed, it is a “retry error” (specifically, payout). The number of operation retries has reached a preset upper limit value), and when the number “6” is displayed, it is “full” (specifically, from the full-state detection sensor 550). Based on the detection signal, the storage space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 is notified that the game balls are full of the stored game balls), and when the number “7” is displayed, it is “CR not connected” (payout). control That the electrical connection is disconnected at any point from the plate 4110 to the CR unit 6), and when the number “9” is displayed, it is “stocking” (specifically, That the number of game balls that have not been paid out has reached a predetermined number of balls).

  The ball lending request signal for the game ball from the ball lending switch 365a and the prepaid card return request signal from the return switch 365b are transmitted to the ball lending unit board 366, the main-side relay terminal plate 880, and the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 first. The data is input to the CR unit 6 via the CPU. The CR unit 6 transmits a signal designating the number of game balls to be lent according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 4110 via the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 in a serial manner, and this signal is used as the payout control I / O. The data is received by the port 4111b and input to the payout control MPU 4111a. Further, the CR unit 6 updates a residual value of the inserted prepaid card in accordance with the number of lent game balls, and outputs a signal for displaying the residual value on the residual number indicator 365c to a CR unit connection terminal. The signal is output to the board 874, the main-side relay terminal board 880, and the ball rental unit board 366, and this signal is input to the residual frequency indicator 365c.

[Launch control unit]
As shown in FIG. 118, the firing control unit 4120 that performs the firing control by the firing solenoid 654 and the ball feeding control by the ball feeding solenoid 585 has a firing control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches related to firing are input. 4120a, an oscillation circuit 4120b that outputs a clock signal at regular time intervals, a firing timing control circuit 4120c that outputs a firing reference pulse for launching a game ball toward the game area 1100 based on the clock signal, and this firing. A firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d that outputs a drive signal to the firing solenoid 654 based on the reference pulse, and a ball feeding solenoid drive circuit 4120e that outputs a drive signal to the ball feeding solenoid 585 based on the firing reference pulse. The firing timing control circuit 4120c generates a firing reference pulse based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit 4120b so that 100 game balls per minute are shot toward the game area 1100, and outputs the generated reference pulse to the firing solenoid driving circuit 4120d. At the same time, a ball feeding reference pulse obtained by multiplying the firing reference pulse by a predetermined number is generated and output to the ball feeding solenoid driving circuit 4120e.

  A detection signal from a touch sensor 516 for detecting whether a palm or a finger is touching the handle main body 504, and a detection stop switch 518 for detecting whether or not the launch of the game ball is forcibly stopped by a player's will. Is input to the firing control input circuit 4120a via the handle device relay board 192 and the main relay terminal plate 880, and is input to the firing timing control circuit 4120c. When the CR unit 6 and the CR unit connection terminal board 874 are electrically connected, the CR connection signal is input to the firing control input circuit 4120a as a CR connection signal, and is input to the firing timing control circuit 4120c. A signal from the rotation position detection sensor 512 for electrically adjusting the strength of the game ball to hit the game area 1100 in accordance with the rotation position of the handle main body 504 is first supplied to the handle device relay board 192 and the main relay terminal plate 880. Is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d via the.

  The launching solenoid drive circuit 4120d outputs a drive current for launching a game ball toward the game area 1100 with a launching strength commensurate with the rotational position of the handle main body 504 based on a signal from the rotational position detection sensor 512. Is output to the firing solenoid 654 as a trigger. On the other hand, when the ball feeding reference pulse is input, the ball feeding solenoid driving circuit 4120e applies a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 585 via the main relay terminal plate 880 and the handle device relay board 192. By outputting the ball, the ball feed member 584 of the ball feed unit 580 receives one ball of the game ball stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300, and when the input of the ball feed reference pulse is completed, the constant current is output. Is stopped, the ball sending member 584 sends the received game ball to the hitting ball firing device 650 side. Thus, while the drive current output from the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d to the firing solenoid 654 is variably controlled, the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit 4120e to the ball feed solenoid 585 is constant. Is controlled.

  The power supply board 851 that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 4110 includes a capacitor BC1 (see Otsu 169) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the payout control board 4110 for a predetermined time even when the power is turned off. . With this capacitor BC1, the payout control MPU 4111a can store various information in the payout control built-in RAM in the power-off process even when the power is turned off. When the RAM clear switch 4100c of the main control board 4100 is operated when the power is turned on, the stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the payout control built-in RAM.

[Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 118, the peripheral control board 4010 performs a performance control based on a command from the main control board 4100, and a liquid crystal display device 1900 or the like based on control data from the peripheral control section 4140. A liquid crystal control unit 4150 that performs drawing control of the second liquid crystal display device 3252.

[Peripheral control unit]
As shown in FIG. 118, a peripheral control unit 4140 that performs effect control on the peripheral control board 4010 includes a peripheral control MPU 4140a as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM 4140b that stores various processing programs and various commands, and performs high-quality sound performance. The sound source IC 4140c includes a sound ROM 4140d that stores sound information such as music and sound effects referred to by the sound source IC 4140c.

  The peripheral control MPU 4140a has a plurality of built-in parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, and the like. When receiving various commands from the main control board 4100, the peripheral control MPU 4140a sends the various commands to the decorative boards of the game board 4 based on the various commands. The game board side emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a provided color LED or the like is transmitted from the lamp drive board serial I / O port to the lamp drive board 3041 or the game board. The game board-side drive data for outputting a drive signal to a drive motor for operating various effect units provided in the game machine 4 is transmitted from the game board decoration drive board serial I / O port to the motor attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010. To transmit a drive signal to the drive substrate 3045 or to output a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a dial drive motor 414 provided on the door frame 5 A door-side drive comprising door-side drive data and door-side emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a color LED or the like provided on each decorative substrate of the door frame 5. The light emission data is transmitted from the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive board to the door frame base board 194 via the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 and the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882, or the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the second liquid crystal display. In addition to transmitting control data (display command) indicating a screen to be displayed on the device 3252 from the serial I / O port for the liquid crystal control unit to the liquid crystal control unit 4150, a control signal for extracting sound information from the sound ROM 4140d ( Sound command) to the sound source IC 4140c.

  Detection signals from various original position detection sensors for detecting original positions of various effect units provided on the game board 4 are input to the peripheral control MPU 4140a via a motor drive board 3045 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010. Have been. The detection signals from the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b for detecting the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 of the operation unit 400 provided on the door frame 5 and the pressing detection sensor 432c for detecting the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 are based on the door frame base board. 194, the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882, and the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872, which are input to the peripheral control MPU 4140a.

  The peripheral control MPU 4140a receives a signal (operation signal) indicating that the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is operating normally from the liquid crystal control unit 4150, and monitors the operation of the liquid crystal control unit 4150 based on the operation signal. are doing.

  The sound source IC 4140c extracts sound information from the sound ROM 4140d based on control data (sound command) from the peripheral control MPU 4140a, and is provided on the main body frame 3 via the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 and the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882. The lower speaker 821 is controlled so that music and sound effects matched to various effects flow from the lower speaker 821, and is connected to the door frame 5 via the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872, the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882, and the door frame base substrate 194. Control is performed so that music, sound effects, and the like according to various effects flow from the provided speakers 130, 222, and 262 and the lower speaker 821 provided on the main body frame 3. The volume can be adjusted by rotating a volume 1912 mounted on the peripheral control board 4010 and projecting rearward from the peripheral control board box 1910.

  The peripheral control unit 4140 includes, in addition to a watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as “peripheral control built-in WDT”) built in the peripheral control MPU 4140a, an external watchdog timer (hereinafter, referred to as “peripheral control external WDT”). The peripheral control MPU 4140a uses the peripheral control built-in WDT and the peripheral control external WDT together to diagnose whether or not its own system is running out of control.

  The display command output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a to the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is performed through a serial input / output port. In the present embodiment, the bit rate (the size of data that can be transmitted per unit time) is 19.2 km (k). ) Bits per second (hereinafter, referred to as “bps”) is set. On the other hand, initial data, a door frame side lighting / flashing command, a game board side lighting / flashing command, a movable body driving command output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a to the lamp driving board 3041 or the motor driving board 3045 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010. This is performed by a plurality of serial input / output ports different from the display command. In this embodiment, the bit rate is set to 250 kbps.

  The lamp driving board 3041 and the motor driving board 3045 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 transmit a lighting signal or a blinking signal based on the received door frame side lighting / blinking command via the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882 to the door frame. 5 is output to the LEDs of the decorative boards 214, 216, 254, 256, 288, 290, 322, 430, 432, etc., and a lighting signal or a blinking signal is generated based on the received game board side lighting blinking command. It outputs to LED of each decoration board 2116,2125,2569,3113,3114,3115,3123,3124,3266,3320,3322,3426,3536,3546 etc. which were provided in the game board 4. FIG. The panel relay board 3040 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 transmits a drive signal based on the received drive command of the movable body to the dial drive motor provided on the door frame 5 via the peripheral relay terminal plate 882. 414, the respective drive motors 3228, 3234, 3304, 3460, 3476, 3508, etc., provided on the game board 4, and outputs to the respective solenoids.

  In addition, the peripheral control MPU 4140a receives a signal (operation signal) indicating that the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is operating normally from the liquid crystal control unit 4150, or controls the operation unit 400 provided in the plate unit 300 of the door frame 5 in the operation unit 400. Detection signals from the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b for detecting the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 and the pressure detection sensor 432c for detecting the operation of the pressure operation unit 405 in the operation unit 400 are transmitted to the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882 and the back box. Input is made via a lamp drive board 3041 or a motor drive board 3045 attached to the rear surface of the 3010.

  The sound source IC 4140c extracts sound information from the sound ROM 4140d based on a sound command output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a, and outputs a lamp drive board 3041, a motor drive board 3045, etc. attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 and a peripheral relay terminal board. The lower speaker 821 of the main body frame 3 via the side speaker 130 or the upper speakers 222 and 262 of the door frame 5 via the 882 or the lamp driving board 3041 or the motor driving board 3045 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010. The control is performed so that music, sound effects, and the like according to various effects flow. In this example, as described above, the side speakers arranged on the left and right sides of the lower side of the game window 101, the upper speakers 222 and 262 arranged above the game window 101, and the lower part of the main body frame 3 are provided. Sending an acoustic signal as sound information (for example, a 2ch stereo signal, a 4ch stereo signal, a 2.1ch surround signal or a 4.1ch surround signal to which a lower speaker 391 described later is added) to the lower speaker 821 for low sound. Thus, a more realistic sound effect (sound effect) can be presented.

[Measures to prevent abnormal sound generation]
The door frame 5 is equipped with various acoustic facilities, LEDs, sensors, and other facilities requiring power, and a door frame base substrate 194 is attached to the back surface of the door frame 5 (FIG. 25). The door frame base substrate 194 includes side speakers 130, upper speakers 222 and 262 of the left and right side decoration units (FIGS. 29 and 32), and lower speakers 821 (FIG. 67) in a speaker box 820 provided on the main body frame 3 (FIG. 67). The speaker is connected to a bass speaker (FIG. 89) (FIG. 89) and is connected to a peripheral control board 4010 provided on the game board 4, and amplifies an audio signal sent from the peripheral control board 4010 and outputs the amplified signal to each speaker. An amplification circuit (digital amplifier circuit) is provided.

  Further, on the door frame base substrate 194, wirings for connecting various kinds of audio equipment, LEDs, sensors, and the like to the payout control substrate 4110, the peripheral control substrate 4010, and the like are collectively bundled and extended rearward. It is configured to be connected to the main-side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral-side relay terminal plate 882 of the main body frame 3 (FIGS. 67 and 89). The rear side of the door frame base substrate 194 is covered with a door frame base substrate cover 195 (FIG. 23).

  Also, at the position (rear side) where the door frame base substrate cover 195 is provided, the game ball paid out from the prize ball unit 700 or the game area 1100 despite being fired by the hit ball firing device 650. A foul cover unit 540 (transparent polycarbonate molded product) that guides the game balls (foul balls) that have not reached to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 of the plate unit is provided in proximity (FIG. 23).

  Since the game ball (metal) passes through the ball passage 542b of the foul cover unit 540 at a high speed while contacting the passage wall surface, an electrostatic charge is accumulated in the polycarbonate in this portion, and it may be as high as 10 kV. (3-4 kV at most even when pain is felt by the discharge of the accumulated electrostatic charge). Also, unlike metals, most of the electric charge accumulated in the resin passes through only its periphery even when grounded, and most of the charge remains.

  Then, the digital amplifier circuit (not shown) of the door frame base substrate 194 adjacent thereto may malfunction due to electrostatic induction by the electric charge. In this case, an abnormal audio signal that continues for a certain period of time is input to the voice coil of the speaker, or the audio signal by the digital amplifier circuit is extremely amplified and exceeds an appropriate amplification width (when an excessive AC voltage is applied). Occur. In such a case, for example, a cracked sound such as a rattling sound is generated from the speaker, or the sound reproduced by the speaker becomes a loud unpleasant sound (abnormal sound is generated), and the player receives an unpleasant sound. You will feel it. Further, the speaker may be damaged, which is not good for the speaker. Note that the digital amplifier circuit has a DC voltage cut function on the input side, but does not normally have it on the output side.

  Since the woofer of the lower speaker 821 is hard to hear, the output tends to be set to a relatively large value.

  The embodiment described below detects whether or not the audio signal output from the door frame base substrate 194 to the lower speaker 821 is the above-described abnormal audio signal. The present invention relates to an invention relating to an abnormal sound signal blocking board (described later) that blocks an abnormal sound signal from being input to the lower speaker 821.

  Regarding audio output, as described above, the peripheral control MPU 4140a has a plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, etc., and receives various commands from the main control board 4100. Based on this, a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM 4140d is output to the sound source IC 4140c (FIG. 118).

  The sound source IC 4140c extracts sound information from the sound ROM 4140d based on control data (sound command) from the peripheral control MPU 4140a, and outputs the sound information from the lower part provided on the main body frame 3 via the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882, the door frame base board 194, and the like. Control is performed so that music, sound effects, and the like according to various effects flow from the speakers 821 and the side speakers 130 and the upper speakers 222 and 262 provided on the door frame 5 (see FIGS. 118 and 119).

[Abnormal sound signal cut-off board]
Next, the abnormal sound signal cut-off board will be described with reference to FIGS. 119 and 120. FIG. 119 is a block diagram of the door frame base substrate 194, the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882, the abnormal sound signal blocking substrate 884, and the lower speaker 821. FIG. 120 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit of the abnormal sound signal cutoff board 884.

  As shown in FIG. 119, the door frame base substrate 194 provided on the door frame 5 and the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882 provided on the main frame 3 are connected by wiring 196, and The +24 V voltage and the woofer + signal and the woofer-signal, which are the audio signals for the lower speaker 821, amplified by the door frame base substrate 194 are output to the side relay terminal plate 882, and are output to the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882 through the wiring 196. It is to be transmitted.

  As shown in FIG. 119, an abnormal sound signal cut-off board 884 is provided between the peripheral relay terminal plate 882 and the lower speaker 821 housed in the speaker box 820 in the main body frame 3, and the peripheral relay terminal The plate 882 and the abnormal sound signal cut-off board 884 are connected by a speaker protection harness 883, and the abnormal sound signal cut-off board 884 and the lower speaker 821 are connected by a lower speaker harness 819.

  In FIG. 120, a ground GND, a + 24V voltage, a woofer + signal and a woofer, which are audio signals for the lower speaker 821 and output from the door frame base substrate 194, are transmitted from the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882 to the abnormal audio signal cutoff substrate 884. -The signal is relayed and output to the abnormal sound signal cut-off board 884 through the speaker protection harness 883.

  Further, a woofer + signal and a woofer- signal, which are audio signals for the lower speaker 821, are output from the abnormal audio signal cut-off board 884 to the lower speaker 821, and supplied to the lower speaker 821 through the lower speaker harness 819. Have been. As described above, the audio signal output from the door frame base substrate 194 through the abnormal audio signal blocking substrate 884 is supplied and input to the lower speaker 821.

  By the way, it is desirable that the location of the abnormal sound signal cut-off board 884 in the main body frame 3 is a location that is hardly affected by static electricity noise. In the present embodiment, the abnormal sound signal cut-off board 884 is disposed at a location far from the foul cover unit 540, for example, inside the speaker box 820 shown in FIG. By arranging the abnormal sound signal cut-off board 884 at a position that is hardly affected by static electricity noise, input of an abnormal sound signal to the lower speaker 821 can be stably suppressed.

[Circuit of abnormal sound signal cut-off board]
The abnormal sound signal cut-off board 884 detects whether or not the sound signal supplied to the abnormal sound signal cut-off board 884 through the speaker protection harness 883 is an abnormal sound signal. This is to block the audio signal from being input to the lower speaker 821.

  As shown in FIG. 120, the abnormal sound signal cut-off board 884 detects whether the sound signal is an abnormal sound signal and outputs an abnormal detection signal and outputs an abnormal sound signal detection circuit 885 and an abnormal sound signal detection circuit 885. An abnormal sound signal cutoff circuit 895 that cuts off supply of an abnormal sound signal to the lower speaker 821 when receiving the output abnormality detection signal.

  The + 24V voltage supplied through the speaker protection harness 883 is supplied to the abnormal sound signal cutoff circuit 895 through the + 24V supply line 886 in the abnormal sound signal cutoff board 884. Further, the ground GND supplied through the speaker protection harness 883 is supplied to the abnormal sound signal cutoff circuit 895 through the ground line 887 in the abnormal sound signal cutoff board 884.

  The woofer + signal, which is an audio signal supplied through the speaker protection harness 883, is branched into two at an abnormal audio signal cutoff board 884, one of which is input to the abnormal audio signal cutoff circuit 895 through the woofer + signal line 888, and the other is input. It is input to the abnormal sound signal detection circuit 885.

  The woofer signal, which is an audio signal supplied through the speaker protection harness 883, is branched into two at an abnormal audio signal cutoff board 884, and one is relayed at the abnormal audio signal cutoff board 884 through a woofer signal line 889. And is connected to an external lower speaker 821 through a lower speaker harness 819. The other is input to the abnormal sound signal detection circuit 885.

[Abnormal voice signal detection circuit]
The abnormal sound signal detection circuit 885 includes a rectifier bridge circuit in which four diodes SD1 to SD4 are connected in a bridge type, a resistor SR1 (47 kΩ) disposed after the rectifier bridge circuit, and an electrolytic capacitor SC1 (in the present embodiment, It mainly includes an infrared LED having a capacitance of 47 μF, a transistor STR1, a transistor STR2, and a photocoupler SPC1 (incorporating an infrared LED and a phototransistor).

  The cathode terminal of the diode SD4 is connected to the anode terminal of the diode SD2, and a connection point between the cathode terminal of the diode SD4 and the anode terminal of the diode SD2 receives the other woofer + signal of the two branches. . The cathode terminal of the diode SD3 is connected to the anode terminal of the diode SD1, and the other of the two woofer signals is input to the connection point between the cathode terminal of the diode SD3 and the anode terminal of the diode SD1. ing.

  Further, the cathode terminal of the diode SD1 and the cathode terminal of the diode SD2 are electrically connected, and the anode terminal of the diode SD3 and the anode terminal of the diode SD4 are electrically connected to form a rectification bridge circuit. The cathode terminal of the diode SD2 is connected to a + voltage line 890 that supplies a positive voltage rectified by a rectifying bridge circuit to the subsequent stage, while the anode terminal of the diode SD4 is connected to a rectifying bridge to the subsequent stage. The circuit is connected to a 0 V line 891 for supplying 0 V whose minus portion is cut and the voltage is substantially 0 V.

  Then, at the subsequent stage of the rectifying bridge circuit, one end of the resistor SR1 is connected to the + voltage line 890, the other end of the resistor SR1 is connected to the + terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1, and the − terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is connected to the 0V line 891. It is connected.

  That is, the woofer + signal and the woofer-signal (waveforms of the + voltage in which the high and low peaks of the audio signal waveform are continuously connected to each other with 0 V as a connection point) rectified by the rectifier bridge circuit are electrolyzed via the resistor SR1. By being applied to the + terminal of the capacitor SC1, the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is charged during the period from the 0V of the + voltage waveform to the peak voltage of the peak, and the period from the peak voltage of the peak of the + voltage waveform to 0V is charged. The electrolytic capacitor SC1 is discharged. The time constant of charging and discharging in a series circuit (smoothing circuit) of the resistor SR1 and the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is determined by the resistance value of the resistor SR1 and the capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor SC1.

  At a stage subsequent to the connection point of the resistor SR1 of the + voltage line 890, one end of the capacitor SC2 is connected to the + voltage line 890, and the other end of the capacitor SC2 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor STR1. The base terminal of the transistor STR1 is connected not only to the other end of the capacitor SC2, but also to the other end of the resistor SR3, one end of which is connected to the connection point between the resistor SR1 and the electrolytic capacitor SC1. That is, the voltage of the + terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR1 via the resistor SR3. Further, the ripple of the waveform of the + voltage is removed and smoothed by the capacitor SC2.

  The collector terminal of the transistor STR1 is connected to the + voltage line 890 at the stage subsequent to the connection point of the capacitor SC2 of the + voltage line 890, and a woofer signal smoothed after rectification, that is, the + voltage is applied. The emitter terminal of the transistor STR1 is connected to one end of a resistor SR2, the other end of the resistor SR2 is connected to one end of a resistor SR4, and the other end of the resistor SR4 is connected to a 0V line 891. The resistors SR2 and SR4 are voltage dividing resistors.

  One end of the resistor SR5 is connected to a connection point between the resistors SR2 and SR4, the other end of the resistor SR5 is connected to the cathode terminal of the Zener diode SZD1, and the anode terminal of the Zener diode SZD1 is connected to one end of the resistor SR6. The other end of the resistor SR6 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor STR2. One end of a resistor SR7 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor STR2, and the other end of the resistor SR7 is connected to a 0V line 891.

  That is, the voltage at one end of the resistor SR7, which appears based on the output voltage of the emitter of the transistor STR1, is applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR2.

  On the other hand, at the subsequent stage of the connection point of the + voltage line 890 with the collector terminal of the transistor STR1, the anode terminal of the diode SD5 is connected to the + voltage line 890, and the cathode terminal of the diode SD5 is connected to the anode terminal of the infrared diode of the photocoupler SPC1. It is connected to the. The cathode terminal of the infrared diode of the photocoupler SPC1 is connected to the collector terminal of the transistor STR2, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR2 is connected to the 0V line 891.

  That is, when the transistor STR2 is turned on, the photocoupler SPC1 is turned on.

[Abnormal sound signal cutoff circuit]
The abnormal sound signal cutoff circuit 895 mainly includes a phototransistor of the photocoupler SPC1, a transistor STR3, and a relay SRL1. That is, the abnormal sound signal detection circuit 885 and the abnormal sound signal cutoff circuit 895 are connected through the photocoupler SPC1.

  In the abnormal sound signal cutoff circuit 895, the 24V supply line 886 is branched into two, one is connected to the collector terminal of the phototransistor of the photocoupler SPC1, and the other is connected to the eighth terminal (coil + input) of the relay SRL1. Have been. The emitter terminal of the phototransistor of the photocoupler SPC1 is connected to one end of a resistor SR8, the other end of the resistor SR8 is connected to one end of a resistor SR9, and the other end of the resistor SR9 is connected to a ground line 887. The resistors SR8 and SR9 are voltage dividing resistors.

  A connection point between the resistors SR8 and SR9 is connected to a base terminal of a transistor STR3 for relay operation, and is connected to one end of a capacitor SC3 whose other end is connected to a ground line 887. The emitter terminal of the transistor STR3 is connected to the ground line 887, and the collector terminal of the transistor STR3 is connected to the first terminal (coil-input) of the relay SRL1 and the third terminal (one of the A contacts) of the relay SRL1.

  The fourth terminal (the other of the A contacts) of the relay SRL1 is connected to the ground line 887. Further, the fifth terminal (one of the B contacts) of the relay SRL1 is connected to the woofer + signal line 888, and the sixth terminal (the other of the B contacts) of the relay SRL1 is connected to the lower speaker harness 819 as an external output of the woofer + signal. Is connected to an external lower speaker 821.

  Further, a varistor SZNR1 for inductive current bypass by self-induction action is connected in parallel between the eighth terminal (coil + input) of the relay SRL1 and the first terminal (coil-input) of the relay SRL1. A varistor SZNR2 for contact protection is connected in parallel between the terminal (one of the B contacts) and the sixth terminal (the other of the B contacts) of the relay SRL1.

  Since the abnormal sound signal detection circuit 885 and the abnormal sound signal cutoff circuit 895 are signal-connected by the photocoupler SPC1, electric noise does not directly enter the abnormal sound signal cutoff circuit 895 from the abnormal sound signal detection circuit 885. It has become.

  Next, the operation of the circuit of the abnormal sound signal blocking board 884 configured as described above will be described.

[Operation when normal audio signal is input]
<Abnormal voice signal detection circuit 885>
When a normal audio signal (a waveform of an AC voltage having a different amplitude peak) is input, in the rectifier bridge circuit of the abnormal audio signal detection circuit 885, in the case of a woofer + signal, the diodes SD2 and SD3 conduct, In FIG. 120, a current flows from the top to the bottom of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 through the resistor SR1, and the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is charged during the period from the positive voltage of 0V to the peak voltage of the peak.

  When a normal audio signal (a waveform of an AC voltage having a different amplitude peak) is input, the voltage increase due to the electric charge stored in the + terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 does not reach the base terminal voltage for operating the transistor STR1. Therefore, the transistor STR1 does not turn on and maintains the off state.

  Next, the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is discharged during a period from the peak voltage of the peak of the + voltage waveform to 0V, and the electric charge accumulated at the + terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 moves to the cathode terminal of the diode SD2 through the resistor SR1.

  In the case of the woofer signal, the diode SD1 and the diode SD4 conduct, and a current flows from the top to the bottom through the electrolytic capacitor SC1 through the resistor SR1 in FIG. 120 to reach a peak voltage of 0 V from a + voltage waveform. During the period, the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is charged.

  When a normal audio signal (a waveform of an AC voltage having a different amplitude peak) is input, the voltage increase due to the electric charge stored in the + terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 does not reach the base terminal voltage for operating the transistor STR1. Therefore, the transistor STR1 does not turn on and maintains the off state.

  Next, during a period from the peak voltage of the peak of the + voltage waveform to 0 V, the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is discharged, and the electric charge accumulated at the + terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 moves to the cathode terminal of the diode SD1 through the resistor SR1.

  As described above, when a normal audio signal (waveform of an AC voltage having a different amplitude peak) is input, the transistor STR1 of the abnormal audio signal detection circuit 885 maintains the off state. Therefore, the transistor STR2 and the infrared LED (photocoupler) of the photocoupler SPC1 also remain off, and the abnormal sound signal detection circuit 885 does not actually turn on.

<Abnormal sound signal cutoff circuit 895>
On the other hand, in the abnormal sound signal cutoff circuit 895, the transistor STR3 also maintains the off state because the photocoupler SPC1 maintains the off state. The relay SRL1 is in a non-operation state. Therefore, the coil of the relay SRL1 is in the non-excited state, and the non-operating B contact (the contact is closed) between the fifth and sixth terminals of the relay SRL1 is not activated between the third and fourth terminals. The contact A is in an open state. Therefore, the fifth and sixth terminals of the relay SRL1 are in a conductive state, and the woofer + signal on the woofer + signal line 888 is supplied to the lower speaker 821 through the lower speaker harness 819.

[When an abnormal audio signal is input for a certain period of time]
[Operation when abnormal audio signal is input by fixed DC voltage]
<Abnormal voice signal detection circuit 885>
When an abnormal audio signal (for example, a constant voltage of +24 V, +18 V, +1.5 V, etc.) due to a fixed DC voltage is continuously input, in the rectifying bridge circuit of the abnormal audio signal detection circuit 885, the diode SD2 and the diode SD3 conducts, and in FIG. 120, a charging current flows from top to bottom through the resistor SR1 to the electrolytic capacitor SC1, and the electrolytic capacitor SC1 continues to be charged.

  When an abnormal audio signal with a fixed constant voltage is input, an increase in the voltage of the + terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 due to an increase in the charge stored in the + terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 through the resistor SR1 with time is applied. Therefore, the voltage approaches a certain constant voltage, and reaches a base terminal voltage for operating the transistor STR1. Therefore, the transistor STR1 turns on.

  When the transistor STR1 is turned on, current flows through the collector terminal of the transistor STR1, the emitter terminal of the transistor STR1, the resistors SR2 and SR4, and the voltage applied to the resistor SR4 (the voltage appearing at the connection point between the resistors SR2 and SR4). , A current flows through the resistor SR5, the Zener diode SZD1, the resistor SR6, and the resistor SR7, and the voltage applied to the resistor SR7 (the voltage appearing at the connection point between the resistor SR6 and the resistor SR7) is applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR2 in the subsequent stage. This turns on the transistor STR2.

  When the transistor STR2 is turned on, the collector voltage of the transistor STR2 is reduced to the 0V line 891 side, and the infrared LED of the photocoupler SPC1 is turned on via the diode SD5. That is, the photocoupler SPC1 is turned on. Here, turning on the infrared LED of the photocoupler SPC1 corresponds to outputting the abnormality detection signal according to the first aspect. Note that the diode SD5 limits the current flowing to the infrared LED.

<Abnormal sound signal cutoff circuit 895>
When the photocoupler SPC1 turns on, the phototransistor of the photocoupler SPC1 turns on, and a current flows to the ground through the phototransistor of the photocoupler SPC1, the resistors SR8 and SR9. Here, turning on the phototransistor of the photocoupler SPC1 means receiving an abnormality detection signal. The voltage applied to the resistor SR9 (the voltage appearing at the connection point between the resistor SR8 and the resistor SR9) is applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR3, and the transistor STR3 is turned on. The voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR3 is smoothed by removing noise from the capacitor SC3.

  When the transistor STR3 is turned on, the collector terminal of the transistor STR3 is pulled down to the ground side, and the first terminal of the relay SRL1 connected to the collector terminal of the transistor STR3 is pulled down to the ground side. The coil inside the relay SRL1 between the first terminal and the No. 1 terminal is energized, and the relay SRL1 operates.

  Accordingly, the coil of the relay SRL1 is in the excited state, and the B contact (the contact is open) between the 5th and 6th terminals of the relay SRL1 in the operating state is in the activated state. A contact (contact closed) is established. Accordingly, the fifth terminal and the sixth terminal of the relay SRL1 shift to the cutoff state, and the output of the woofer + signal of the woofer + signal line 888 from the sixth terminal of the relay SRL1 is cut off. As a result, the supply of the abnormal woofer + signal to the lower speaker 821 through the lower speaker harness 819 is cut off.

  Further, the third terminal and the fourth terminal of the relay SRL1 shift to the conductive state, the third terminal of the relay SRL1 is pulled down to the ground, and the collector terminal of the transistor STR3 connected to the third terminal of the relay SRL1 is grounded. The transistor STR3 is turned off.

  On the other hand, the first terminal of the relay connected in parallel with the third terminal of the relay SRL1 is also pulled down to the ground, so that the current flows through the route of the eighth terminal, the first terminal, the third terminal, the fourth terminal, and the ground line 887. The state shifts to the flowing conductive state, and the energized state of the coil is maintained. Therefore, the output of the woofer + signal from the sixth terminal of the relay SRL1 remains interrupted.

  As described above, when an abnormal audio signal with a fixed constant voltage is input, the abnormal audio signal detection circuit 885 detects that the audio signal is an abnormal audio signal and outputs an abnormal detection signal (photocoupler). Turns on). Upon receiving the abnormality detection signal output from the abnormal sound signal detection circuit 885 (when the photocoupler is turned on), the abnormal sound signal cutoff circuit 895 supplies an abnormal sound signal to the lower speaker 821 by operating the relay SRL1. Cut off. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the speaker from being damaged due to the continuous application of the fixed DC voltage to the speaker.

  In the above-described embodiment, when an abnormal sound is input, the energized state of the coil of the relay SRL1 is maintained, and the output of the woofer + signal from the sixth terminal of the relay SRL1 is cut off. The highest priority is given to preventing speaker damage, and ultimately safety measures are taken. Therefore, when the cause of the abnormal sound signal can be grasped by a staff or the like, or when the sound output stop state is confirmed, the operation state of the relay SRL1 is released by turning on the power of the game machine again. Can be returned to a normal initial state.

[Operation when abnormal audio signal is input due to excessive AC voltage]
<Abnormal voice signal detection circuit 885>
When an abnormal audio signal due to an excessive AC voltage is input, that is, when an audio signal is excessively amplified and an excessive AC voltage exceeding an appropriate amplification width is input, for example, in the case of a woofer + signal, The diode SD2 and the diode SD3 conduct, the charging current flows from the top to the bottom in the electrolytic capacitor SC1 through the resistor SR1 in FIG. 120, and the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is charged during the period from the positive voltage waveform of 0V to the peak voltage of the peak. Is done.

  For example, in the case of a woofer signal, the diode SD1 and the diode SD4 conduct, the charging current flows from the top to the bottom through the electrolytic capacitor SC1 through the resistor SR1 in FIG. During the period up to the peak voltage, the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is charged.

  In this case, since the peak voltage of the abnormal audio signal is extremely higher than the peak voltage of the normal audio signal, even if the width of the peak waveform is the same between the normal waveform and the abnormal waveform, the resistance SR1 , The charging current rapidly flows to the electrolytic capacitor SC1, and the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is rapidly charged.

  Therefore, the charge stored at the + terminal of electrolytic capacitor SC1 through resistor SR1 rapidly increases. Due to this rapid increase in charge, the voltage at the + terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 rises and reaches the base terminal voltage for operating the transistor STR1. Therefore, the transistor STR1 turns on.

  The operation of the abnormal sound signal detection circuit 885 and the operation of the abnormal sound signal cutoff circuit 895 after the transistor STR1 is turned on are the same as the operations when the abnormal sound signal with the fixed DC voltage is input as described above. Yes, and will be described briefly.

  Turning on the transistor STR1 turns on the transistor STR2, and turning on the transistor STR2 turns on the photocoupler SPC1. In the abnormal sound signal cutoff circuit 895, when the photocoupler SPC1 is turned on, the transistor STR3 is turned on, and when the transistor STR3 is turned on, the relay SRL1 is activated and the fifth and sixth terminals of the relay SRL1 are cut off. The state shifts to the state, and the output of the woofer + signal on the woofer + signal line 888 from the sixth terminal of the relay SRL1 is cut off. As a result, the supply of the abnormal woofer + signal to the lower speaker 821 through the lower speaker harness 819 is cut off. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an abnormal sound from being generated due to an abnormal audio signal having an excessively-excessive AC voltage exceeding the appropriate amplification width and being extremely amplified. Therefore, an unpleasant sound can be prevented from being output to the player.

[LCD controller]
Next, as shown in FIG. 118, the liquid crystal control unit 4150 that performs drawing control of the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the second liquid crystal display device 3252 on the peripheral control board 4010 includes a liquid crystal control MPU 4150a as a microprocessor, various processing programs, A liquid crystal control ROM 4150b for storing various commands and various data, a VDP (abbreviation for Video Display Processor) 4150c for controlling display of the above-described liquid crystal display device 1900 and the second liquid crystal display device 3252, and a screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 And a character RAM 4150e to which the various data stored in the character ROM 4150d are transferred and copied.

  The liquid crystal control MPU 4150a includes a parallel I / O port, a serial I / O port, and the like, controls the VDP 4150c based on control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 4140, and controls the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the The drawing control of the two liquid crystal display device 3252 is performed. When the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a operates normally, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a outputs an operation signal to that effect to the peripheral control unit 4140. Further, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a receives an in-progress signal to be described later from the VDP 4150c, and performs an interrupt process when the output of the in-progress signal is stopped every 16 ms.

  The liquid crystal control ROM 4150b includes, in addition to various programs for generating a screen to be drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the second liquid crystal display device 3252, schedule data corresponding to control data (display command) from the peripheral control board 4010, A plurality of non-resident area transfer schedule data and the like corresponding to the control data (display command) are stored. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data defining a screen configuration in a time series, and defines the order of screens to be drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the second liquid crystal display device 3252. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured such that when transferring various data stored in the character ROM 4150d to the non-resident area of the character RAM 4150e, the non-resident area transfer data that defines the order is arranged in chronological order. In the non-resident area transfer data, the order in which various kinds of data are transferred from the character ROM 4150d to the non-resident area of the character RAM 4150e for the screen data drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900 in accordance with the progress of the schedule data is defined in advance.

  The liquid crystal control MPU 4150a extracts the first screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control board 4010 from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b and outputs it to the VDP 4150c, and then outputs the screen data following the first screen data. It is extracted from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b and output to the VDP 4150c. As described above, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a extracts the screen data arranged in chronological order in the schedule data one by one from the head screen data from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b and outputs it to the VDP 4150c.

  When screen data output from the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a is input, the VDP 4150c extracts sprite data from the character RAM 4150e based on the input screen data and displays the sprite data on the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the second liquid crystal display device 3252. The drawing data is generated, and the generated drawing data is output to the liquid crystal display device 1900. When the VDP 4150c does not receive screen data from the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a, the VDP 4150c outputs an execution signal to that effect to the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a. Note that the VDP 4150c employs a line buffer method. The “line buffer method” means that one line of drawing data for drawing in the horizontal direction of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is held in a line buffer, and the one line of drawing data held in the line buffer is stored in the liquid crystal display device 1900 or This is a method of outputting to the second liquid crystal display device 3252.

  The character ROM 4150d stores an extremely large amount of sprite data, and has a large capacity. When the capacity of the character ROM 4150d increases, that is, when the number of sprites drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900 increases, the access speed of the character ROM 4150d cannot be ignored and affects the drawing speed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the sprite data stored in the character ROM 4150d is transferred and copied to the character RAM 4150e having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from the character RAM 4150e. Note that the sprite data is base data which is data before the sprite is expanded into a bitmap format, and is stored in the character ROM 4150d in a compressed state.

  Here, the “sprite” will be described. The “sprite” is an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 as a unit. For example, when displaying various people on the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the second liquid crystal display device 3252, data for drawing each person is called a “sprite”. Accordingly, when displaying a plurality of persons on the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the second liquid crystal display device 3252, a plurality of sprites is used. In addition to a person, a house, a mountain, a road, and the like constituting a background are also sprites, and the entire background can be a single sprite. These sprites are set in a position arranged on the screen or in a vertical relationship when the sprites overlap each other (hereinafter referred to as “sprite overlapping order”), and the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the second liquid crystal display device are set. 3252.

  Note that the sprite is configured by laminating a plurality of rectangular regions each having 64 pixels in the vertical and horizontal directions. The data for drawing this rectangular area is called a “character”. In the case of a small sprite, it can be expressed using one character, and in the case of a relatively large sprite such as a person, it is expressed using a total of six characters arranged in, for example, 2 × 3. be able to. In the case of a larger sprite such as a background, it can be represented using a larger number of characters. Thus, the number and arrangement of characters can be arbitrarily specified for each sprite.

  The liquid crystal display device 1900 and the second liquid crystal display device 3252 each include a main scan for setting a display state of each pixel in one direction along a pixel sequentially from left to right when viewed from the front, and intersecting with the one direction. And a sub-scan that repeats the main scan in the direction of the scan. When one line of drawing data output from the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is input, the liquid crystal display device 1900 goes from left to right as viewed from the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the second liquid crystal display device 3252 as main scanning. And sequentially outputs the pixels to one line. When the output of one line is completed, the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the second liquid crystal display device 3252 shifts to the line immediately below as sub-scanning, and similarly, when drawing data of the next line is input, Based on the drawing data for one minute, the data is output to pixels of one line sequentially from left to right when viewed from the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the second liquid crystal display device 3252 as main scanning.

[Control processing on main control board]
Next, an example of a control process executed by the main control board 4100 (particularly, the main control MPU 4100a) will be described with reference to FIGS.

[Main processing]
FIG. 121 is a flowchart illustrating an example of main processing performed by the main control board according to the present embodiment. When power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the main control MPU 4100a executes a power-on process (step S1). In the power-on process, it is determined whether the backup data stored in the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) is normal (set to the value at the time of the occurrence of the power failure), and if the backup data is normal. If the backup data is abnormal, the RAM is cleared and the device settings around the CPU (normal initial setting) are executed. , Interrupt timing setting, etc.).

  When the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is stopped during the game, the current game state is stored in the RAM as backup data. If the RAM clear switch 624a for instructing the clearing of the backup data stored in the RAM in the power-on process is on, the RAM is cleared and normal initialization is performed. In the power-on process, if backup data is not stored in the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a), the RAM is cleared and normal initialization is performed.

  In the power-on process, a process of setting the peripheral control unit 4140 to a state in which a power-on command indicating that the main control board 4100 has been started can be transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 when normal initialization is performed is also executed. The power-on command notifies the peripheral control unit 4140 of the progress of the game such as the activation of the main control board 4100 and the game state when the power is turned off. When the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is stopped (when the power is turned off) when the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed is closed or the like, the backup data is stored in the RAM, and the power to the pachinko machine 1 is restored again. When supply is started, power-on processing is executed.

  When the power-on processing ends, the main control MPU 4100a starts a loop processing for repeatedly executing each processing for the game. At the start of this loop processing, the main control MPU 4100a first determines whether a power failure notice signal has been detected (step S2). In the present embodiment, the power supply voltage used in the pachinko machine 1 is generated by a power supply board. That is, since the plurality of types of devices mounted on the pachinko machine 1 operate at different power supply voltages, the power supply voltage supplied from the external power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is converted into a predetermined power supply voltage by the power supply board, Supplying equipment. Thus, when a power failure occurs and the power supply voltage supplied from the external power supply to the power supply board becomes equal to or lower than a predetermined power supply voltage, a power failure notice signal indicating that the supply of the power supply voltage from the power supply board to the main control board 4100 is stopped. Sent. Then, when the power failure notice signal is detected by the main control MPU 4100a mounted on the main control board 4100 in step S2, a power failure occurrence process is executed (step S4).

  The power-off processing is performed when the power supply voltage (24 V in the present embodiment) supplied to the power supply board after the power failure is restored (hereinafter referred to as power restoration), and the operation of the gaming machine is changed from the state before the power failure. This is a process of storing the state at the time of power failure occurrence as backup data in the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) to start. Although the contents of the processing will be described later, in the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, the processing at the time of power failure occurrence is not an interrupt processing, but a branch processing that is executed immediately after the start of the loop in accordance with the presence or absence of a power failure notice signal. It is incorporated in the main processing (main control processing).

  By the way, when the power failure notice signal is not detected in step S2, that is, when the power from the external power supply is normally supplied, the random number updating process 2 for updating various random numbers used in the game is performed (step S2). S3).

[Process when power failure occurs]
FIG. 122 is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing when a power failure occurs according to the present embodiment. The process at the time of power failure occurrence is a process executed when a power failure notice signal is detected in the main process.

  First, the main control MPU 4100a performs an interrupt prohibition setting so that the interrupt processing is not executed (step S4a). Then, a checksum of the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) is calculated and stored in a predetermined area of the RAM (step S4b). This checksum is used to check whether or not the contents of the RAM before the power failure are retained when the power is restored.

  Next, the main control MPU 4100a sets a specified value indicating that the process at the time of power failure occurrence has been performed in a backup flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM (step S4c). When the above processing is completed, the main control MPU 4100a prohibits access to the RAM (step S4d), and enters an infinite loop to prepare for stopping power supply. In this process, if the power supply voltage becomes unstable due to a short-time power outage or the like (hereinafter, referred to as an “instantaneous power outage”), the process at the time of the power outage is actually started. Since the power supply voltage is not stopped, in the above process, there is a possibility that it is not possible to return from the infinite loop. In order to avoid such an adverse effect, the main control MPU 4100a of the present embodiment is provided with a watchdog timer, and is configured to reset if the watchdog timer is not updated for a predetermined time. The watchdog timer is periodically updated while the processing is being performed normally. However, the processing is started when a power failure occurs, and the update is not performed. As a result, even when the process enters the power-off state due to a momentary power failure and enters an infinite loop, the reset is applied after a predetermined period has elapsed, and the main control MPU 4100a is activated in the same process as when the power is turned on.

[Timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 123 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the timer interrupt process according to the present embodiment. The timer interrupt processing is executed at a predetermined timing (every 4 ms in the present embodiment) by the main control MPU 4100a mounted on the main control board 4100.

  The main control MPU 4100a first executes a register save process (step S10), and then executes the processes of steps S11 to S18. In the switch input process of step S11, a process of monitoring a detection signal of the above-described switch (a gate switch, a starting port sensor, a count sensor, a general winning switch, etc.) is executed. In the random number update process 1 of step S12, a process of updating various random numbers used in the game is executed. In the present embodiment, the random number updated in the random number update process 1 is different from the random number updated in the random number update process 2 described above. In the payout operation process in step S13, a payout command instructing payout of game balls is set in the payout control board 4110 based on the signal detected in the switch input process (step S11).

  In the special control process in step S14, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variably displayed on the special symbol indicators 1185 and 1186 based on the progress of the game, or the special electric accessory (that is, the attacker driving mechanism 2121). The opening / closing member 2106) for opening and closing the special winning opening 2103 is controlled by the control of the CPU 101 to change the open / close state of the special winning opening 2103.

  In step S15, a normal control process including a lottery process related to a winning in a normal hit, which triggers the operation of the movable piece 2111, is executed. In the normal control process, basically, the corresponding process is selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag indicating the progress of the game. The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 performs the lottery process so that the driving frequency of the movable piece 2111 becomes higher when a specific condition (time-saving flag is ON) is satisfied after the big hit game state. (A so-called time-saving gaming state). In the present embodiment, the time required for the normal symbol variable display control is reduced for a predetermined period after the end of the big hit game state, and the operation time when the movable piece 2111 operates is set to a long time. This realizes a time-saving gaming state in which it is easier to receive game balls into the special winning port 2101b of the first starting port 2101 than in the normal state (non-time-saving gaming state).

  In the output data setting process of the subsequent step S16, a process of outputting a status signal indicating a game status to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, a management computer or the like), and a drive signal to a special figure start storage display (not shown) And the like. In the command transmission process of step S17, a process of transmitting an effect command to the peripheral control unit 4140 is performed. In the command transmission process, a process of transmitting the power-on command set in the power-on process (step S1) to the peripheral control unit 4140 when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started is also performed. When the processing from step S11 to step S17 is executed, a register return processing (step S18) is executed, and the processing ends.

  Here, various random numbers updated by the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 in the above-described random number update processing 1 (step S12) and random number update processing 2 (step S3) will be described. In the present embodiment, as various random numbers used in the game, a big hit determination random number used for determining whether or not to generate a big hit game state (also called a big hit determination or a big hit lottery), and a big hit game state is generated in the big hit determination. The big hit symbol random number used to determine the stop symbol of the special symbol when it is determined to be made, a judgment whether or not to generate a small hit game state instead of the big hit (also referred to as a small hit determination, a small hit lottery) ), A random number for a small hit symbol used for determining a stop symbol of a special symbol when it is determined that a small hit game state is generated in the small hit determination, a big hit lottery and a small hit A reach determination random number used for determination (reach determination) as to whether or not to perform a high expectation effect such as a reach effect when it is determined that the hit is not a hit in a lottery; Variation display pattern random number (variation time random number) used to determine the variation display pattern (variation time etc.) of the special symbol displayed on the separate symbol display 1185, 1186, a big hit (small hit) game (special bonus) A random number for round determination used to determine the opening mode (such as the number of rounds) of the special winning opening 2103 in the game, the movable piece 2111 for opening and closing the special winning opening 2101b is opened (the upper end is clockwise with the lower end as the center). There is an ordinary hit determination random number used for determining whether or not control is performed (a state of being in a rotated position) (ordinary lottery hit determination).

  The random number for the jackpot symbol is also used for the determination of the jackpot state type (whether or not to activate the time-saving function) performed when it is determined that the jackpot has been won.

  Among these random numbers, in the random number update processing 1, the big hit (small hit) determination random number, the big hit (small hit) design random number, the round determining random number, and the movable piece 2111 related to the big hit (small hit) lottery are opened. The random number for normal symbol hit determination relating to whether or not to control is updated. That is, the random numbers used in the determination regarding the big hit (small hit) lottery and the opening / closing control of the movable piece 2111 are updated every 4 ms as a predetermined timing. By doing so, the probability of each random number in a predetermined period (the probability of determining to generate a big hit (small hit) gaming state, the probability of determining to control the movable piece 2111 to the open state) is made constant. This can prevent the player from being disadvantaged. On the other hand, in the random number updating process 2, the reach determination random number and the variation display pattern random number which are not related to the big hit (small hit) lottery and the normal lottery are updated.

[Special control processing]
Next, the special control process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 124 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the special control process according to the present embodiment.

  In this special control process, first, the first and second starting opening winning process (step S110) is performed. In the first and second starting opening winning processing, a determination is made as to whether or not a game ball has won the first starting opening 2101 or the second starting opening 2102. Then, after the first and second start opening winning processing (step S110) is performed, the second special symbol control processing (step S14b) in which the progress of the game on the second special symbol side is controlled, and the first special symbol controlling processing (step S14b). The first special symbol control process (step S14a) for controlling the progress of the game on the symbol side is sequentially performed. Thereby, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the game on the first special symbol side (the first special symbol) and the game on the second special symbol side (the second special symbol) can be simultaneously changed, As a result, even when the symbol change on one side starts, the symbol change on the other side does not stop.

[First and second starting opening winning process]
Next, the first and second starting opening winning processing (the processing of step S110) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 125 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the first and second start-up winning processing according to the present embodiment.

  In the first and second starting opening winning processing (step S110), the processing related to determining whether or not a game ball has been won in the first starting opening 2101 or the second starting opening 2102 and the winning are mainly described. On the condition that it has been determined that there is a corresponding special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol), a process for updating the hold state of the corresponding special symbol is performed.

  Therefore, main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not a detection signal has been output from second starting port sensor 3132. Then, as a result, when it is determined that the detection signal has been output from the second starting port sensor 3132, it is determined that a game ball has been won in the second starting port 2102 (YES in step S201), and then Step S202 is performed. In the process of step S202, various random numbers for the second special symbol lottery (a random number for a jackpot determination, a random number for a large jackpot symbol, etc.) are acquired, and the second random number is provided in the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a). It is determined whether or not the value of the number-of-suspended counter is less than 1, which is the upper limit. As a result, if the second hold number counter is less than 1 (the second hold number counter is 0), the second start hold storage process (step S203) and the hold history update process (step S204) are sequentially performed.

  That is, in this case, the main control MPU 4100a first performs, as the second start hold storage process (step S203), various data (the random number for the jackpot determination and the symbol for the jackpot symbol) acquired when the game ball has won the second start port 2102. Random numbers, etc.) are stored in a predetermined storage area (RAM) while associating them with the types of special symbols and the order of suspension. Next, as a hold history update process (step S204), 1 is added to the counter value of the second hold number counter provided in the RAM.

  In the process of step S203, a prize notification command indicating that a game ball has been awarded to the second starting port 2102 (more precisely, the type of special symbols and the order of holding) is set. The set winning notification command may be transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 in the above-described command transmission process (step S17). In such a configuration, through the control of the peripheral control unit 4140, when the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the like displays the hold on the side of the second starting port 2102, it can be promptly updated.

  On the other hand, in the process of step S201, when it is determined that the detection signal from the second starting port sensor 3132 has not been output, or in the process of step S202, the value of the second pending number counter becomes the upper limit value. When it is determined that the value is 1, next, as a process of step S205, it is determined whether or not a detection signal is output from the first starting port sensor 3131. Then, as a result, when it is determined that the detection signal has been output from the first starting port sensor 3131, it is determined that a game ball has been awarded to the first starting port 2101 (YES in step S205), and the next Then, the process of step S206 is performed. In the process of step S206, various random numbers for the first jackpot lottery (eg, a jackpot determination random number, a jackpot symbol random number, etc.) are obtained, and the value of the first hold number counter provided in the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a is set to the upper limit. A determination is made as to whether the value is less than four. As a result, if the first hold number counter is less than 4, the first start hold storage process (step S207) and the hold history update process (step S208) are sequentially performed.

  That is, in this case, the main control MPU 4100a firstly performs various types of data (the random number for the jackpot determination and the random number for the jackpot symbol) acquired when the game ball has won the first starting port 2101 as the first start hold storing process (step S207). Etc.) are stored in a predetermined storage area (RAM) while associating them with the types of special symbols and the order of suspension. Next, as a hold history update process (step S208), 1 is added to the counter value of the first hold number counter provided in the RAM.

  In the process of step S207, a prize notification command indicating that a game ball has been awarded to the first starting port 2101 (more precisely, the type of special symbols and the order of holding) is set. The set winning notification command may be transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 in the above-described command transmission process (step S17). In such a configuration, through the control of the peripheral control unit 4140, even when the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the like performs the hold display on the first start port 2101 side, it can be promptly updated.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of step S205 that no game ball has been won in the first starting port 2101, or in the processing of step S206, the counter value of the first pending number counter becomes the upper limit value. When it is determined that the number has reached 4, the first and second start-up winning processing is terminated at this time.

  In the present embodiment, after the prize-winning process (steps S201 to S204) for the second starting port 2102, the prize-winning process for the first starting port 2101 (steps S205 to S208) is executed. . However, instead of this, a mode in which a winning process to the second starting port 2102 is executed after a winning process to the first starting port 2101 may be executed.

  In addition, the main control MPU 4100a may execute a preceding determination process based on various acquired random numbers and transmit a command indicating the result of the preceding determination process to the peripheral control unit 4140 as a winning notification command. The precedence determination process is performed prior to a lottery using the random numbers stored in steps S203 and S207 (for example, a jackpot lottery, a probability variable lottery, and a determination of a variable display pattern, which will be described later), and the result of the lottery is determined in advance It is. The precedence determination process is performed using the random numbers stored in steps S203 and S207 and the precedence determination table. The precedence determination table is a table similar to the table used for the lottery using the random numbers. In the precedence determination process, by comparing the random number with the precedence determination table, a lottery result when a lottery using the random number is performed (whether or not a big hit (small hit), a big hit, a variation display pattern) Etc.) (the determination made prior to the lottery is also referred to as “prefetch determination”). The peripheral control unit 4140 may realize an effect reflecting the received prize notification command (preceding determination result) before the lottery using the random number is performed (such an effect is “read ahead”. Direction).

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the contents of the preceding determination table are the same as the contents of the table used for the lottery. However, at least a part of the contents of the preceding determination table may be different from the contents of the table used for the lottery.

  Hereinafter, a first special symbol control process in which the progress of the game on the first special symbol side is controlled (step S14a), and a second special symbol control process in which the progress of the game on the second special symbol side is controlled (step S14b) A detailed procedure for each will be described. Here, for the sake of convenience, unlike the control execution procedure, the first special symbol control process (step S14a) will be described first.

[First special symbol control process]
Next, the first special symbol control process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol control process on the first special symbol side of the present embodiment. In the first special symbol control process, the above-described first and second start-port winning process (FIG. 125) and the later-described second special symbol control process (FIG. 134) are executed in the above-described special control process (FIG. 124). This is a process executed later.

  The main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not the interlock flag on the first special symbol side is in an on state (Step S100a). The interlock flag of the first special symbol is a flag that is set to ON when the game of the first special symbol is to be interlocked with the game of the second special symbol.

  The pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment has a control structure in which a game on the first special symbol side and a game on the second special symbol side can simultaneously proceed. In such a control structure, there is a concern that the big hit game (small hit game) may occur between the game on the first special symbol side and the game on the second special symbol side. In order to avoid this, when a big hit (small hit) is obtained in one game, an interlocking flag indicating that the progress of the other game is controlled regardless of the processing flag is turned on. Therefore, the interlocking flag of the first special symbol is set to the ON state when the result of the second special symbol lottery is a big hit (small hit) in a second special symbol control process (FIG. 134) described later.

  When the interlocking flag of the first special symbol is on (YES in step S100a), main control MPU 4100a does not perform the processing (steps S130a to S200a) according to the first processing flag, and One interlock setting process is executed (step S250a). The details of the first linkage setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, when the interlock flag of the first special symbol is in the off state in the process of step S100a (NO in step S100a), the main control MPU 4100a performs the original game of the first special symbol. Assuming that the progress is allowed, the state of the first processing flag indicating the progress of the game on the first special symbol side is confirmed. Then, the main control MPU 4100a selectively selects a process that matches the state of the first process flag (the progress of the game on the first special symbol side) among a plurality of processes (steps S130a to S200a) shown in the drawing. Since the game is executed, the game on the first special symbol side is appropriately advanced.

  More specifically, main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not the first processing flag is 0 (step S120a), and if the first processing flag is 0 (YES in step S120a), The 1-variation start process (step S130a) is executed. In the first change start process (step S130a), after setting for starting change display of the first special symbol based on the result of the hit first special symbol lottery (first special determination) and the like is performed, The one processing flag is updated to “1”.

  On the other hand, if the first processing flag is not 0 (NO in step S120a), main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the first processing flag is 1 (step S140a). Then, as a result, if the first processing flag is 1 (YES in step S140a), the first variation pattern setting processing (step S150a) is executed. In the first variation pattern setting process (step S150a), the variation pattern of the first special symbol (identification symbol) displayed on the first special symbol display 1185 (the first special symbol (identification) on the first special symbol display 1185). The first processing flag is updated to "2" after the variable time of the symbol (variable time from the start of the variable display to the stop display) is determined.

  On the other hand, if the first processing flag is not 1 (NO in step S140a), main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the first processing flag is 2 (step S160a). Then, as a result, if the first processing flag is 2 (YES in step S160a), the first fluctuation processing (step S170a) is executed. In the first variation process, the variation time set in the first variation pattern setting process (step S150a) is monitored by a timer, and based on the timeout, the first special symbol display 1185 displays the first special symbol display. Stop the fluctuation display. After that, when it is determined in the first change start process (step S130a) that a big hit has been won, an interlocking flag for linking the game on the second special symbol side to the game on the first special symbol side is set. After the ON state, the first processing flag is updated to “3” to start the big hit game. However, if the winning is not achieved (losing), the first processing flag is updated to “0”. That is, in this case, in the next interruption process, the process is restarted from the first variation start process (step S130a).

  On the other hand, if the first processing flag is not 2 (NO in step S160a), main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the first processing flag is 3 (step S180a). Then, as a result, if the first processing flag is 3 (YES in step S180a), a first big hit game start process (step S190a) for creating an interval period before starting the big hit game is executed. When the interval period before starting the big hit game has elapsed, the first processing flag is updated to “4” in the first big hit game start processing.

  On the other hand, if the first processing flag is not 3 (NO in step S180a), the main control MPU 4100a executes the first big hit game start processing (step S200a). In the first big hit game start process, a condition device, which is one of the conditions for executing the big hit game, is operated or the time saving function is stopped. Then, after the preparation for starting the big hit game is completed, the first processing flag is updated to “4”.

  On the other hand, if the first processing flag is not 3 (NO in step S180a), the main control MPU 4100a determines that the first processing flag is 4 and executes the first big hit game processing (step S200a). In the first big hit game process, the mode of the big hit game (number of rounds, opening time, maximum winning number, etc.) is set, and the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member 2106 is controlled based on the set big hit game mode. . When the big hit game is over, the processing flag is updated to “0” after processing such as stopping the operation of the condition device is performed. That is, in this case, in the next interruption process, the process is restarted from the first variation start process (step S130a).

  As described above, in the processing of step S100a, if the interlock flag indicating that the game on the first special symbol side should be interlocked with the game on the second special symbol side is in the off state, When any one of S130a, S150a, S170a, S190a, and S200a is selectively executed based on the state of the first processing flag, the first special control processing in the interrupt processing is performed. Will be terminated.

  Hereinafter, the first variation start process (step S130a), the first variation pattern setting process (step S150a), the first variation process (step S170a), the first big hit game start process (step S190a), the first big hit game process ( The detailed procedure of each process of step S200a) and the first interlock setting process (step S250a) will be described separately.

[First fluctuation start processing]
First, the first variation start process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 127 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the first change start process according to the present embodiment. The first variation start process is executed when the first process flag is “0” in the first special symbol control process (FIG. 126).

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first determines whether or not there is a lottery process of the first special symbol in a suspended state based on the counter value of the first special reserved number counter as the process of step S301a. I do. Then, when it is determined that there is no lottery process of the first special symbol in the suspended state based on the counter value of the first special reserved number counter (YES in step S301a), the process in the interrupt process is not performed. The first change start process is temporarily ended. That is, in this case, each time the above-described interrupt processing is performed, in the processing of step S301a, it is determined whether or not there is a lottery processing of the first special symbol in a suspended state. Until it is determined that there is a first special symbol lottery process, the progress of the game on the first special symbol side is substantially in a standby state.

  On the other hand, when the main control MPU 4100a determines in the process of step S301a that there is a lottery process of the first special symbol in a suspended state (NO in step S301a), the main control MPU 4100a proceeds to step S302a. As a process, it is determined whether or not the ST count is 0. The number of STs is the number of times of the lottery process (the number of times the special symbol fluctuates) that makes the winning probability of the big hit a high probability (probable change state), and is set at the end of the big hit game in a first big hit game process (FIG. 131) described later. . In the present embodiment, 70 times are given as the number of STs after the end of all the big hit games. Details of the big hit type will be described later with reference to FIG.

  If the number of STs is not 0 (NO in step S302a), main control MPU 4100a updates the number of STs by 1 as a process in step S303a. On the other hand, if the ST count is 0 (YES in step S302a), the process shifts to step S304a without performing step S303a.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a, as the process of Step S304a, performs a random number group (for example, the first hitting) related to the lottery process of the first special symbol stored in the first special symbol holding storage area of the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a. The random number group stored in the earliest storage area among the determination random number, the first symbol random number, the first reach random number, and the first variable random number) is read from the RAM 4100e. Next, as a process of step S305a, a random number group (first hit determination random number) related to the first special symbol lottery process stored in each storage area of the first special symbol holding storage area of the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a. , A first symbol random number, a first reach random number, a first variable random number) in a first-in first-out (First-In First-Out) manner.

  More specifically, the first special symbol holding storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and stores random numbers extracted in accordance with occurrence of a start winning prize in order from the first (earliest) area. Then, if a random number is stored in the n-th (n = 1 to 3) storage area and a winning start occurs, the extracted random number is stored in the (n + 1) -th (n = 1 to 3) storage area, and the first random number is stored. When the start condition of the variable display based on the random numbers stored in the storage areas is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and stored in the N-th (N = 2 to 4) storage areas. The various random numbers are moved to the (N-1) th (N = 2 to 4) storage areas. Thereby, the order in which the fluctuation display control of the first special symbol is suspended is stored so as to be specified, and the suspension of the fluctuation display control is released in order from the earliest suspension (the earliest suspension). become.

  After that, the main control MPU 4100a counts down the first special holding number counter and performs the lottery process (the first process) based on the read first random number for random determination as the processes of steps S306a and S307a. 1 special symbol lottery).

  Here, in the first special symbol lottery according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 146 (A), when the jackpot probability state is the normal state, the jackpot is won with a probability of 1/399, and the jackpot is won. When the probability state is a probable state (high probability state), it is set to win a jackpot with a probability of 1/45.

  When the first special symbol lottery is performed (step S307a), the main control MPU 4100a sets a flag indicating the result of the first special symbol lottery and a winning information command as the process of step S308a. I do. At this time, a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the first special symbol lottery is also determined. Then, thereafter, as the process of step S309a, the process ends when the first process flag is updated to "1" so that the process shifts to the first variation pattern setting process (step S150a).

  It should be noted that the result of the first special symbol lottery obtained in the first variation start process is the winning information command set in the process of step S308a, and the peripheral control is performed by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. 123. Section 4140.

[First variation pattern setting process]
Next, a first variation pattern setting process in which a variation pattern of the first special symbol is set based on a result of the first special symbol lottery (step S307a) and the like will be described. FIG. 128 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the first variation pattern setting process according to the present embodiment.

  In the first variation pattern setting process (step S150a) executed when the first process flag is “1”, as shown in FIG. 128, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 has won a big hit. If the flag indicating that the big hit has been set (YES in step S401a), the change pattern table at the time of the big hit according to the game state is selected (step S402a), and the flag state indicating that the big hit has not been won is set. If there is (NO in step S401a), a variation pattern table at the time of loss is selected (step S403a).

  Then, the main control MPU 4100a determines a variation pattern by comparing the selected variation pattern table with the first variation random number read in step S304a in the first variation start processing (step S404a), and determines the determined variation pattern. Of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 1185 is set (step S405a). Further, the main control MPU 4100a sets the fluctuation time set corresponding to the determined fluctuation pattern in the first fluctuation timer (Step S406a). As a result, the variation control is performed by the first special symbol display 1185 and the liquid crystal display device 1900 for the variation time determined in this way. Then, thereafter, as the process of step S407a, the process ends when the first process flag is updated to "2" so that the process shifts to the first changing process (step S170a).

  The variation pattern set in the first variation pattern setting process is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. 123 as the variation pattern command set in the process of step S405a. Is done. Thereby, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, the result of the big hit lottery is indicated based on the fluctuation pattern indicated by the effect command and the information indicated by the winning information command through the control by the peripheral control unit 4140 side. The display effect is performed.

  Note that among the fluctuation pattern tables used in the processes of steps S402a and S403a, the fluctuation pattern tables used in the normal game state (normal mode) and the high-accuracy time-short game state (rush preparation mode) include a liquid crystal display. A plurality of variation patterns (variation times) for enlivening the display effect in the device 1900 are stored. In these fluctuation patterns, effects (including reach effects) that differ in the degree of expectation of “winning” are set, and any of the fluctuation patterns is selectively determined in the process of step S405a. Becomes On the other hand, in the fluctuation pattern table used in the high-probability non-time saving game state (rush mode), the shortened fluctuation time (for example, 1 second) is always selected. Details of the setting of the fluctuation time will be described later with reference to FIG.

[First fluctuation processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 129, the first changing process (step S170a) executed when the first process flag is “2” will be described. FIG. 129 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the first process during fluctuation according to the present embodiment.

  The main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not the first variation timer set in the process of step S406a in the first variation pattern setting process (step S150a) has become 0 as the process of step S501a. A determination is made as to whether or not the determined fluctuation time has elapsed. As a result, as long as the first fluctuation timer is not 0, that is, as long as it is determined that the set fluctuation time has not elapsed (NO in step S501a), the first fluctuation processing (step S170a) is performed. Each time the process is performed, the first variable timer is decremented by 1 as the process of step S521a.

  As a result of such processing, when it is determined in the processing of step S501a that the first fluctuation timer has reached 0, that is, when it is determined that the set fluctuation time has elapsed (YES in step S501a). ), The main control MPU 4100a displays, on the first special symbol display 1185, a stopped symbol that has already been determined (a stopped symbol according to the result of the first special symbol lottery) as the processing of steps S502a and S503a. The display control for terminating the variable display is thereby performed, and the first fixed stop command for instructing the liquid crystal display device 1900 to derive and display the display result of the decorative symbol corresponding to the stop symbol of the first special symbol is issued to the liquid crystal display device 1900. This is set as a command to the peripheral control unit 4140. The first confirmation stop command thus set is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. As a result, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, the effect of the display effect is definitely displayed through the later-described control by the peripheral control unit 4140.

  After performing the process related to the symbol stop in this way, this process ends when various processes according to the result of the first special symbol lottery are executed.

  When the result of the first special symbol lottery is a big hit (YES in step S504a), the main control MPU 4100a sets the second special symbol side to avoid the occurrence of a double hit on the second special symbol side. The interlock flag of the second special symbol, which indicates that the game is to be interlocked with the game of the first special symbol, is turned on (step S505a). In addition, the probability change flag indicating that the jackpot winning probability of the special symbol lottery is in the high probability state (probability change state) is turned off (step S506a). Then, thereafter, when the first processing flag is updated to “3” in order to start the big hit game (step S507a), this processing is ended.

  By performing such control, the period from the end of the big hit game to the end of the big hit game until the interlock flag of the second special symbol is turned off (the first big hit game process (FIG. 131) described later) In step S726a), the game on the second special symbol side is stopped in conjunction with the game on the first special symbol side, or the current state is maintained, regardless of the second processing flag.

  On the other hand, when the result of the first special symbol lottery is a loss (NO in step S504a), the main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not the probability change flag provided in the RAM 4100e of the main control board 4100 is on. A determination is made (step S511a). The probability change flag is set to the ON state when the jackpot winning probability is shifted from the normal probability (normal state) to the high probability (probability change state). Since the change of the jackpot winning probability is triggered by the occurrence of a jackpot, the probability change flag is set at the end of the jackpot game in a first jackpot game process (FIG. 131) described later.

  Then, when the probable change flag is in the ON state (YES in step S511a), main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the ST count is 0 (step S512a). If the ST count is 0 (YES in step S512a), it is determined that the probable change state has ended, and the probable change flag is set to the off state (step S513a).

  On the other hand, when the probable change flag is in the OFF state (NO in step S511a), main control MPU 4100a shifts to the processing in step S514a. If the number of STs is not 0 even when the probable change flag is on (NO in step S512a), the probable change state continues, so that the on state of the probable change flag is maintained and the process proceeds to step S514a. .

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the time saving function is operating as the process of Step S514a (Step S514a). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the time saving flag provided in RAM 4100e of main control board 4100 is in an ON state. The time-saving flag is set to the ON state when the time-saving function is operated in a time-saving function setting process (step S725a) of a first big hit game process (FIG. 131) described later.

  Then, when the time saving function is in operation (YES in step S514a), main control MPU 4100a determines whether to stop the time saving function (step S515a). In the present embodiment, the time saving function is provided together with the certainty changing function when the first big hit A occurs, and operates while the certainty changing function is continued. Therefore, it is determined that the time saving function is stopped when the probability change flag is in the OFF state, and it is determined that the operation of the time reduction function is continued when the probability change flag is in the ON state.

  In other words, the main control MPU 4100a determines that the condition for terminating the time-saving gaming state is satisfied when the probability change flag is set to the OFF state in the process of step S513a, and stops the time-saving function (step S516a). After the processing related to the time saving function is performed in this manner, the special symbol is stopped to fluctuate so as to indicate a loss, and it is determined that the special symbol is in the processing stage in which the special symbol has been reserved, and the first processing flag is set to “ "0" (step S517a), and this process ends. As a result, when the next interrupt control is performed, the next variation relating to the first special symbol is performed.

[First big hit game start process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 130, the first big hit game start process (step S190a) executed when the first process flag is “3” will be described. FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing an example of the first big hit game start process of the present embodiment.

  First, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not a timer (a first big hit start interval timer) for counting an interval before the start of the big hit game is set as a process of step S601a. As a result, if the first big hit start interval timer has not been set yet (NO in step S601a), the condition device is operated as the processing in step S602a, and the time saving is performed as the processing in steps S603a and S604a. If the function is operating (YES in step S603a), the operation is stopped. That is, after such preparation is completed, the first big hit start interval timer is set and the first big hit interval start command is set as the processing of steps S605a and S606a to start the pre-big hit game interval. This process is temporarily terminated.

  The first big hit interval start command set in the process of step S606a is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. 123. As a result, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, a display effect during the interval before the start of the big hit game appears through the later-described control by the peripheral control unit 4140 side.

  That is, after the first big hit start interval timer is set in this way, every time an interrupt process is performed, it is determined that the first big hit start interval timer has been set in the process of step S601a ( (YES in step S601a), and the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the first big hit start interval timer is 0 in the processing in the next step S611a, that is, the time set as the interval before the start of the big hit game elapses. A determination is made as to whether or not this has been done. In the process of step S611a, the first big hit start interval timer is not 0, that is, as long as it is determined that the time set as the interval before the start of the big hit game has not elapsed (NO in step S611a). ), Every time the first big hit game start process (step S190a) is performed, the first big hit start interval timer is decremented by 1 as the process of step S621a.

  As a result of such processing, in the processing of step S611a, it is determined that the first big hit start interval timer has become 0, that is, it has been determined that the time set as the interval before the start of the big hit game has elapsed. At this time (YES in step S611a), main control MPU 4100a updates the first processing flag to “4” to execute the jackpot game (step S612a), and ends this processing.

  The length of the first big hit start interval timer can be set according to the type of the big hit symbol (the type determined by the first symbol random number).

[First big hit game process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 131, the first big hit game process (step S200a) executed when the first process flag is “4” will be described. FIG. 131 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the first big hit game process of the present embodiment.

  First, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the first big hit game execution flag indicating that the control related to the execution of the big hit game is already in progress is a process of step S701a. The first big hit game execution flag is provided in the RAM 4100e of the main control board 4100, is set to an on state in a process of a step S703a described later at the start of the first big hit game, and is turned off in a process of a step S723a described later at the end of the first big hit game. Is set.

  When the first big hit game execution flag is not in the on state (NO in step S701a), the main control MPU 4100a performs the process of step S702a to start the control related to the execution of the big hit game using the attacker device 2100. The opening mode (number of rounds, opening time of each round, maximum winning number of each round) is set according to the type of jackpot. The details of the opening mode according to the type of big hit will be described later with reference to FIG. 146 (C).

  After the execution mode of the jackpot game is set in this manner, the main control MPU 4100a performs the first jackpot game execution indicating that the control relating to the execution of the jackpot game is already in progress as the processing of steps S703a and S704a. When the flag is turned on and the first big hit start command is set, this process is temporarily ended.

  That is, after the first big hit game execution flag is turned on in this way, each time the interrupt processing is performed, it is determined that the control related to the execution of the big hit game is already in progress ( In step S701a, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the set round number has been exhausted, as the process in the next step S711a. In the process of step S711a, as long as it is determined that the set number of rounds has not yet been exhausted, that is, it is determined that the control of the execution of the big hit game is in the middle of the process (NO in step S711a). Each time the first big hit game process (step S200a) is performed, the main control MPU 4100a executes control according to the set opening pattern as the process of step S712a. Thus, every time the above-described interrupt processing is performed (every 4 ms), the movement (including the interval between rounds) related to the opening and closing of the opening and closing member 2106 is updated (managed) through the processing of step S712a. As a result, a big hit game in which the attacker device 2100 opens and closes with an opening pattern according to the type of big hit is realized.

  Then, while such control is being performed, in the process of step S711a, when the set round number has been consumed, that is, when it is determined that all the controls related to the execution of the big hit game are completed. (YES in step S711a), the main control MPU 4100a performs each process (step S721a, step S722a, step S731a, step S741a, step S742a) for generating the big hit game end interval.

  That is, the main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not the timer for measuring the big hit game end interval (first big hit end interval timer) has been set (step S721a). Then, as a result, if the first big hit end interval timer has not been set yet (NO in step S721a), the first big hit end interval is processed as steps S741a and S742a in order to start the big hit game end interval. When the timer is set and the first big hit interval end command is set, this process is temporarily ended.

  The first big hit interval end command set in the process of step S742a is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. 123. As a result, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, a display effect during the end interval of the big hit game appears through the later-described control by the peripheral control unit 4140 side.

  That is, after the first big hit end interval timer is set in this way, each time an interrupt process is performed, it is determined that the first big hit end interval timer has been set in the process of step S721a ( (YES in step S721a), and the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the first big hit end interval timer is 0, that is, the time set as the big hit game end interval elapses in the next step S722a. A determination is made as to whether or not this has been done. In the process of step S722a, the first big hit end interval timer is not 0, that is, as long as it is determined that the time set as the interval before the start of the big hit game has not elapsed (NO in step S722a). Each time the first big hit game process (Step S200a) is performed, the main control MPU 4100a subtracts 1 from the first big hit end interval timer as the process of Step S731a.

  As a result of such processing, when it is determined in the processing of step S722a that the first big hit end interval timer has become 0, that is, it is determined that the time set as the end interval of the big hit game has elapsed. (YES in step S722a), the main control MPU 4100a performs each process (steps S723a to S728a) for ending the big hit game.

  That is, the main control MPU 4100a firstly turns off the first big hit game execution flag indicating that the control for the execution of the big hit game is already in progress as the process of step S723a. Then, as the process of step S724a, the probability change flag indicating that the big hit winning probability of the special symbol lottery is in the high probability state (probable variation state) is turned on, and the number of times of the special symbol lottery to be in the high probability state ( (ST times) is set to 70 times. Here, the probability change flag that has been turned on is turned off when the ST count is exhausted (step S513a) or when a big hit occurs before the digestion (step S506a).

  In the present embodiment, the probability changing function is operated for all the big hits. However, when the certainty changing function is not operated or not depending on the type of the big hit, a time saving function setting process described later (step S725a) As described above, first, a process of determining whether or not a big hit for activating the probability change function may be executed. Then, in the case of a jackpot for activating the probability change function, the main control MPU 4100a operates the probability change flag to the ON state as in the processing in step S724a, and sets the number of STs. Further, in the case of a big hit in which the probability change function is operated until the next big hit, the main control MPU 4100a only needs to set the probability change flag to the ON state and does not need to set the number of STs.

  Next, as a step S725a, the main control MPU 4100a executes a time saving function setting process for setting whether or not to activate the time saving function according to the type of the big hit and the game state. Details of the time saving function setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Then, after the processing related to the probability change function and the time saving function is performed, the main control MPU 4100a sets the second special symbol side in consideration of the possibility that the big hit game is not duplicated on the second special symbol side. The above-mentioned interlock flag indicating that the game is to be interlocked with the game of the first special symbol is turned off (step S726a). Thereafter, the operation of the condition device is stopped (step S727a), and the first processing flag is updated to "0" assuming that the first special symbol that has become the current big hit is in the processing stage of being held off (step S728a). ), And this process ends. As a result, when the next interrupt control is performed, the next variation relating to the first special symbol is performed.

  According to such a jackpot game process, the corresponding jackpot 2103 is opened according to the type of the jackpot until the round game reaches the maximum number of rounds in the process of step 711a. The game is repeatedly opened in step S712a), and the player can acquire a prize ball according to the type of big hit.

[Time saving function setting process]
Next, the time saving function setting process (step S725a) of the above-described first big hit game process (FIG. 131) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 132 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the time saving function setting process according to the present embodiment.

  The main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not the current big hit is a big hit that activates the time saving function according to the type of the big hit (step S751). In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 146 (C) described later, the time-saving function is provided only when the big hit (first big hit A) of the symbol A is won in the first special symbol lottery.

  Then, when it is a big hit to activate the time saving function (YES in step S751), main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the current game mode is the rush mode (step S752). The rush mode in the present embodiment indicates a game state in which the certainty changing function is operated and the time saving function is not operated (highly accurate non-time saving game state). Therefore, specifically, it is determined whether or not the probable change flag is on and the time reduction flag is off.

  If the current game mode is not the rush mode (high-precision non-time saving game state) (NO in step S752), main control MPU 4100a operates the time reduction flag to turn on the time reduction function (step S753). . After that, the process ends.

  On the other hand, if the current big hit is not a big hit that activates the time saving function (NO in step S751), the main control MPU 4100a ends this processing without operating the time saving flag. Also, when the current big hit is a big hit for activating the time saving function and the current game mode is the rush mode (highly accurate non-time saving game state) (YES in step S752), the time saving flag is not operated. This processing ends. Here, the time saving flag is set to the off state when the big hit game is started by the processing of steps S603a and S604a of the first big hit game start processing (FIG. 130) described above.

  Therefore, when the current game mode is the rush mode (high-precision non-time saving game state), even if the result of the first special symbol lottery is a big hit (first big hit A) that activates the time saving function, the time saving function is not performed. It will not be activated. In the present embodiment, a game state (rush mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a game state (rush preparation mode) in which the time reduction function is activated by not operating the time reduction function generally considered to be advantageous to the player is provided. It is characterized by the following.

[First interlock setting process]
Next, the first interlock setting process (step S250a) of the first special symbol control process (FIG. 126) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 133 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the first linkage setting process according to the present embodiment.

  In the first interlocking setting process, when a big hit or a small hit is derived in the game on the second special symbol side, the game on the first special symbol side is controlled to interlock with the game on the second special symbol side.

  The main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not the first special symbol is changing (step S1001a).

  When the first special symbol is changing (YES in step S1001a), the main control MPU 4100a has already determined in the first special symbol lottery (step S307a) of the first change start process (FIG. 127). The stop symbol is set to a predetermined loss symbol (step S1002a).

  Next, the main control MPU 4100a performs display control for terminating the variable display by displaying the set loss symbol on the first special symbol display 1185 (step S1003a). Also, a first fixed stop command for instructing the liquid crystal display device 1900 to derive and display the display result of the decorative symbol according to the stop symbol of the first special symbol is set as a command to the peripheral control unit 4140 (step S1004a). . Note that the processing in steps S1003a and S1004a is the same as steps S502a and S503a performed when the fluctuation time has elapsed in the above-described first fluctuation processing (FIG. 129).

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a performs the same processing as steps S511a to S517a executed when the first special symbol is lost in the above-described first changing processing (FIG. 129) by the processing of steps S1005a to S1011a. After the execution, the process ends.

  On the other hand, when the first special symbol is not changing (NO in step S1001a), the main control MPU 4100a continues the current state of the first special symbol (that is, the state where the first special symbol does not change). (Step S1021a), and the process ends.

  As described above, in the first interlocking setting process, when the big hit or the small hit is derived by the change of the second special symbol (when the first interlock flag is on), the changing first special symbol is forcibly set. To stop with a losing symbol. Further, the first special symbol that is not fluctuating is brought into a standby state in which the fluctuation is not started until the first interlocking flag is turned off. Thereby, it is avoided that the hits between the game on the first special symbol side and the game on the second special symbol side overlap.

  In the present embodiment, in the process of step S505b of the second changing process (FIG. 137), the first interlocking flag is set to ON at the timing when the changing time of the second special symbol ends, and in the first interlocking setting process. The stop symbol already determined in the hit determination process (step S307a) of the first variation start process (FIG. 127) is changed to a lost symbol, but is not limited to this. The first interlocking flag may be set to ON at the timing when the change starts according to the gaming state. For example, in the high-probability non-time-saving game state (rush mode), the first interlocking flag is turned on when a large hit or a small hit is derived in the hit determination processing (step S307b) of the second change start processing (FIG. 135). To set. When the hit determination process (step S307a) of the first change start process (FIG. 127) is performed during the change in which the second big hit is derived, the random determination is performed without using the first hit determination random number. You may decide to determine a missing symbol. Thus, the variation of the first special symbol executed during the variation of the second special symbol from which the big hit is derived is determined at the start of the variation, so that the process at the variation end timing of the second special symbol is simplified. can do.

  Further, as a modified example of the first interlocking setting process of the present embodiment, a standby state in which the fluctuating state is maintained even when the first special symbol is fluctuating may be created. In this case, when a big hit is derived by the fluctuation of the first special symbol, the loss is forcibly controlled to be lost, and the player loses the chance of obtaining the first big hit which should be originally obtained. Disappears.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 134 to 142, detailed procedures of the second special symbol control process (step S14b) in which the progress of the game on the second special symbol side is controlled will be described.

  The second special symbol control process may be performed by using the same program as in the case of performing the above-described first special symbol control process and changing various values referred to in the program.

[Second special symbol control process]
The second special symbol control process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol control processing on the second special symbol side of the present embodiment.

  First, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the interlock flag on the second special symbol side is on (step S100b). The interlock flag of the second special symbol is a flag that is set to an on state when the game on the second special symbol side is to be interlocked with the game on the first special symbol side.

  That is, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment has a control structure in which the game on the first special symbol side and the game on the second special symbol side can simultaneously proceed. In such a control structure, there is a concern that a big hit game (small hit game) may occur between the game on the first special symbol side and the game on the second special symbol side. Therefore, when a big hit (small hit) is obtained in the game on one side, the interlocking flag indicating that the progress of the game on the other side is controlled regardless of the processing flag is turned on at that time. ing. Here, the interlocking flag of the second special symbol is set to the on state when the result of the first special symbol lottery is a big hit in the above-described first special symbol control process (FIG. 126) (step S505a).

  When the interlock flag of the second special symbol is on (YES in step S100b), main control MPU 4100a does not perform any processing (steps S130b to S240b) according to the second processing flag. Then, a second interlock setting process is executed (step S250b). The details of the second linkage setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if the interlock flag of the second special symbol is in the off state in the process of step S100b (NO in step S100b), the main control MPU 4100a originally performs the game of the second special symbol. It is determined that the game progress is allowed, and the state of the second processing flag indicating the progress of the game on the second special symbol side is confirmed. Then, the main control MPU 4100a, among the plurality of processes (steps S130b to S240b) shown in the figure, the process that matches the state of the second process flag (the progress of the game on the second special symbol side) thus confirmed. Is selectively executed, so that the game on the second special symbol side proceeds properly.

  More specifically, main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not the second processing flag is 0 (step S120b). If the second processing flag is 0 (YES in step S120b), 2 A change start process (Step S130b) is executed. In the second variation start process (step S130b), after setting for starting variation display of the second special symbol is performed based on the result of the winning second special symbol lottery (second special determination) and the like, The second processing flag is updated to “1”.

  On the other hand, if the second processing flag is not 0 (NO in step S120b), it is determined whether the second processing flag is 1 (step S140b). Then, as a result, if the second processing flag is 1 (YES in step S140b), the second variation pattern setting processing (step S150b) is executed. In the second variation pattern setting process (step S150b), the variation pattern of the second special symbol (identification symbol) displayed on the second special symbol display 1186 (the second special symbol (identification) on the second special symbol display 1186). (Variation time from the start of the variable display of the symbol) to the stop display) is determined, and then the second processing flag is updated to “2”.

  On the other hand, if the second processing flag is not 1 (NO in step S140b), main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the second processing flag is 2 (step S160b). Then, as a result, if the second processing flag is 2 (YES in step S160b), the second fluctuation processing (step S170b) is executed. In the second variation process, the variation time set in the second variation pattern setting process (step S150b) is monitored by a timer, and based on the timeout, the second special symbol display 1186 displays the second special symbol. Stop the fluctuation display. After that, when it is determined in the second variation start processing (step S130b) that a big hit has been won, the link flag for linking the game on the first special symbol side to the game on the second special symbol side is set. After the ON state, the second processing flag is updated to “3” to start the big hit game. Also, when it is determined that the small hit has been won, a small hit game is started after the link lag for linking the game on the first special symbol with the game on the second special symbol is turned on. In this case, the second processing flag is updated to “5”. However, if neither the small hit nor the big hit is won (loss), the second processing flag is updated to “0”. As a result, the current change is completed, and the second change start process (step S130b) is executed in the next interrupt process.

  On the other hand, if the second processing flag is not 2 (NO in step S160b), main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the second processing flag is 3 (step S180b). Then, as a result, if the second processing flag is 3 (YES in step S180b), the second big hit game start processing (step S190b) is executed. In the second big hit game start process, a condition device, which is one of the conditions for executing the big hit game, is activated or the time saving function is stopped. Then, after the preparation for starting the big hit game is completed, the second processing flag is updated to “4”.

  On the other hand, if the second processing flag is not 3 (NO in step S180b), main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the second processing flag is 4 (step S200b). Then, as a result, if the second processing flag is 4 (YES in step S200b), the second big hit game processing (step S210b) is executed. In the second jackpot game process, the mode of the jackpot game (the number of rounds, the opening time, the maximum number of winnings, etc.) is set, and the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member 2106 is controlled based on the set jackpot game mode. In addition, when the big hit game ends, the processing of stopping the operation of the condition device is performed, and then the second processing flag is updated to “0”. As a result, the current change is completed, and the second change start process (step S130b) is executed in the next interrupt process.

  On the other hand, if the second processing flag is not 4 (NO in step S200b), main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the second processing flag is 5 (step S220b). Then, as a result, if the second processing flag is 5 (YES in step S220b), a second small hitting game start process (step S230b) for creating an interval period before starting the small hitting game is executed. When the interval period before starting the small hitting game has elapsed, the second processing flag is updated to “6” in the second small hitting game start processing.

  On the other hand, if the second processing flag is not 5 (NO in step S220b), the main control MPU 4100a determines that the second processing flag is 6, and executes the second small hitting game processing (step S240b). In the second small hitting game process, a small hitting game in which the opening / closing member 2106 is opened / closed in a control manner according to the type of the small hitting is performed. When the small hitting game ends, the second processing flag is updated to “0”. As a result, the current change is completed, and the second change start process (step S130b) is executed in the next interrupt process.

  As described above, in the process of step S100b, if the link flag indicating that the game on the second special symbol side should be linked with the game on the first special symbol side is in the off state, At the point in time when any of S130b, S150b, S170b, S190b, S210b, S230b, and S240b is selectively executed based on the state of the second processing flag, the interrupt The second special control process ends.

  Hereinafter, the second variation start process (Step S130b), the second variation pattern setting process (Step S150b), the second variation process (Step S170b), the second big hit game start process (Step S190b), the second big hit game process (Step S190b) Steps S210b), the second small hitting game start process (step S230b), the second small hitting game process (step S240b), and the second interlocking setting process (step S250b) will be described in detail. Each will be described.

[Second fluctuation start processing]
First, the second change start process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 135 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the second change start process according to the present embodiment. The second variation start process is executed when the second process flag is “0” in the above-described second special symbol control process (FIG. 134).

  First, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not there is a lottery process of the second special symbol in a suspended state based on the counter value of the second special reserved number counter as the process of step S301b. When it is determined that there is no lottery process for the second special symbol in the suspended state based on the counter value of the second special reserved number counter (YES in step S301b), the process in the interrupt process is not performed. The second change start process is temporarily ended. That is, in this case, every time the above-described interrupt processing is performed, in the processing of step S301b, it is determined whether or not there is a lottery processing of the second special symbol in a suspended state. Until it is determined that there is a second special symbol lottery process, the progress of the game on the second special symbol side is substantially in a standby state.

  On the other hand, if the main control MPU 4100a determines in the process of step S301b that there is a lottery process of the second special symbol in a suspended state (NO in step S301b), then the main control MPU 4100a proceeds to step S302b. As a process, it is determined whether or not the ST count is 0. The number of STs is the number of times of the lottery process (the number of times the special symbol fluctuates) in which the winning probability of the big hit is a high probability (probable change state), and is set at the end of the big hit game in a second big hit game process (FIG. 139) described later. . In the present embodiment, 70 times are given as the number of STs after the end of all the big hit games. Details of the big hit type will be described later with reference to FIG.

  If the number of STs is not 0 (NO in step S302b), main control MPU 4100a updates the number of STs by 1 as the process of step S303b. On the other hand, if the ST count is 0 (YES in step S302b), the process shifts to step S304b without performing step S303b.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a, as the process of Step S304b, performs a random number group (for example, the second hitting process) related to the lottery process of the second special symbol stored in the second special symbol holding storage area of the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a. The random number group stored in the earliest storage area among the determination random number, the second symbol random number, the second reach random number, and the second variable random number is read from the RAM 4100e. Next, as a process in step S305b, a random number group (second hit random number) related to the second special symbol lottery process stored in each storage area of the second special symbol holding storage area of the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a. , A second symbol random number, a second reach random number, a second variable random number) in a first-in first-out (First-In First-Out) mode.

  More specifically, the second special symbol holding storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and stores random numbers extracted according to the occurrence of a start winning prize in order from the first (earliest) area. Then, if a random number is stored in the n-th (n = 1 to 3) storage area and a winning start occurs, the extracted random number is stored in the (n + 1) -th (n = 1 to 3) storage area, and the first random number is stored. When the start condition of the variable display based on the random numbers stored in the storage areas is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and stored in the N-th (N = 2 to 4) storage areas. The various random numbers are moved to the (N-1) th (N = 2 to 4) storage areas. Thereby, the order in which the fluctuation display control of the second special symbol is suspended is stored so as to be specified, and the suspension of the fluctuation display control is released in order from the earliest suspension (the earliest suspension). become. In the present embodiment, only the first area (digestion area) of the second special symbol holding storage area is valid. That is, the variable display control of the second special symbol according to the present embodiment stores the random number extracted according to the later-generated start winning prize unless the second special symbol corresponding to the previously generated starting prize has changed. It will not be done.

  After that, the main control MPU 4100a counts down the second special hold number counter and performs the lottery process (the second process) based on the read second random number for random determination as the processes of steps S306b and S307b. 2 special symbol lottery).

  Here, in the second special symbol lottery according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 146 (A), when the winning probability state is the normal state, the jackpot is won with a probability of 1/399, and the winning probability state is definitely changed. In the case of a state (high probability state), it is set to win a jackpot with a probability of 1/45. Also, when the winning probability state is the normal state, the small hit is won with a probability of 390/399, and when the winning probability state is the probable change state (high probability state), the small hit is won with a probability of 44/45. Is set.

  Then, when the second special symbol lottery is performed (step S307b), the main control MPU 4100a sets a flag indicating a result of the second special symbol lottery and a winning information command as the process of step S308b. I do. At this time, a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the second special symbol lottery is also determined. Then, thereafter, as the processing of step S309b, the processing ends when the second processing flag is updated to “1” so that the process shifts to the second variation pattern setting processing (step S150b).

  It should be noted that the result of the second special symbol lottery obtained in the second variation start process is the winning information command set in the process of step S308b, and the peripheral control is performed by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. 123. Section 4140.

[Second variation pattern setting process]
Next, the second variation pattern setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 136 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the second variation pattern setting process according to the present embodiment. The second variation pattern setting processing is executed when the second processing flag is “1” in the above-described second special symbol control processing (FIG. 134).

  If the flag indicating that the big hit has been won is set (YES in step S401b), the main control MPU 4100a selects the big hit variation pattern table according to the gaming state (step S402b), and wins the small hit. If the flag indicating that the game has been performed is set (YES in step S403b), the variation pattern table at the time of the small hit according to the game state is selected (step S404b), and the loss is neither the big hit nor the small hit. If it is in the flag state (NO in step S403b), a loss pattern table at the time of loss is selected (step S405b).

  Then, the main control MPU 4100a determines the variation pattern by comparing the selected variation pattern table with the second variation random number read in step S304b in the second variation start process (step S406b), and determines the determined variation pattern. Of the second special symbol displayed on the second special symbol display 1186 is started by setting a variation pattern command for notifying the peripheral control board 4010 of the start of the process (step S407b). Further, the main control MPU 4100a sets the fluctuation time set corresponding to the determined fluctuation pattern in the second fluctuation timer (Step S408b). As a result, the variation control is performed in the second special symbol display 1186 and the liquid crystal display device 1900 for the variation time determined in this way. Then, thereafter, as the process of step S409b, the process ends when the second process flag is updated to "2" so that the process shifts to the second process during variation (step S170b).

  The variation pattern set in the second variation pattern setting process is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. 123 as the variation pattern command set in the process of step S407b. Is done. As a result, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, the result of the big hit lottery (small hit lottery) is obtained based on the fluctuation pattern indicated by the effect command and the information indicated by the winning information command through the control of the peripheral control unit 4140. Is displayed, as shown in FIG.

  That is, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, since the game on the first special symbol side and the game on the second special symbol side proceed simultaneously, the liquid crystal display device 1900 Through the control by the peripheral control unit 4140, a display effect on the first special symbol side (such as a change in decorative symbols) and a display effect on the second special symbol side (such as a change in decorative symbols) appear simultaneously. .

  Note that among the variation pattern tables used in the processes of steps S402b, S404b, and S405b, the variation pattern tables used in the normal game state (normal mode) and the highly accurate time-saving game state (rush preparation mode) include: A variation time (for example, 600 seconds) having a length of 10 times or more than any other variation time that can be selected on the first special symbol side is always selected. On the other hand, in the fluctuation pattern table used in the high-probability non-time saving game state (rush mode), the shortened fluctuation time (for example, 1 second) is always selected. The details of the setting of the fluctuation time will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Processing during second fluctuation]
Next, with reference to FIG. 137, a description will be given of the second changing process (step S170b) executed when the second process flag is “2”. FIG. 137 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the second changing process of the present embodiment.

  The main control MPU 4100a first determines whether the value of the second variation timer set in the process of step S408b in the second variation pattern setting process (step S150b) has become 0, that is, the above-described setting in step S501b. A determination is made as to whether or not the determined fluctuation time has elapsed. As a result, as long as the second fluctuation timer is not 0, that is, as long as it is determined that the set fluctuation time has not elapsed (NO in step S501b), the second fluctuation processing (step S170b) is performed. Each time the process is performed, the second variation timer is decremented by 1 as the process of step S521b.

  As a result of such processing, when it is determined in the processing of step S501b that the second fluctuation timer has reached 0, that is, when it is determined that the set fluctuation time has elapsed (YES in step S501b). ), The main control MPU 4100a displays, on the second special symbol display 1186, a stopped symbol (stop symbol corresponding to the result of the second special symbol lottery) which has been determined as the process of step S502b and step S503b. The display control for terminating the variable display is thereby performed, and the second fixed stop command for instructing the liquid crystal display device 1900 to derive and display the display result of the decorative symbol corresponding to the stop symbol of the second special symbol is issued to the liquid crystal display device 1900. This is set as a command to the peripheral control unit 4140. It should be noted that the second confirmation stop command thus set is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. As a result, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, the effect of the display effect is definitely displayed through the later-described control by the peripheral control unit 4140.

  After performing the process related to the symbol stop in this way, the process is ended when various processes corresponding to the result of the second special symbol lottery are executed.

  When the result of the second special symbol lottery is a big hit (YES in step S504b), the main control MPU 4100a sets the first special symbol side in order to avoid the occurrence of a double hit on the first special symbol side. The above-mentioned interlocking flag of the first special symbol, which indicates that the game is to be interlocked with the game of the second special symbol, is turned on (step S505b). In addition, the probability change flag indicating that the jackpot winning probability of the special symbol lottery is in the high probability state (probability change state) is turned off (step S506b). Then, after that, when the second processing flag is updated to “3” in order to start the big hit game (step S507b), this processing is ended.

  On the other hand, even when the result of the second special symbol lottery is a small hit (NO in step S504b and YES in step S531b), the main control MPU 4100a first overlaps the hit on the first special symbol side. In order to avoid occurrence, the above-mentioned interlock flag of the first special symbol, which indicates that the game of the first special symbol should be linked with the game of the second special symbol, is turned on (step S532b). ). Then, thereafter, when the second processing flag is updated to “5” in order to start the small hitting game (step S533b), this processing is ended.

  By performing such control, the end interval of the big hit game ends and the interlock flag of the first special symbol is turned off (the second big hit game process (FIG. 139) described later). In step S726b), the game on the first special symbol side is stopped in conjunction with the game on the second special symbol side, regardless of the first processing flag, or the current state is maintained.

  On the other hand, when the result of the first special symbol lottery is a loss (NO in step S504b and NO in step S531b), the main control MPU 4100a first turns on the probability change flag provided in the RAM 4100e of the main control board 4100. Is determined (step S511b). The probability change flag is set to the ON state when the jackpot winning probability is shifted from the normal probability (normal state) to the high probability (probability change state). Since the change of the jackpot winning probability is triggered by the occurrence of a jackpot, the probability change flag is set at the end of the jackpot game in a second jackpot game process (FIG. 139) described later.

  Then, when the probability change flag is in the ON state (YES in step S511b), main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the ST count is 0 (step S512b). If the ST count is 0 (YES in step S512b), it is determined that the probable change state has ended, and the probable change flag is set to the off state (step S513b).

  On the other hand, when the probable change flag is in the OFF state (NO in step S511b), main control MPU 4100a shifts to the processing in step S514b. If the number of STs is not 0 even when the probable change flag is on (NO in step S512b), the probable change state continues, so the probable change flag is kept on and the process proceeds to step S514b. .

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the time saving function is in operation as the processing of Step S514b (Step S514b). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the time saving flag provided in RAM 4100e of main control board 4100 is in an ON state. The time-saving flag is set to the ON state when the time-saving function is activated in a time-saving function setting process (step S725b) of a second big hit game process (FIG. 139) described later.

  Then, when the time saving function is operating (YES in step S514b), main control MPU 4100a determines whether to stop the time saving function (step S515b). In the present embodiment, the time saving function is provided together with the certainty changing function when the first big hit A occurs, and operates while the certainty changing function is continued. Therefore, it is determined that the time saving function is stopped when the probability change flag is in the OFF state, and it is determined that the operation of the time reduction function is continued when the probability change flag is in the ON state.

  That is, the main control MPU 4100a stops the time-saving function when the probability change flag is set to the off state in the processing of the above-described step S513b, assuming that the condition for terminating the time-saving gaming state is satisfied (step S516b). After the processing related to the time saving function is performed in this manner, the special symbol is stopped to fluctuate so as to indicate a loss, and it is determined that the special symbol is in the processing stage in which the special symbol has been reserved, and the second processing flag is set to “ "0" (step S517b), and this process ends. As a result, when the next interrupt control is performed, the next variation relating to the second special symbol is performed.

[Second big hit game start process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 138, the second big hit game start process (step S190b) executed when the second process flag is “3” will be described. FIG. 138 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the second big hit game start process of the present embodiment.

  First, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the timer (second big hit start interval timer) for measuring the interval before the start of the big hit game is set as the process of step S601b. As a result, if the second big hit start interval timer has not been set yet (NO in step S601b), the condition device is operated as the processing in step S602b, and the time saving is performed as the processing in steps S603b and S604b. If the function is operating (YES in step S603b), the operation is stopped. That is, after such preparation is completed, the second big hit start interval timer is set as the process of steps S605b and S606b to start the pre-big hit game interval, and the second big hit interval start command is set. This processing is temporarily terminated.

  The second big hit interval start command set in the process of step S606b is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. As a result, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, a display effect during the interval before the start of the big hit game appears through the later-described control by the peripheral control unit 4140 side.

  That is, after the second big hit start interval timer is set in this way, each time an interrupt process is performed, it is determined that the second big hit start interval timer has been set in the process of step S601b ( In step S601b, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the second big hit start interval timer is 0 in the process of the next step S611b, that is, the time set as the interval before the start of the big hit game has elapsed. A determination is made as to whether or not this has been done. In the process of step S611b, the second big hit start interval timer is not 0, that is, as long as it is determined that the time set as the interval before the start of the big hit game has not elapsed (NO in step S611b). ), Every time the second big hit game start process (step S190b) is performed, the process of step S621b decrements the second big hit start interval timer by one.

  Then, as a result of performing such processing, in the processing of step S611b, it is determined that the second big hit start interval timer has become 0, that is, that the time set as the pre-big hit game start interval has elapsed. At this time (YES in step S611b), main control MPU 4100a ends this processing when the second processing flag is updated to “4” in order to execute the big hit game (step S612b).

  The length of the second big hit start interval timer can be set according to the type of the big hit symbol (the type determined by the second symbol random number).

[2nd jackpot game process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 139, the second big hit game process (step S200b) executed when the second process flag is “4” will be described. FIG. 139 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the second big hit game process of the present embodiment.

  First, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the second big hit game execution flag indicating that the control related to the execution of the big hit game is already in progress is a process of step S701b. The second big hit game execution flag is provided in the RAM 4100e of the main control board 4100, is set to an on state in a process of a step S703b described later at the start of the second big hit game, and is turned off in a process of a step S723b described later at the end of the second big hit game. Is set.

  When the second big hit game execution flag is not in the ON state (NO in step S701b), the main control MPU 4100a performs the process of step S702b to start the control related to the execution of the big hit game using the attacker device 2100. The opening mode (number of rounds, opening time of each round, maximum winning number of each round) is set according to the type of jackpot. The details of the opening mode according to the type of big hit will be described later with reference to FIG. 146 (C).

  After the execution mode of the jackpot game is set in this manner, the main control MPU 4100a performs the second jackpot game execution indicating that the control related to the execution of the jackpot game is already in progress as the processing of steps S703b and S704b. When the flag is turned on and the second big hit start command is set, this process is temporarily ended.

  That is, after the second big hit game execution flag is turned on in this way, each time the interrupt processing is performed, it is determined that the control related to the execution of the big hit game is already in progress ( In step S701b, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the set round number has been exhausted, as the process in the next step S711b. In the process of step S711b, as long as it is determined that the set round number has not yet been consumed, that is, it is determined that the control of the execution of the big hit game is in the middle of the process (NO in step S711b). Each time the second big hit game process (step S200b) is performed, the main control MPU 4100a executes control according to the set opening pattern as the process of step S712b. Accordingly, every time the above-described interrupt processing is performed (every 4 ms), the movement (including the interval between rounds) related to the opening and closing of the opening and closing member 2106 is updated (managed) through the processing of step S712b. Eventually, a big hit game in which the attacker device 2100 opens and closes with an opening pattern according to the type of the big hit is realized.

  Then, while such control is being performed, in the process of step S711b, the set round number has been consumed, that is, when it is determined that all the controls related to the execution of the big hit game have been completed. (YES in step S711b), the main control MPU 4100a performs processes (step S721b, step S722b, step S731b, step S741b, and step S742b) for generating a big hit game end interval.

  That is, the main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not the timer for measuring the big hit game end interval (the second big hit end interval timer) has been set (step S721b). Then, as a result, if the second big hit end interval timer has not been set yet (NO in step S721b), in order to start the big hit game end interval, the second big hit end interval is executed as a process in steps S741b and S742b. When the timer is set and the second big hit interval end command is set, this process is temporarily ended.

  Note that the second big hit interval end command set in the process of step S742b is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. 123. As a result, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, a display effect during the end interval of the big hit game appears through the later-described control by the peripheral control unit 4140 side.

  That is, after the second big hit end interval timer is set in this way, each time an interrupt process is performed, it is determined that the second big hit end interval timer has been set in the process of step S721b (step S721b). In step S721b, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the second big hit end interval timer is 0 in the processing of the next step S722b, that is, the time set as the big hit game end interval has elapsed. A determination is made as to whether or not this is the case. In the process of step S722b, the second big hit end interval timer is not 0, that is, as long as it is determined that the time set as the interval before the start of the big hit game has not elapsed (NO in step S722b). Each time the second big hit game process (step S200b) is performed, the main control MPU 4100a subtracts 1 from the second big hit end interval timer as the process of step S731b.

  As a result of performing such processing, when it is determined in the processing of step S722b that the second big hit end interval timer has become 0, that is, that the time set as the big hit game end interval has elapsed. (YES in step S722b), the main control MPU 4100a performs each process (steps S723b to S728b) for ending the big hit game.

  That is, the main control MPU 4100a firstly turns off the second big hit game execution flag indicating that the control related to the execution of the big hit game is already in progress as the process of step S723b. Then, as a process in step S724b, the probability change flag indicating that the special jackpot winning probability of the special symbol lottery is in the high probability state (probable variation state) is turned on, and the number of times of the special symbol lottery to be in the high probability state ( (ST times) is set to 70 times. The probability change flag that has been turned on here is turned off when the ST count has been exhausted (step S513b) or when a big hit has occurred before the digestion (step S506b).

  In the present embodiment, the probability change function is operated for all jackpots. However, when the probability change function is not activated or not depending on the type of the jackpot, a time saving function setting process described later (step S725b) As described above, first, a process of determining whether or not a big hit for activating the probability change function may be executed. Then, in the case of a jackpot to activate the probability change function, the main control MPU 4100a operates the probability change flag to the ON state and sets the number of STs as in the process of step S724b described above. Further, in the case of a big hit in which the probability change function is operated until the next big hit, the main control MPU 4100a only needs to set the probability change flag to the ON state and does not need to set the number of STs.

  Next, as a step S725b, the main control MPU 4100a executes a time saving function setting process for setting whether or not to activate the time saving function according to the type of the big hit and the game state. The time saving function setting process is the same as the time saving function setting process (step S725a) in the first big hit game process (FIG. 131), and is as described above with reference to FIG.

  Then, after the processing related to the probability change function and the time saving function are performed, the main control MPU 4100a sets the first special symbol side in consideration of the possibility that the big hit game is not duplicated on the first special symbol side. The above-mentioned interlock flag indicating that the game is to be interlocked with the game of the second special symbol is turned off (step S726b). Then, thereafter, the operation of the condition device is stopped (step S727b), and the second processing flag is updated to "0" assuming that the second special symbol that has become the current big hit is in the processing stage of being held off (step S727). S728b), this process ends. As a result, when the next interrupt control is performed, the next variation relating to the second special symbol is performed.

  According to such a jackpot game process, the corresponding jackpot 2103 is opened until the round game reaches the maximum number of rounds in the process of step 711b according to the type of the jackpot. The game is repeatedly opened in step S712b), and the player can acquire prize balls according to the type of the big hit.

[Second small hit game start process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 140, the second small hitting game start process (step S230b) executed when the second process flag is “5” will be described. FIG. 140 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the second small hitting game start process according to the present embodiment.

  The main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not the timer (second small hit start interval timer) for counting the interval before the start of the small hit game is set as the process of step S801b. Then, as a result, if the second small hit start interval timer has not been set yet (NO in step S801b), the process in steps S802b and S803b is executed in order to start the interval before the start of the small hit game. When the small hit start interval timer is set and the second small hit interval start command is set, this process is temporarily ended.

  Note that the second small hit interval start command set in the process of step S803b is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. 123. As a result, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, the display effect during the interval before the start of the small hitting game appears through the later-described control by the peripheral control unit 4140 side.

  That is, after the second small hit start interval timer is set, it is determined that the second small hit start interval timer has already been set each time an interrupt process is performed (YES in step S801b). The main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the second small hit start interval timer is 0 in the process of the next step S811b, that is, whether or not the time set as the interval before the start of the small hit game has elapsed. Will do. In the process of step S811b, as long as it is determined that the second small hit start interval timer is not 0, that is, it is determined that the time set as the interval before the start of the small hit game has not elapsed (step S811b). NO), every time the second small hitting game start processing (step S230b) is performed, the second small hitting start interval timer is decremented by one as the processing of step S821b.

  Then, as a result of performing such processing, in the processing of step S811b, it is determined that the second small hitting start interval timer has become 0, that is, that the time set as the pre-start interval of the small hitting game has elapsed. When it is performed (YES in step S811b), the main control MPU 4100a ends this processing when the second processing flag is updated to “6” to execute the small hitting game (step S812b).

[Second small hit game process]
Next, the second small hitting game process (step S240b) executed when the second process flag is “6” will be described with reference to FIG. 141. FIG. 141 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the second small hitting game process of the present embodiment.

  The main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not the second small hitting game execution flag indicating that the control relating to the execution of the small hitting game is already in progress is a process of step S901b. I do. The second small hitting game execution flag is provided in the RAM 4100e of the main control board 4100, is set to an on state in a process of a step S903b described later at the start of the second small hitting game, and is turned off in a process of a step S921b described later at the end. Set to state.

  If the second small hitting game execution flag is not in the on state (NO in step S901b), the main control MPU 4100a executes step S902b to start the control related to the execution of the small hitting game using the attacker device 2100. In the process (1), an opening mode (opening pattern) according to the type of the small hit and a control timer for measuring the time required for executing the control according to the opening pattern are set. It should be noted that there is only one small hit in the present embodiment. The details of the small hit opening mode will be described later with reference to FIG. 146 (D).

  Next, the main control MPU 4100a turns on the second small hitting game execution flag indicating that the control relating to the execution of the small hitting game is already in progress as the processing of step S903b and step S904b. When the second small hit start command is set, this process is temporarily terminated.

  That is, after the second small hitting game execution flag is turned on in this manner, each time an interrupt process is performed, it is determined that the control related to the execution of the small hitting game is already in progress. (YES in step S901b), the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the control timer has reached 0 in the process of the next step S911b, that is, whether or not the timing for ending the control for executing the small hit game has come. Will be determined. In the process of step S911b, as long as it is determined that the control timer is not 0, that is, it is determined that the control of the execution of the small hit game is in the middle (NO in step S911b), the second small hit Each time the game process (step S240b) is performed, the main control MPU 4100a first executes the opening / closing control of the attacker device 2100 according to the set open pattern as the process of step S912b. Accordingly, every time the above-described interrupt processing is performed (every 4 ms), the movement related to the opening and closing of the opening and closing member 2106 is updated (managed) through the processing of step S912b, and the small hit when the attacker device 2100 performs the opening and closing operation is performed. The game will be realized.

  Then, while such control is being performed, in the process of step S911b, if it is determined that the control timer is 0, that is, it is determined that all the controls related to the execution of the small hitting game are completed (step S911b YES), the main control MPU 4100a performs each process (step S921b to step S929b) for terminating the small hitting game.

  First, the main control MPU 4100a turns off the second small hitting game execution flag indicating that the control relating to the execution of the small hitting game is already in progress as the process of step S921b. Next, in view of the possibility that the jackpot game on the first special symbol side is no longer duplicated, the state that the game on the first special symbol side should be linked with the game on the second special symbol side is described. The interlock flag of the first special symbol shown is turned off (step S922b).

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the probable change flag provided in the RAM 4100e of the main control board 4100 is on (step S923b). If the probability change flag is in the ON state (YES in step S923b), it is determined whether or not the ST count is 0 (step S924b). If the ST count is 0 (YES in step S924b), it is determined that the probable change state has ended, and the probable change flag is set to the off state (step S925b).

  On the other hand, when the probable change flag is in the OFF state (NO in step S923b), main control MPU 4100a proceeds to the process in step S926b. If the number of STs is not 0 even when the probable change flag is on (NO in step S924b), the probable change state continues, so the probable change flag is kept on and the process proceeds to step S926b. .

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the time saving function is operating as the process of Step S926b. If the time saving function is in operation (YES in step S926b), it is determined whether or not the time saving function is stopped (step S927b). In the present embodiment, the time saving function is provided together with the certainty changing function when the first big hit A occurs, and operates while the certainty changing function is continued. Therefore, it is determined that the time saving function is stopped when the probability change flag is in the OFF state, and it is determined that the operation of the time reduction function is continued when the probability change flag is in the ON state.

  In other words, the main control MPU 4100a determines that the condition for terminating the time-saving gaming state has been satisfied when the probable change flag is set to the off state in the processing of step S925b, and stops the time-saving function (step S928b). Then, after the processes related to the probability change function and the time saving function are performed, the second process flag is updated to “0”, assuming that the special symbol from which the small hit has been derived is in the process stage of being held off (step S929b). , And this process ends. As a result, when the next interrupt control is performed, the next variation relating to the second special symbol is performed.

[Second interlock setting process]
Next, the second interlock setting process (step S250b) of the above-described second special symbol control process (FIG. 134) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 142 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the second linkage setting process according to the present embodiment.

  In the second interlocking setting process, when a big hit is derived in the game on the first special symbol side, the game on the second special symbol side is controlled to interlock with the game on the first special symbol side.

  The main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not the second special symbol is changing (Step S1001b).

  When the second special symbol is changing (YES in step S1001b), the main control MPU 4100a has already determined in the second special symbol lottery (step S307b) of the second change start process (FIG. 135). The stop symbol is set to a predetermined loss symbol (step S1002b).

  Next, the main control MPU 4100a performs display control for terminating the variable display by displaying the set loss symbol on the second special symbol display 1186 (step S1003b). Also, a second fixed stop command for instructing the liquid crystal display device 1900 to derive and display the display result of the decorative symbol according to the stop symbol of the second special symbol is set as a command to the peripheral control unit 4140 (step S1004b). . The processing in steps S1003b and S1004b is the same as steps S502b and S503b performed when the fluctuation time has elapsed in the above-described second fluctuation processing (FIG. 137).

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a performs the same processing as the processing in steps S511b to S517b executed when the second special symbol is lost in the above-described second fluctuation processing (FIG. 137) by the processing in steps S1005b to S1011b. After the execution, the process ends.

  On the other hand, when the second special symbol is not changing (NO in step S1001b), the main control MPU 4100a continues the current state of the second special symbol (that is, the state where the second special symbol does not change). (Step S1021b), and the process ends.

  As described above, in the second interlocking setting process, when the big hit is derived by the fluctuation of the first special symbol (when the second interlocking flag is on), the changing second special symbol is forcibly lost. To stop. Further, the second special symbol that is not fluctuating is brought into a standby state in which the fluctuation is not started until the second interlocking flag is turned off. Thereby, it is avoided that the hits between the game on the second special symbol side and the game on the first special symbol side overlap.

[Normal symbol side processing]
Subsequently, the normal control process (step S15) of the above-described timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) will be described with reference to FIGS. In the ordinary control process, ordinary symbol fluctuation control (ordinary symbol lottery) based on the passage of the game ball of the ordinary symbol gate 2301 is executed. The winning assist control for facilitating the winning of the game ball to the special winning opening 2101b by operating the electric accessory 2111 is executed.

[Normal control processing]
FIG. 143 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the normal control process according to the present embodiment.

  First, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines whether or not the gate sensor 2302 for detecting the passage of the game ball to the general-purpose gate 2301 is in an on state (step S2001). When the gate sensor 2302 detects the passage of the game ball to the ordinary figure gate 2301 and is in the ON state (YES in step S2001), the main control MPU 4100a outputs the ordinary random number of the ordinary symbol to the random number counter. (Step S2010). The details of the gate passage processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main control MPU 4100a performs one of five process processes (a normal symbol normal process, a normal symbol variation time determination process, a normal symbol variation process, a normal symbol stop process, and a normal electric accessory opening process) according to the ordinary symbol process flag. And the normal control process is terminated.

  First, in the normal symbol normal processing of step S2100, the main control MPU 4100a reads out the ordinary random number stored in the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a, and displays the display pattern when the variation control of the ordinary symbol is stopped based on the read ordinary random number. Perform lottery processing and the like.

  Next, in the ordinary symbol variation time determination process of step S2200, the main control MPU 4100a performs a lottery process on the variation mode (variation time) of the ordinary symbol displayed on the ordinary symbol display 1189 based on the ordinary symbol variation random number. Execute.

  Next, in the ordinary symbol variation process of step S2300, the main control MPU 4100a executes a process of waiting until the variation display of the ordinary symbol on the ordinary symbol display 1189 is stopped.

  Next, in the normal symbol stop process of step S2400, the main control MPU 4100a normally uses the normal symbol variation control stop mode determined based on the result of the lottery process on the display mode when the normal symbol variation control is stopped. A process is executed to stop the variable display of the normal symbol as displayed on the symbol display 1189.

  Next, in the normal electric accessory opening process of step S2500, the main control MPU 4100a turns the movable when the result of the lottery process regarding the mode when the fluctuation control of the normal symbol is in a mode suggesting “per-genuine hit”. A piece (ordinary electric accessory) 2111 is operated to perform a process of controlling a game ball to be awarded to the special winning port 2101b of the first starting port 2101.

  The normal symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the normal symbol normal process (step S2100) should be performed in the process of initializing the data stored in the various registers and the main control built-in RAM 4100e.

[Gate passage processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 144, the gate passage processing (step S2010) of the above-described ordinary control processing (FIG. 143) will be described. FIG. 144 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the gate passage processing according to the present embodiment.

  The main control MPU 4100a first obtains the counter value of the normal hold number counter from the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a, and based on the counter value, the hold number of the normal symbol is a value less than the maximum value “4”. It is determined whether or not (Step S2011).

  When the number of ordinary symbols retained is less than the maximum value (YES in step S2011), the main control MPU 4100a sets the variable display control of ordinary symbols to a new suspended state in step S2012. To S2014. First, as a process of step S2012, the ordinary suspension number counter is counted up (addition of 1). Next, as a process of step S2013, an ordinary random number and an ordinary figure variable random number are acquired from a random number counter. Then, as a process of step S2014, each of the random numbers thus obtained is stored in a normal symbol holding storage area corresponding to the counter value of the normal holding number counter in the storage area of the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a. Thereafter, the present gate passage processing ends.

  On the other hand, when the number of reserved ordinary symbols is the maximum value (NO in step S2011), the main control MPU 4100a does not newly suspend the variable display control of the ordinary symbols. In other words, the gate passage processing ends without executing the processing of steps S2012 to S2014.

[Normal symbol normal processing]
Next, the normal symbol normal processing (step S2100) of the above-described normal control processing (FIG. 143) will be described with reference to FIG. The normal symbol normal process is executed when the normal symbol process flag indicates that this process should be performed in the above-described normal control process. FIG. 145 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal symbol normal processing of the present embodiment.

  First, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not there is a variable display control of the ordinary symbols in the suspended state based on the counter value of the ordinary suspended number counter (step S2101). As a result, when it is determined that there is the variable display control of the ordinary symbol in the suspended state (YES in step S2101), the normal symbol stored in the ordinary symbol holding storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a is displayed. The random number stored in the earliest storage area out of the random numbers related to the display mode (for example, ordinary random number, ordinary figure variable random number) is read from the RAM (step S2102). Then, a countdown for decrementing the ordinary reserve number counter by 1 is performed (step S2103), and the display mode when the variable display of the ordinary symbols stored in each storage area of the ordinary reservation storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a is stopped. A random number (ordinary random number, ordinary figure variable random number) is shifted in a first-in first-out (First-In First-Out) mode (step S2104).

  Specifically, the main control MPU 4100a stores the random numbers extracted in accordance with the passage of the game ball to the general symbol gate 2301 in order from the first (earliest) area of the ordinary symbol holding storage area having four storage areas. I do. Then, when a random number is stored in the n-th (n = 1 to 3) storage area and the game ball passes through the general-purpose gate 2301, the extracted random number is stored in the (n + 1) -th (n = 1 to 3) storage area. When the variable display start condition based on the random number stored in the first storage area is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out, and the N-th (N = 2 to 4) storage area is stored. Are moved to the (N-1) th (N = 2 to 4) th storage area. As a result, the order in which the fluctuation display control of the ordinary symbols is suspended is stored so as to be identifiable, and the suspension of the fluctuation display control is released in order from the earliest suspension (the earliest suspension).

  Next, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the current gaming state is the time saving gaming state (step S2105). If the current game state is the time saving game state (YES in step S2105), a time reduction time ordinary figure hit determination table (not shown) is selected (step S2106), and the current game state is the non-time saving game state. If NO (NO in step S2105), a non-working time general-purpose hit table (not shown) is selected (step S2107). Thereafter, the ordinary figure hit determination table selected in the processing of step S2106 or S2107 is compared with the ordinary random number read in the processing of step S2102 (step S2108).

  It should be noted that the normal map hit determination table is stored in the ROM 4100d of the main control MPU 4100a, and is used when the game state is time reduction, and is used when the game state is non-time reduction. And a non-working time normal time hit table. Then, in the time-saving-time general-purpose hit determination table referred to for comparison with the ordinary random numbers, all of the 255 types of normal random numbers match the general-purpose hit determination value indicating that the winning has been achieved. Ordinary random numbers are associated with each other so as not to coincide with a deviation determination value in a general figure indicating a deviation. In this way, in the time-saving gaming state, when a game ball passes through the general-purpose gate 2301, the ball is always won per general-purpose figure, the movable piece (ordinary electric accessory) 2111 is operated, and the first starting port 2101 is operated. Is controlled so that a game ball can be won in the special winning port 2101b.

  In addition, in the non-working time general time stamp determination table which is referred to for comparison with the normal random number, it is found that all 255 kinds of normal random numbers coincide with the general time stamp determination value indicating that the normal time has been won. However, ordinary random numbers are associated with each other so as to coincide with the out-of-posture misalignment determination value, which indicates that the out-of-usage figure is out of place. In this way, in the non-time saving game state, even if a game ball passes through the general-purpose gate 2301, the ball is not won per general-purpose figure, so that the movable piece (ordinary electric accessory) 2111 is opened. There is no control so that a game ball can be won in the special winning port 2101b of the first starting port 2101. In addition, as described above, it may be possible to obtain a normal symbol even in the non-time saving game state. In this case, the winning probability (for example, 50%) is lower than that in the time reduction game state, and the lottery result of the normal symbol is determined. When a hit occurs, the movable piece 2111 of the special winning opening 2101b is opened for a shorter time than the time-saving gaming state, for example, 0.1 second to allow a game ball to enter the special winning opening 2101b and then closed. In this way, it is possible to disable the winning of the game ball to the special winning opening 2101b.

  The main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the result of the above-described step S2108 is a normal drawing (step S2109). Then, in the case of a normal symbol hit (YES in step S2109), after setting a general symbol hit flag indicating that the variation of the normal symbol has won the general symbol hit (step S2110), the normal symbol is set. A symbol per ordinary symbol is determined as a mode (variable symbol stop symbol) when the fluctuation control is stopped (step S2112).

  On the other hand, if the result of the processing in step S2108 described above is a loss (NO in step S2109), the main control MPU 4100a sets the general symbol as a mode when the variation control of the ordinary symbol is stopped (ordinary symbol stopped symbol). A lost symbol is determined (step S2111).

  After the processing in step S2112 or step S2111 is completed, the main control MPU 4100a updates the above-mentioned ordinary symbol process flag so that the process shifts to the ordinary symbol variation time determination processing (step S2200) (step S2113), and ends this processing. .

  In the present embodiment, the winning probability of a normal symbol in the non-time saving game state in which the time saving function does not operate is set to 0%, and the winning probability of the ordinary symbol in the time saving game state in which the time saving function operates is set to 100%. However, it is not limited to this. In the time-saving game state, the frequency of winning the game ball (prize probability) into the special winning port 2101b of the first starting port 2101 is always higher than the frequency of winning the game ball (prize probability) into the winning port 2101a. In this state, it is only necessary that the game specification of the ordinary symbol (the winning probability per ordinary figure, the ordinary figure fluctuating time, the opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory) can guide the player to make a right strike instead of a left strike. More specifically, in the time-saving game state, a general-purpose change function that increases the probability of winning per general-purpose figure, a general-purpose change shortening function that shortens the general-time change time, and an opening operation using a normal electric accessory, compared to the non-time-saving game state. At least one of the normal power release extension functions for extending (winning assistance control) is provided. As a result, in the time-saving game state, the prize assist reinforcement control that further enhances the prize assist control set in the non-time-saving game state is executed.

[Game specifications of special design]
FIG. 146 is an example of various tables showing game specifications of the first special symbol and the second special symbol of the present embodiment.

  First, the winning probability in the first special symbol lottery of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 146 (A), in the first special symbol lottery of the present embodiment, when the hit winning probability is in a normal state (low probability state), a big hit is won with a probability of 1/399. In addition, in the case of a probable change state (high-probability state) in which the hit winning probability is set higher than the normal state, a big hit is won with a probability of 1/45. In the first special symbol lottery according to the present embodiment, only a big hit in which the condition device operates and a small hit in which the condition device does not operate occur in the first special symbol lottery. In the hit determination process (step S307a) of the above-described first variation start process (FIG. 127), a big hit determination is made with a winning probability of 1/399 or 1/45 depending on the probability state at the time of executing the lottery.

  Next, the winning probability in the second special symbol lottery of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 146 (B), the hit in the second special symbol lottery of the present embodiment includes a big hit and a small hit. The jackpot winning probability in the second special symbol lottery is the same as the jackpot winning probability in the first special symbol lottery described above. The small hit winning probability in the second special symbol lottery is such that when the big hit winning probability is in the normal state (low probability state), the small hit is won with a probability of 390/399, and the big hit winning probability is in a probable state (high probability state). , A small hit is won with a probability of 44/45. The small hit winning probability is a constant probability regardless of the gaming state, and does not change between the normal state and the probable change state unlike the big hit winning probability. In the hit determination process (step S307b) of the above-described second variation start process (FIG. 135), a big hit determination is made with a winning probability of 1/399 or 1/45 according to the probability state at the time of executing the lottery, and 390/399. Alternatively, the small hit determination is performed with a winning probability of 44/45.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the small hit winning probability in the second special symbol lottery is set high. In particular, in the second special symbol lottery in the probable change state, if a big hit is not won, a setting is made so as to always win a small hit. The small hit does not necessarily have to be won if the big hit is not won. The small hit here may be such that if the big hit is not won in the second special symbol lottery in the probability change state, the probability of winning is much higher than the probability of being lost.

  Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 146 (C), the types of big hits according to the present embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 146 (C), the jackpot according to the present embodiment includes a first jackpot A and a first jackpot B that can be generated in the first special symbol lottery and a second jackpot that can be generated in the second special symbol lottery. A total of four types of jackpots, A and a second jackpot B, are provided.

  The first big hit A occurs at a probability of 75% when the result of the first special symbol lottery is a big hit, and the change display of the first special symbol is stopped at the symbol A at this time. In addition, the first big hit B occurs with a probability of 25% when the result of the first special symbol lottery is a big hit, and at this time, the change display of the first special symbol is stopped at the symbol B.

  The second big hit A is generated with a probability of 50% when the result of the second special symbol lottery is a big hit, and the change display of the second special symbol is stopped at the symbol A at this time. The second big hit B occurs with a probability of 50% when the result of the second special symbol lottery is a big hit. At this time, the change display of the second special symbol is stopped at the symbol B.

  With these four types of jackpots, the game state after the end of the jackpot game is shifted to the probable change state with a probability of 100%, and the probable change state is continued until the number of times the special symbol changes after the jackpot game is executed 70 times. It is provided so that a function can be given. In addition, the first big hit A can provide a time-saving function of performing a prize assist control for operating a movable piece (ordinary electric accessory) 2111 to assist a prize of a game ball to a special winning port 2101b of the first starting port 2101. Is provided.

  The opening mode of the special winning opening 2103 is set according to the type of the big hit, and the first big hit A, the first big hit B, the second big hit A, and the second big hit B are opened patterns A, B, and C, respectively. And D are set. Here, the number of prize balls that can be obtained by the player is changed according to the open pattern, thereby increasing the interest of the big hit game.

  The opening patterns A to C are set so that the opening time of the special winning opening 2103 is long and the player can acquire a sufficient prize ball. For example, the opening pattern A and the opening pattern B are big hit games in which round games are performed four times, and the opening time and the maximum number of winnings in each round are set so that the player can acquire 500 balls as prize balls. The opening pattern C is a jackpot game in which a round game is performed 16 times, and the opening time and the maximum winning number of each round are set so that the player can acquire 2000 balls as prize balls.

  On the other hand, the opening pattern D is set so that the opening time of the special winning opening 2103 is short, and the player cannot acquire sufficient prize balls. For example, the opening pattern D is a big hit game in which a round game is performed 16 times, and is set such that a player cannot substantially acquire a prize ball by repeating high-speed opening in which one opening time is short.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 146 (D), the small hit type of the present embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 146 (D), the small hit in the present embodiment is provided with a second small hit C that can be generated in the second special symbol lottery. The second small hit C occurs with a probability of 100% when the result of the second special symbol lottery is a small hit, and at this time, the change display of the second special symbol is stopped at the symbol C. In addition, an opening pattern E is set in the opening mode of the special winning opening 2103 in the small hitting game. The opening pattern E is provided so that one opening time is short and a prize ball can be acquired by accidental winning. Here, the accidental prize is not a prize obtained by the player hitting a game ball into the game area with the intention of winning the big prize mouth 2013 but a game area where the big prize mouth 2013 is provided. It means a winning that can be obtained by the gaming ball being hit down by a chance at the time of opening the big winning opening 2013 by accident. In the second small hit C, the number of rounds and the opening time of the big winning opening 2013 is such that if the player hits the game ball with the right, about 1-2 balls can be expected to be accidentally received. Is set. When about 1 to 2 balls are won in the big winning opening 2013 by the second small hit C, about 15 to 30 prize balls can be obtained.

  In the high-probability non-time saving game state (rush mode) according to the present embodiment, the second small hit C is provided so as to frequently occur, and the rush mode is achieved by the player continuously hitting the game ball with the right hit. It is possible to promote an accidental prize based on the second small hit C generated during the rush mode, and the number of prize balls obtainable during the rush mode is the majority of the total number of prize balls obtainable during the rush mode Will occupy. In the present embodiment, when the second small hit C (maximum 30 balls) of the number of STs (70 times) occurs during the rush mode, the prize ball (maximum 2100 balls) which is equal to or larger than the above-mentioned prize ball (2000 balls) due to the big hit ) Can be expected, so that a small hit where almost no prize ball can be obtained does not lower the interest of the game. Rather, since the small hit game that occurs a plurality of times is more interested in the game than the single big hit game, the interest in the series of games during the rush mode can be enhanced.

  Further, with reference to FIG. 146 (E), the fluctuation time of the special symbol of the present embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 146 (E), the fluctuation time of the special symbol of the present embodiment differs depending on the game mode (game state). The variation time of the first special symbol is set to 30 seconds to 60 seconds according to the presence or absence of the reach effect when the game mode is the normal mode and the rush preparation mode, and is set to 1 second when the game mode is the rush mode. Is set. Further, the variation time of the second special symbol is set to 600 seconds when the game mode is the normal mode and the rush preparation mode, and is set to 1 second when the game mode is the rush mode.

  Here, the normal mode is a game mode that prompts the player to win a game ball (ie, “left-hit”) to the regular winning opening 2101a of the first starting port 2101, and has a special symbol lottery jackpot winning probability. Indicates a normal state (low probability state) and a normal game state where the time saving function is not provided. The rush preparation mode is a game mode in which the player is required to win a game ball in the special winning port 2101b of the first starting port 2101 (that is, "right-hit"), and the jackpot winning probability of the special symbol lottery is set. Indicates a highly probable state (high probability state) and a high-probability time-saving gaming state to which the time-saving function is provided. The rush mode is a game mode that prompts the player to win a game ball to the second starting port 2102 (that is, “right-hand”), in which the jackpot winning probability of the special symbol lottery is in a stable state (high probability). State) and a highly accurate non-time saving game state in which the time saving function is not provided. The high-precision time-saving gaming state in the rush preparation mode is a gaming state that can be shifted to when the first big hit A occurs.

  As described above, in the special symbol game provided to the player, the above-described specifications (hit probability, hit type, fluctuation time, etc.) change according to the game state. Then, the transition from the normal game state to the advantageous game state which is advantageous to the player is triggered by the occurrence of a big hit, and the transition from the advantageous game state to the normal game state is performed for the given ST times (here, 70 times). Triggered by the completion of the symbol lottery (fluctuation).

[Transition of game state]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 147 to FIG. 149, a description will be given of transition of the gaming state and control of simultaneous fluctuation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in each gaming state. FIG. 147 is a diagram illustrating transition of a game state (game mode) according to the present embodiment.

(Normal mode)
First, the game mode at the start of the game is a normal game state (normal mode). In the normal gaming state, the game ball is fired at the game area 1100 on the left side of the center role item 2500 (so-called “left-handed”), so that the game ball can be awarded to the regular winning opening 2101a of the first starting port 2101. Is the best play method for the player.

  Here, the second starting port 2102 of the present embodiment can easily win a prize simply by a game ball fired (so-called “right-hit”) aimed at the game area 1100 on the right side of the center role item 2500 following the downflow path. It is provided in. In the second special symbol lottery based on winning in the second starting port 2102, the winning probability of a small hit in which a prize ball can be acquired is high (390/399 in a normal state, 44/45 in a probable change state). In this case, the player strives right from the start of the game to try to win a game ball in the second starting port 2102. Therefore, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 146 (E) described above, the fluctuation of the second special symbol in the game state (normal mode, rush preparation mode) in which it is not recommended that a game ball is won to the second starting port 2102. The time is set to a long-term variation (600 seconds). As a result, it takes a long time until the variable display of the second special symbol is started in both modes until the stop display is performed (the lottery result is found), so that the player can be prevented from right-handing. .

  In addition, since the second starting port 2102 of the present embodiment is always open and easy to win, the second special opening in the gaming state where the winning is not recommended in order to suppress the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2102. Although the fluctuation time of the symbol is set to a long time, it is not limited to this. A state conversion member capable of converting the second starting port 2102 into an easy winning state and a difficult winning state is provided, and a prize is won in a gaming state (normal mode, rush preparation mode) in which it is not recommended that a game ball enter the second starting port 2102. You may make it set to a difficult state. In the present embodiment, in order to avoid complication of the configuration and processing related to the control of the state conversion member, and to provide a game that is easy for the player to obtain, the variation time is changed for the player by changing the variation time according to the game state. You are guided to play in the best way.

  Therefore, in the normal gaming state, the first special symbol lottery based on winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2101 (always winning port 2101a) is mainly executed. If the result of the first special symbol lottery is lost, the normal game state is continued, while if the result of the first special symbol lottery is the first big hit A, the high probability time-saving game state (rush preparation mode, (First advantageous game state). When the result of the first special symbol lottery is the first big hit B, the game shifts to the high-probability non-time saving game state (rush mode, second advantageous game state).

  As described above, in the normal gaming state, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set long in order to suppress the occurrence of the second special symbol lottery. For this reason, the possibility that the result of the second special symbol lottery is found in the normal gaming state (the occurrence of the game state transition triggered by the second big hit of the second special symbol) is extremely low.

(Lash preparation mode)
Next, a case where the gaming state has shifted from the normal gaming state (normal mode) to the high-probability time-saving gaming state (rush preparation mode) will be described. At the time of this state transition, the occurrence of the first big hit A gives the player an advantage which is advantageous to the player, such as obtaining a winning ball and providing a certainty changing function and a time reduction function.

  In the high-probability time-short game state (rush preparation mode), a special prize port 2101b of the first starting port 2101 is fired by firing a game ball (so-called “right-hit”) aiming at the right game area 1100 of the center role item 2500. Is the best game method for the player.

  Here, when the right-hitting game ball passes through the general-purpose gate 2301 disposed in the game area 1100 on the right side of the center role 2500, the time-saving function is activated, so that the normal symbol lottery is derived by the ordinary symbol lottery. (Probability per 100% in time-saving state). As a result, the movable piece (ordinary electric accessory) 2111 is operated, and the winning of the game ball to the special winning port 2101b of the first starting port 2101 becomes easy. Also, as described above, in the time-saving gaming state, the frequency of winning game balls into the special winning port 2101b of the first starting port 2101 (prize probability) is always higher than the frequency of winning game balls into the winning port 2101a (prize probability). Since it is set high, the player makes a right strike to aim at the special winning opening 2101b.

  Therefore, in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the first special symbol lottery based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2101 (special winning port 2101b) is mainly executed. Then, when the result of the special symbol lottery is a loss for 70 consecutive times, the game shifts to a normal game state (normal mode). Also, if the result of the first big hit A is derived before the special symbol lottery is executed 70 times, the ST number is reset to 70 times and the main game state (rush preparation mode, first advantageous game state). To continue. If the result of the first big hit B is derived before the special symbol lottery is executed 70 times, the game shifts to the high-probability non-time saving game state (rush mode, second advantageous game state).

  As described above, in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set to be long in order to suppress the occurrence of the second special symbol lottery. Therefore, the possibility that the result of the second special symbol lottery is determined in the high-probability time-saving gaming state (the occurrence of the game state transition triggered by the second big hit of the second special symbol) is extremely low.

(Rush mode)
Next, a case will be described in which the gaming state has shifted from the normal gaming state (normal mode) or the high-probability time-saving gaming state (rush preparation mode) to the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state (rush mode). In this state transition, the occurrence of the first big hit B gives the player a privilege that is advantageous to the player, that is, the winning of the prize ball and the provision of the probability change function.

  In the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state (rush mode), a game ball is shot at the second starting port 2102 by firing a game ball (so-called “right-hit”) aiming at the game area 1100 on the right side of the center role item 2500. Playing is the best game method for the player.

  Here, the second starting port 2102 of this embodiment is provided downstream of the gaming area 1100 on the right side of the center role 2500. Therefore, the right-hitting game ball reaches the second starting port 2102 after flowing down the movable area of the movable piece 2111 of the special winning gate 2101b and the special winning port 2101b, but reaches the second starting port 2102. Even after passing through 2301, there is no occurrence of a per-drawing (that is, an easy winning state of the special winning opening 2101b by the operation of the movable piece 2111). Therefore, a game ball hit right in the high-probability non-time saving game state (rush mode) almost wins the second starting port 2102.

  Therefore, in the high-probability non-time saving game state, the second special symbol lottery based on winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2102 is mainly executed. The execution of the first special symbol lottery is limited to the first special symbol lottery held in the gaming state before the transition when the gaming state transitions. Then, if the result of the special symbol lottery in the main gaming state is not a big hit for 70 consecutive times, the game shifts to the normal gaming state (normal mode). In addition, if any of the jackpot results is derived before the special symbol lottery is executed 70 times, the ST count is reset to 70 times and the main game state (rush mode, second advantageous game state) is set. continue.

  In the second special symbol lottery in the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state, if a big hit is not derived with a probability of 1/45, a small hit is always derived. Then, in the small hitting game generated at this time, the player can acquire a small number of game balls (for example, 30 balls) as prize balls, which is less than the number of game balls obtainable in the big hit game. Therefore, in the main game state, the player can acquire the prize ball by the small hit game every time the second special symbol lottery is executed until the next big hit. And, in this game state, a maximum of 70 small hit games can be continuously generated. That is, a series of games of the second special symbol until the next big hit occurs becomes a privilege game in which a prize ball can be acquired.

  It should be noted that both the first special symbol and the second special symbol in the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state are set to a short time (1 second). In this game state, since the execution of the second special symbol lottery is recommended, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is set to a long time (600 seconds) so that it takes time for the result of the first special symbol lottery to be determined. It is also possible to do. However, in the present embodiment, the period during which the probability change function is provided is controlled by the number of times the special symbol is executed (the number of STs), and the number of STs is counted when the special symbol starts to change. For this reason, when the variation time of the first special symbol to which the probability change function is to be applied is long, a case where the first special symbol is provided with the probability variation function but the second special symbol is not provided with the probability variation function is provided. Can occur. Therefore, in the present embodiment, by setting the fluctuation time of the first special symbol to be the same short time as the second special symbol, the probability state of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in the simultaneous fluctuation state are different. Occurrence (obfuscation of termination of probable change state) is prevented. In addition, as a modified example, when the end of the provision period of the probability change function is controlled until the occurrence of the next big hit, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol in the present game state may be set to a long time. In the present embodiment, when one special symbol lottery derives a big hit, it is possible to forcibly stop the other special symbol lottery that is simultaneously changing, so that the end of the probable change state as described above is unclear. No transformation occurs.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in the high-probability non-time-saving game state (rush mode), a prize ball can be acquired in a series of small hit games of the second special symbol even if the big hit is not derived, and the total number of prize balls Is larger than the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the jackpot game that occurs in the same mode. Therefore, the most advantageous game state for the player is not the high-probability time-saving game state (rush preparation mode, first advantageous game state) but the high-probability non-time-saving game state (rush mode, second advantageous game state).

  The high-probability non-time-saving game state (rush mode) is a game state that can be generated when the first big hit B is derived in the first special symbol lottery. Therefore, the player first sets the normal game state (normal mode) or the high In a certain time reduction game state (rush preparation mode), a game is performed with the aim of winning a game ball to the first starting port 2101. Then, when the gaming state shifts to the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state (rush mode) triggered by the occurrence of the first big hit B, next, the player performs a game aimed at winning the gaming ball to the second starting port 2102. Do.

[Control timing chart for each game state]
As described above, in the present embodiment, the game on the first special symbol side (first special symbol) and the game on the second special symbol side (second special symbol) can be simultaneously changed. However, a big hit game or a small hit game using the attacker device 2100 cannot be generated in both games in duplicate. Therefore, referring to FIG. 148 and FIG. 149, the timing of the simultaneous variation control in each game state will be described.

(Simultaneous fluctuation control timing chart)
FIG. 148 is an example of a timing chart illustrating the simultaneous variation control of the present embodiment. FIG. 148 (A) is an example of the interlock stop control of the second interlock setting process (FIG. 142) in the normal mode and the rush preparation mode, and FIG. 148 (B) is the first interlock setting process (FIG. 133) in the rush mode. 9) is an example of the interlocking stop control of FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 148 (A), in the normal mode (normal game state) and the rush preparation mode (high-precision time-short game state), if a game ball wins in the second starting port 2102, the second special symbol changes. The time (second fluctuation time) is set to 600 seconds, and the long-term fluctuation is started. When a game ball wins in the first starting port 2101 (always winning port 2101a or special winning port 2101b), the variation time (first variation time) of the first special symbol is set to 30 seconds to 60 seconds, and the first special symbol is changed to 30 seconds to 60 seconds. The change of one special symbol is executed.

  In the game on the first special symbol side, when a big hit is derived, the change is stopped at the first big hit stop symbol (step S502a), and the game on the second special symbol side is linked to the first special symbol side. The link flag (second link flag) to be set is set to the ON state (step S505a). Then, the first big hit game is executed (steps S190a, S200a).

  Then, in the game on the second special symbol side, in response to the second interlock flag being turned on, a second interlock setting process (step S250b, FIG. 142) is executed, and the changing second special symbol is displayed. A stop is forcibly displayed with a stop symbol (step S1003b).

  Here, when the first big hit game in which the attacker device 2100 is used on the first special symbol side is executed, the second interlocking flag indicates a big hit game or a small hit in which the attacker device 2100 is similarly used on the second special symbol side. This flag is provided to avoid the execution of the game, but is also necessary to prepare for entering the rush mode.

  Specifically, when the first big hit B occurs in the normal mode (normal game state) and the rush preparation mode (high accuracy short time game state), the game state after the end of the first big hit game is changed to the rush mode (high game mode). (Non-time saving game state). In the rush mode after the transition, the game on the second special symbol side based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2102 becomes mainstream. At this time, if the change of the second special symbol started before the shift is continued, the game on the second special symbol side waits for the change to be stopped and enters a standby state. Therefore, the second interlocking flag is a flag necessary for starting the game in the rush mode without delay.

  As shown in FIG. 148 (B), immediately after shifting to the rush mode (high-precision non-time saving gaming state), the change of the first special symbol held in the gaming state before shifting is executed. The fluctuation time of the first special symbol at this time is set to a short time (1 second). And in the rush mode, the game of the second special symbol based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2102 is the mainstream. The second starting port 2102 is a winning port where even a beginner of the game can win a prize by right-handing, and the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set to 1 second, so that the fluctuation of the second special symbol frequently occurs. The second special symbol that does not derive a big hit derives a small hit.

  Therefore, in the game on the second special symbol side, the fluctuation of the second special symbol and the small hitting game (the second small hitting game) are alternately repeated until the next big hit occurs. Then, each time the change of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed (step S502b), an interlock flag (first interlock flag) for interlocking the game on the first special symbol with the second special symbol is set to an on state. (Step S532b). Then, the second small hitting game is executed (steps S230b, S240b), and when the second small hitting game ends, the first interlocking flag is returned to the off state (step S922b).

  In the game on the first special symbol side, the first interlock setting process (step S250a, FIG. 133) is executed in response to the first interlock flag being turned on. At this time, the first special symbol that has not started to change is set in a standby state so as not to start changing (step S1021a), and starts changing when the first interlocking flag is turned off (step S130a). In addition, the first special symbol that is changing is forcibly stopped and displayed with a stop symbol that has come off (step S1003a).

  As described above, in the normal mode and the rush preparation mode in which the game on the first special symbol side is the mainstream, the execution frequency of the second interlocking setting process (FIG. 142) is high, and the rush mode in which the game on the second special symbol side is the mainstream. , The execution frequency of the first interlock setting process (FIG. 133) is high. In the present embodiment, there is a concern that a hit game may occur between a game on the first special symbol side and a game on the second special symbol side, and in order to avoid this, a game on one side is avoided. When a win is obtained, the game on the other side is controlled by the interlocking setting process at that time.

(Game mode transition timing chart)
FIG. 149 is an example of a timing chart showing an ideal game mode transition in the present embodiment.

  When the player starts the game, first, the normal mode starts. In the normal mode, it is best for the player to aim left at the regular winning opening 2101a of the first starting opening 2101 by left-handing. Here, the firing force of the game ball at the start of the hit is too strong and the ball is right-handed, and when the game ball wins the second starting port 2102, the fluctuation time (second fluctuation time) of the second special symbol is long. Long-term fluctuations are performed.

  Thereafter, when the player adjusts the firing force and makes a left-handed hit, and when the game ball wins the regular winning port 2101a of the first starting port 2101, the first special symbol is changed. The variation time (first variation time) at this time is 30 seconds to 60 seconds depending on the variation pattern selected. In the game on the first special symbol side, a first special symbol lottery in which a jackpot is won with a probability of 1/399 is executed. When the first big hit A is won, the fluctuation is stopped and displayed in the big hit symbol A, and the first big hit game is executed. At this time, since the second interlocking flag is set to the ON state, the fluctuation of the second special symbol in the long-time fluctuation state is forcibly stopped and displayed with the undesignated symbol. Then, at the end of the first big hit game, the second interlock flag is returned to the off state, and the game mode shifts from the normal mode to the rush preparation mode.

  In the rush preparation mode, it is best for the player to strike right and aim at the special winning port 2101b of the first starting port 2101. Further, in the rush preparation mode, a certainty changing function of 70 times of ST and a time saving function of performing a prize assist control for facilitating a prize in the special prize port 2101b are provided.

  When the player makes a right strike and a game ball wins in the special winning port 2101b of the first starting port 2101, the fluctuation of the first special symbol is executed. The variation time (first variation time) at this time is 30 seconds to 60 seconds depending on the variation pattern selected. In the game on the first special symbol side, a first special symbol lottery in which a jackpot is won with a probability of 1/45 is executed. Then, at the start of the change of the first special symbol, the ST count is decremented and updated by one. When the first big hit B is won when the ST count is 68, the fluctuation is stopped and displayed in the big hit symbol B, and the first big hit game is executed. At this time, the second interlocking flag is set to the ON state, but the state is maintained because the fluctuation of the second special symbol is not executed. Then, the second interlock flag is returned to the off state with the end of the first big hit game, and the game mode shifts from the rush preparation mode to the rush mode.

  In the rush mode, it is best for the player to strike right and aim at the second starting port 2102. Further, in the rush mode, the time saving function is not provided, and only the certainty changing function for 70 times of ST is provided. Here, the ST count at which the count value at the end of the rush preparation mode is 68 is counted again from the count value of 70.

  Here, the player continues to make a right strike. The game ball hit right does not win the special winning opening 2101b because the time saving function does not operate, and wins the second starting opening 2102 further below. The winning of the second starting port 2102 is easy even for a game beginner, so that the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2102 occurs frequently. At this time, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol (second fluctuation time) is set to 1 second, so that the fluctuation of the second special symbol is frequently executed.

  In the game on the second special symbol side, a second special symbol lottery is executed in which a big hit is won with a probability of 1/45, and if the big hit is not won, a small hit is won. Then, at the start of the change of the second special symbol, the ST count is decremented and updated by one. When a small hit is achieved as a result of the second special symbol lottery, the change is stopped and displayed in the small hit symbol C, and the second small hit game is executed. At this time, while the second small hitting game is being executed, the first interlocking flag is set to the ON state.

  Immediately after the start of the rush mode, the first special symbol based on the winning of the game ball to the special winning opening 2101b generated in the rush preparation mode before the shift is in a holding state, and the fluctuation of the first special symbol is changed. Will be executed.

  In the game on the first special symbol side, a first special symbol lottery in which a jackpot is won with a probability of 1/45 is executed. At this time, the fluctuation time (first fluctuation time) of the first special symbol is set to 1 second. In the rush mode, in the game on the second special symbol side, small hit games frequently occur, so that the first interlocking flag is also frequently set to the ON state. Therefore, if the first special symbol is fluctuating when the second special symbol is fluctuatingly stopped, the first special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed with a missing symbol. Then, the first interlock flag is returned to the off state at the end of the second small hitting game, so that the next change of the first special symbol is started. Then, the ST count is also decremented by one at the start of the change of the first special symbol.

  As described above, immediately after the start of the rush mode, the fluctuation of the first special symbol and the fluctuation of the second special symbol are efficiently executed in a short time. Then, the change of the second special symbol and the second small hitting game are alternately and repeatedly executed until the count value of the ST count becomes 0 or the next big hit is won.

  In the rush mode of the present embodiment, when a big hit is not won in the second special symbol lottery, a small hit is won, so the second small hit game frequently occurs. The number of prize balls that can be acquired during the rush mode is 2,100 when the number of small hits in the number of STs (70) is 30 when the number of prize balls in one second small hit game is 30. This is larger than the maximum number of prize balls (2000 balls) that can be obtained in the jackpot game of the present embodiment. Therefore, a series of second small hit games in the rush mode can be privilege games equivalent to the big hit games. Further, even during the rush mode, there is a possibility that a jackpot game will be achieved with a probability of 1/45, so the rush mode is the most advantageous (should be aimed) game mode for the player.

  Note that it is highly likely that the ST number in the rush mode will be more beneficial to the player if the ST number is consumed by the change number of the second special symbol. Therefore, it is preferable that the first special symbol in the hold state is not carried over to the rush mode. Therefore, when the transition to the rush mode is determined, that is, when it is determined that the first big hit B is won in the game mode before the transition, the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2101 is suppressed. Control may be performed. For example, the operation of the movable piece 2111 may be controlled so as to stop the operation of the time saving function for assisting winning in the special winning opening 2101b or decrease the winning assist function. In addition, some notification effects may be performed on the liquid crystal display device 1900.

[Control on peripheral control board side]
Next, with reference to FIG. 150 and FIG. 151, processing executed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a mounted on the peripheral control board 4010 will be described.

[Sub main processing]
FIG. 150 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the sub-main processing according to the present embodiment. The sub-main process is a process executed when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on.

  When the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the peripheral control MPU 4140a first performs an initial setting process (step S3001). In this initial setting processing, processing for clearing the RAM built in the peripheral control MPU 4140a mounted on the peripheral control board 4010 is performed. Note that interrupts are prohibited during this initial setting process, and interrupts are permitted after the initial setting process. Then, when the initialization processing is completed, a loop processing for monitoring whether or not the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set to “1” is started (step S3002).

  Here, the peripheral control MPU 4140a generates an interrupt every time 2 ms elapses, and executes a 2 ms steady process. In the 2 ms steady processing, a process of counting up the 16 ms elapsed monitoring counter (adding 1 to the 16 ms elapsed monitoring counter) is executed, and when the value of the 16 ms elapsed monitoring counter becomes 8, that is, when 16 ms has elapsed, the 16 ms elapsed monitoring counter has elapsed. A process is performed to set the flag T and reset (set to 0) the 16 ms progress monitoring counter. As described above, the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set (set) to “1” every 16 ms in the 2 ms steady processing, and is normally set (reset) to “0”.

  When the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set to “1” (YES in step S3002), the peripheral control MPU 4140a resets the 16 ms elapsed flag T to “0” (step S3003), and then performs the 16 ms steady processing. Execute (step S3004). In the 16 ms regular process, a process of controlling the liquid crystal display device 1900, lamps / LEDs, speakers 130, 222, 262, and the like based on a command received from the main control board 4100 is executed.

  After finishing the 16 ms regular process, the peripheral control MPU 4140a returns to the process of step S3002 again, and repeats the processes of steps S3003 to S3004 described above every time the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set, that is, every 16 ms.

  On the other hand, if the 16 ms elapsed flag T is not set to “1” (the 16 ms elapsed flag T is “0”) (NO in step S3002), the peripheral control MPU 4140a determines whether the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set. Perform loop processing.

[16ms steady processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 151, the 16 ms regular process (step S3004) executed every 16 ms in the above-described sub main process (FIG. 150) will be described. FIG. 151 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the 16-ms regular processing according to the present embodiment.

  The peripheral control MPU 4140a first executes a command analysis process for analyzing a command received from the main control board 4100 (Step S3101). Next, an effect control process for controlling the effect content to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 based on the control command (the received variation pattern command or the like) analyzed in the above-described command analysis process is executed (step S3102).

  Further, the peripheral control MPU 4140a executes a sound control process for controlling sounds output from the speakers 130, 222, 262 (step S3103). Next, a lamp control process for controlling the effect of the lamp / LED provided in the pachinko machine 1 is executed (step S3104). In addition, information for executing an effect, such as a process of transmitting a lamp / LED lighting signal to the lamp drive substrate 3041 and a process of transmitting a drive signal to a drive motor for operating various effect units to the motor drive substrate 3045, is output. An information output process is performed (step S3105). Thereafter, a random number update process for updating random numbers used for various settings in the effect control process of step S3102 is executed (step S3106), and the 16-ms regular process ends.

  It should be noted that the 16 ms steady-state processing normally ends within 16 ms. Even if it takes 16 ms or more from the start to the end of the 16 ms steady processing, the peripheral control MPU 4140a executes the 16 ms steady processing from the beginning (the processing of step S3101) when 16 ms elapses from the start of the processing. Never. That is, when 16 ms elapses during execution of the 16 ms steady processing, only the 16 ms elapse flag is set in the sub main processing (step S3002), and after the 16 ms steady processing ends, the 16 ms elapse flag is set in the sub main processing. When it is determined (YES in step S3002), the next 16 ms steady processing is started.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the random number updating process (step S3106) is executed in the 16 ms regular process to update various random numbers, but the timing (timing) for updating various random numbers is not limited to this. is not. For example, various random numbers may be updated in one or both of the loop processing and the 16 ms regular processing in the above-described sub-main processing (FIG. 150).

(Effect of this embodiment)
According to this embodiment, the first special symbol based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2101 (always winning port 2101a, special winning port 2101b) and the first special symbol based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2102. The player has a control structure capable of simultaneously changing two special symbols, and the player can aim at a prize area (always a prize port 2101a, a special prize port 2101b, a second start port 2102) or a game ball in accordance with a game state. A plurality of game states are provided so that (right strike (second game state) and left strike (first game state)) are different. In the present embodiment, by providing the function display unit 1180 with the gaming state indicator 1183 including an LED capable of clearly notifying the timing of performing “right strike” (second gaming state) to the player, Also, it is possible to smoothly switch the way of hitting (hitting operation) in accordance with the transition of the game state, without mistakenly hitting "left hitting" and "right hitting".

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 transmits a control signal for controlling the game state display 1183 to the peripheral control unit 4140 of the peripheral control board 4010, so that the player can “right-hand” on the liquid crystal display device 1900. You may be notified. Usually, the liquid crystal display device 1900 is arranged in front view (beyond the front line of sight) of the player. Therefore, when “right hit” is notified on the liquid crystal display device 1900, the player can switch to an appropriate hitting method (driving operation) without shifting his / her line of sight to the front left end (function display unit 1180). It becomes possible.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, the plurality of gaming states include a normal gaming state (normal mode), a highly accurate time-saving gaming state (rush preparation mode), and a highly accurate non-time saving gaming state (rush mode). Then, in the rush mode, every time a second special symbol lottery is performed based on winning of a game ball to the second starting port 2102, which is easy for even a game beginner to win, a chance to obtain a prize ball (small hit game or Jackpot game) is given. In the rush mode, the number of game balls that can be acquired by the player tends to be higher in the ratio of the number of game balls obtainable in the small hit game than in the big hit game. Accordingly, since a series of small hit games in the rush mode can be expected to provide more game balls than the big hit game, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game related to the small hit game.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, the rush mode (second advantageous game state) of the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state is a high-accuracy time-saving gaming state (rush-preparation state) that activates a time-saving function that is generally advantageous to the player. Mode, the first advantageous gaming state). When the current game mode is the rush mode (high-precision non-time saving game state), even if the result of the first special symbol lottery is a big hit (first big hit A) that activates the time saving function, the time saving function is not performed. Control to continue the rush mode without operating. A game that overturns the existing concept that the time saving function is activated (given) to the player is more advantageous for the player can be provided by the small hit game of the present embodiment, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  In addition, according to the present embodiment, the first special symbol based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2101 (always winning port 2101a, special winning port 2101b) and the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2102. In the case where the second special symbol based on simultaneous fluctuations is obtained, when one of the winnings (big hits, small hits) is derived, the other one being changed is forcibly stopped and displayed with a missing symbol. This avoids overlapping between the game on the first special symbol side and the game on the second special symbol side, and before and after the transition when transitioning to another game state triggered by the big hit And the other variation can be prevented from being executed.

(2nd Embodiment)
As described above, the pachinko machine 1 of the present invention has a first special symbol based on winning of a game ball to the first starting port 2101 (always winning port 2101a, special winning port 2101b) and a game ball to the second starting port 2102. Has a control structure capable of simultaneously changing the second special symbol based on the winning. In such simultaneous variable control, a specific game (small hit game, big hit game) is prevented from occurring repeatedly between the game on the first special symbol side and the game on the second special symbol side. Control is required. In the first embodiment described above, when one of the special symbols stops changing with a stop symbol indicating the specified result (small hit, big hit), if the other special symbol is changing, the stopped symbol is replaced with a missing symbol. By controlling such that the other special symbol does not fluctuate during the specific game, a control structure capable of simultaneously fluctuating is formed.

  In the second embodiment, various control patterns of a simultaneously variable control structure will be described with reference to FIGS. 152 to 186.

[Game board]
FIG. 152 is a front view of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 according to the second embodiment of the present invention. Members having the same functions as those of the game board 4 of the first embodiment (see FIG. 114) are denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof is omitted. Here, a characteristic configuration of the game board 4 of the second embodiment will be described.

  In the gaming area on the right side of the center role 2500 of the second embodiment, a general-purpose gate 2301, a second starting port 2102, a special winning port 2101b of the first starting port 2101, and a large winning port 2103 are arranged in order from the upstream. ing.

  In this embodiment, the game ball that has flowed down the right passage 2545 first reaches the general-purpose gate 2301. Then, when a game ball passes through the normal figure gate 2301, a normal symbol lottery is executed. In addition, a second starting port 2102 is provided below the general-purpose gate 2301. The second starting port is provided so as to be able to receive game balls that have passed through the gate 2301 and game balls that have not passed. When a game ball is received in the second starting port 2102, a second special symbol lottery is executed if a predetermined special starting condition is satisfied.

  A special winning port 2101b of the first starting port 2101 is provided directly below the second starting port 2102. The special winning opening 2101b is provided with a pair of movable members (ordinary electric accessory) 2111 which opens in an inverted "C" shape at the upper portion and converts the gaming ball into a state in which it can be easily received (an easily accepted state). The pair of movable members 2111 normally maintain a closed state (a disadvantageous state for the player) with an interval of about the diameter of the game ball. The special winning port 2101b is provided with the second starting port 2102 above, so that the game ball cannot be received when the movable member 2111 is in the closed state. The movable member 2111 is normally changed from the closed state to the easy-to-accept state when the symbol lottery is won, whereby the acceptance of the game ball into the special winning opening 2101b is allowed. When a game ball is received in the special winning port 2101b of the first starting port 2101, the first special symbol lottery is executed if a predetermined special starting condition is satisfied.

  In addition, below the special winning port 2101b of the first starting port 2101, the hit of the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery serves as an opening operation trigger, and during operation, game balls flowing down the right passage 2545 can be received. An attacker device 2100 is provided. The attacker device 2100 of the present embodiment is a so-called combia tacker device that opens the special winning opening 2103 by opening and closing two opening and closing members (a first opening and closing member 2106a and a second opening and closing member 2106b) that slide in the front-rear direction. Details of the attacker device 2100 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Further, the function display unit 1180 of the present embodiment is disposed at the lower left portion of the front surface of the front component 1110 and outside the outer rail 1111. In the function display unit 1180, in the first embodiment, the game state display 1183 is provided with an LED capable of clearly notifying the timing of performing “right strike” (second game state). In the present embodiment, the game state display is provided. A right-handed state indicator 1192 is provided separately from the device 1183. Details of the function display unit 1180 of this embodiment will be described later with reference to FIG. 153 (B).

  In the present embodiment, a 7-segment display 1920 is provided in the upper right portion of the center role 2500 and in the upper right portion of the liquid crystal display device 1900. The display of the 7-segment display 1920 is controlled by the peripheral control MPU 4140a mounted on the peripheral control board 4010. In the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the 7-segment display 1920 according to the game state. Details of the 7-segment display 1920 will be described later with reference to FIG. 153 (C).

  As described above, the game board 4 of the present embodiment and the game board 4 of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 114) are different from each other in the configuration as described above, but their playability (recommended game mode transition). The driving operation recommended in the game mode) is the same.

  Next, the configurations of the attacker device 2100, the function display unit 1180, and the 7-segment display 1920 of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

[Attacker device]
FIG. 153 (A) is a simplified structural diagram of an attacker device 2100 provided on the game board 4 of the second embodiment.

  The attacker device 2100 includes a special winning opening 2103, a first opening / closing member 2106a and a second opening / closing member 2106b operable between a closed state and an open state, and an attacker driving mechanism 2121 (FIG. 118) for opening and closing the opening / closing members of the second opening / closing member. Reference). The attacker device 2100 of this embodiment is characterized in that one large winning opening 2103 is provided with two opening / closing members (a first opening / closing member 2106a and a second opening / closing member 2106b).

  The first opening / closing member 2106a and the second opening / closing member 2106b normally maintain a closed state that closes the special winning opening 2103 so that game balls cannot be received in the special winning opening 2103. It is configured as a part of a guide flow path 2110 for guiding a game ball flowing down the right game area to a game area below the center role 2500.

  Then, when a win occurs in the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery, the drive control of the attacker driving mechanism 2121 is performed after the variable display related to the lottery ends, and the first opening / closing member 2106a and the second opening / closing are performed. The sliding operation of the member 2106b in the front-back direction is performed. The opening and closing operations of the first opening and closing member 2106a and the second opening and closing member 2106b are controlled at the same timing.

  Here, the first opening / closing member 2106a and the second opening / closing member 2106b are arranged side by side at an interval on the upstream side and the downstream side of the guide flow path 2110. That is, the special winning opening 2103 has two openings that can receive game balls when the opening state is established. Note that the special winning opening 2103 is configured such that the game balls are merged internally regardless of which opening the game balls are received, and the reception of the game balls is detected by one count sensor 2122a.

  As described above, the attacker device 2100 of the present embodiment can open the large winning opening 2103 by opening the first opening / closing member 2106a on the upstream side and the second opening / closing member 2106b on the downstream side to open the large winning opening 2103. There is provided a combat tacker structure that allows a plurality of game balls that roll from the upstream to the downstream in the guide flow path 2110 by opening each time in the large winning opening 2103.

[Function display unit]
FIG. 153 (B) is an enlarged front view of a function display unit 1180 provided on the game board 4 of the second embodiment. The function display unit 1180 is controlled by the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100.

  The function display unit 1180 of the present embodiment is provided with a right-handed state indicator 1192 including two LEDs for indicating that it is time to perform “right-handed” above the display unit 1181. Below the right strike state indicator 1192, four LEDs for displaying the number of repetitions (the number of rounds) of the opening and closing pattern of the special winning opening 2103 when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is "hit". A first special symbol storage display 1184 comprising a round display 1190 comprising a plurality of LEDs and a plurality of LEDs disposed below the round display 1190 for displaying the number of reserves for accepting game balls in the first starting port 2101. The lottery result (first special lottery result) of the first special symbol arranged on the right side of the first special symbol memory display 1184 and selected by receiving game balls into the first starting port 2101 is set as the first special symbol. A first special symbol display 1185 composed of eight LED groups for displaying is provided. In addition, below the first special symbol display 1185, a second special symbol storage display 1187 made up of two LEDs for displaying the number of reserves relating to the acceptance of game balls to the second starting port 2102, A second special symbol drawing result (second special lottery result) arranged on the left side of the special symbol memory display 1187 and drawn by receiving game balls into the second starting port 2102 is displayed as a second special symbol. A second special symbol display 1186 comprising eight LED groups is provided.

  Also, below the display section 1181, a game state indicator 1183 made up of two LEDs for displaying the game state, and a normal symbol made up of two LEDs for displaying the number of reserves related to passing through the general-purpose gate 2301. A storage display 1188 and a normal symbol display 1189 composed of two LEDs for displaying as a normal symbol a normal lottery result drawn by passing a game ball through the general symbol gate 2301 are provided side by side. I have.

  The right-handed state indicator 1192 of this embodiment turns on the LED when it is time to perform “right-handed” (second game state), and notifies the player of “right-handed”. Note that the LED is turned off when it is time to perform “left hit” (first game state).

  In the present embodiment, if it is detected that a game ball has passed to the general-purpose gate 2301 due to “right-handed” at the timing of “left-handed”, a signal that warns the player is sent to the main control board. 4100 to the peripheral control board 4010. Then, the peripheral control unit 4140 of the peripheral control board 4010 displays a message warning that the liquid crystal display device 1900 should return to the left-hand mode, and emits an alarm sound for several seconds (for example, 10 seconds). After that, if "right strike" is detected, penalty control for imposing a predetermined penalty disadvantageous to the player is performed.

[7-segment display]
FIG. 153 (C) is an enlarged front view of a 7-segment display 1920 provided on the game board 4 of the second embodiment. The 7-segment display 1920 is controlled by the peripheral control unit 4140 of the peripheral control board 4010.

  The 7-segment display 1920 displays a change display (lottery process) of the first special symbol and the second special symbol and information about the number of holdings. On the 7-segment display 1920, a first special symbol display section 1921 composed of 7-segment LEDs for displaying a variable display (lottery result) of the first special symbol, and a display section for displaying the number of reserved first special symbols. A first special symbol storage display unit 1922 composed of two LEDs, a fourth symbol display unit 1923 composed of one LED for displaying a fourth symbol relating to the variable display of the first special symbol, and a variation of the second special symbol. A second special symbol display unit 1924 composed of 7-segment LEDs for displaying a display (lottery result), and a second special symbol storage display unit 1925 composed of two LEDs for displaying the number of reserved second special symbols. And a fourth symbol display section 1926 comprising one LED for displaying a fourth symbol relating to the variable display of the second special symbol.

  The 7-segment LED constituting the first special symbol display unit 1921 and the second special symbol display unit 1924 indicates that the variable display is being performed by repeating the lighting and extinguishing (ie, blinking) of each segment in order, and according to the result, a predetermined value is displayed. The variation result (lottery result) is displayed by lighting the segment. During the standby, the same segment as when the lottery result is out is lit.

  The two LEDs constituting the first special symbol storage display unit 1922 are turned off when the number of reservations is “0”, the upper LED is turned on when the number of reservations is “1”, the lower LED is turned off, When the hold number is “2”, both LEDs light up, when the hold number is “3”, the upper LED blinks, the lower LED lights up, and when the hold number is “4”, both LEDs turn on. Flashes.

  The two LEDs constituting the second special symbol storage display unit 1925 are turned off when the number of reservations is “0”, the upper LED is turned on when the number of reservations is “1”, the lower LED is turned off, When the hold number is “2”, both LEDs are turned on. In the present embodiment, it is possible to store “1” second special symbols on hold.

  One LED constituting the fourth symbol display units 1923 and 1926 can emit red and green light instead of monochromatic light, and repeatedly turns on and off in red during the fluctuation display, and turns green when the fluctuation result is out of order. Lights up, and lights up in red when the fluctuation result is a hit (big hit, small hit).

  When the gaming state is the normal gaming state (normal mode) or the high-precision time-saving gaming state (rush preparation mode), the variable display of the first special symbol is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, and the variable display of the second special symbol. Is displayed on the 7-segment display 1920. Further, when the gaming state is a high-precision non-time saving gaming state (rush mode), the variable display of the first special symbol is displayed on the 7-segment display 1920, and the variable display of the second special symbol is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. Is done.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the display device that displays the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is switched according to the game state. The transition of the gaming state is triggered by a jackpot in the lottery result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, or by the end of the assigned ST count. When the big hit is triggered, the special symbols to be displayed by the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the 7-segment display 1920 are switched after the big hit game ends. When the end of the ST count is used as an opportunity, when the final variation of the ST ends and the probable change flag is set to OFF (step S513a in FIG. 129 and step S513b in FIG. 137), the liquid crystal display devices 1900 and 1900 The seg display 1920 switches a special symbol to be displayed.

[Game specifications of special design]
Subsequently, FIG. 154 is an example of various tables showing game specifications of the first special symbol and the second special symbol of the second embodiment. Here, specifications different from the game specifications (FIG. 146) in the first embodiment will be described.

  First, as shown in FIG. 154 (A) and FIG. 154 (B), in this embodiment, the jackpot winning probability in the probable change state is 1/51 for both the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery. The small hit winning probability is always 1/3.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 154 (C), there are four types of big hits and there is no change, but the presence or absence of the time saving function is different depending on the gaming state in which each has been won. In the present embodiment, the time saving function is provided for the big hit other than the big hit B of the first special symbol. Therefore, the only way to enter the rush mode is to use the big hit B of the first special symbol. Further, as shown in the above-described time-saving function setting process (FIG. 132), the time-saving function is not provided to the big hit that occurs in the rush mode.

  As shown in FIG. 154 (D), in this embodiment, the number of small hits increases. In the small hit according to the present embodiment, a second small hit D is provided in addition to the second small hit C that can be generated in the second special symbol lottery. The second small hit C and the second small hit D are different in the mode of opening the large winning opening 2103 in the small hit game. The opening pattern E has a short opening time (for example, 1.8 seconds) and is opened only once, whereas the opening pattern F has a shorter opening time (for example, 0.9 seconds). ) Opened twice. When the result of the second special symbol lottery is a small hit, the second small hit C or the second small hit D occurs with a probability of 50%.

  Note that, between the open pattern E and the open pattern F, the open pattern F can be expected to win the large winning opening 2103. As described above, the attacker device 2100 of the present embodiment is provided with the special winning opening 2103 which is open at two places, upstream and downstream, of the guiding flow path 2110 through which the game balls flow, and can receive the game balls. Even if the opening time is short, the opening pattern F that is opened twice has a higher expectation of winning a game ball.

  As shown in FIG. 154 (E), in the present embodiment, when the game mode is the normal mode or the rush preparation mode, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol differs according to the fluctuation result. The fluctuation time when the result of the second special symbol lottery is a hit is a shortened fluctuation of 5 seconds to 90 seconds, and the fluctuation time when the result is a loss is a long time fluctuation of 600 seconds. When the game mode is the rush mode, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is a shortened fluctuation having a width of 1 second to 30 seconds.

[Transition of game state]
Subsequently, FIG. 155 is a diagram illustrating transition of a game state (game mode) according to the second embodiment. Here, a description will be given of specifications different from the transition of the gaming state (FIG. 147) in the first embodiment described above.

  In the above-described first embodiment, the rush preparation mode can be shifted when the first big hit A (FIG. 146) occurs, but in the present embodiment, the first big hit A, the second big hit A and the second big hit A in the normal mode. The transition can be made in response to the occurrence of two big hits B (FIG. 154). The transition from the rush preparation mode to another game mode is due to the transition to the normal mode due to the exhaustion of the change in the number of STs, or to the rush mode due to the occurrence of the first big hit B. Further, the transition from the rush preparation mode to another game mode (normal mode) depends on the change in ST times. In the rush mode, no matter which big hit occurs, the mode does not shift.

  In the present embodiment, when the result of the second special symbol lottery in the normal mode and the rush preparation mode derives a hit (small hit, big hit), the variation time is reduced by one second. Originally, the game mode for prompting a prize of a game ball to the second starting port 2102 is the rush mode, but in this case, it is highly likely that the prize to the second starting port 2102 is aimed at in the normal mode and the rush preparation mode. Therefore, when the result of the second special symbol lottery is deviated, a long time variation (600 seconds) is set, or even if the game ball is launched toward the attacker device 2100 after the small hit result is determined, the small value is obtained. The opening timing is set so as not to be in time for opening of the special winning opening 2103 in the winning game, or it is difficult to guess the opening pattern by providing a plurality of types of opening modes. Suppress the execution efficiency of special symbol lottery.

  In the present embodiment, the winning in the special winning port 2101b of the first starting port 2101, that is, the game in the rush preparation mode in which “right-hand” is recommended is diversified. In the first embodiment, even if a game ball is won in the second starting opening 2102 by "right-handing", the variation of the second special symbol is a long time, so that the interest can be substantially found only in the variation of the first special symbol. Did not. However, in the present embodiment, the variation of the second special symbol in the rush preparation mode is short in deriving the hit result, and the short-term variation occurs with a probability of 1/3 or more. Then, if a big hit is obtained in the second special symbol lottery, a new ST count is given and the time saving function is continued. For this reason, the variation in the second special symbol can be found interesting, and the game property in the rush preparation mode is improved.

[Control pattern]
Next, referring to FIG. 156, the first special symbol based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2101 (always winning port 2101a, special winning port 2101b) and the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2102. An outline of a control pattern in a control structure capable of simultaneously changing a second special symbol based on the control pattern will be described. FIG. 156 is a diagram illustrating an outline of a control pattern of the simultaneous fluctuation control structure. Hereinafter, an outline of the four control patterns will be described with reference to FIGS. 156 (A) to 156 (D).

  First, FIG. 156 (A) is a timing chart showing a basic control pattern. As described in the first embodiment, the basic control pattern is such that when one special symbol is a hit result, the other special symbol being changed is forcibly replaced with a loss result and the change is stopped. .

  For example, as shown in FIG. 156 (A), when the change of the second special symbol stops at the small hit stop symbol, the changing first special symbol changes the determined big hit stop symbol to the predetermined off stop symbol. Replace and stop fluctuating with the off stop symbol.

  Describing specifically according to the control processing of the first embodiment, in the second change processing (FIG. 137) relating to the second special symbol, the time of change of the second special symbol times out, and the second special symbol changes in the small hit stop symbol. Stops, the interlock flag of the first special symbol is set to ON (YES in step S501b → step S502b → step S503b → NO in step S504b → YES in step S531b → S532b). Thus, in the first special symbol control process (FIG. 126) relating to the first special symbol, the first interlocking setting process is executed regardless of the progress of the change of the first special symbol (YES in step S100a → Step S250a).

  Then, in the first interlocking setting process (FIG. 133), the fluctuating first special symbol is stopped and displayed with a predetermined lost symbol (YES in step S1001a → step S1002a → step S1003a). Here, the process of determining whether or not the first special symbol is a hit (hit determination process) is a step of the first variation start process (FIG. 127) executed when the first special symbol starts to vary. The process is executed in S307a, and the stop symbol of the first special symbol is determined together with the start of the change. Therefore, in the first interlocking setting process (FIG. 133), the determined stopped symbol (here, the big hit symbol) is replaced with a predetermined lost symbol.

  As described above, in the basic control pattern of the above-described first embodiment, the link flag for linking the game on the other special symbol side to the one special symbol side at the timing when one of the special symbols for deriving the hit stops fluctuating is turned on. Set to state. For this reason, although the other special symbol generated during the change of the special symbol is forcibly released by the interlocking stop control, the existence of the interlocking stop control cannot be determined at the start of the change. (Lottery processing) had to be executed.

  In the second embodiment, as another control of the basic control pattern of the first embodiment, an interlocking flag is set to an on state at a timing when a special symbol for deriving a hit starts to change, and the other special symbol is set to an interlocking flag when the change starts. An example will be described in which if the flag is in the ON state, it is set so as not to perform the hit determination process (without lottery) and stop to fluctuate with a lost symbol.

  The details of the control processing of the basic control pattern in the second embodiment will be described later with reference to FIGS. 157 to 166.

  Next, FIG. 156 (B) is a timing chart showing a priority control pattern. The priority control pattern is a pattern in which results obtained by both special symbols are compared, and a special symbol which derives a result advantageous to the player is preferentially executed, and the other special symbol is fluctuated and stopped at a missing symbol.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 156 (B), when the fluctuation for deriving the big hit is performed in the second special symbol and the fluctuation for deriving the big hit is generated in the first special symbol, both lotteries are performed. As a result of comparing the results, the first special symbol that derives a big hit that is advantageous to the player stops changing at the big hit symbol. Then, in the second special symbol, the determined small hit stop symbol is replaced with a predetermined loss stop symbol, and the second special symbol is fluctuated and stopped at the loss stop symbol.

  In this way, in the priority control pattern, a special symbol that is prioritized among special symbols that simultaneously fluctuate according to a lottery result derived by the special symbol is determined, that is, a special symbol that derives a result more advantageous to the player is prioritized. Can be performed. In the basic control pattern of the above-described first embodiment, even if the special symbol is a big hit in the hit determination at the start of the change, if the other special symbol that is the small hit first stops changing, it is forcibly lost. Although it was set, such a special symbol that would be a big hit would not be unwillingly missed. Therefore, the priority control pattern can maintain the original gaming ability of the gaming machine more than the basic control pattern.

  The details of the priority control pattern control processing in the second embodiment will be described later with reference to FIGS. 167 to 175.

  Next, FIG. 156 (C) is a timing chart showing an interruption control pattern. The interruption control pattern is to interrupt the other special symbol while the hit game based on the hit result derived from the one special symbol is performed, and to resume the fluctuation of the remaining time after the end of the hit game. It is.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 156 (C), when the fluctuation for deriving the small hit is executed in the second special symbol and the fluctuation for deriving the big hit is executed in the first special symbol, the second special symbol is changed to the small hit. When the fluctuation stops at the symbol, the first special symbol suspends the temporary fluctuation. Then, the small hit game corresponding to the small hit result of the second special symbol is executed. During this time, the first special symbol stops changing. When the small hit game ends, the first special symbol resumes the suspended fluctuation.

  In this way, in the interruption control pattern, the generated first special symbol and the second special symbol can all be changed and executed as a result based on the obtained random numbers. In the basic control pattern and the priority control pattern described above, one of the special symbols that fluctuates at the same time is forcibly set to be off regardless of the obtained random number. In the interrupt control pattern, the result of the special symbol acquired by the player ( The hit judgment result based on the random number is not overturned. Therefore, the interruption control pattern can maintain the original gaming characteristics of the gaming machine more than the above-described priority control pattern. In addition, the effect of the fluctuation at the time of resumption can make the first special symbol and the second special symbol seem to be related to the hit game, so that the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  The details of the control processing of the interruption control pattern in the second embodiment will be described later with reference to FIGS. 176 to 181.

  Next, FIG. 156 (D) is a timing chart showing a reset control pattern. The reset control pattern is for resetting the remaining fluctuation time when restarting the interrupted special symbol based on the above-described interrupt control pattern.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 156 (D), when the fluctuation for deriving the small hit is executed in the second special symbol and the fluctuation for deriving the big hit is executed in the first special symbol, the second special symbol is changed to the small hit. When the fluctuation stops at the symbol, the first special symbol suspends the temporary fluctuation. Then, the small hit game corresponding to the small hit result of the second special symbol is executed. During this time, the first special symbol stops changing. Up to this point, the control is the same as the above-described lottery control pattern. In the reset control pattern, when the small hitting game is completed and the first special symbol resumes the suspended fluctuation, the fluctuation is restarted after setting a new fluctuation time after the resumption.

  As described above, in the reset control pattern, the degree of freedom in the effect in the fluctuation at the time of resumption increases more than in the above-described interruption control pattern, so that the interest of the game can be further enhanced. In addition, a recommended game can be provided by setting the fluctuation time at the time of restart according to the game situation.

  The details of the control processing of the reset control pattern in the second embodiment will be described later with reference to FIGS.

<Basic control pattern>
Subsequently, a characteristic control process in the basic control pattern of the second embodiment will be described. Hereinafter, different control processes will be described based on the control structure in the basic control pattern of the first embodiment described above.

  In the basic control pattern of the second embodiment, the forced off flag of the other special symbol is set to the ON state at the timing when the special symbol for deriving a hit starts to fluctuate. If it is in the ON state, it is characterized by a control structure in which it does not perform a hit determination process (without lottery) and stops changing with a lost symbol.

[First fluctuation start processing]
FIG. 157 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the first change start process in the basic control pattern according to the second embodiment. Note that processes common to the first variation start process (FIG. 127) of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof is omitted.

  After executing the process of step S306a, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines whether or not the first special symbol forced off flag for setting the first special symbol to non-lottery non-selection is on. (Step S311a). If the forced off flag of the first special symbol is not in the ON state (NO in step S311a), the processing of steps S307a and S308a for performing the lottery of the first special symbol and setting the lottery result information is executed.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the flag indicating the result of the first special symbol lottery set in the processing of the above-described step S308a indicates a hit result (step S313a). If the flag indicates the hit result (YES in step S313a), the second special symbol forcible removal flag for changing the variation of the second special symbol generated during the variation of the first special symbol to the removal result is set. Is turned on (step S314a). On the other hand, if it is not the flag indicating the hit result, that is, if it is the flag indicating the loss result (NO in step S313a), the process shifts to step S309a without executing step S314a.

  On the other hand, when the forced off flag of the first special symbol is on (YES in step S311a), the main control MPU 4100a sets a flag indicating a result of the first special symbol loss and a deviation information command (step S311a). S312a). After that, the processing shifts to the processing of step S309a.

  As described above, in the first variation start processing, when the first special symbol derives a hit result, the forced loss flag of the second special symbol is set to the ON state, so that it is generated after the first special symbol starts to vary. The second special symbol to be set is set so as to derive a deviation result without lottery.

[First big hit game process]
FIG. 158 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the first big hit game process in the basic control pattern of the second embodiment. In addition, about the process common to the 1st big hit game process (FIG. 131) of 1st Embodiment, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and description is abbreviate | omitted.

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 sets the interlock flag and the forced off flag of the second special symbol to the off state when the first big hit game ends (Step S751a).

[First interlock setting process]
FIG. 159 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the first interlocking setting process in the basic control pattern according to the second embodiment. Note that processes common to the first interlock setting process (FIG. 133) of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof is omitted.

  When the first special symbol is changing (step S1001a), the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 sets the lost symbol determined in the process of step S312a of the first change start process (FIG. 157) to the first. It is displayed on the special symbol display device (step S1101a). After that, the processing shifts to the processing of step S1004a.

[Second fluctuation start processing]
FIG. 160 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the second change start process in the basic control pattern according to the second embodiment. Note that processes common to the second variation start process (FIG. 135) of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof is omitted.

  After executing the processing of step S306b, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines whether or not the forced off flag of the second special symbol for setting the second special symbol to non-lottery is on. (Step S311b). If the forced off flag of the second special symbol is not in the ON state (NO in step S311b), the processes of steps S307b and S308b of performing the lottery of the second special symbol and setting the lottery result information are executed.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the flag indicating the result of the second special symbol lottery set in the processing of the above-described step S308b indicates a hit result (step S313b). If the flag indicates the hit result (YES in step S313b), the first special symbol forcible removal flag for changing the variation of the first special symbol generated during the variation of the second special symbol to the removal result is set. Is turned on (step S314b). On the other hand, if it is not the flag indicating the hit result, that is, if it is the flag indicating the loss result (NO in step S313b), the process shifts to step S309b without executing step S314b.

  On the other hand, when the forced loss flag of the second special symbol is on (YES in step S311b), main control MPU 4100a sets a flag indicating a result of the second special symbol loss and a deviation information command (step S311b). S312b). After that, the processing shifts to the processing of step S309b.

  As described above, in the second variation start process, when the second special symbol derives a hit result, the forced loss flag of the first special symbol is set to the ON state, so that it is generated after the second special symbol starts to vary. The first special symbol to be set is set so as to derive a deviation result in the non-lottery.

[2nd jackpot game process]
FIG. 161 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the second big hit game process in the basic control pattern of the second embodiment. In addition, about the process common to the 2nd big hit game process (FIG. 139) of 1st Embodiment, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and description is abbreviate | omitted.

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 sets the interlock flag and the forced off flag of the first special symbol to the off state when the second big hit game ends (step S751b).

[Second small hit game process]
FIG. 162 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the second small hitting game process in the basic control pattern of the second embodiment. In addition, about the process common to the 2nd small hitting game process (FIG. 141) of 1st Embodiment, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and description is abbreviate | omitted.

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 sets the interlocking flag and the forced off flag of the first special symbol to the off state when the second small hitting game ends (step S951b).

[Second interlock setting process]
FIG. 163 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of a second interlock setting process in the basic control pattern according to the second embodiment. Note that the same reference numerals are given to the processes common to the second linkage setting process (FIG. 142) of the first embodiment, and description thereof will be omitted.

  When the second special symbol is changing (step S1001b), the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 removes the lost symbol determined in the process of step S312b of the second change start process (FIG. 160). It is displayed on the special symbol display device (step S1101b). After that, the processing shifts to the processing of step S1004b.

[Right-hand penalty setting process]
Next, FIG. 164 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of a right-hand penalty setting process in the basic control pattern according to the second embodiment. The right-handed penalty setting process is a process executed by the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 regarding a warning and a penalty for "right-handed" when it is time to perform "left-handed".

  In this processing, if "right-handed" is performed in the gaming state where "left-handed" is recommended, a warning is first issued, and if "right-handed" is performed after the warning, a penalty is imposed. Is set.

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first determines whether or not the current game mode is in the normal mode (low-probability non-time saving state) (step S1201). Then, when the game mode is the normal mode (YES in step S1201), it is determined whether or not “right-handed” is detected (step S1202). Here, the detection of “right strike” means that the gate sensor 2303 detects the passage of the game ball to the general-purpose gate 2301 arranged in the game area on the right side of the center role 2500. Note that the detection of the acceptance of the game ball to the second starting port 2102 may be performed.

  The main control MPU 4100a ends the present process when the current game mode is not the normal mode (NO in step S1201), or when "right-handed" is not detected even in the normal mode (NO in step S1202). I do.

  Then, when “right-handed” is detected (YES in step S1202), main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not a warning has been executed (step S1203). The warning is to notify the player to return to “left-handed”. Whether or not the warning has been executed may be confirmed by checking whether or not a warning executed flag set when a warning timer described later times out is in an on state.

  If the warning has not been executed (NO in step S1203), main control MPU 4100a sets a time (warning timer) for performing the warning (step S1204). Then, when the time of the warning timer expires (YES in step S1205), the warning execution completed flag is set to the ON state (step S1206), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, when the warning has been executed (YES in step S1203), main control MPU 4100a determines that “right-handed” has been continued despite the warning, and thus imposes a penalty for a predetermined period.

  First, the main control MPU 4100a sets a penalty timer, which is a period for imposing a penalty (step S1211), and sets the forced off flag of the second special symbol to the on state (step S1212). Until the penalty timer times out (NO in step S1213), the forced off flag of the second special symbol is turned on.

  When the penalty timer times out (YES in step S1213), main control MPU 4100a sets the forced off flag and the warning execution completed flag of the second special symbol to the off state (step S1214), and ends this processing.

  As described above, when “right-handed” is detected in the normal mode in which “left-handed” is recommended, a warning is first issued to the player to return to “left-handed”. If the “right-handed” is still continued, a “penalty” is given to give a penalty period that results in a non-lottery result even if a game ball is won to the second starting port 2102 by “right-handed”. Then, since the player is notified (suggested) that the penalty has been imposed (see FIG. 166), the player can be guided to perform an appropriate driving operation according to the game mode.

  Next, a description will be given of a characteristic process of control performed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control board 4010.

[Liquid crystal display processing]
FIG. 165 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of a liquid crystal display process in the basic control pattern according to the second embodiment. The liquid crystal display process is one of the effect control processes (step S3102) executed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control board 4010 for the display on the liquid crystal display device 1900.

  The peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control board 4010 first determines whether or not the current game mode is a rush mode (high-precision non-time saving state) (step S3201). Then, if the current game mode is not the rush mode, that is, if it is the normal mode (low-precision non-time saving state) or the rush preparation mode (high-precision time saving state) (NO in step S3201), the main control MPU 4100a performs the second It is determined whether or not a winning variation for deriving a winning result is executed on the special symbol side (step S3202). Then, when the hit change is executed on the second special symbol side (YES in step S3202), the display of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is blacked out (step S3203). On the other hand, when the hit change is not executed on the second special symbol side (NO in step S3202), a normal display effect is performed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 (step S3204).

  Here, the blackout refers to a display effect in which the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is dark and noise is applied. The blackout is started when the special symbol to be changed and displayed on the 7-segment display 1920 starts a change to derive a hit result, and is continued until the hit symbol is determined by the change. Note that the special symbol displayed on the 7-segment display 1920 is due to a winning of a game ball to a starting port which is not recommended to a player in the game mode. Therefore, the blackout can also be said to be a hit announcement effect to notify that a hit change due to a special symbol which is not recommended in the game mode has occurred.

[Right-hand penalty notification processing]
FIG. 166 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of a right-handed penalty notification process in the basic control pattern according to the second embodiment. The right-handed penalty notification processing relates to a warning and a penalty notification for “right-handed” when it is time to perform “left-handed”, and is one of effect control processing (step S3102) executed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control board 4010. One. This is an effect process corresponding to the right-handed penalty setting process (FIG. 164) executed by the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100.

  The peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control board 4010 first determines whether or not the current game mode is in the normal mode (low-probability non-time saving state) (step S3301). Then, when the game mode is the normal mode (YES in step S3301), it is determined whether or not “right-handed” is detected (step S3302). Here, the detection of “right strike” means that the gate sensor 2303 detects the passage of the game ball to the general-purpose gate 2301 arranged in the game area on the right side of the center role 2500. Note that the detection of the acceptance of the game ball to the second starting port 2102 may be performed.

  The peripheral control MPU 4140a ends the process when the current game mode is not the normal mode (NO in step S3301) or when the right-handed is not detected even in the normal mode (NO in step S3302). I do.

  If “right-handed” is detected (YES in step S3302), peripheral control MPU 4140a determines whether a warning has been executed (step S3303). Whether the warning has been executed may be confirmed by checking the state of the warning executed flag set on the main control MPU 4100a.

  If the warning has not been executed (NO in step S3303), peripheral control MPU 4140a sets a time (warning timer) for performing the warning (step S3304). The warning timer may obtain timer information from the main control MPU 4100a. Then, a warning notification is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 to display a message “Please return to left-handed” (step S3305). At this time, a warning sound may be sounded for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds), and a warning may be suggested. Until the warning timer times out (NO in step S3306), a warning notification is made (step S3305). When the warning timer times out (YES in step S3306), this process ends.

  On the other hand, if the warning has been executed (YES in step S3303), peripheral control MPU 4140a determines that “right-handed” has been continued despite the warning, so that main control MPU 4100a performs the predetermined operation. A period penalty will be imposed.

  The peripheral control MPU 4140a sets a penalty timer (step S3311). Then, penalty notification for notifying that a penalty has been imposed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is executed (step S3312). The penalty notification is continued until the penalty timer times out, and when the penalty timer times out (YES in step S3313), this processing ends.

<Effects of basic control patterns>
As described above, according to the basic control pattern of the present embodiment, the presence or absence of the interlock stop control is determined at the timing at which the special symbol for deriving a hit starts to fluctuate. Without executing the determination process (without lottery), it is possible to stop the fluctuation in the out-of-position symbol. Even if the hit determination processing is executed, useless processing can be omitted in the other special symbol for which the loss result is forcibly set, so that the processing load can be reduced.

<Priority control pattern>
Subsequently, a characteristic control process in the priority control pattern according to the second embodiment will be described. Hereinafter, different control processes will be described based on the control structure in the basic control pattern of the first embodiment described above.

  In the priority control pattern, control is performed such that the first special symbol and the second special symbol are compared, and the special symbol which derives a result advantageous to the player is preferentially executed, and the other special symbol is fluctuated and stopped at an outlier symbol. Features a structure.

[First fluctuation start processing]
FIG. 167 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the first change start process in the priority control pattern according to the second embodiment. Note that processes common to the first variation start process (FIG. 127) of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof is omitted.

  After executing the process of step S307a, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines whether or not the current change of the first special symbol is a change advantageous to the player as compared with the change of the second special symbol. A first priority determination process is performed (step S321a). Details of the first priority determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After that, the main control MPU 4100a executes the process of step S308a and ends the process.

[First priority determination process]
FIG. 168 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the first priority determination process in the priority control pattern according to the second embodiment. The first priority determination process is executed as the process of step S321a of the above-described first change start process (FIG. 167).

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first determines whether or not the second special symbol is changing (Step S361a). If there is no second special symbol that is changing (NO in step SS361a), there is no comparison target, and thus this processing ends.

  If there is a changing second special symbol (YES in step S361a), the main control MPU 4100a acquires the result of the hitting process of the changing second special symbol (step S362a), The result is compared with the result of the hit determination process in step S307a of the change start process (FIG. 167) (step S363a).

  When the first special symbol is more advantageous for the player (YES in step S364a), the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the second special symbol is a loss result (step S365a). If the result is a miss (YES in step S365a), the process ends. On the other hand, when the result is not a loss result, that is, when the result is a small hit or a big hit (NO in step S365a), the forced off flag for forcibly removing the second special symbol is set to an on state (step S366a). ), End this processing.

  On the other hand, when the second special symbol is more advantageous for the player (NO in step S364a), the main control MPU 4100a sets the result of the first special symbol hit determination processing to be out (step S367a). ), End this processing.

  As described above, in the first priority determination process, if there is a changing second special symbol when the change is started in the first special symbol, it is determined which variation result is more advantageous for the player, If the first special symbol is advantageous, the second special symbol is determined to be a loss result, and if the first special symbol is not advantageous, the first special symbol is determined to be a loss result, thereby simultaneously changing the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The winning game will not overlap with the special symbol.

[First fluctuation processing]
FIG. 169 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the first changing process in the priority control pattern according to the second embodiment. Note that the same reference numerals are given to the processes common to the first changing process (FIG. 129) of the first embodiment, and the description is omitted.

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100, after determining that the fluctuation time of the first special symbol has timed up in the processing of step S501a, determines whether the forced off flag of the first special symbol is on. (Step S551a). The forced off flag of the first special symbol is set to the on state in the processing of step S366b of the second priority determination processing (FIG. 171) described later.

  Then, when the forced off flag of the first special symbol is on (YES in step S551a), the main control MPU 4100a replaces the stopped symbol of the first special symbol with the off, and turns off the forced off flag. It is set (step S552a).

  After that, the main control MPU 4100a displays the stopped symbol determined in the process of step S502a on the first special symbol display device (the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the 7-segment display 1920). Therefore, when the first special symbol during the change is replaced with a loss result by the second special symbol that is started to change later, the stop symbol determined at the time of the start of the change at the change stop timing of the first special symbol is removed. replace.

[First interlock setting process]
FIG. 170 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the first interlocking setting process in the priority control pattern according to the second embodiment. Note that processes common to the first interlock setting process (FIG. 133) of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof is omitted.

  When the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines that the first special symbol is fluctuating in the process of step S1001a, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the forced off flag of the first special symbol is on (step S1111a). ). The forced off flag of the first special symbol is set to the on state in the processing of step S366b of the second priority determination processing (FIG. 171) described later.

  Then, when the forced off flag of the first special symbol is on (YES in step S1111a), the main control MPU 4100a replaces the stopped symbol of the first special symbol with the off, and turns off the forced off flag. It is set (step S1112a). If the forced off flag of the first special symbol is not in the ON state (NO in step S1111a), the first special symbol is lost in the hit determination process at the start of the change (step S307a of the first change start process). The result is.

  After that, the main control MPU 4100a displays the stop stop symbol determined in the process of step S307a or step S1112a on the first special symbol display device (the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the 7-segment display 1920) (step S1113a). Therefore, the first special symbol during the change is replaced with the loss result by the second special symbol which is changed later, and the fluctuation stop timing of the second special symbol is shorter than the fluctuation stop timing of the first special symbol. If the timing is earlier, the stop symbol determined at the start of the fluctuation at the fluctuation stop timing of the second special symbol is replaced with a missing symbol.

[Second fluctuation start processing]
FIG. 171 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the second change start process in the priority control pattern according to the second embodiment. Note that processes common to the second variation start process (FIG. 135) of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof is omitted.

  After executing the process of step S307b, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines whether or not the current variation of the second special symbol is an advantageous variation for the player as compared with the variation of the first special symbol. A second priority determination process is performed (step S321b). Details of the second priority determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After that, the main control MPU 4100a executes the process of step S308b, and ends this process.

[Second priority determination process]
FIG. 172 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the second priority determination process in the priority control pattern according to the second embodiment. The second priority determination process is executed as the process of step S321b of the above-described second variation start process (FIG. 171).

  First, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines whether or not the first special symbol is changing (Step S361b). If there is no fluctuating first special symbol (NO in step SS361b), the process ends because there is no comparison target.

  If there is a fluctuating first special symbol (YES in step S361b), the main control MPU 4100a acquires the result of the fluctuating first special symbol hit determination process (step S362b), The result is compared with the result of the hit determination process in step S307b of the change start process (FIG. 171) (step S363b).

  When the second special symbol is more advantageous for the player (YES in step S364b), the main control MPU 4100a determines whether the first special symbol is a result of the loss (step S365b). If the result is a miss (YES in step S365b), the process ends. On the other hand, when the result is not a loss result, that is, when the result is a big hit (NO in step S365b), a forced loss flag for forcibly removing the first special symbol is set to an ON state (step S366b). The process ends.

  On the other hand, when the first special symbol is more advantageous to the player (NO in step S364b), the main control MPU 4100a sets the result of the second special symbol hit determination processing to be out (step S367b). ), End this processing.

  As described above, in the second priority determination process, if there is the first special symbol that is changing when the change is started in the second special symbol, it is determined which change result is more advantageous for the player, If the second special symbol is advantageous, the first special symbol is determined to be a loss result, and if the second special symbol is not advantageous, the second special symbol is determined to be a loss result, thereby simultaneously changing the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The winning game will not overlap with the special symbol.

[Processing during second fluctuation]
FIG. 173 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of the second changing process in the priority control pattern according to the second embodiment. Note that the same reference numerals are given to the processes common to the second changing process (FIG. 137) of the first embodiment, and the description is omitted.

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100, after determining that the fluctuation time of the second special symbol has timed up in the process of step S501b, determines whether the forced off flag of the second special symbol is on. (Step S551b). The forced off flag of the second special symbol is set to the ON state in the processing of step S366a of the above-described first priority determination processing (FIG. 168).

  Then, when the forced off flag of the second special symbol is on (YES in step S551b), the main control MPU 4100a replaces the stopped symbol of the second special symbol with the off, and turns off the forced off flag. It is set (step S552b).

  After that, the main control MPU 4100a displays the stopped symbol determined in the process of step S502b on the second special symbol display device (the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the 7-segment display 1920). Therefore, when the changing second special symbol is replaced with a loss result by the first special symbol that has started to fluctuate later, the stop symbol determined at the start of the fluctuation at the fluctuation stop timing of the second special symbol is lost. replace.

[Second interlock setting process]
FIG. 174 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the second interlock setting process in the priority control pattern according to the second embodiment. Note that the same reference numerals are given to the processes common to the second linkage setting process (FIG. 142) of the first embodiment, and description thereof will be omitted.

  When the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines that the second special symbol is changing in the process of step S1001b, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether the forced off flag of the second special symbol is on (step S1111b). ). The forced off flag of the second special symbol is set to the ON state in the processing of step S366a of the above-described first priority determination processing (FIG. 168).

  When the second special symbol forced off flag is on (YES in step S1111b), the main control MPU 4100a replaces the stopped symbol of the second special symbol with the off, and turns off the forced off flag. It is set (step S1112b). If the forced off flag of the second special symbol is not in the ON state (NO in step S1111b), the second special symbol is lost in the hit determination process at the start of the change (step S307b of the second change start process). The result is.

  After that, the main control MPU 4100a displays the lost stop symbol determined in the process of step S307b or step S1112b on the second special symbol display device (the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the 7-segment display 1920) (step S1113b). Therefore, this is a case where the changing second special symbol is replaced with a loss result by the first special symbol that has started to change later, and the fluctuation stop timing of the first special symbol is shorter than the fluctuation stop timing of the second special symbol. If the timing is earlier, the stop symbol determined at the start of the fluctuation at the fluctuation stop timing of the first special symbol is replaced with a loss.

  Next, a description will be given of a characteristic process of control performed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control board 4010.

  As described above, the special symbol for which the forced off flag is set to the on state is replaced with the off stop symbol at the fluctuation stop timing. In such a special symbol, since the stop symbol before replacement is a hit (small hit, big hit), the display contents (reach effect, etc.) of the character or the like displayed during the change on the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the change stop time There is a possibility that a sense of incongruity may occur with the display contents (outside) of. For example, it is unnatural if the character on the player side is dominant in battle performance and the character is suddenly switched to defeat even before victory. Since many players recognize the fluctuation result by the effect display of the characters and the like displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, it is desired to avoid unnaturalness (unnaturalness) occurring in the transition of the effect display.

  Therefore, in the priority control pattern according to the present embodiment, a process of delaying the special symbol change result notification timing (effect display indicating a loss) by the effect display of a character or the like on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is delayed from the special symbol change stop timing. Execute.

[Forced removal effect additional processing]
FIG. 175 (A) is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of a forced off-rendering effect addition process in the priority control pattern according to the second embodiment. The forced-miss effect addition process is one of the effect control processes (step S3102) executed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control board 4010 with respect to the display on the liquid crystal display device 1900.

  The peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control board 4010 first determines whether or not the forced off flag of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is on (step S3321). Here, the forced loss flag is set to an on state for a special symbol whose hit symbol is replaced with a loss stop symbol at the fluctuation stop timing. When the forced off flag of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is in the OFF state (NO in step S3321), the present process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the forced off flag of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is on (YES in step S3321), the peripheral control MPU 4140a determines whether the special symbol for which the forced off flag is set on is It is determined whether or not the liquid crystal display device 1900 is a target to be variably displayed (step S3322). As described above, when the game mode is the normal mode or the rush preparation mode, the first special symbol is variably displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, and when the game mode is the rush mode, the second special symbol is variably displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. Is displayed. If the special symbol for which the forced off flag is set to the ON state is not a target to be variably displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 (NO in step S3322), the process ends.

  On the other hand, the peripheral control MPU 4140a adds the special symbol for which the forced off flag is set to the ON state to the liquid crystal display device 1900 when the special symbol is to be variably displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 (YES in step S3322). A loss notification effect is set (step S3323), and the process ends.

  Here, the additional loss notification effect is an effect of notifying the deviation in a predetermined period by an effect display of a character or the like displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 (for example, an effect in which the character on the player side loses in the battle effect of the character). Show. It should be noted that the display contents other than the decorative patterns displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 are targeted.

  FIG. 175 (B) is a timing chart of the special symbol change and the effect display on the liquid crystal display device 1900 when the additional miss notification effect is set in the above-described forced loss effect adding process.

  As shown in FIG. 175 (B), the effect display corresponding to the special symbol switched from the hit stop symbol to the stop symbol at the fluctuation stop timing is selected based on the hit result, and the effect during the fluctuation is a game. It is highly likely that the effect is expected to be expected by the player (the character on the player side is dominant in the battle effect). Even if such an effect is executed, it is unnatural if a loss-determined effect (defeat of the player's character) is suddenly executed at the fluctuation stop timing. Therefore, after the special symbol change stop timing, an additional missing notification effect is executed. As a result, the effect transition from the expected effect (predominant) to the definitive effect (defeat) can be made an uncomfortable effect transition, and it is possible to provide an effect that does not make the player feel uncomfortable (unnatural).

<Effect of priority control pattern>
According to the priority control pattern of the second embodiment, the first special symbol is compared with the result derived from the second special symbol, and the special symbol that derives a result advantageous to the player is preferentially executed, and the other special symbol is Since the variation stops at the loss symbol, a special symbol for deriving the big hit at the variation stop timing as in the basic control pattern is not processed as the loss result. Therefore, the priority control pattern can maintain the original gaming property (game property) of the gaming machine more than the basic control pattern.

  In the priority control pattern of the present embodiment, the first symbol and the second symbol are compared to derive results, and a special symbol that derives a result advantageous to the player is preferentially executed. Not limited to When deriving a big hit together, a special symbol that has started to fluctuate first may be prioritized, or a priority result may be ranked according to the game mode, and a special symbol prioritized may be determined according to the ranking. .

  In addition, when an effect of a special symbol that is forced to be lost is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, an additional error notification effect is set such that the character display effect ends with a delay from the timing of stopping the change of the special symbol. This makes it possible to transition to an effect display that derives a loss result even in an effect display accompanying a hit result, so that a player who reads the result from the effect display of a character or the like can recognize the loss without a sense of incongruity. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from lowering due to the unusual effect display.

<Interruption control pattern>
Subsequently, a characteristic control process in the interruption control pattern according to the second embodiment will be described. Hereinafter, different control processes will be described based on the control structure in the basic control pattern of the first embodiment described above.

  The interruption control pattern is characterized by a control structure in which, while a hit game based on a hit result derived from one of the special symbols is being performed, the other special symbol interrupts the change and resumes the remaining change after the end of the applicable game. I do.

[First special symbol control process]
FIG. 176 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol control process in the interruption control pattern of the second embodiment. In addition, about the process common to the 1st special symbol control process (FIG. 126) of 1st Embodiment, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and description is abbreviate | omitted.

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 ends this processing when the interlock flag of the first special symbol is on in the processing of step S100a. In the above-described first embodiment, the first interlocking setting process (step S250a, FIG. 133) of forcibly removing the first special symbol and stopping the change in the symbol is executed. 2 While the hit game is being played on the special symbol side, the game on the first special symbol side is interrupted (temporarily stopped) as it is, so no processing is performed.

[Second special symbol control process]
FIG. 177 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the second special symbol control process in the interruption control pattern according to the second embodiment. Note that processes common to the second special symbol control process (FIG. 134) of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof is omitted.

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 ends this processing when the interlock flag of the second special symbol is on in the processing of step S100b. In the above-described first embodiment, the second interlocking setting process (step S250b, FIG. 142) for forcibly removing the second special symbol and stopping the change in the symbol is executed. While the winning game is being performed on the 1st special symbol side, the game on the 2nd special symbol side is interrupted (temporarily stopped) as it is, so no processing is performed.

  Next, a description will be given of a characteristic process of control performed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control board 4010.

  As described above, in the interruption control pattern, the fluctuation of the other special symbol is interrupted with the occurrence of a hit game on one special symbol side, but if the effect performed before the interruption is continued as the effect after resumption, the corresponding game There is a possibility that it is not appropriate as a later production.

  Therefore, in the interruption control pattern of the present embodiment, a resumption effect change process for changing the effect after resumption of the interrupted special symbol from the specified effect selected at the start of the change and performed before the interruption is executed.

[Resumed production change processing]
FIG. 178 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the restart effect change process in the interruption control pattern according to the second embodiment. The restart effect change process is one of the effect control processes (step S3102) executed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control board 4010 regarding the display on the liquid crystal display device 1900.

  The peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control board 4010 first determines whether or not the current hit game is being played (step S3331). In the present embodiment, the linkage flag is set to an on state at the start of a hit game, and is set to an off state at the end of the game. Therefore, it may be determined whether the interlocking flag of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is set to the ON state. If the hit game is not in progress (NO in step S3331), the process ends because there is no suspended change to be the effect change.

  Next, when a hit game is being played (YES in step S3331), the peripheral control MPU 4140a determines whether or not there is a suspended change (step S3332). This may be determined by determining whether the first processing flag or the second processing flag is “2”. When the first changing process (FIG. 129) or the second changing process (FIG. 137) is executed (that is, when the first special symbol or the second special symbol is changing), the first process flag or the second process is executed. The 2 processing flag is set to “2”. If there is no suspended change (NO in step S3332), the process ends because there is no effect change target.

  Next, when there is a suspended change (YES in step S3332), the peripheral control MPU 4140a determines whether the change is a hit (step S3333). If it is a win (YES in step S3333), it is determined whether or not the hit is more advantageous for the player than the hit of the currently executed hit game (step S3334). Here, the determination of a win that is advantageous to the player is made in the same manner as the determination of which special symbol is to be prioritized in the above-described priority control pattern. Will be done accordingly.

  If the suspended change derives a hit game that is more advantageous to the player than the currently executed hit game (YES in step S3334), the peripheral control MPU 4140a performs a step-up effect as an effect after resumption. Is set (step S3335), and this process ends.

  Further, the peripheral control MPU 4140a sets a bonus effect as an effect after resumption when a suspended game whose derived change is not as great as the currently executed winning game (NO in step S3334) (step S3334). S3336), this process ends.

  In addition, when the interrupted fluctuation derives the loss (step S3333: NO), the peripheral control MPU 4140a sets the related effect as the effect after resumption (step S3337), and ends the process.

[Example of resuming production]
FIG. 179 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect after restart in the restart effect change process (FIG. 178). Here, an example is given of a case where the change of the second special symbol for deriving the hit is executed first, and the change of the first special symbol executed later is interrupted with the remaining time t at the stop timing of the change. Will be described.

  The case (A) is a case for explaining the step-up effect (step S3335). Here, a small hit C is generated by the second special symbol, and a large hit B is generated by the first special symbol. In this case, as an effect (restart effect) corresponding to the change (remaining time t) of the first special symbol after the restart, a step-up effect that appears to have developed from small hit C to big hit B is set to be executed. . Specifically, the effect after the small hit game changes to a rough wave and a big hit comes is performed.

  The case (B) is a case for explaining the bonus effect (step S3336). Here, the big hit A is generated by the second special symbol, and the big hit B is generated by the first special symbol. In the big hit A of the second special symbol and the big hit B of the first special symbol, the big hit A of the second special symbol gives a more advantageous privilege to the player. In this case, as an effect (resume effect) corresponding to the change (remaining time t) of the first special symbol after the restart, it is as if the jackpot game of the first special symbol was given along with the jackpot game of the second special symbol. Is set so that the bonus effect shown in FIG. Specifically, the rough wave after the big hit game once stops and changes to the rough wave again, and the effect of the big hit comes. In the bonus effect, particularly when the interruption fluctuation derives a small hit, the timing of opening the big winning port 2103 at the time of the small hit game is notified by a countdown display of the remaining time t or the like. The small hit game can be shown as an additional privilege added to the hit game executed when the fluctuation is interrupted.

  As described above, in the step-up effect and the bonus effect, the hit game on the first special symbol side and the hit game on the second special symbol side are a series of hits (the operation of the attacker device 2100 in the double hit game is a series of actions). An effect is performed to make it look as if it were. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the effect after the resumption from being an effect that is not suitable for the game situation at the time of execution, and it is possible to show a continuous hit as a series of hits, thereby enhancing the interest, so that the game has high game characteristics. Games can be offered.

  Case (C) is a case for explaining the related effect (step S3337). Here, a small hit C occurs due to the second special symbol, but the first special symbol interrupted at this time results in a loss. In this case, as an effect (resume effect) corresponding to the change (remaining time t) of the first special symbol after the restart, a related effect such as the lingering of the small hit game (such as expecting the development from the small hit game). Is set to be executed. Specifically, an effect is produced in which a temporary wave rises after the small hitting game, but returns gently and ends without shifting to a new hitting game.

  In the case where the interrupted fluctuation deviates from the result as in the case (C) described above, the effect of giving relevance to the hit game before and after such as the step-up effect or the bonus effect cannot be obtained. , The resumption of the fluctuation may be stopped.

  Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 180 and FIG. 181, as a modified example of the interruption control pattern, a characteristic control process in a pattern of terminating the fluctuation without resuming when the interrupted fluctuation derives a loss result will be described. I do. Note that different control processes will be described based on the control structure in the basic control pattern of the above-described first embodiment.

[First interlock setting process]
FIG. 180 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of a first interlocking setting process in a modified example of the interruption control pattern of the second embodiment. Note that processes common to the first interlock setting process (FIG. 133) of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof is omitted.

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines whether or not the stop symbol determined at the start of the change of the first special symbol is missing when the first special symbol is changing in the process of step S1001a. (Step S1121a). If it is a loss (YES in step S1121a), the determined loss symbol is displayed on the first special symbol display device (the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the 7-segment display 1920) (step S1122a). After that, a process for stopping the fluctuation of the first special symbol is executed in the processes after step S1004a.

  On the other hand, the main control MPU 4100a continues the current state if the determined stop symbol of the fluctuating first special symbol is not lost, that is, is a hit (NO in step S1121a), ie, the above-described interruption. The process is temporarily stopped (interrupted state) as in the control pattern (step S1021a), and the process ends.

[Second interlock setting process]
FIG. 181 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of a second interlocking setting process in a modified example of the interruption control pattern according to the second embodiment. Note that the same reference numerals are given to the processes common to the second linkage setting process (FIG. 142) of the first embodiment, and description thereof will be omitted.

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines whether or not the stop symbol determined at the start of the change of the second special symbol is missing when the second special symbol is changing in the process of step S1001b. (Step S1121b). If it is a loss (YES in step S1121b), the determined loss symbol is displayed on the second special symbol display device (the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the 7-segment display 1920) (step S1122b). Thereafter, in the processing after step S1004b, the processing relating to the stop of the fluctuation of the second special symbol is executed.

  On the other hand, the main control MPU 4100a continues the current state if the determined stop symbol of the fluctuating second special symbol is not lost, ie, is a hit (NO in step S1121b), ie, the above-described interruption. The process is temporarily stopped (interrupted state) as in the control pattern (step S1021b), and the process ends.

  As described above, in the modification of the interruption control pattern of the present embodiment, the control for forcibly stopping the other special symbol at the change stop timing of the special symbol for deriving one of the hits in the aforementioned basic control pattern, At the timing of stopping the fluctuation of the special symbol for deriving one of the hits in the control pattern, the other special symbol is temporarily stopped, and a combination control with the control of restarting after the corresponding game is performed.

  In the modified example, the stop is performed only when the other special symbol is lost at the timing of stopping the change of the special symbol for deriving one of the hits, and is interrupted when the special symbol is a hit. Thus, the above-described related effect (case (C) in FIG. 179) is not executed. For this reason, the resuming effect due to the fluctuation interruption is either a step-up effect or a bonus effect, and the execution of the resuming effect itself can be made a highly anticipated notice effect (hit confirmation effect).

<Effect of interruption control pattern>
According to the interruption control pattern of the second embodiment, all the generated first special symbols and second special symbols can be variably executed as a result based on the obtained random numbers. In the basic control pattern and the priority control pattern described above, one of the special symbols that fluctuates at the same time is forcibly set to be off regardless of the obtained random number. In the interrupt control pattern, the result of the special symbol acquired by the player ( The hit judgment result based on the random number is not overturned. Therefore, the interruption control pattern can maintain the original gaming characteristics of the gaming machine more than the basic control pattern and the priority control pattern described above.

  In the interruption control pattern, while a winning game is being performed based on a winning result derived from one of the special symbols, the other special symbol is interrupted, and the remaining fluctuation is resumed after the end of the corresponding game. At this time, an effect corresponding to the restarted change (restart effect) is newly set according to the preceding and following game situations (the hit game on one special symbol side and the game derived from the change). This makes it possible to provide an effect that does not cause a sense of incongruity even if the suspended fluctuation is resumed. Also, when the interrupted fluctuation derives a hit game, the renewal effect can make the relevant game appear to be related to the hit game on one of the special symbols, thereby enhancing the interest of the game. it can.

<Reset control pattern>
Subsequently, a characteristic control process in the reset control pattern of the second embodiment will be described. Hereinafter, different control processes will be described based on the control structure in the basic control pattern of the first embodiment described above.

  In the resetting control pattern, while the winning game is being performed based on the winning result derived from one of the special symbols, the other special symbol interrupts the fluctuation, and after the corresponding game ends, the interrupted fluctuation is reviewed according to the game state. It is characterized by a control structure that restarts after the start.

[First fluctuation processing]
FIG. 182 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the first changing process in the reset control pattern according to the second embodiment. Note that the same reference numerals are given to the processes common to the first changing process (FIG. 129) of the first embodiment, and the description is omitted.

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 repeats the subtraction of the timer value as the processing of step S521a until the time of the fluctuation of the first special symbol in the processing of step S501a is up. In the present embodiment, the main control MPU 4100a sets the reset flag to the off state before the processing in step S521a (step S561a).

  Here, the reset flag is set to the on state in the processing of step S1134a of the first interlock setting processing (FIG. 183) described later. The reset flag is a flag that is set to the ON state when reset setting processing for resetting the variation time of the interrupted variation according to the game state is performed.

[First interlock setting process]
FIG. 183 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the first interlocking setting process in the reset control pattern according to the second embodiment. Note that processes common to the first interlock setting process (FIG. 133) of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof is omitted.

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines whether or not the reset flag is on when the first special symbol is changing in the process of Step S1001a (Step S1131a). If the reset flag is on (YES in step S1131a), the current state is continued, that is, temporarily stopped (interrupted state) as in the above-described interrupt control pattern (step S1021a). The process ends.

  On the other hand, when the reset flag is not in the ON state (NO in step S1131a), main control MPU 4100a acquires the timer value of the first fluctuation timer (step S1132a). Then, the obtained timer value is reset according to the gaming state (step S1133a), and the reset flag is set to the ON state (step S1134a), followed by terminating the present process. Here, the processing of steps S1132a to S1134a is the reset setting processing. In addition, the target to be reset in the interrupted fluctuation is not limited to the remaining fluctuation time of the fluctuation, but may be the entire control content related to the fluctuation time, such as a fluctuation pattern.

  As described above, in the reset control pattern, when the change of the first special symbol is interrupted, first, the reset setting process for the change after the restart is performed. When the reset setting process is executed, the reset flag is set to the ON state, the first special symbol maintains the reset timer value until the first interlocking flag is released to the OFF state, and the temporary stop state is set. Become. Then, when the first interlocking flag is released to the off state and the execution of the first in-fluctuation process is restarted, the reset flag is returned to the off state, and the reset timer value starts to be subtracted (that is, the fluctuation). Will be resumed).

[Processing during second fluctuation]
FIG. 184 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the second changing process in the reset control pattern according to the second embodiment. Note that the same reference numerals are given to the processes common to the second changing process (FIG. 137) of the first embodiment, and the description is omitted.

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 repeats the subtraction of the timer value as the process of step S521b until the time of the change of the second special symbol in the process of step S501b is up. In the present embodiment, the main control MPU 4100a sets the reset flag to the off state before the processing in step S521b (step S561b).

  Here, the reset flag is set to the on state in the processing of step S1134b of the second interlock setting processing (FIG. 185) described later. The reset flag is a flag that is set to the ON state when reset setting processing for resetting the variation time of the interrupted variation according to the game state is performed.

[Second interlock setting process]
FIG. 185 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the second interlocking setting process in the reset control pattern according to the second embodiment. Note that the same reference numerals are given to the processes common to the second linkage setting process (FIG. 142) of the first embodiment, and description thereof will be omitted.

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines whether or not the reset flag is on when the first special symbol is changing in the process of Step S1001b (Step S1131b). If the reset flag is ON (YES in step S1131b), the current state is continued, that is, temporarily stopped (interrupted state) as in the above-described interruption control pattern (step S1021b). The process ends.

  On the other hand, when the reset flag is not in the ON state (NO in step S1131b), main control MPU 4100a acquires the timer value of the second fluctuation timer (step S1132b). Then, the acquired timer value is reset according to the gaming state (step S1133b), and the reset flag is set to the ON state (step S1134b), followed by terminating the present process.

  As described above, in the reset control pattern, when the change of the second special symbol is interrupted, first, the reset setting process for the change after the restart is performed. When the reset setting process is executed, the reset flag is set to the ON state, the second special symbol maintains the reset timer value until the second interlocking flag is released to the OFF state, and the second special symbol is temporarily stopped. Become. Then, when the second interlocking flag is released to the off state and the execution of the second in-fluctuation process is resumed, the reset flag is returned to the off state, and the reset timer value starts to be subtracted (that is, the fluctuation). Will be resumed).

<Effect of reset control pattern>
According to the reset control pattern of the second embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol generated in the same manner as the above-described interruption control pattern can be variably executed as a result based on the obtained random numbers. Therefore, the reset control pattern can maintain the original gaming characteristics of the gaming machine more than the basic control pattern and the priority control pattern described above.

  The reset control pattern changes the remaining fluctuation time of the interrupted special symbol in accordance with the game state. Here, the interruption of the change of the special symbol is caused by the hit game on the other special symbol side. Therefore, there is a possibility that the game mode after the relevant game has shifted to another game mode. Therefore, if the fluctuation according to the fluctuation pattern set based on the game mode before the transition is resumed as it is, there is a possibility that the player may feel uncomfortable. Therefore, according to the reset control pattern, the control contents such as the change time are reviewed for the change restarted after the hit game, so that the change corresponding to the game state to be executed is provided without giving the player a sense of incongruity. be able to. Further, since the degree of freedom in the effect in the fluctuation at the time of resumption increases more than in the above-described interruption control pattern, the interest in the game can be further enhanced.

  Specifically, it may be reviewed in accordance with the above-described first special symbol and second special symbol variation time (FIG. 154 (E)). For example, when the fluctuation for deriving the loss result of the second special symbol is interrupted, if the game mode after the transition is the normal mode and the rush preparation mode, the game mode is reset to the long-time fluctuation, and the game mode after the transition is the rush mode. In the case of the mode, it may be reset to the short-time fluctuation.

  Also, when the game mode is the rush mode, it is desirable to reduce the number of times of ST to cause the small hit C and the small hit D of the second special symbol to occur frequently. Thus, with reference to FIG. 186, a description will be given of the reset setting when the first special symbol for deriving the big hit occurs in the rush mode in a state where the number of STs remains.

  FIG. 186 is a timing chart illustrating a reset setting process of interruption fluctuation in the reset control pattern according to the second embodiment. As described above, in the rush mode, when the first special symbol for deriving the big hit occurs in a state where the number of STs remains in the rush mode, the ST number given in the current game is reduced as much as possible before the first special symbol is used. I want to hit a jackpot game (that is, a new ST count).

  Therefore, if a large hit change occurs in the first special symbol when the remaining ST count is less than the predetermined number (here, less than 5), the big hit change is interrupted by the small hit game of the second special symbol. After the restart, the fluctuation time after resumption is set to a long time t1. The long time t1 is, for example, a time obtained by extending the remaining time t of the original fluctuation, and a time during which a small hitting game can be expected.

  Then, while the big hit change of the first special symbol resumes the change of t1 for a long time, the small hit change of the second special symbol occurs, and the stop timing of the small hit change comes. And the big hit change is interrupted again. Since the fluctuation time of the second special symbol in the rush mode is a short fluctuation of 1 second (FIG. 154 (E)), the ST times are digested with a good tempo.

  Then, when the remaining ST count becomes one, the fluctuation time after the resetting is restarted is set to the short time t2. The short time t2 is, for example, a time obtained by shortening the remaining time t of the original fluctuation, and is a time during which the fluctuation does not end even if the fluctuation of the second special symbol in which the number of STs becomes zero occurs. is there. As a result, the big hit variation of the first special symbol, which has been frequently interrupted, can be stopped in a variation state in which the number of STs is effective, that is, in the probable change state determined to be the big hit result, which disrupts the original gaming performance of the gaming machine. Nothing.

  As described above, according to the reset control pattern, the fluctuation time after the resumption of the fluctuation of the special symbol to be interrupted can be adjusted according to the game state, so that not only the fluctuation control of the special symbol to be interrupted, The fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol in the game state can also be adjusted. Therefore, since it is possible to flexibly cope with a variety of supposed game characteristics, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the game.

  Also in the reset control pattern, similar to the above-described interruption control pattern, an effect (resume effect) corresponding to the resumed change is a game situation before and after (a hit game on one special symbol side and a game derived from the change). , A new effect can be provided. Also, when the interrupted fluctuation derives a hit game, the renewal effect can make the relevant game appear to be related to the hit game on one of the special symbols, thereby enhancing the interest of the game. it can.

  As described above, according to the present invention, there is provided a control structure employing any one or a combination of the basic control pattern, the priority control pattern, the interruption control pattern, and the reset control pattern described in the first embodiment and the second embodiment, A specific game (small hit game, big hit game) is prevented from occurring repeatedly between the game on the first special symbol side and the game on the second special symbol side, and can be simultaneously changed. Here, even if a prize of a game ball to the prize area occurs at the same time, only one lottery game is performed according to the priority, and the other lottery games are set to a standby state. A difference between the winning tempo of the game ball (that is, the game tempo of the player) and the lottery game tempo causes a decrease in the interest of the game. In the present invention, it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from decreasing as described above by the simultaneous variation control.

  In the above embodiment, the gaming machine applied to the pachinko machine 1 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and is applied to a pachislot machine or a gaming machine obtained by fusing a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine. In this case, the same operation and effect as described above can be obtained.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Main frame 4 Gaming board 5 Door frame 1100 Gaming area 1180 Function display unit 1200 Gaming panel 1900 Liquid crystal display device 2100 Attacker device 2101 First starting opening 2101a Always winning opening 2101b Special winning opening 2102 Second starting opening 2111 Movable piece (ordinary electric accessory)
2301 General-purpose gate 4000 Main board 4010 Peripheral control board (effect control means, disadvantageous game state suggestion means, effect change means)
4100 main control board (game control means, first lottery game execution means, second lottery game execution means, specific game execution means, interlock control means, result replacement means, other detection means, disadvantageous game state generation means, result change means, Temporarily stopping means, restarting means, forced ending means, resetting means)

Claims (1)

First lottery execution means for executing a first lottery based on a winning of the game medium to a first winning area in the gaming area,
A second lottery execution means for executing a second lottery based on the winning of the game medium to the second winning area in the gaming area,
A variable display performing means capable of performing a variable display of a symbol based on the first lottery or the second lottery,
Based on the first lottery or the second lottery, a first specific game execution means for executing a first specific game that can provide a game profit with a different probability according to the game state,
Based on the second lottery, a second specific game execution means for executing a second specific game that can provide a smaller game profit than the first specific game with a certain probability regardless of the game state,
Specific game state transition means for transitioning the game state to a specific game state different from the normal game state upon execution of the first specific game,
While the probability that the second specific game is executed is constant regardless of the game state, the variable display that can be executed based on the second lottery in the normal game state is set to a long time, (Ii) lottery frequency suppressing means for suppressing the execution frequency of the specific game;
While the probability that the second specific game is executed irrespective of the game state is fixed, a variable display that can be executed based on the second lottery in the specific game state is displayed for a short time shorter than the long time. Means for increasing the frequency of execution of the second specific game by doing,
With
The variable display based on the second lottery is executed by the lottery frequency improving means during the short period, rather than the game profit given in the first specific game executed based on the second lottery. The game profit given in the second specific game to be given can be more,
It is possible to execute the variable display based on the first lottery during the execution of the variable display based on the second lottery,
Having an effect execution means capable of displaying an effect display based on the first lottery and the second lottery,
The effect performing means, when the variable display in which the first specific game is executed based on the second lottery in which the variable display is made long by the lottery frequency suppressing means, the variable display of the second lottery A special effect display, which is not executed in the first lottery in a state where is set to a long time, can be displayed during execution of the variable display based on the first lottery .